Downloaded 63 times
![totes on the unit
i5 " E R (SB рб)
ТИ CD 1: Track 2] Smile, greet the class, and say
г p*rn name - Hello, I ’m (Liz). Point to yourself to
ti tbe meaning clear. Point to the speech bubbles and
r tbe recording.
xe -Tjdents to say their own name, including the
Oing Hello. If you have a very large group, you could
i irw students to say their name and then get students
■otmue in pairs. Keep this stage brief, as students will
e die opportunity to introduce themselves and each
er m the next section.
-A TS YOUR NAME? (SB P6)
r. zre/is, my/your
1 1 * 1 [CD 1: Track 3] Focus attention on the photo
at Pablo and Mika. Point to the conversation on p6
m i ask students to read and listen. Demonstrate these
actions to the class if necessary. Play the recording
through once.
Pfay the recording twice more, first pausing at the end
each line and getting the students to repeat as a class.
>r_xients then repeat lines individually before practising
~ e conversation in open and then in closed pairs
f>ee Teaching beginners - tips and techniques, ТВ рб).
Encourage an accurate voice range - the amount by
which pitch of the voice changes. (Many languages do
dc: use such a wide voice range as English so this needs
l : be actively encouraged.) Also make sure students
can accurately reproduce the contracted forms I’m and
'-.mes. If necessary, model the sentences again yourself
to help emphasize the pronunciation in a visual way.
GftAMMAR SPOT
E: cus attention on the contractions. Ask students to
circle the contracted forms in exercise 1. Demonstrate
this by writing the conversation on the board and
rutting a circle round the first contraction I ’m.
This is a mingle activity. Demonstrate the conversation
with one student to the rest of the class. Then ask
another two students to repeat the conversation in
:ren pairs (see Teaching beginners - tips and techniques,
ТВ рб). Demonstrate the meaning o f‘stand up’ and
re: the students to move around the class practising
the conversation. You may like to encourage them to
'Г.аке hands as they introduce themselves, particularly
if ‘Jiey don’t know each other. Monitor and check for
pronunciation.
INTRODUCTIONS (SBP7)
This is...
1 И 1 И [CD 1: Track 4] This section gets students to
practise introducing each other, still using just first
names. Focus attention on the photo of Pablo, Ben, and
Mika on p7. Point to the conversation and ask students
to read and listen. Play the recording through once.
Play the recording again and get students to point to
the correct characters as they are referred to in the
conversation.
Play the recording twice more, first pausing at the
end of each line and getting the students to repeat as
a class. Students then repeat lines individually before
practising the conversation in open and then in
closed pairs.
Encourage accurate pronunciation of the short sound
III and of the linking:
/6is iz/
th isjs Ben
2 Point to the gapped conversation. Choose two
confident students to demonstrate the conversation
with you to the rest of the class. Introduce the students
to each other and encourage them to shake hands when
they say Hello. Choose two more groups of three to
practise the conversation in front of the class.
Divide the class into groups of three and get each
student to take it in turns to introduce the other two.
Monitor and check for pronunciation and intonation.
Depending on the class, when the activity is over, you
may like to ask one or two groups to go through the
conversation again while the whole class listens.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 1
Exercises 1 and 2 Introductions
Nice to meet you
3 This section focuses on introducing people in a slightly
more formal context, giving surnames as well as first
names, and practising the phrase Nice to meet you.
Give your first name again: I'm (Liz). Write it on the
board: (Liz) is myfirst name. Then say your surname
and write it on the board: My surname is (Brown).
Repeat I ’m (Liz Brown) - (Liz) is myfirst name,
(Brown) is my surname. Then ask a student whose
first name you know: Mayumi - Mayumi is yourfirst
name, what’s your surname? Elicit surnames from other
students.
Unitl • Hello! 9](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-8-2048.jpg)
![[CD 1: Track 5] Focus attention on the photo
of Judy Koblenz and Robert Smith on p7. Point to the
conversation and ask students to read and listen. Play
the recording through once. Play the recording again
and get students to point to the correct characters as
they are referred to in the conversation.
Play the recording twice more, first pausing at the
end of each line and getting the students to repeat as
a class. Students then repeat lines individually before
practising the conversation in open and then in closed
pairs. Encourage accurate stress in the key expressions
Nice to meet you.
And you.
4 Point to the gapped conversation. Choose a confident
student to demonstrate the conversation with you to the
rest of the class. Choose two more pairs to practise the
conversation in front of the class. Remind students to
smile and shake hands when they say Nice to meet you.
5 [CD 1: Track 6] This activity gives students
further practice, using other English names. Check
students understand the male and female symbols in
the activity by pointing to male and female students and
then to the correct symbol. Play the recording through
once and let students just listen. Play the recording
again and get students to repeat each name chorally
and individually. Focus attention on the conversation
with James Bond. Choose a name for yourself and
demonstrate the mingle activity with two or three
confident students. Get the class to stand up and move
around the class to practise the exchanges, using the
new names. Monitor and check for pronunciation.
If students sound rather ‘flat’ when greeting each other,
model the conversation in exercise 4 again, emphasizing
the voice range needed and the correct stress.
HOW ARE YOU? (SB P8)
1 Ч 1Г Д [CD 1: Track 7] Focus attention on the photo
of Pablo and Ben in conversation 1 on p8. Check
students can remember the names of the characters by
asking Who’s this?Refer students back to the photos
on pp6-7 if necessary. Point to conversation 1 and ask
students to read and listen. Play the recording
through once.
Focus attention on the photo of Ben and Mika in
conversation 2 on p8. Check students can remember
the names of the characters. Follow the same procedure
as for conversation 1. If students query the difference
between Fine, thanks, and Very well, thank you., explair
that they are both possible answers to How are you?
Play the recording twice more, first pausing at the
end of each line and getting the students to repeat as a
class. Students then repeat the lines individually before
practising the conversations in open and then in closed
pairs. Encourage accurate stress and intonation on the
questions:
How are you?
And you?
2 Ask individual students How are you? to elicit the
answer Fine, thanks/Very well, thank you. And you?
Reply to each student in turn. Make sure students
realize that And you? requires an answer Fine/Very
well, thanks.
Get students to ask and answer you and each other
in open pairs across the class. It may be helpful to
gesture to your partner when you say And you? to aid
comprehension.
3 Students now have free practice in a mingle activity.
(You may like to develop a gesture which means
‘mingle’.) Focus attention on the speech bubbles. If
necessary, check comprehension of OK, fine, very well
with simple board drawings of faces - a straight face
for OK © , a half smile forfine © , and a full smile for
very well ©. Get the students to move around the class
practising the conversation. Monitor and check for
pronunciation and intonation.
SUGGESTION
If appropriate, you can play a memory game based
on the students’ names. Ask one student to go round
the class saying everyone’s name while the other
students help if necessary. Encourage students in a
multilingual group to pronounce everyone’s name
as accurately as possible. (You might want to do the
memory game yourself, too, to make sure you have
remembered all the students’ names!)
T 1.4
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 1
Exercises 3 and 4 Nice to meet you](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-9-2048.jpg)
![-SIMAR SPOT
attention on the gapped sentences. Elicit the
ore to complete the first sentence with the whole
as an example ( m). Then ask students to
-.r.ete the other sentences.
Sandra,
are you?
isJohn.
Bead Grammar Reference 1.1-1.3 on pl23 together
I :.i'S , and/or ask students to read it at home.
B k Mirage them to ask you questions about it, in
Ll appropriate.
Focus attention on the photos and conversations. Point
t ; уour students and say You are students in a language
s ioo.. Point to the characters in the photos and say
Tney are students in a language school.
I- i students 30 seconds to read the gapped
. nversations. Hold up the book so the class can see the
pbotos. Read out the first line of the first conversation
ir.d point to the female character in the photo. Ask Ana
•r Mario? {Ana). Point to the male and ask Who’s this?
{Mario). Elicit the identities of Carla and Max, and Eda
and David in the other photos.
Ь is a good idea to write the first conversation gap-fill
oo the board and do it with the whole class, as students
may not be familiar with this kind of exercise. Write
adents’ suggestions (right or wrong) in the gaps,
jive students time to complete the second and third
; : nversations. You could put them in pairs to try to
do the task together. Go round and monitor, but don’t
cc rrect any mistakes yet.
4 f [CD 1: Track 8] Play the conversations for
: idents to listen and check. See if they can hear and
; : rrect any mistakes themselves before you offer
: : rrection. Then check the answers with the whole class.
Answers and tapescript
A Hello, My name’s Ana. What’s your name?
В My name’s Mario.
1 A Max, this is Carla.
В Hi, Carla.
С Hello, Max. Nice to meet you.
; A Hi, Eda. How are you?
В Fine, thanks, David. And you?
A Very well, thanks.
Get students to practise the conversations first in
open pairs and then in closed pairs. Monitor and
check for accurate pronunciation. If necessary, model
the conversations again, either yourself or from the
recording, and get students to practise again. Let
students refer to the photos, but discourage them from
reading the conversations word for word, as they will
lose the correct intonation and not make eye contact
with the other students. (If appropriate, get them to
stand up, as this often encourages a more dynamic
performance!) If you think more practice is needed
at this stage, get students to repeat the conversations
using their own names.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 1
Exercise 5 How are you?
EVERYDAY ENGLISH (SB P9)
Good morning!
This section focuses on the appropriate greetings to use
at different times of day, along with other simple phrases
used in different everyday situations.
1 Focus attention on the photos and the gapped
conversations. Use the photos, mime, and simple
clocks on the board to explain that the situations
show different times of day. Get two students to read
out conversation 1, including the example. Write the
complete conversation on the board and point out
that Good morning is crossed out from the expressions
in the box. Students continue completing the
conversations, working in pairs and using the photos to
help. Monitor and help, using the photos to help deal
with any vocabulary queries.
Ч Ш [CD 1: Track 9] Play the recording and get
students to check their answers. Students then practise
the conversations in open and then in closed pairs.
Encourage a wide voice range in expressions like
What a lovely day! and See you later!
Answers and tapescript
1 A Good morning!
В Good morning! What a lovely day!
2 A Good afternoon!
В Hello. A cup of tea, please.
3 A Goodbye!
В Bye! See you later!
4 A Good night!
В Good night! Sleep well!
Unitl • Hello! 11](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-10-2048.jpg)
![2 This exercise consolidates the everyday expressions
in this section in a word order exercise. Copy the first
example onto the board with the words in the wrong
order. Ask a student to read out the correct order and
write the answer on the board, crossing out the words
in the wrong order as you go.
Students complete the conversations, using the words
given. Give students time to check their answers in
pairs before checking with the whole class.
Ч И Ё [CD 1: Track 10] Play the recording, pausing at
the end of each conversation to allow students to check
their answers. Students then practise the conversations
in open and then in closed pairs. Again, encourage a
wide voice range in expressions like Have a nice day. If
necessary, play the recording again and get the students
to repeat to get the correct stress and intonation.
Answers and tapescript
1 A Good morning! How are you today?
В Fine, thanks.
2 A Good afternoon!
В Good afternoon! A cup of coffee, please.
3 A Goodbye! Have a nice day.
В Thank you. And you. See you later.
4 A Good night! Sleep well.
В Thank you. And you.
SUGGESTION
Encourage students to use the expressions in the
Everyday English section as often as possible. Always
get them to greet you and each other at the beginning
of each lesson in English. This is real communication
in a real situation and it also provides a useful marker
that it is time for English. You can also adapt and
extend the expressions to cover other time references,
e.g. Have a nice weekend. See you next week, etc.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Teacher’s Resource Disc
Communicative activity Unit 1 Nice to meet you
Workbook Unit 1
Exercises 11 and 12 Good morning!
VOCABULARY AND SPEAKING (SBplO)
What’s this in English?
1 Many of the words in the lexical set may be known to
the students as they are ‘international’ words or may be
similar in their own language. Focus on the example
and then get students to work individually or in pairs
or groups of three to match the rest of the words to the
photos. Monitor and check for correct spelling.
Check the answers with the whole class.
Answers
1 a book 7 a hamburger
2 a computer 8 a sandwich
3 atelevision 9 a camera
4 a phone 10 a photograph
5 a bus 11 a bag
6 a car 12 a house
2 l i i l i l [CD 1: Track 11] Play the recording and
get students to listen and repeat the words. Check
for accurate word stress and, if necessary, explain
the system of stress marks used in New Headway by
pointing to the stress highlighting in the Students Book
and modelling the pronunciation yourself, highlighting
the stressed syllables:
camera
photograph
computer
hamburger
television
sandwich
3 Ч В1И [CD 1: Track 12] Focus attention on the speech
bubbles. Demonstrate the conversation by pointing to
the photograph and asking What’s this in English? Elicit
the reply It’s a photograph. Play the recording and get
students to repeat. Point to different pictures on plO
and get students to ask and answer in open pairs. Make
sure students answer with full sentences, not just one
word. Also check for accurate pronunciation of It’s a
and if students produce *Is a, repeat the drill.
Students then continue asking and answering about the
objects in exercise 1, working in closed pairs.
GRAMMAR SPOT
Focus attention on the contracted form. Ask students
to circle the same form in the conversation in
exercise 3.](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-11-2048.jpg)
![^ a book and ask What’s this in English? Elicit
Its a book. Pick up another object that
hfrtos don’t know how to say in English and elicit the
What’s this in English? Give the answer, e.g.
{dictionary). Students then continue picking up or
to objects in the classroom and asking questions.
^ m *4t their questions, and write up the words on the
Ьвагс. highlighting the word stress if necessary. (Try to
words beginning with a vowel and the need for
to use an. Also, try to limit students’ questions
'ary that will be useful to them at this stage in
learning, e.g. pen, dictionary, and try not to let the
ity go on too long!)
••C'O CO PIA BLE ACTIVITY
ito ’ 1 What’s this in English? ТВ p!38
Materials: one copy of the worksheet cut up per
р о с т of 15 students
^rcvcdure: Pre-teach/check table, chair, and window
b f pc ..-.ting to the relevant object in the classroom
» - --King What’s this in English? Elicit It’s a (chair).
tttx e '..re students use the contracted form It’s and
3ae article a.
• Giv e each student a picture card.
• S o dents mingle showing their cards and asking
each other What’s this in English? After each
exchange, students swap cards and move on to
■_-.e next student. Go round listening, making sure
jdents are asking and answering the question
correctly.
• Encourage students to help each other if they can’t
remember the name of the item. If neither student
can remember, they should ask you What’s this
in English?
SUGGESTIONS
You can give students more practice with the
vocabulary in this section with a range of word
games, including describe and draw, a memory game
based on a detailed image such as a street scene,
or a crossword/word search. You could also ask
students for more examples of ‘international’ words
or cognates with the students’ own language (e.g.
supermarket, cinema, hospital, telephone, radio, taxi,
tennis, golf, football). Put the words on the board and
practise the pronunciation.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
•Yorkbook Unit 1
Exercise 6 What’s this in English?
Numbers 1-10 and plurals
SUGGESTION
Students need a lot of practice with numbers, so
from now on, use numbers as much as possible when
referring to pages and exercises. Continue to do quick
number revisions in future lessons, especially as more
numbers are introduced. This can include number
dictations, either with you dictating or with the
students working in pairs:
Teacher dictation: Say numbers at random, writing
them down yourself so that you have a means of
checking. Students write the figures, not the words,
as you say them. Have one student read their list of
numbers out to check.
Pairs dictation: Students prepare a list of random
figures to dictate to their partner. They take it in
turns to dictate their list. The student who is taking
down the dictated numbers writes the figures, not the
words, and then reads the list back to their partner to
check the answers.
Make sure you limit the range of numbers to those
covered at any stage in the course, e.g. Unit 1:
numbers 1-10.
1 О Д Д [CD 1: Track 13] Play the recording once and
get students to read and listen to the numbers. Write
two and eight on the board and put a stroke through
the w and the gh to show that they are silent. Play the
recording again and get students to repeat.
2 Get students to say the numbers round the class,
starting again at one once they reach ten. You can
also get students to say the numbers in reverse order
if appropriate. If students need more practice, write
figures at random on the board and get students to say
the numbers as you write.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 1
Exercises 7 and 8 Numbers 1-10
3 This exercise presents and practises formation of
plurals with -s/-es, and reviews the vocabulary from
this unit and numbers 1-10. Focus attention on the
pictures and on the example. Count up the books in the
first item a and get students to read the example aloud.
Then get students to complete the rest of the exercise,
referring back to the list of numerals and words on the
page. Monitor and check for correct spelling.
Unitl • Hello! 13](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-12-2048.jpg)
![Ч И П [CD 1: Track 14] Play the recording and get Don’t forget!
students to check their answers. Get students to write
the words on the board as a final check. Workbook Unit 1
Exercises 13-17 Revision
Answers and tapescript
a five books
b three cars
с eight houses
d seven cameras
e nine photographs
f two sandwiches
g four computers
h six buses
i ten students
4 Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Model the
pronunciation of the question and answer, and get
students to repeat. Students practise in open and
then closed pairs. Monitor and check for accurate
pronunciation. Drill the numbers and words again if
necessary. If students need more practice, ask them
to work with a new partner and repeat the activity,
covering exercise 1 to make it more challenging if
necessary.
GRAMMAR SPOT
Focus attention on the singular nouns and the plural
noun endings. Ask students to underline the plural
endings in exercise 3.
Refer students to Grammar Reference 1.4 on p!23.
Word list
Ask the students to turn to p i30 and look at the word list
for Unit 1. Explain that this contains important words
from the unit. Go through the words in class and then ask
students to learn the words for homework. Test students
on a few of the words in the following lesson.
Teacher’s Resource Disc
Unit 1 Test
Unit 1 Skills test
Video/DVD
Unit 1 What’s your name? on iTools
Units 1 & 2 on iTutor
5 M R E I [CD 1: Track 15] Play the recording through
once and let students just listen. Play the recording
again and get the students to repeat chorally and
individually. If students have problems distinguishing
between /s/and /z/, get them to put their hands on
their throat to feel the vibrations that occur when /z/
is pronounced because the sound is voiced. (Don’t
introduce the terms voiced and voiceless at this early
stage, but just get students used to the idea that the
pronunciation is different.)
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 1
Exercises 9 and 10 Plurals](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-13-2048.jpg)
![Notes on the unit SHE’S FROM JAPAN (SB pl2)
SUGGESTION
Take the opportunity to review the greetings covered
in Unit 1 at the beginning of each class. Greet each
student as they arrive in class and ask how they are.
Encourage students to greet each other in English so
that they get into the habit of using the language they
have learned in a meaningful way.
STARTER (SB pl2)
Focus attention on the map on p13 to introduce the
context of talking about where you are from. Point to the
country that you are from on the map and invite students
to do the same. Remind them of the question What’s ... in
English? from Unit 1 so that they can ask you for the name
of their country, e.g. What’s (Belgique) in English? (If you
do not recognize the name of the country in the students’
mother tongue, then ask them to point it out on the map.)
Write up the names of the countries on the board and drill
the pronunciation as necessary.
Focus attention on the countries in the box. Demonstrate
the activity by getting students to locate Australia on the
map. Students continue locating the countries in exercise 1
on the map, working in pairs. If there is any disagreement,
check the answers with the whole class.
■ [CD 1: Track 16] Play the recording and get the
students to repeat chorally and individually. Pay particular
attention to stress. If you have a lot of students from other
countries, get them to say the name of their country and
check their pronunciation.
he/she, his/her
1 [CD 1: Track 17] This conversation introduces
the second person question form. Focus attention on
the photos of the characters who appeared in Unit 1.
Elicit the names Pablo and Mika from the class. Point
to the conversation and ask students to read and listen.
Play the recording through once. Play the recording
again and then ask Where’s Spain? Where’s Japan?
Get students to point to the correct part of the map.
Play the recording again, pausing at the end of each line
and getting the students to repeat as a class. Students
then repeat lines individually before practising
the conversation in open and then in closed pairs.
Encourage accurate reproduction of the contrastive
stress in the questions, and of the falling intonation:
Where are you from ?
Where are you from?
2 This is another mingle activity. If you have a
multilingual class, make sure that all the students’
countries are written on the board and practised
beforehand. If you have a monolingual class, you might
like to teach them I’m from (town/city) in (country) to
vary the answers. Demonstrate the conversation with
one student for the rest of the class. Then ask another
two students to repeat the conversation in open pairs.
Get the students to move around the class practising
the conversation. Monitor and check for pronunciation.
3 [CD 1: Track 18] Focus attention on the photos
of Pablo and Mika. Point to the sentences and ask
students to read and listen. Play the recording through
once. Play the recording again and get students to
repeat. Encourage students to reproduce the long and
short sounds in his and he’s:
/hiz/ /hi:z/
His name’s Pablo. He’sfrom Spain.
Write the sentences about Pablo on the board. Circle his
and he. Repeat His name’s Pablo. He’sfrom Spain. Then
model the sentence on another male class member:
His name’s Erdi. He’sfrom Turkey. Now contrast with a
female student: But Her name’s Ali. She’sfrom Indonesia.
Write up the sentences about Mika and circle Her and
She. Elicit more examples from the class to consolidate
the use of he!she and his/her.
Answers
16 Unit 2 • Your world](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-15-2048.jpg)
![RAMMAR SPOT GRAMMAR SPOT
Focus attention on the contractions. Ask students to
circle the contracted forms in exercise 3.
Read Grammar Reference 2.1 and 2.2 on p i23
together in class, and/or ask students to read it at
home. Encourage them to ask you questions about it.
MTIONAL MATERIAL____________________________________________
sk Unit 2
rises 1 and 2 Countries
rises 3 and 4 am /are/is - Her name’s .../She’sfrom .
QUESTIONS (SB pB)
IWtere’s he from?
Focus attention on the photos on pl3. Read the
sentences in number 1 with the whole class as an
example. Students work individually to complete the
sentences about the other people. Give students time
to check their answers in pairs.
■ > [CD 1: Track 19] Play the recording through
nee and let students check their answers. Play the
recording again and get students to repeat chorally
and individually.
Answers and tapescript
His name’s Kevin. He’s from the United States.
1 His name’s Laszlo. He’s from Hungary.
: Her name’s Karima. She’s from Egypt.
- Her name’s Tatiana. She’sfrom Russia.
: Her name’s Rosely. She’sfrom Brazil.
: His name’s Simon. He’s from England.
His name’s Yong. He’s from China.
: Her name’s Hayley. She’sfrom Australia.
■ [CD 1: Track 20] This exercise introduces
third person question forms. Note that every time the
cuestion form is introduced, it is clearly displayed on
the page with the question mark icon. This enables
students to review question forms across the course
more easily. Play the recording and get the students to
repeat chorally and individually. Check students can
reproduce the falling intonation of the Wh- questions.
1 Focus attention on the contraction Where’s.
Ask students to circle the contraction Where’s in
exercise 2. Check students recognize What’s in
exercise 2 as the contraction of What is.
2 Focus attention on the gapped sentences.
Complete the first sentence with the whole class
as an example (is). Then ask students to complete
the other sentences.
Answers
Where is she from?
Where is he from?
Where are you from?
Refer students to Grammar Reference 2.3 on pl23.
3 Go through the photographs on pl3 yourself first
asking What’s his/her name? and Where’s he/she from?
and eliciting the answers, before getting students to do
the same in pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of
he/she and his/her. Drill the forms again if necessary,
referring to different male and female students to make
the difference clear.
PHOTOCOPIABLE ACTIVITY
UNIT 2 Where’s he from? ТВ pl39
Materials: one copy of the worksheet cut up per
group of 12 students
Procedure: This activity provides further practice of
I/you, my/your, he/she, and his/her by giving students
a new name and country. The cards provide a male
and a female name from each of the countries in the
Students Book.
• Review the exchanges What’s your name? My name’s
(Robert). Where are you from? I’m from (the United
States), writing them on the board if necessary.
Also review when to use he/she.
• Give the role cards out to the students, telling them
this is their new name and country. Ask students
to stand up and go round the class asking and
answering the questions. Tell them they must try
to remember everyone’s new name and country.
• When students have finished, point to various
students and ask the class What’s his/her name?
and Where’s he/shefrom? If the class is good, you
can also check with the student in question whether
the class has remembered correctly, asking Is that
right?, and having them answer Yes or No.
Unit 2 • Your world 17](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-16-2048.jpg)
![Alternatively, or in addition to the above
suggestion, you could bring in pictures of famous
people for further practice. You could use them for
open pairwork, or you could try a question and
answer chain as follows:
1 Stand in a circle with the students, with the pictures
in your hand.
2 Turn to SI on your left, show the first card and
ask What’s his/her name?and Where’s he/shefrom?
51 answers, and receives the picture from you.
3 Si then turns to S2 and asks the same question.
52 answers, and receives the picture.
4 While SI is asking S2, turn to SA on your right,
show the second picture, and ask the questions
What’s his/her name? and Where’s he/shefrom? SA
answers, receives the picture, and turns and asks SB.
5 While SA is asking SB, turn back to SI again with
the third picture, and ask the question.
6 Continue the process until all the pictures are
in circulation and the students are asking and
answering. There will probably be a bottleneck
when the student opposite you starts getting
questions from both sides at once, but that’s part
of the fun. Eventually the pictures should all come
back to you.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 2
Exercises 5 -7 am /are/is - Her name’s .../She’sfrom ...
PRACTICE (SB p!4)
Cities and countries
1 Focus attention on the names of the cities on pl4
and drill the pronunciation chorally and individually.
Model the conversation and get students to repeat
chorally. Students repeat the conversation with a
different city, e.g. Cairo, in open pairs. Students
continue working in closed pairs.
B U M [CD 1: Track 21] Play the recording and let
students check their answers.
Answers and tapescript
Where’s Barcelona? It’s in Spain.
Where’s Beijing? It’s in China.
Where’s Moscow? It’s in Russia.
Where’s Cairo? It’s in Egypt.
Where’s Los Angeles? It’s in the United States.
Where’s Sao Paulo? It’s in Brazil.
Where’s Sydney? It’s in Australia.
Where’sTokyo? It’s inJapan.
Where’s Budapest? It’s in Hungary.
Where’s London? It’s in England.
2 This is the first information gap exercise that students
have met in the book, and it therefore needs careful
setting up. Make sure students understand that they
shouldn’t look at each other’s pages until the end of the
activity. Each student has the name and city of four
of the eight people in the photos. The aim is for each
student to find out about the other four by asking their
partner. If possible, explain this using the students’
own language and demonstrate a couple of question
and answer exchanges with a good student yourself
first. Remind students of the forms they will need to
talk about the men and women in the photos (What’s
his/her name? and Where’s he/shefrom?). Drill all four
questions again if necessary.
Divide the class into pairs and make sure students know
if they are Student A or B. Student A should look at pl4
in the unit and Student В at p i40 at the back of the book
Students can refer to each photo by saying the number.
They should write their answers in the spaces provided.
While the students are asking and answering about the
people in the photos, go round monitoring and helping.
If the names cause problems, get students to write them
on a separate piece of paper and show it to their partner
When they have finished, you can check by asking
individual students to tell you about one of the people
in the photos. Say Tell me about number one, etc.
Answers
Tell students to look at each other’s pages.
18 Unit 2 • Your world](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-17-2048.jpg)
![[ aro.T you
I t i few students and ask the class What’s his/
Шт'- and Where’s he/shefrom? Focus attention
4 c ^jeech bubbles and get students to practise the
and answers in open pairs across the class,
srcdents to replace the examples in exercise 3
ts’ names and countries, and to include the
a city/town if appropriate. Students continue
e in closed pairs.
and answers
CD 1: Track 22] Focus attention on the photo
dv and Bruno on pl5. Ask students What’s her
•rout Rosely and elicit the answer. Ask What’s
about Bruno and use the opportunity to
I don’t know.
conversation through once and get students
aplete as many gaps as possible. (With a weaker
r* vou may want to let them listen through once
■■сге they fill in the gaps.) Play the conversation again
ж : ге: students to complete their answers. Check the
•with the whole class.
and tapescript
I'm Rosely. What’s your name?
В ы, --ame's Bruno.
Ь *e£o. Bruno. Where are you from?
1 Гт from Brazil. Where are you from?
R Ok i mfrom Brazil, too. I’m from Sao Paulo.
| I leaity? I'm from Sao Paulo, too!
1 On. nice to meet you, Bruno.
ГVbv the recording again, pausing at the end of each
ir e and getting the students to repeat as a class. Get a
cc<_rle of pairs of students to practise the conversation
r : ren pairs and then get the class to continue in
ckrsed pairs.
SUGGESTION
Шyou have pictures of famous people of different
rationalities, you can use these for further practice,
r not, you can write on the board the names of some
tamous people whose nationalities students will know,
Ь r further question and answer practice.
I H B [CD 1: T rack23] This exercise consists of
three short conversations with people from different
с : untries and it is the students’ first unseen listening.
They should be well prepared for the language by now,
rut some students tend to panic without the support of
the written word. Explain that they only have to listen
tor two countries in conversations 1 and 2, and one
country in conversation 3. Tell them not to worry if
they don’t understand every word!
Play the first conversation and focus on the example
about Claudio. Then elicit where Akemi is from
(Japan). Play the rest of the recording and let students
compare their answers in pairs. Play the recording
again as many times as is necessary to let students
complete their answers.
Answers
1 Claudio: Italy
Akemi: Japan
2 Charles: England
Bud: the United States
3 Loretta andJason: Australia
1 С Hello, I’mClaudio. I’m from Italy.
A Hello, Claudio. I’mAkemi, fromJapan.
2 С Hello. My name’s Charles. What’s your name?
В Hi, Charles. I’m Bud. I’mfrom the United States. Where are you
from?
С I’m from London, in England.
В Oh, right! I’mfrom Chicago.
3 L Hi, I’m Loretta. I’mfrom Sydney, Australia.
J Hi, Loretta. I’mJason. I’mfrom Australia, too.
L Oh, wow! Are you from Sydney?
J No. I’m from Melbourne.
SUGGESTION
Allowing students to tell you other details that they
have understood from a listening can help build their
confidence, so you can ask extra questions within the
students’ language range, e.g. What’s his/her name?
Where in (England)?
Look at the example with the whole class. Elicit the
match for question 2 (Her name’s Tatiana) and then
get students to continue working individually before
checking their answers in pairs.
1 И Д [CD 1: Track 24] Play the recording and let
students check their answers.
Answers and tapescript
1 d Where are you from? I’mfrom Brazil.
2 f What’s her name? Her name’sTatiana.
3 a What’s his name? His name’s Bruno.
4 b Where’s he from? He’s from Sao Paulo.
5 g What’s this in English? It’s a computer.
6 e How are you? Fine, thanks.
7 с Where’s Montreal? It’s in Canada.
This is an extension to the matching activity
to consolidate the question and answer forms.
Unit 2 • Your world 19](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-18-2048.jpg)
![Demonstrate the meaning of cover’ and then ask a
confident student to cover the answers in his/her book.
Ask one or two of the questions and elicit the answers
from the student. Students continue in their pairs.
Students then change roles and cover the questions
before practising the exchanges again.
Check it
7 Focus attention on the first pair of sentences as
an example. Check students understand that the
convention of ticking (/ ) indicates that something
is correct. Students continue working individually to
choose the correct sentence.
Get students to check their answers in pairs before
checking with the whole class.
Answers
2 What’s his name?
3 ‘What’s his name?’ ‘Kevin.’
4 He’s from Spain.
5 Where’s she from?
6 What’s her name?
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 2
Exercise 8 Listening - At a party
Exercise 9 Questions
READING AND SPEAKING (SBP16)
Where are they from?
1 This is the first reading text that the students have
met in the book. It presents the subject pronoun they.
Focus attention on the photo and get students to guess
where Claude and Holly are in the photo (New York).
Get students to read the text through quickly and
check where they are from (Holly - Canada, Claude -
France). Check comprehension by getting students to
locate these countries on the map on pl3.
[CD 1: Track 25] Play the recording and ask
students to read and listen. Then explain any new
words. Words and phrases not previously introduced
are married, teacher, school, in the centre of, doctor, and
hospital. Married can be explained by referring to a
famous married couple. To explain doctor, you can turn
to pl8 of the Student’s Book (the start of Unit 3), where
there is a picture of a doctor. Ask students Where? about
the doctor to elicit/explain hospital. Teacher and school
should be easy to explain in the context of the classroom.
In the centre o f can be illustrated on the board.
2 Students work in pairs to complete the sentences about
the text. Make sure they understand there is more
than one possible answer to number 4. Go over the
answers by asking individual students to read out their
completed sentences.
Answers
1 Holly is from Montreal in Canada.
2 She's a teacher.
3 Her school is inthe centre of Montreal.
4 Claude is from France (or Montreal).
5 He’s a doctor.
6 His hospital is in the centre of Montreal.
7 They are in New York.
8 They are married.
3 Focus attention on the gapped questions in exercise
3. Elicit complete examples to practise is and are, e.g.
What’s his name? Where’s shefrom? Highlight the use
of the contraction s. Get students to ask and answer in
open pairs. Students then work individually to write
questions about Claude and Holly, using the prompts.
Monitor and help as necessary. Students ask and
answer in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct
use of he/she and his/her, and for falling intonation on
the Wh- questions.
GRAMMAR SPOT
Focus attention on the gapped sentences. Complete
the first sentence with the whole class as an example
(is). Then ask students to complete the other
sentences.
Answers
She is a teacher.
He is a doctor.
They are from Canada.
If necessary, highlight the use of he/she/they by
pointing to a male student and saying he, a female
student and saying she, a pair of students and a group
of students and saying they.
Refer students to Grammar Reference 2.4 on p!23.
4 This listening activity has Claude and Holly talking
about different aspects of their trip to New York. It
introduces basic adjectives and words related to visiting
cities, e.g. buildings, weather. Focus attention on the
words in the boxes and use the smiley symbols and the
photos to pre-teach/check the vocabulary.
T 2.10
20 Unit 2 • Your world](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-19-2048.jpg)
!['CD 1: Track 26] Focus attention on the
in number 1. Play the recording through
get students to complete the rest of the
s. Play it again so that students can
■answers. If necessary, play it a third time
its listen and repeat. Encourage accurate
ion and a wide voice range on the sentences
fadjectives. Students practise the conversations
If possible, get students to stand up and
the characters, as this often helps with
tion and overall delivery.
and tapescript
□h Look at the weather!
ts awful!
* Look at my hamburger! It’s fantastic!
- ;-burger is really good, too!
С *hafs this building?
ts the Empire State Building! It’sfantastic!
Г : Look at Central Park!
• beautiful!
5.C-GESTI0N
p b - can revise the language from SB p l6 exercise 4
„-.crease speaking practice by asking students
rr.agine they are on a trip to a different city and
Isubstitute key words from the conversations
their own examples. They then roleplay the
.rsations and get the rest of the class to guess
: they are.
NAL MATERIAL
Unit 2
10 Adjectives -good/aw ful
11 and 12 Reading - Where are they?
13 and 14 Listening - She’s from Berlin
ERYDAY ENGLISH (SB P17)
■u-Ders 11-30
I Get students to say numbers 1-10 round the class,
repeating as many times as necessary until students can
them without hesitation.
. И И [CD 1: Track 27] Focus attention on numbers
11-20. Play the recording and get students to listen,
read, and repeat chorally. Play the recording again and
get students to repeat individually. If necessary, remind
students that the gh in eighteen is silent by writing the
word on the board and crossing out the letters.
Get students to say numbers 1-20 round the class.
Again, get them to repeat as many times as necessary
until they can say the numbers without hesitation.
Give students a number dictation. (See Unit 1 Everyday
English Suggestion ТВ pl3.) Then write a random
selection of numbers 1-20 (as figures) on the board
and get students to say the numbers first chorally, then
individually.
Focus attention on the example. Then get students to
continue matching in pairs.
» ! ! ■ [CD 1: Track 28] Play the recording through
once and get students to check their answers. Play the
recording again and get them to repeat, first chorally
then individually.
Get students to say numbers 1-30 round the class. Get
them to repeat as many times as necessary until they
can say the numbers without hesitation.
■■>«£■ [CD 1: Track 29] Focus attention on the sets
of numbers in exercise 5. Play the first number as
an example and focus on the answer (12). Play the
recording through once and get students to tick the
numbers they hear. Let students check their answers
in pairs and then play the recording again if necessary.
Check the answers with the whole class.
Answers and tapescript
1 12
2 16
3 9
4 17
5 23
Get students to do a number dictation in pairs using
numbers 1-30 (See Unit 1 Everyday English Suggestion
ТВ pl3). Student A should say the numbers and
Student В write. Then get students to change roles.
Monitor and check for accurate pronunciation and
comprehension of the numbers. Note any common
errors, and drill and practise the numbers again in the
next lesson.
This activity allows students to consolidate numbers
via a guessing game based on peoples age. Say I’m
(+ your age) and then ask How old is he/she? about
famous people to establish the concept of age. Focus
attention on the first photo and drill the examples
in the speech bubbles. Pre-teach Yes, I agree to give
students an alternative answer. Elicit students’ ideas
of the girl’s age in the first photo.
Unit 2 • Your world 21](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-20-2048.jpg)
![Students continue talking about the age of the people in Video/DVD
the photos, working in pairs or groups of three. (Don’t Unit 2 Where are you from? on iTools
insist that students use the question How old is he/she? Unit 1 & 2 on iTutor
as the focus is on the numbers at this stage. Students
will go on to practise more personal information
questions in Unit 3.)
Elicit a range of answers from the class in a short
feedback session.
Tell students they are going to hear five short
recordings that give the actual ages of the people in the
photos on p i 7. Point out that in one of the recordings
they will hear two ages. Remind them that they only
need to understand the age of the person each time.
[CD 1: Track 30] Play number 1 as an example
and elicit the age of the child (two). Play the rest of the
recording without stopping and then let the students
compare their answers in pairs. Play the recording
again if necessary to let students check/complete their
answers. Then check the answers with the class.
Ask students how many of the answers they got right
or nearly right, and if there were any surprises.
Answers and tapescript
1 This is little Becky. She’s two.
2 Her name’s Naomi. She’s seven.
3 He’s Nathan. He’s fifteen tomorrow.
4 How old is she? She’s 26.
5 This isJeremy. He’s 29, nearly JO.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Teacher’s Resource Disc
Communicative activity Unit 2 Lottery!
Workbook Unit 2
Exercises 15-17 Numbers 11-30
Don’t forget1.
Workbook Unit 2
Exercises 18-21 Revision
Exercise 22 Pronunciation
Word list
Ask the students to turn to pp 130-1 and go through
the words with them. Ask them to learn the words for
homework, and test them on a few in the following lesson.
Teacher’s Resource Disc
Unit 2 Test
Unit 2 Skills test
T 2.15
22 Unit 2 • Your world](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-21-2048.jpg)
![Notes on the unit
STARTER (sb pie)
NOTE
In this section, students are asked to give their own
job. If you have a multilingual group or you don’t
speak the students’ own language, ask them to look
up the name of their job in a dictionary before
the lesson. Briefly check the pronunciation with
the students so that they are prepared for Starter
exercise 3.
1 This section introduces some job vocabulary and
practises the question What’s his/her/yourjob? Students
will already be familiar with doctor and teacher from
the Reading in Unit 2, so use these as examples to
demonstrate the activity.
If you think students might know some of the jobs,
put them in pairs and ask them to match any jobs they
know and guess the others. Then check answers with
the class. If you think students won’t know any of the
vocabulary or won’t want to guess the answers, then do
the matching activity as a whole-class exercise.
[CD 1: Track 31] Play the recording and
get students to listen and repeat the words, first
chorally and then individually. Concentrate on correct
pronunciation and word stress. Make sure students
don’t get confused by the spelling of nurse, bus driver,
businessman, and builder, and that they pronounce the
vowel sounds correctly:
nurse /n3:s/
bus driver/'bAS ,draivo/
businessman /'biznismon/
builder /'bikta/
2 W [CD 1: Track 32] Briefly review his and her by
pointing to a man and a woman in the Starter pictures
and eliciting What’s his job? and What’s herjob? Read
the questions and answers with the class. Play the
recording, pausing at the end of each line and getting
the students to repeat chorally and individually. Make
sure students include the article a each time. Students
practise talking about the people in the pictures in
open and then in closed pairs. Monitor and check for
correct intonation, and use of his/her and a.
3 Focus attention on the questions and answers in the
speech bubbles. Write the sentences up on the board
and circle the a in each answer to emphasize that
we use an article before jobs. Drill the question and
answers chorally and individually. Quickly check if
students have jobs which are different from those in the
Students Book. If students want to use a job beginning
with a vowel, e.g. engineer, point out they will have to
use an - I ’m an engineer.
SUGGESTION
If you think students need more practice, you can
use flashcards of the same jobs that appear in the
Student’s Book. Get students to ask and answer
What’s his/her job? in pairs, swapping the flashcards
as they finish with them.
HE ISN’T A STUDENT (SB P18)
Negatives - he isn’t
1 This is the first time students meet the negative form,
and so use the photos in this exercise to make the
concept clear. Point to the close-up photo of the man in
the circle, covering the larger photo of him if necessary.
Ask Student or teacher? Then point to the larger photo of
the man and say He isn’t a student. He’s a teacher. Shake
your head as you say the negative sentence to reinforce
the meaning. Point to the close-up photo of the woman,
covering the larger photo of her if necessary. Ask Nurse
or doctor? Then point to the larger photo of the woman
and say She isn’t a nurse. She’s a doctor. Again, shake your
head as you say the negative sentence.
i i l l [CD 1: Track 33] Focus attention on the
captions. Play the recording, pausing at the end of each
line and getting the students to repeat chorally and
individually. Make sure students can reproduce the
negative form correctly and that they include the
article a each time. Also check that they deliver the
sentences fluently. If necessary, highlight the linking
after the negative form:
She isn’tji student.
2 Write the following cues on the board to demonstrate
the activity:
Number 1 He /shop assistant X /teacher /
Number 2 She /teacher X /doctor /
Answers and tapescript
1 a teacher
2 a doctor
3 a bus driver
4 a police officer
5 a builder
6 a shop assistant
7 a nurse
8 a student
9 a businessman
T3.1
24 Unit 3 • All about you](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-23-2048.jpg)
![students to give the above sentences in full {He isn’t
■assistant. He’s a teacher, and She isn’t a teacher,
a doctor.). Students then continue talking about the
es in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct
unciation of isn’t, linking and fluent delivery, and
use of a.
4MMAR SPOT
attention on the sentences and what the
contracted forms are in full. Make sure students
■r.ierstand that the second sentence is negative. Ask
•r_dents to circle the negative forms in exercises 1 and 2.
iGESTION
1:'you think students need more practice with is/isn’t,
у : a can get them to produce sentences with
■formation about each other. You can talk about their
jobs and also review the language from Unit 2, e.g.
Ana isn’t a student. She’s a teacher,
b a n isn’t a teacher. He’s a doctor.
Yoshi isn’tfrom Tokyo. He’sfrom Osaka.
IONAL MATERIAL
к Unit 3
1 Jobs
laervise 2 is or isn’t?
: £RSONAL INFORMATION (SBP19)
ions and answers
This section covers the personal information that
students may need to exchange in a range of everyday
^tuations. The information about the character Ellie is
г resented as a personal profile on a social networking
site called Friendspace. This is intended to be similar to
real sites like Facebook or MySpace.
Focus attention on the photo of Ellie and the
information in her profile. Read through the
information with the class. Check comprehension
of address, phone number, and age and drill the
rronunciation of these words. Remind students of
married from the Reading in Unit 2.
Focus attention on the example in number 1. Put
students into pairs to complete the questions and
answers. Note that students will have to generate the
question Where’s shefrom? for the Country category in
the profile. This question should not be a problem for
mem, as they have already practised it several times,
students met the question How old is he/she?
in Unit 2 but mainly for recognition, so make sure they
understand that this is the question to ask about age.
It is given in full in sentence 6 of the exercise so that
students can familiarize themselves with it before they
practise it. The short answer No, she isn’t is included in
the exercise. Again, students will be able to generate the
question {Is she married?) for this answer, and Yes/No
questions and short answers are covered in the following
exercise. (With a weaker group, you could complete the
questions and answers with the whole class first and use
the ‘Listen and check’ phase for repetition.)
■ W [CD 1: Track 34] Play the recording, pausing
after each question and answer and get students to
check their answers.
Answers and tapescript
1 What’s her surname? Green.
2 What’s her first name? Ellie.
3 Where’s she from? England.
4 What’s her address? 29, Victoria Road, Birmingham.
5 What’s her phone number? 07700 955031.
6 How old is she? She’s twenty.
7 What’s her job? She’s a student.
8 Is she married? No, she isn’t.
Play the recording again and get students to repeat
all the questions and answers. Do this chorally and
individually. Point out that in English we give our
phone numbers using single figures 0-9, and that 0 is
pronounced ‘oh’. Repeated numbers can be expressed
with double, e.g. 455 - four doublefive.
Get students to ask and answer about Ellie, working in
open and then closed pairs.
SUGGESTION
For further practice, cut out a picture of a man from
a magazine (or draw one on the board) and provide
similar ID information about him. Students then
practise asking and answering the questions with
he/him.
Yes/No questions and short answers, which appeared in
exercise 2, are covered in full here.
[CD 1: Track 35] Focus attention on the
questions and answers. Ask students to read and listen.
Play the recording through once. Play the recording
again, pausing at the end of each line and getting
the students to repeat as a class. Check for accurate
reproduction of the rising intonation on the question
and falling intonation on the answer:
Is Elliefrom America? No, she isn’t.
Unit 3 • All about you 25](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-24-2048.jpg)
![4 Focus on the question cues in number 1 and
demonstrate the first question and answer exchange
with a confident student - Is shefrom London? No,
she isn’t. Students continue to ask and answer about
the other cities in question 1, working in open pairs.
Students continue asking and answering the other
questions in closed pairs. Monitor and check for
correct intonation and correct use of short answers.
5 This exercise practises the positive and negative forms
in statements. Focus attention on the two examples
in number 1. Students complete the sentences with
the information about Ellie. Get students to check
their answers in pairs before checking with the whole
class. Be prepared to review and drill numbers 1-9 if
students have problems saying the phone numbers.
METRO 5 - T H E AUDITION (SBP20)
Negatives - I’m not, they aren’t
This second presentation of negative forms also covers
Yes/No questions and short answers. The context is an
interview with a band called Metro 5, who are entering a
fictional TV talent competition called The Audition.
1 The negative forms I ’m not and they aren’t are
presented along with Yes/No questions Are you ...?,
Are they ...? and Is this...?, and the short answers.
Focus attention on the photo. Ask Who are the people?
Elicit Metro 5. Use the information in the photo and
mime to pre-teach/check audition, band, and singer.
Draw a simple family tree on the board to pre-teach
brother, and refer students back to the map on Student’
Book pl3 to check Scotland and Ireland.
2 ВИ ГД [CD 1: Track 36] Play the recording through
once and ask students just to listen and read. Play the
recording again and get students to complete as many
questions as they can. Get them to check in pairs and
help each other to complete The Audition Interview.
Play the recording again and get students to listen and
check and/or complete anything they missed. Check
the wording of the questions with the whole class.
Answers and tapescript
I Hi! is this your band, Metro 51
P Yes, it is.
I Great! And are you Donny McNab?
P No, I’mnot. I’m Paul McNab. This is Donny. He’s my brother.
I Ah, yes, sorry. Hi, Donny. You’re a builder from Scotland, right?
D Well, yes, I am a builder, but I’mnot from Scotland.
I Oh, where are you from?
P&D We’re from Ireland.
I Aah! Are the other boys from Ireland too?
D No, they aren’t. They’re all from different countries.
I Oh! Interesting! And are they all builders?
D No, they aren’t. Paul’s a bus driver and...
P Yeah, I’ma bus driver and Ronan’sa nurse and Bo and Edson
are students.
I Interesting! And Donny, are you the singer in the band?
D Yes, I am. Well, we’re all singers.
I Oh, right! Nice to meet you. Good luck to you all!
All Thank you very much.
3 This exercise asks basic comprehension questions
about the band. Ask What’s the band’s name? as an
example and elicit Metro 5. Put students in pairs to
ask and answer the rest of the questions. Monitor and
check for accurate pronunciation and formation of the
short answers.
1 И 1 [CD 1: Track 37] Play the recording through
once and get students to check their answers. If
necessary, play it again and get students to listen and
repeat. Then put them in new pairs to practise the
questions and answers again.
Answers and tapescript
1 What’s the band’s name? Metro Б.
2 Are Paul and Donny brothers? Yes, they are.
3 Are they from Scotland? No, they aren’t.
4 Are the other boys from Ireland? No, they aren’t.
5 Are they all builders? No, they aren’t.
6 Are they all singers? Yes, they are.
Answers
1 Is she from London? No, she isn’t.
Is she from Liverpool? No, she isn’t.
Is she from Birmingham? Yes, she is.
2 Is she 16? No, she isn’t.
Is she 18? No, she isn’t.
Is she 20? Yes, she is.
3 Is she a teacher? No, she isn’t.
Is she a nurse? No, she isn’t.
Is she a student? Yes, she is.
4 Is she married? No, she isn’t.
Answers
2 Her phone number isn’t 07700 995031. It’s 07700 955031.
3 She isn’t 18. She’s 20.
4 She isn’t married.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 3
Exercises 3 -6 Questions and negatives - is/isn’t
26 Unit 3 • All about you](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-25-2048.jpg)
![: r a m m a r s p o t
1 Focus attention on the negative sentences and
what the contracted forms are in full. Make
sure students understand that the sentences are
negative. Ask students to circle the negative forms
in the interview in exercise 2.
2 Focus attention on the short answers. Make sure
students understand that we use the full form in
the third person affirmative - Yes, it is, not *it’s,
and that we cannot say *1 amn’t for the first person
negative. Ask students to circle the short answers
in the interview in exercise 2.
Read Grammar Reference 3.1 on p i24 together
in class, and/or ask students to read it at home.
Encourage them to ask you questions about it.
one with Diego and one with Grace. These are a little
longer than in previous units, but reassure students that
they only need to complete the information in the table
and they don’t have to understand every word.
[CD 1: Track 38] Ask students to listen for
the city or town Diego is from. Play the first six lines
of conversation 1 and then pause. Check the answer
(Mexico City). Play the recording again from the
beginning and get students to complete the information
about Diego. Pause before moving on to conversation 2.
Play conversation 2 through once and get students to
complete the information about Grace. Get students to
compare their answers in pairs. Play the conversations
again, pausing after conversation 1 and get students to
complete/check their answers.
Check the answers with the whole class.
This gives students the opportunity to practise a
longer conversation than in earlier units. Put students
m groups of three to practise the interview. With a
confident class, you can let them start straight away
but with weaker classes, it would be helpful to play
the recording again line by line, drilling any difficult
sections to help build students’ confidence. Encourage
the appropriate intonation on the questions and voice
range on replies like Interesting, Oh right, etc.
Ta_< ng about you
5 In this exercise students get the opportunity to
personalize the Yes/No questions. Get students to
ask and answer the first question in open pairs.
Students work in small groups to continue the task.
Alternatively, students could stand up and do the
activity as a mingle. Monitor and check for correct
intonation and use of short answers.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Yacher’s Resource Disc
Communicative activity Unit 3 Yes or No!
Workbook Unit 3
Exercises 7-9 Negatives and questions - I ’m not/they aren’t
PRACTICE (SB p21)
s ~e a businessman?
Focus attention on the photos of Diego and Grace.
Ask Where are they? Elicit that Diego is by his taxi and
Grace is in a cafe.
2 Get students to read through the information in the
table so that they know what they have to listen for.
Explain that they are going to hear two conversations,
Answers
First name Diego Grace
Surname Hernandez Chou
Country Mexico the United States
City/Town Mexico City New York
Phone number 5546-247312 212638-9475
Age 42 33
Job Taxi driver Shop assistant
Married? No Yes
T 3.8
1 I Good morning.
D Hello.
I What’syour name, please?
D My name’s Diego Hernandez.
I Thank you. And where are you from, Diego?
D I’mfrom Mexico, from Mexico City.
I Thank you. And your telephone number, please?
D 5546-247312.
I How old are you, Diego?
D I’mforty-two.
I And... what’s your job?
D I’m a taxi driver.
I And... are you married?
D No, I’m not.
I Thank you very much.
2 I Good afternoon.
G Good afternoon.
I What’syour name, please?
G Grace, Grace Chou.
I And where are you from?
G From New York.
I Ah! So you’re from the United States.
G Yes, I am.
I What’s your phone number?
G 212638-9475.
Unit 3 • All about you 2/](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-26-2048.jpg)
![Get students to check their answers in pairs before
necking with the whole class.
latswers
1 Her name’s Anna.
I She's a teacher.
. His phone number is 796542.
a mnot a doctor.
: ~iey aren’t from Italy.
& i~e isn’t married.
; £ADING AND LISTENING (SBP22)
N *e in Las Vegas!
This skills section follows on from p20, where students
first meet the band Metro 5. It gives an update on the
band’s progress with a magazine article and a recorded
interview. The band have now won the TV talent
competition The Audition. The text introduces the
subject pronoun we and broadens students’ exposure
Iо new lexical items. Focus attention on the photo and
make sure students understand it shows the same band
as on p20. Ask What’s the band’s name? and elicit any
other information the students can remember. Point to
the different band members in the photo and introduce
me question word Who? Ask Who’s this? about each
person. Other new vocabulary in the text includes
boy band, winners, Sweden, on tour, guys, tired, happy,
excited, and good luck. Encourage students to try to
understand these from context, but be prepared to
explain if necessary.
Ask students to read the text through fairly quickly. Deal
with any vocabulary problems. Elicit the names of any
other talent contests and boy bands that students know.
Tr.en deal briefly with the Grammar Spot.
5 3AMMAR SPOT
f heck students understand we by gesturing to
yourself and another student. Focus attention on the
ifrirmative sentence and the contracted form We’re.
Make sure students understand what the contracted
form is in full. Ask students to circle the examples of
were in the reading text.
F :cus attention on the negative sentence and
the contracted form aren’t. Make sure students
understand what the contracted form is in full and
that the sentence is negative. Ask students to circle the
example of aren’t in the reading text.
Refer students to Grammar Reference 3.2 on p!24.
2 Remind students of the they form by pointing to two
students and eliciting They’re students. Focus attention
on the questions. Elicit the answer to number 1 (No,
they aren’t.). Students answer the other questions,
working individually, before checking their answers in
pairs. Then check the answers with the whole class.
Answers
1 No, they aren’t.
2 No, they aren’t.
3 They’re in Las Vegas, in the United States.
4 Yes, they are.
3 This task consolidates positive and negative forms of
to be in a correction exercise. Focus attention on the
example answer. Say Sentence 1: positive or negative?
(negative), then Sentence 2: positive or negative? (positive),
Students work individually to complete the task.
I t f [CD 1: Track 39] Play the recording, pausing at
the end of each sentence to give students time to check
their answers. Ask a few students to read out their
answers. Check they can reproduce the contrastive
stress in the pairs of sentences, e.g.
They aren’t in Brazil. They’re in the United States!
Drill the pronunciation if necessary and get students to
practise the sentences again.
Answers and tapescript
1 The band, Metro 5, are in Brazil.
They aren’t in Brazil! They’re in the United States!
2 They’re in New York.
They aren’t in New York! They’re in Las Vegas!
3 Bo’sfrom Australia.
He isn’t from Australia! He’s from Sweden!
4 Edson’sfrom Sweden.
He isn’t from Sweden! He’sfrom Brazil!
5 They’re very tired.
They aren’t tired! They’re happy and excited to be here!
Interview with the band
4 I H H l [CD 1: Track 40] Get students to read the
questions through before they listen. If necessary,
review numbers 11-30 to help students when picking
out the ages of the characters.
Play the first 8 lines of the conversation and elicit the
answer to question 1 (Ronan is 24). Play the rest of the
conversation and get students to listen for the answers
to 2-4. If necessary, refer them back to the text so that
they can remember the names of the characters.
Play the recording through again and get students to
check/complete their answers. Check the answers with
the whole class.
Unit 3 • All about you 29](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-28-2048.jpg)
![Answers
1 Ronanis24.
2 Bo and Edson are 21.
3 Paul is 22 and Donny is 19.
4 Ronan is married. Paul, Donny, Bo, and Edson aren’t married.
T3.10
I Hi!
All Hi!
I Now, this is your first time in Las Vegas, yes?
All Yeah. That’s right. It’sfantastic here! It’s great!
I Good! Now, one by one. Ronan, you’re from Australia.
R Yes, I am.
I And how old are you, Ronan?
R I’m24.
I OK. And Bo, you’re from Brazil and Edson’s from Sweden...
В No, no, I’m not from Brazil, Edson’s from Brazil. I’m from
Sweden.
I Sorry, guys. So Bo and Edson, how old are you?
E We’re both 21.
В Yeah, that’s right.
I OK. Now, Donny and Paul. You’re brothers.
D&PYeah, we are.
I And you’re from Scotland?
D&PNo, no. We aren’t from Scotland. We’re from Ireland.
I Ireland. Oh, yes. Sorry. How old are you both?
P I’m22.
D And I’m19.
I Thanks. Now, who’s married inMetro 51
В, E, D &P We aren’t married!
R I am!
I Ah, Ronan. You’re married.
R Yeah, my wife’s name’s Lisa. She isn’t here. She’s in Australia.
I Aah! Well, thank you, Metro 5. Welcome to Las Vegas!
All It’s great to be here. Thanks!
Roleplay
5 This is the first roleplay in the course. It is intended to
be quite controlled, but also to give students important
speaking practice at this early stage in their learning.
As in all freer speaking tasks, its important to let
students focus on communicating and not to highlight
their errors during the task.
Tell students they are going to invent a band. Focus
attention on the questions. Check students understand
Where are you now? by asking the same question about
the classroom situation. Divide the class into groups of
four. Try to get a mixture of males and females in each
group and to put weaker students with stronger ones to
help create balance in the task.
Give students time to invent their imaginary identities
and write down the details. Demonstrate the questions
and answers with a confident group. For the answer
to What are your names? encourage students to use
I ’m ..., and This is ... to avoid the need for our, which
is presented in Unit 4.
If appropriate, set up the roleplay to feel more authentii
by moving desks and/or letting students sit in small
groups in different parts of the room. Then get the
groups to ask and answer about their bands. Monitor
and check. Note down any common errors and
highlight them after the roleplay or in a subsequent
lesson. As an extension, get one or two groups to
describe themselves to the rest of the class.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 3
Exercises 10 and 11 Listening - An interview with Ella
Exercise 12 Vocabulary - Revision
EVERYDAY ENGLISH (SB P23)
Social expressions (1)
NOTE
This section contains examples of the Present Simple
{I don’t know and I don’t understand). At this stage,
it’s best to treat these as useful expressions rather
than explain the grammar behind the use of Present
Simple. The grammar of the Present Simple will be
covered in Units 5 and 6.
Review the expressions in this section regularly so
that they become part of the students’ productive
vocabulary as early as possible. Highlight situations
in the classroom in which students can use the
expressions in a meaningful way.
1 This is the first focus on expressions used in everyday
situations. Ask students to look at the pictures and ask
Where are they? about each one (I in a school, 2 in a
restaurant, 3 in a city, 4 in a car, 5 at a language school,
6 in a city).
[CD 1: Track 41] Play the recording and get
students to look at the picture and gapped conversation
for each situation.
2 Focus attention on conversation 1 and elicit B’s answer
(That’s OK.). Students continue completing the
conversations in pairs, using the words in the boxes
and the pictures to help them.
Play the recording again and get students to check
their answers.
T3.11
30 Unit 3 • All about you](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-29-2048.jpg)
![*es on the unit
TER (SB p24)
section reviews all the possessive adjectives
nts have seen in Units 1-3 and also presents
and their. Focus students’ attention on the row
s-oiect pronouns and briefly review I, you, etc. by
ting to yourself and students and eliciting the
pronoun. Focus attention on the examples
the chart. Get students to continue completing
chart, working in pairs. Then check the answers
students’ pronunciation. Make sure they can
nguish you/your, they/their, and that they can
ounce our correctly.
3 Review the use of his and then focus attention
on the other examples with possessive s. Ask
students to circle the examples of possessive s in
the text about Annie’s family. Make sure students
don’t confuse the contracted form of is with
possessive s.
Read Grammar Reference 4.1 and 4.2 on p i24
together in class, and/or ask students to read it at
home. Encourage them to ask you questions about it.
Grammar Reference 4.3 on pl24 focuses on irregular
plurals. Read it together in class, and/or ask students
to read it at home. Ask students to find an irregular
plural in the text about Annie on p24 (children).
u he she we they
ur his her our their
attention on the examples in the speech bubbles,
the sentences, pointing to relevant objects and
tg students to repeat. Elicit more examples by
ting to objects that belong to the students and
cts in the classroom. Make sure students use just
possessive adjectives my, your, his, etc., rather
tr. _n students’ names, as this would require s, which is
;: ered in the next section.
FAMILY (SB p24)
I [CD 1: Track 42] Focus attention on the
photographs and the heading Annie Taylor. Play
—e recording and ask students to follow the text in
~ e ir books. Check comprehension of husband, bank
nager, children, and university.
at to one member of the family and ask Who’s this?
:: elicit the person’s name. Take the opportunity to
farther practise How old is ... ?and (I think) She’s ... by
_r.ving How old is (Annie)?, etc. to elicit possible ages.
DAMMAR SPOT
Focus attention on the examples. Make sure that
students understand that s is the contracted form
of is.
Review the use of her and then focus attention on
the use of possessive’s. Make sure that students
understand that we use this form to express
possession.
Focus on the example and elicit the answer to question 2
(It’s in London.). If necessary, briefly review the use
of it to talk about things. Get students to continue
answering the questions.
[CD 1: Track 43] Play the recording and get
students to check their answers. Put students in new
pairs to practise the questions and answers.
Answers and tapescript
1 Is Annie married?
Yes, she is.
2 Where’s their house?
It’s in London.
3 What’s Annie’sjob?
She’s a doctor.
4 Where’s her hospital?
In the centre of London.
5 What’sJim’sjob?
He’s a bank manager.
6 Are their children both at school?
No. Emma’s at school. Vince is at university.
Who are they?
3 [CD 1: Track 44] Focus attention on the words
in the table. Play the recording and get students to
repeat as a class. Check students can reproduce the
correct word stress.
[CD 1: Track 45] Focus attention on the family
tree. Ask Who’s Annie? and get students to point to
the correct person in the photo on p24. Now focus
attention on the example and play sentence 1 in the
recording. Continue playing the sentences, pausing
at the end of each one and getting students to write
the correct words. Play the recording again and get
students to check their answers.
Unit 4 • Family and friends 33](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-32-2048.jpg)
![Answers and tapescript
1 Annie isJim’s wife.
2 Jim is Annie’s husband.
3 Emma is Annie andJim’s daughter.
4 Vince is their son.
5 Annie is Vince’s mother.
6 Jim is Emma’s father.
7 Emma is Vince’s sister.
8 Vince is Emma’s brother.
9 Annie andJim are Emma and Vince’s parents.
10 Emma and Vince areJim and Annie’s children.
Play the recording through again, pausing after each
sentence and getting students to repeat chorally and
individually. Make sure they reproduce the possessive s
accurately.
SUGGESTION
With a weaker group, use the family tree in a
teacher-lead presentation, e.g. point to Annie and
then to Jim and say wife. Annie is Jim’s wife. Have
students repeat the word in isolation first, then the
whole sentence chorally and individually. Make sure
that they pronounce the possessive s. Students can
then listen to the recording and write the words
down as reinforcement.
5 Write the following on the board to reinforce the use of
possessive’s.
Whdts) Vince? s = is
He’s Emma^s)brother. s = possessive, not is
Drill the question and answers in open pairs. Then
drill a plural example, e.g. Who are Jim and Annie?
They’re Vince’s parents. Get students to continue asking
and answering about Annie’s family in open pairs.
Make sure that they give all possible answers about
the different relationships and that they include plural
examples, too. Students continue asking and answering
in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of
possessive s and is/are.
SUGGESTION
You can give students further practice on families
and possessive s by referring to famous people.
Draw the family tree of a famous family, e.g. the
British or Spanish royal family and get students to
ask and answer questions with Who? Alternatively,
you can prepare true/false statements about the
family relationships.
You can also try a quiz based on famous people.
Prepare questions based on relationships that your
students will know. You can include film stars, pop
stars, politicians, and sportspeople, e.g.
Who’s Victoria Beckham? (She’s David Beckham’s wife.)
Who’s Stella McCartney? (She’s Paul McCartney’s
daughter.)
Be prepared to modify the questions to suit the age
and experience of individual groups.
6 Д И [CD 1: Track 46] This listening task focuses on
short expressions used by member’s of Annie’s family in
different situations. Tell students that they don’t need to
understand every word to do the task, and they should
use the context to help them. Play number 1 and focus
on the example. Play the rest of the recording and
get students to write the correct family member. Let
students check their answers in pairs before checking
with the whole class.
Answers
1 Annie
2 Emma
3 Jim
4 Vince
5 Annie
■ем
1 Come on, Emma! Time for school!
2 Mum! Where are my school books?
3 Bye, everybody! I’moff to work! Have a good day!
4 Bye, Dad! See you this evening.
5 Good morning, Mrs Clark. How are you today?
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Teacher’s Resource Disc
Communicative activity Unit 4 The Adams family
PRACTICE (SB p26)
An American family
1 Read out the rubric for exercise 1 and focus attention
on the photos of Elena’s family and on the names of her
brother and her parents. Ask some general questions
about the family: Where are theyfrom? What are their
names? Focus attention on the chart and make sure
students understand what information they have to
listen for by eliciting possible answers for each category,
e.g. name - Oscar, age -1 6 , job - student.
Ч 1Г .1 [CD 1: Track 47] Tell students they are going
to hear Elena talking about her family. The script is
quite short and students have met all the vocabulary in
it, but remind them to listen for just the information
they need. Play the first part of the recording as far
as He’s a student in college. Elicit the answers about
34 Unit 4 • Family and friends](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-33-2048.jpg)
![-.ena’s brother (Oscar, 19, student). Play the rest of the
recording and get students to complete the chart.
Check the answers with the whole class.
Answers
Name Age Job
Lena’s brother Oscar 19 student
Lena’s mother Maria 47 Spanish teacher
Lena’sfather Alfredo 52 businessman
- My name’s Elena Diaz, and I’mfrom the United States. This is my
Tmily. Our house is in Chicago. This is my brother. His name is Oscar,
ard he's 19. He’s a student in college. This is my mother. Her name’s
A'aria. She’s47, and she’s a Spanish teacher. And this is my father,
- *>edo. He’s 52, and he’s a businessman.
As a follow-up, point to each of Elenas relations and get
students to give a brief description, e.g. This is Oscar.
He’s Elenas brother. He’s 19 and he’s a student.
Focus attention on the example and then get students
to complete the sentences in pairs.
Check the answers with the whole class, making sure
students have included possessive s where necessary.
my/our/your...
4 This section consolidates the possessive adjectives
covered in the Starter section. Focus attention on
the example and then get students to complete the
sentences.
[CD 1: Track 48] Play the recording and get
students to check their answers.
Answers and tapescript
1 ‘What’s your name?’ ‘My name’s Annie.’
2 ‘What are your names?’ ‘Our names are Emma and Vince.’
3 Jean-Paul and Andre are students. Their school is in Paris.
4 ‘My sister’s married.’ ‘What's her husband’s name?’
5 ‘My brother’s office is in New York.’ ‘What’s his job?’
6 We’re in our English class.
7 ‘Mum and Dad are in Rome.’ ‘What’s the name of their hotel?’
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 4
Exercise 1 Possessive s
Exercise 2 myIourIher...
Exercise 3 Vocabulary - The family
Answers
1 Her mother’s name is Maria. M ANNIE’S BROTHER (SBp27) j
; What’s Alfredo’s job?’ ‘He’s a businessman.’
a Where’stheir house?’ ‘It’s in Chicago.’ has/have
Demonstrate the activity by writing the names of your
own family on the board and talking about them. Give
the information quite slowly but naturally and then
ask a few questions to check understanding, e.g. Who’s
:his?, What’s herjob?, etc.
SUGGESTION
If possible, it’s a nice idea to base family descriptions
on real photos. Bring in photos of your family and
ask students to do the same. If you have a small
enough class, sit them around you and talk about the
pictures slowly but naturally and pass them around.
Encourage students to ask questions, following the
models in exercise 3 on p26.
Get students to draw their own family tree (and have
their family photos ready if relevant). Divide the class
into pairs and get students to ask about each other’s
family. Monitor and check for correct use of he/she,
nis/her, and a + job.
Ask a few students to choose someone in a family
tree or in a photo and give a brief description of
him/her. The person can be from their own or their
partner’s family.
This section recycles the family vocabulary, possessive s,
and possessive adjectives, and also presents has/have.
The text is based on the family of some of the
characters students have already met. Point to the
picture of Annie on p24 and ask WTjo’s this? Elicit the
answer It’s Annie Taylor. Tell students they are going
to read about Annie’s brother. Students should be
able to recognize/work out the new vocabulary items
(hotel, apartment, and big) but be prepared to explain
if necessary with simple board drawings.
[CD 1: Track 49] Focus attention on the
photograph of Paddy and his family and read out
the heading. Play the first line of the recording as
an introduction and point to the photo of Galway.
If possible, indicate where Galway is on a map. Play the
rest of the recording through to the end. Ask students
Who are Paul and Donny? (They’re Paddy’s sons.) What’s
their band’s name? (Metro 5.) Where are they now?
(In Las Vegas.). Also ask students to look back and find
the pictures of Paul and Donny on SB pp20 and 22.
Read the examples with the class. Then get students
to complete the exercise working individually. Get
students to check their answers in pairs before checking
with the whole class.
Unit 4 • Family and friends 35](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-34-2048.jpg)
![Answers
I X 2 / З Х 4 X 5 / 6 X 7 /
GRAMMAR SPOT
Focus attention on the table and the examples. Students
complete the table with the other forms of have.
Answers
I have
You have
He has
She has
We have
They have
Ask students to circle the examples of has and have
in the reading text. Refer students to Grammar
Reference 4.4 on p i24.
3 Ч И [CD 1: Track 50] This is a dictation activity with
five short sentences, each recorded once. Demonstrate
the activity by playing the first sentence and focusing
attention on the example. Play the rest of the recording
to the end and ask students to just listen and not write
anything.
Play the recording a second time and ask students to write
the missing words in each sentence. Ask students to write
the complete sentences on the board to check the answers.
If they have made mistakes or missed words, play the
relevant sentences again and elicit the correct wording.
Answers and tapescript
1 I have a small hotel in the city of Galway.
2 My wife has a job in town.
3 We have three sons.
4 The boys have a band called Metro 5.
5 My sister has a big house in London.
4 In this exercise students write about themselves. Focus
attention on the examples in the speech bubbles. Write
a few more examples about yourself on the board and
list the categories students can write about: brothers/
sisters, children, home, job, animals. Go round helping
and checking.
Then ask a few students to tell the rest of the class
about themselves and their family. Correct any
common errors in the use of has/have and possessive s,
but do not over-correct students as this may affect their
levels of confidence.
PRACTICE (SB p28)
has/have
1 Focus attention on the example. Students then
complete the exercise, working individually.
Get students to check their answers in pairs before
checking with the whole class.
Answers
2 My parents have a house in the country.
3 My wife has aJapanese car.
4 My sister and I have a dog.
5 You have a very nice family.
6 Our school has fifteen classrooms.
7 We have English classes in the evening.
2 This exercise provides some freer practice and extends
the context to talking about the students’ school. It alsc
provide practice in the it form of have. Focus attention
on the examples in the speech bubbles. Drill the
sentences chorally and individually. List the categories
students can talk about on the board: number of
teachers/students/classrooms; size of school; equipmer
at your school (e.g. TV, DVD player, CD player,
computers). You will need to modify the examples to
include equipment that students know you have at you
school so that they generate only affirmative sentences
Divide the class into pairs and get students to talk
about their school. Monitor and check for correct use
of has/have.
ADDITIONAL M A T E R I A L ___________________________
Workbook Unit 4
Exercise 4 has/have - Alfie and his family
Questions and answers
3 This exercise reviews the question words students havi
covered to date. Focus attention on the example and
then get students to match the other questions and
answers.
[CD 1: Track 51] Play the recording and get
students to check their answers. Then let them practis
the questions and answers in pairs.
Answers and tapescript
1 d How is your mother?
She’s very well, thank you.
2 f What’s your sister’sjob?
She’s a nurse.
3 e How old are your daughters?
They’re ten and thirteen.
T 4.10
36 Unit 4 • Family and friends](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-35-2048.jpg)
![[ г э Who is Pedro?
He’s a student from Madrid.
5 : Where’syour office?
It’s in the centre of town.
: a What’s your surname?
Smith.
■СЬеск it
I
B Focus attention on the first pair of sentences and
die example. Remind students of the convention of
ticking (/ ) to indicate that something is correct.
Students continue working individually to choose
die correct sentence.
Get students to check their answers in pairs before
; checking with the whole class.
Answers
Mary’s children are married.
; 2 What’s your daughter’s name?
I 2* What’s hisjob?
4 They’re from Germany.
5 Their parents have a house in Bonn.
: My brother has a good job.
We have a lovely teacher.
OOITIONAL MATERIAL
■orfcbook Unit 4
Exercises 5 -7 Listening - Alfie: EADING AND WRITING (SBP28)
Ы. best friendГ Ш
NOTE
Students need access to dictionaries to check new
exis in the reading text. This is an important step
to get them used to using dictionaries on a regular
oasis in their learning. If students don’t usually bring
dictionaries to class or if there isn’t a class set of
dictionaries available, ask students to check the new
words (in red) in the text for homework before the
reading lesson.
The text introduces like + noun and like + -ing
|paragraph d) and students practise it briefly in
exercises 3, 5, and 6. At this stage, it’s best to treat
this mainly as a phrase for recognition, as students
io on to cover I/you/we/they like and question
forms as part of the first presentation of the Present
Simple in Unit 5.
1 Explain that the text is about a girl called Antonia and
her boyfriend is Vince. Ask Who’s Vince?Ask students
to look back earlier in the unit and find the answer.
(He’s Annie’s son.) Refer students back to SB p24 and
the information about Annie’s family if necessary.
Working alone or in pairs, students read the text and
check the new words (in red in the text). (If students
have done the dictionary work for homework before
the lesson, ask them to do the reading and matching
in exercise 2 straight away.) If students query the use
of have in have a really good time, explain that we
often use have with a range of expressions as well as
have + object.
2 Demonstrate the activity by eliciting the photo that
goes with paragraph a (photo 1). Students continue to
match the other photos and paragraphs, and say who
they think the people in the photos are. Check the
answers with the whole class.
Answers
Photo 1- paragraph a (Antonia and Vince)
Photo 2- paragraph с (Toni’s brother Mark and sister Alison)
Photo 3- paragraph b(Toni’s parents)
Photo 4 - paragraph d (music, dance, and football magazines)
3 Focus attention on the example sentence. Students
complete the activity, working individually, and then
check their answers in pairs. Check the answers with
the whole class.
Answers
1 a student, funny, beautiful
2 a brother, a boyfriend, a lot of music
3 Toni’s boyfriend, great
4 Toni’s brother, a Manchester United fan, at school
5 a house, three children
6 Metro 5, dancing, football, Vince
4 This is another listening activity in which students use
the context to help them work out who is talking. Make
sure students understand that they only need to write
the name of each person, not the complete sentences.
With weaker students, write the names of the people in
the recording on the board before students listen.
Ч Ш Н [CD 1: Track 52] Focus attention on the
example and play number 1 on the recording. Play
the rest of the recording, pausing if necessary to allow
students to write their answers. Allow students to
compare their answers in pairs. Play the recording
again to let students check/complete their answers.
Then check the answers with the class.
Unit 4 • Family and friends 37](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-36-2048.jpg)
![SUGGESTION
It’s a good idea to let students look at each other’s
written work to help correct it. When you correct the
work, make a note of the most common mistakes in
recent target language and get students to correct
them as a class activity before you hand back
individual work.
If possible, display some of the students’ writing on
the classroom wall. Remember to change the displays
fairly frequently and, if appropriate, to ask students to
vote for the description/story, etc. they liked best.
Answers
1 Toni
2 Vince
3 Toni
4 Mark and Alison
5 Alison
6 Toni’s parents
7 Toni’s mother
8 Mark and Toni
T 4.11
1 Listen to this band! It’sMetro 5! They’re fantastic!
2 My girlfriend is from the north of England.
3 London’s great! And my boyfriend’s great, too!
4 Our sister’s at university.
Yeah, she’s at university in London.
5 I like my sister’s boyfriend, he’sfunny.
6 Our children’s school is near our house.
7 My bank is in the centre of Manchester.
8 Come on, United! Come on! Yes! A goal! 4 -1 to Man United!
5 Focus attention on the example and then get students
to give more information about Toni. Divide the class
into pairs and get students to take it in turns to talk
about Toni, using the information they underlined
in exercise 3. Monitor and check for correct use of
he/she/they, his/her/their, is/are, has/have, and
possessive s.
Writing
6 This is one of a series of short writing tasks that help
consolidate the key language students have covered and
also provide a change of pace if done in class. Prepare
students for the writing phase by eliciting what sort of
information can complete each sentence. If you have
time, build up a connected description on the board
of an imaginary person to provide the students with a
model. Get the students to write their description in
class or for homework.
Students can do the follow-up stage in the same or a
subsequent lesson. Put students in pairs. If possible,
get them to work with a new partner or someone
they don’t know well so that the information they
exchange is really new. Students take it in turns to read
their description. Encourage them to ask questions
about the person their partner is describing, using the
language they have covered to date. If students try to
ask questions with like, explain that they will cover this
point in the next unit.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 4
Exercise 8 Reading - Who’s happy?
Exercise 9 Vocabulary - Revision
Exercise 10 Pronunciation - they’re or their?
EVERYDAY ENGLISH (SB P30)
The alphabet
This section covers the alphabet and spelling and so is
an important step in helping students to find out about
and check vocabulary for themselves. Once students
have learned the alphabet, take the opportunity whenever
possible to spell new words to the students and to get
them to spell words in class. Be prepared to review the
pronunciation of letters students have problems with at
regular intervals.
1 l t l » l [CD 1: Track 53] Focus attention on the
letters on p30 and tell the students they are going to
practise the alphabet in English. Play the recording
through once and let students just listen and familiariz
themselves with the letters. Play the recording again,
pausing after each letter and getting the students to
repeat as a class. Review the letters that students often
find confusing and drill these thoroughly:
a, r
e, i, у
g>j
u, w
2 ИДИШ [CD 1: Track 54] The letters in this exercise
are arranged according to sound. Demonstrate this by
playing the recording of the first group of letters /ei/.
Play the recording of the first group again and get
students to repeat as a class. Repeat for the other
groups of letters and then get individual students to
read different letter groups aloud.
38 Unit 4 • Family and friends](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-37-2048.jpg)
![Write different letters on the board at random and elicit
~em from the students. Pay special attention to the
•:wels as these often give problems. Then put some
kr.own words on the board and elicit the spelling.
You could feed in How do you spell... ? at this point.)
do you spell...?
[CD 1: Track 55] Check comprehension of
first name and surname and tell students they are
going to hear five people spelling their names. Play the
recording of the first name as an example. Then play
the other names, pausing at the end of each surname.
Students write the names and then check their answers
in pairs. Then check the answers with the whole class
by writing the names on the board and getting students
to spell them aloud.
Answers and tapescript
1 .Vhat’s your name? Annie Taylor.
How do you spell your first name? A-N-N-l-E.
How do you spell your surname? T-A-Y-L-O-R.
1 .Vhat’s your name? Quentin Wrexham.
How do you spell your first name? Q-U-E-N-T-l-N.
How do you spell your surname? W-R-E-X-H-A-M.
3 .Vhat’syour name? Takako Matsuda.
How do you spell your first name? T-A-K-A-K-O.
How do you spell your surname? M-A-T-S-U-D-A.
•i .Vhat’s your name? Fabien Leclerc.
How do you spell your first name? F-A-B-l-E-N.
How do you spell your surname? L-E-C-L-E-R-C.
: What’syour name? Idoia Ruiz Martinez.
How do you spell your first name? I-D-O-I-A.
How do you spell your surnames? R-U-l-Z, then M-A-R-T-l-N-E-Z.
Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles
md drill the exchanges chorally and individually.
Make sure students can reproduce the correct stress on
the questions:
How do you spell yourfirst name?
How do you spell your surname?
Students practise spelling their own names in open and
dosed pairs.
Focus attention on the examples in the speech
bubbles in exercise 5. Drill the exchange chorally
and individually. Students practise the exchange with
different words from the text, working in open pairs.
Students continue working in closed pairs. Monitor
and check for accurate pronunciation of the letters.
6 With weaker students, briefly review the names of
some of the countries they practised in Unit 2. Focus
attention on the example. Students continue with the
other countries. Get them to check their answers in
pairs before checking with the whole class. Get the
students to give the spelling of each country, rather
than just the name.
Answers
France, Spain, Brazil,Japan, Australia, Italy, England
7 This activity practises the alphabet in the context of
common abbreviations students might see in everyday
life. Write VW on the board. Ask How do you say it?
/vi: 'dvblju:/ and What is it? (a Volkswagen car).
Students work in pairs or small groups to continue
the activity.
[CD 1: Track 56] Play the recording to let
students check their answers. Drill the pronunciation
of the letters again if students have problems.
Answers and tapescript
VW /vi: 'dvblju:/ a Volkswagen car
BBC /bi: bi: 'si:/ British Broadcasting
Corporation
WWW /dAblju: dvblju: ‘dvblju:/ the world wide web
UK /ju: 'kei/ United Kingdom
US /ju: 'es/ United States
UAE /ju: ei 'i: / United Arab Emirates
NYPD /en wai pi: 'di:/ New York Police
Department
PC /pi: 'si:/ personal computer
TV /ti: ’vi:/ television
As an extension, get students to brainstorm other
common abbreviations in small groups and then to
exchange with other groups and test each other.
Other possible examples include: BP (British
Petroleum), EU (European Union), UN (United
Nations), NASA (National Aeronautics and Space
Administration), FA (Football Association),
CD (compact disc), DVD (digital video disc),
CNN (Cable News Network), IT (information
technology), etc.
T 4.14
T 4.15
Unit 4 • Family and friends 39](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-38-2048.jpg)
![tfie phone
section revises the alphabet and introduces basic
language and how to say email addresses.
Focus attention on the first business card and ask
'■'■'hat’s his name? (Jose Gonzalez), Where’s his company?
IBarcelona), What’s his job? (Export Manager), and
■'.'hat’s his phone number? (93-306 785 04).
> f» r.l [CD 1: Track 57] Check students understand
Aey are going to hear two conversations over the phone.
Play the recording through once and get students to
iollow in their books. Make sure students understand
that And your name is? is a polite way of asking What’s
four name? over the phone. If necessary, explain I’m
connectingyou with a simple board drawing or mime.
I tnf.fr [CD 1: Track 57] Play the first line of
conversation 1 and elicit the answer to question 1
iaxcon International). Then play the rest of the
recording and let students continue answering the
с aestions about both conversations in pairs. If students
1
c aery the meaning of want in question 2, write a series
I at options on the board for conversation 1 and get
students to choose the correct one:
ask for information
sr'eak to the manager /
ask a question
ftvak to a friend
Check the answers with the class. Refer students to
exercise 3 if necessary when checking question 4.
Check they understand the country codes at the end
a t each address: es = Spain, jp = Japan.
tswers
xiversation 1
.axcon International
•э speak to the manager
G - O - N - Z - A - L - E - Z
I сnzalez.jose@soac.co.es
Conversation 2
1 The King School of English
2 some information about the school
3 M - O - R - l - O - K - A
4 morioka@mmdesign.co.jp
Play the recording again line by line, getting students
to repeat chorally and individually. If possible, get
students to sit back to back to practise the conversation
in closed pairs. Not looking at each other makes the
situation more like a real phone conversation. Monitor
and check for accurate pronunciation. Drill difficult
lines again with the whole class if necessary.
Email addresses
3 Read the notes with the class, eliciting the correct
pronunciation for each part of the address. Elicit the
code for students’ own countries or countries they have
emailed, e.g ar = Argentina, pi = Poland, hu = Hungary.
Write a few fictitious email addresses on the board and
get students to read them aloud.
4 Focus attention on the names of service providers and
country codes in the Student’s Book. Ask students to
say them aloud, check the pronunciation, and elicit
which countries the codes refer to: es = Spain,
fr = France, cz = Czech Republic, it = Italy,
au = Australia. Point out to students that some of
these items will be in the email addresses they hear.
■ДИГД [CD 1: Track 58] Play the recording through
once and get students to complete as much of the task
as they can. Play the recording again if necessary. Get
students to write the missing information on the board
to check the answers. Give students the opportunity to
correct each other if they make a mistake in reading
the information.
Answers and tapescript
1 A Your email address is?
P pambowler@btinternet.com
A B-A...
P No, Pam. P-A-M.
A Ah, OK. Pam.
P Bowler. B-O-W-L-E-R.
A Pam... Bowler... @
P @btinternet.com
A @btinternet.com
P That’s it.
2 В Can you tell me your email address?
H Yes. harrylime@hotmail.co.uk
В harrylime... all one word ...
H @hotmail...
>ЮТЕ
Гг.е phone conversations include examples of
f_nctional language like (Sam Benting) speaking,
Can you give me ...?, I ’l l ... (email you some
mformation). Students should be able to use the
:■■erall context to understand these phrases, so you
;an deal with them as lexical items. It’s better not
ld go into a detailed explanation of the grammar
behind them at this stage. Exercise 1 introduces
What does he/she want? but, again, just deal with
this for recognition.
Unit 4 • Family and friends 41](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-40-2048.jpg)
![Notes on the unit
STARTER (SB p32)
1 Focus attention on the pictures and the headings
Sports, Food, and Drinks. Focus attention on the
example tennis and then elicit the correct word for
numbers 2 and 3. Students match as many words as
possible, working individually or in pairs. Encourage
them to guess if they are not sure.
Ask them to compare their answers before checking
answers with the whole class.
[CD 1: Track 59] Play the recording and get
students to repeat chorally and individually. Make sure
they can reproduce the correct word stress on each
item. Consolidate the vocabulary by holding up the
book and pointing to the pictures. Ask What’s this?/
What are these? and elicit replies about three or four
items. Get students to continue asking and answering
in pairs.
2 Write on the board three or four things that you
like from exercise 1. Tick them and show by your
expression that you like them. Get students to tick the
things they like in exercise 1.
Repeat the above procedure for the negative, crossing
the things you don’t like and giving a clear expression
and gesture of dislike. Then get students to cross the
things they don’t like in exercise 1.
THINGS I LIKE (SBP32)
Present Simple
1 1 И 1 [CD 1: Track 60] Focus attention on the photos,
the smiley face icons, and the sentences with I like.
Play the recording once or twice before you ask
students to repeat. Play the recording again and get
students to repeat chorally and individually.
2 Give an example of three things you like from Starter
exercise 1. Get students to point to the correct picture
as you say I like ... each time. Elicit more examples from
one or two students in the class. Then, in pairs, students
take it in turns to talk to each other about what they like.
Negatives
3 Students have met don’t as part of the phrases I don’t
know and I don’t understand. These were introduced
Unit 3 as part of the social expressions syllabus, but 1
is the first time students meet don’t as the grammatic
marker of the negative.
i i i l [CD 1: Track 61] Focus attention on the
photos, the negative face icons, and the sentences
with I don’t like. Say the sentences yourself, using
mime, gestures, and facial expressions to reinforce tl
meaning. Play the recording once or twice before yoi
ask students to repeat. Play the recording again and
students to repeat chorally and individually. Make sc
students get the correct sentence stress:
I don’t like tennis.
4 Refer students back to p32. Give three examples of
things you don’t like and get students to point to the
correct item as you say each sentence. Focus attentio
on the speech bubble and drill the example with or.
Make sure students can reproduce the sentence stres
accurately:
I don’t like oranges, coffee, or tea.
Elicit more examples from one or two students in thi
class. Then, in pairs, students take it in turns to talk
to each other about what they don’t like. Ask a few
students to give their examples to the class using I ...
Avoid transferring to he/she until Unit 6.
GRAMMAR SPOT
5 Т 1 У 1 [CD 1: Track 62] Focus attention on the phc
of Harvey. Ask Where’s he from? and elicit the United
States. Give students time to read the gapped sentem
Ask them to guess what Harvey likes from the lists
in Starter exercise 1. Play the recording once and
get students to check their predictions. Focus on the
example and play the first line of the recording again
Play the rest of the recording and get students to wri
their answers. Students check in pairs. Then check tl
answers with the whole class.
Answers and tapescript
Sports Food Drinks
1 tennis 5 Italian food П tea
2 football 6 Chinese food 12 coffee
3 swimming 7 pizza 13 Coke
4 skiing 8 hamburger 14 beer
9 oranges
10 ice-cream
15 wine
T 5.1
Focus attention on the examples. Make sure student:
understand that don’t is the contraction of do not.
If students ask what do means, you can explain simp
(in the students’ own language if possible) that it hel
to make negatives and questions. However, don’t giv
a detailed grammatical explanation at this stage.](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-43-2048.jpg)
![and tapescript
*e? Well, I like sports a lot, but not all sports. I like
- American football, of course - and I like skiing! But I
tennis and ...erm, I don’t like swimming very much. And
nnk? What do I like? Well, I like hamburgers, and pizza.
" food a lot. But not Chinese food, I don’t like Chinese
don't like tea. Tea is for the English. I'mAmerican so I like
rmetimes, and Coke, of course. I love Coke.
AL MATERIAL
Unit 5
1 Sports, food, drink
2 Things I like - I like coffee
I,you, we, they
[CD 1: Track 63] The question form Do you
?is introduced here. Focus attention on the
les. Play the recording a couple of times and let
ts listen before you ask them to repeat line by
chorally, and individually. Make sure students can
iuce the pronunciation of do you /dju:/ and the
mtonation on the Yes/No questions.
students to ask you the questions and give true
. Drill the pronunciation and intonation if
attention on the examples in the speech bubbles,
ts practise asking and answering in open pairs,
them to work with a new partner and continue
about the other things in Starter exercise 1.
or and check for accurate formation of the
^ns and short answers, and for pronunciation.
listening task introduces the we and they forms in
context of an interview with Harvey and his sister.
■review the adjectives in the box by saying a
of food, places, singers, actors, etc. and getting
ents to respond with an adjective, e.g. New York -
exciting.
s attention on the photos. Ask Who’s Eva?and
t She’s Harvey’s sister. Point to the photos and say
ey is 12 and Eva is 12, too to explain twins. Explain
students are going to hear an interview with the
s about what they like and don’t like. Briefly review
use of ticks and crosses to indicate like (/ ) and
’t like (X).
[CD 1: Track 64] Focus attention on line 1 in
- task. Play the recording as far as the end of Eva’s
speech and get students to look at the examples.
:t that Eva likes pizza, too. Point out that in
her 5 Harvey and Eva disagree about football
so students need to write two adjectives. Remind
them that they don’t need to understand every word
to be able to do the task. Play the rest of the recording
without stopping and get students to write their
answers. If necessary, play the recording again and
get students to check/complete their answers before
checking with the class.
Answers
HARVEY EVA
pizza / / delicious
ice-cream / / fantastic
tea У X awful
skiing / / exciting
football / X great, awful
T 5.6
I Harvey and Eva. You’re twins. Do you like the same things?
H Well, we really, really like pizza!
E Oh, yes! It’sdelicious! We have pizza a lot at home and in
restaurants.
I So, do you like the same food?
E Well, we both like ice-cream.
H Mmm, it’s fantastic!
E But we really don’t like tea! Do we, Harvey?
H No, we don’t. Ugh! It's awful!
I And do you both like sports?
H Yes, we do. We like skiing.
E Yeah! We like skiing a lot. It’s really exciting!
H And I love football! It’s great.
E No, it isn’t. It’s awful!
9 This exercise practises the they form, talking about
Harvey and Eva. Focus attention on the example and
elicit a full sentence They like pizza and ice-cream.
Students continue talking about Harvey and Eva, and
their likes and dislikes. Monitor and check for accurate
formation of the verb forms, and for pronunciation. If
students have problems, go through the Grammar Spot
with them and then get them to repeat exercise 9.
GRAMMAR SPOT
Focus attention on the positive examples. Elicit more
true examples from the class.
Focus attention on the question forms. Check
students know that the question starting with What
requires an information answer, e.g. Football, Italian
food, and that the question starting with Do is
answered Yes, I do. /No, I don’t. Also point out that
we do not use like in short answers, i.e. you cannot
say *Yes, I like or *No, I don’t like.
Again, it is probably best not to explain the function
of do at this stage.
Refer students to Grammar Reference 5.1 on p!25.
Unit 5 • The way I live 45](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-44-2048.jpg)
![As an extension, get students to practise the we and
they forms by talking about themselves and another
student, or people in their family, e.g. Jan and I like
swimming. My children don’t like coffee.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 5
Exercise 3 Things I like - Questions and answers
PRACTICE (SB p34)
Reading and speaking
1 In this skills section, students are introduced to more
Present Simple verbs in context: comefrom, live, work,
eat, drink, speak, play, and want. Have is also recycled
from Unit 4. Other new words are waiter, drama,
part-time, restaurant, language, and actor. The
languages/nationalities Italian, Spanish, and French are
also introduced. Students should be able to work out
the most of the vocabulary from context, but use the
photos in the Student’s Book to pre-teach/check the
meaning if students have any problems.
Point to the photos and say This is Colin Brodie.
Ask What’s his job? Give students time to scan the text
to find the answer He’s a waiter and he’s also a drama
student. Check comprehension by asking students
to point to the relevant picture for waiter and drama
student.
[CD 1: Track 65] Students read the text
and listen to the recording once or twice. Try to get
students to understand the new vocabulary in context
and get them to refer to the information in the photos
for help. Check comprehension of live and work by
making sentences about yourself, e.g. I live in (town,
country), I work in (this school), etc. Eat, drink, play,
and speak should be understandable from the context,
but if students need further help, mime the actions.
(There’s no need to point out that drink is a verb here
but a noun on p32.) If students query language and
Italian, English, and French, write the corresponding
countries on the board and link them to the languages.
You may need to translate want to if students query
this. If students query the pronoun it in I don’t like
it, check they understand what noun it refers back to
(beer). (Object pronouns it and them are presented in
full in Unit 7.)
2 [CD I: Track 66] This interview with Colin
presents Wh- and Yes/No questions with a range of
verbs. Give students time to read through the question:
and gapped answers. Play the recording for questions
1 and 2 and elicit the missing answers in number 2.
Play the rest of the recording without stopping and
get students to complete Colin’s answers. Play the
recording again to let students complete/check their
answers. Check the answers with the whole class.
Answers and tapescript
1 I Hello, Colin, nice to meet you. Where do you come from?
С I come from Scotland, from Dundee.
2 I Do you live in Dundee?
С No, I don’t. I live and work in London.
3 I Do you live with friends?
С Yes, I do. I live with two friends.
4 I Where do you work?
С I work in an Italian restaurant.
5 I Do you like Italian food?
С Yes, I do. I tike it a lot.
6 I Do you drink Italian wine?
С Yes, I do. I drink wine, but I don’t drink beer. I don’t like it.
7 I Do you like your job?
С No, I don’t. I want to be an actor.
8 I Do you speak Italian?
С No, I don’t. I speak Spanish and French, but I don’t speak
Italian.
Ask students to read out the questions. Make sure
students can reproduce the falling intonation
on the Wh- questions. Be prepared to model the
pronunciation and intonation, and drill the questions
chorally and individually.
3 Before putting students into pairs, demonstrate
by asking individual students the questions from
exercise 2. Make sure they answer with information
about themselves. Get individual students to ask you
the questions and answer with true information.
Students continue asking and answering in open pairs
If necessary, drill the pronunciation and intonation of
the questions again before getting students to continui
in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of
the Present Simple.
As an extension, you could get students to think abou
someone they know or imagine a different character,
and repeat the question and answer exchanges using
different information.
46 Unit 5 • The way I live](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-45-2048.jpg)
![AMMAR SPOT
attention on the examples. Make sure students
erstand that we use an before a vowel - я, e, i, o,
u. Point out that this can be a noun, e.g. an actor,
an adjective, an Italian restaurant.
Irfve students time to write a or an. Check the answers,
g sure students make the pronunciation link
een an + vowel:
an actor an Italian restaurant
Answers
an ice-cream
an orange
a student
an American car
a computer
Lerer students to Grammar Reference 5.2 on p!25.
jlary
; exercise highlights common collocations for
ryday actions. Pre-teach/Check millionaire if you
к students wont recognize it. Focus attention
ithe example and then get students to continue
tching, working individually. Give students time to
ck in pairs before checking with the whole class.
ers
: two brothers
•in a flat
: in a bank
?fromJapan
: Italian food
nk beer
rsports
eak Spanish
nt to be a millionaire
rening and speaking
This task helps students get used to using the context
lo help them work out what is happening and who
is talking in a range of situations. Explain that there
ire four conversations all involving Colin. These are
slightly longer than in earlier listening tasks of this
rvpe, but reassure students that they don’t need to
understand every word to do the task.
Briefly review what students know about Colin by
diciting a range of statements. Write cues on the board
•o help with this if necessary, e.g. Job? Colin works in a
restaurant. Flat? He lives with twofriends, etc.
Г Г Е 1 [CD 1: Track 67] Focus attention on numbers
I and 2 as examples and play conversation 1. Elicit the
answers (see below). Play the rest of the recording,
pausing at the end of each conversation to give students
time to discuss their answers in pairs. Play the recording
again if necessary to allow students to check/complete
their answers. Check the answers with the class.
Refer students to Ч-И'Д on SB pi 14. Divide students
into groups of three. Ask a confident group to read out
conversation 1. Remind students that conversation 4
is over the phone and so the student who plays Colin
needs to sit away from the other two. If possible,
arrange the furniture in the room to allow students
to roleplay the different situations, especially waiting
on the tables in conversation 2. If students have fixed
desks, encourage them to stand up to do the roleplay as
this often helps them interact with each other better.
Students practise the conversations in their groups.
If students have problems with pronunciation, be
prepared to drill selected lines from the recording, or
model the lines yourself.
Answers
1 at home; Colin’s friends/flatmates
2 at home; Colin
3 in the restaurant; Colin
4 in the restaurant; customers
5 at drama school; Colin’steacher
6 at drama school; Colin’steacher
7 on the phone; Colin
8 on the phone; Colin’s mum
T 5.9
1 Colin Goodbye, guys. Time for work.
A Bye, Colin. See you later.
Colin Yeah. Very late tonight.
A Oh yes. It’s Friday.
Colin Yes, I work late on Fridays. Bye.
2 Colin Good evening. Do you want to order?
В Ah yes. We both want pizzas.
С Yes, two Pizza Margheritas, please.
Colin Fine. And do you want wine?
В Oh yes, we do. Do you have a wine list?
Colin Yes, of course. Here it is.
3 D OK, Colin and Anna come here!
Colin What do you want?
D I want you to read it again with Anna. OK? You are Romeo,
Anna isJuliet, of course.
Anna Fine. ‘Oh Romeo, Romeo, where...’
D No, no! Terrible. You love Romeo, really love him. Again.
Anna ‘Romeo, Romeo, wherefore art thou Romeo...’
4 Mum Hello?
Colin Hi, Mum!
Mum Oh, hello, Colin. Donald, It’s your big brother!... Colin,
how are you?
Colin I’mfine Mum, really fine.
Unit 5 • The way I live 47](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-46-2048.jpg)
![Mum Do you like your flat?
Colin Yes, 1do but it’s a bit small for three people.
Mum Ah, yes. It is small. But do you like your work?
Colin No, 1don’t. Not really. But 1like the food.
Mum Oh, yes. Italian food is good.
Colin Yeah, but 1like your food the best, Mum! It’s delicious!
Mum Ooh, thank you, Colin. Now, do you want to speak to your
brother?
Colin Yes, of course. Hi, Donald. It’s your brother...
SUGGESTION
You can make use of the tapescripts in a variety
of ways:
• as a simple review by getting students to go back
to earlier units and practise the conversations.
• for intensive pronunciation practice.
• as a model for students writing their own
conversations/sketches. Students can replace key
words to personalize the content or write new
conversations based on people they know or new
roles they have imagined.
• as gapped exercises/information gaps for reviewing
key language. You can adapt the Word version of
the tapescripts on the Teachers Resource Disc by
gapping target words, then print out copies for
students to work on.
Talking about you
6 This exercise consolidates Wh- and YesINo questions in
the Present Simple. Briefly review/check the question
words where, what, and how many by giving short
answers and eliciting the appropriate question word, e.g.
a dictionary /an actor - What?
Australia /in a hospital - Where?
three sisters /ten books - How many?
Elicit the missing word in number 1. Put students in pairs
to complete the rest of the questions. Check the answers.
If students need more practice or if they finish quickly
get them to work with a new partner and repeat the
questions and answers.
Check it
7 Focus attention on the first pair of sentences as
an example. Remind students that the convention
of ticking (/ ) indicates that something is correct.
Students continue working individually to choose the
correct sentence.
Get students to check their answers in pairs before
checking with the whole class.
Answers
1 Do you live in Berlin?
2 Where do you come from?
3 Do you speak Portuguese?
4 I don’t speak Chinese.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Teacher’s Resource Disc
Communicative activity Unit 5 Is this true?
Workbook Unit 5
Exercise 4 Present Simple - The swimmer Michael Phel]
Exercises 5 and 6 Present Simple - Questions
Exercise 7 Present Simple - Negatives
Exercises 8-10 Listening - Gracie and her parents
VOCABULARY AND PRONUNCIATION (SBP36)
Languages and nationalities
1 Check comprehension of Germany and Portugal by
referring students back to the map on pl3. Focus
attention on the example. Students continue the
matching activity, working individually.
[CD 1: Track 68] Play the recording through
once and let students check their answers.
5 ‘Do you like football?’
‘Yes, I do.’
6 He’s an actor.
T 5.10
Answers
1 do 4 Do 7 sports
2 live 5 do... speak 8 Do... want
3 do 6 like
Give students a short time to think about their own
answers. If students need extra vocabulary, e.g.
languages, be prepared to feed these in. Demonstrate
by asking and answering the first two questions with a
confident student. Students continue in open and then
in closed pairs. Monitor and check for accurate use of
the Present Simple, and correct intonation.
Answers and tapescript
England English
Germany German
Italy Italian
Mexico Mexican
Brazil Brazilian
japan Japanese
Portugal Portuguese
China Chinese
France French
the United States American
Spain Spanish](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-47-2048.jpg)
![Remind students of the system used in New Headway
3egitiner, Fourth edition to highlight word stress. Play
the recording again and get students to repeat the pairs
of words as a class. Make sure they can reproduce the
change of stress from the country to the nationality/
language:
Italy Italian
Japan Japanese
Portugal Portuguese
China Chinese
Play the recording through again and get students to
repeat individually.
2 Focus attention on the photos and on the examples in
the speech bubbles. Point to the photo of the people
sitting in the town square and drill the examples
chorally and individually. Elicit another pair of
examples about different people in the photos. Students
continue talking about the people in pairs.
3 This exercise reviews the they form of the Present
Simple with the verb speak. Students shouldn’t have any
difficulty with this form, as it’s the same as the I form
they have already practised.
Check comprehension of Switzerland. Focus attention
on the example. Students continue making sentences
working individually.
[CD 1: Track 69] Play the recording and get
students to check their answers.
Answers and tapescript
In Brazil they speak Portuguese.
2 In Canada they speak English and French.
3 In France they speak French.
4 In Germany they speak German.
5 In Italy they speak Italian.
6 InJapan they speakJapanese.
7 In Mexico they speak Spanish,
i In Egypt they speak Arabic.
9 In Spain they speak Spanish.
'3 In Switzerland they speak German, French, and Italian.
4 Drill the question form in the speech bubbles. Then
get students to practise a few examples in open pairs.
Students continue in closed pairs, taking it in turns
to ask each other about the countries in exercise 3.
Monitor and check for correct use of the question form
and for pronunciation of the countries and languages.
Adjective +noun
5 This exercise consolidates the nationalities and also
highlights adjective + noun word order. Students of
different nationalities often have problems with this, as
in their own language the order is noun + adjective. Be
prepared to review the correct order, using examples on
the board, and gesturing to indicate a switch of word
order if students get the order wrong.
Focus attention on the photos and the example.
Students complete the exercise by writing the correct
nationalities.
[CD 1: Track 70] Play the recording and get
students to check their answers.
Answers and tapescript
1 It’s an American car.
2 It’s German beer.
3 They’re Spanish oranges.
4 It’s aJapanese camera.
5 It’s Mexican food.
6 It’s an English dictionary.
7 It’s an Italian bag.
8 It’s Brazilian coffee.
9 It's French wine.
Students work in pairs and take it in turns to point to
the photos and practise the sentences. Monitor and
check for correct pronunciation of Its a/an ... and drill
the sentences if students produce *Is a/an .... Remind
students of the plural form by contrasting Its an
American car and They’re Spanish oranges on the board.
Ask How many? to establish It’s a/an for singular and
They’re for plural. Don’t go into the use of zero article
(no article) with the plural sentence at this stage.
6 This exercise gives students the opportunity to practise
the Present Simple, nationalities, and noun + adjective
word order in a personalized way.
Write the verbs have, eat, and drink on the board and
elicit adjectives and nouns that can go with each verb.
Possible combinations:
have a/an Japanese/American/German/French/
Spanish car
an Italian/American bag
a Japanese camera
an English dictionary
eat Chinese/Italian/Japanese/French/Mexican
food
Spanish oranges
American/Italian ice-cream
TS.11
T 5.12
Unit 5 • The way I live 49](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-48-2048.jpg)
![drink French/Italian/German/Portuguese/Spanish
wine
French/German/English/American beer
Brazilian coffee
Chinese tea
Give examples of your own with have, eat, and drink.
Try to highlight the use of a/an, e.g. I have a Japanese
camera. I don’t have an Italian car. Then get students to
write their own examples. Monitor and help. Check for
accurate use of a/an and correct adjective + noun word
order.
7 Focus attention on the example questions in the speech
bubbles. Remind students of the use of it in I don’t like
it. if necessary. Give students time to write at least four
questions of their own using have, eat, and drink. Remind
them of the possible adjective + noun combinations listed
in the notes for exercise 6. Monitor and help.
Drill the questions and answers in the speech bubbles.
Get students to practise in open pairs across the class
and then in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct
use of the Present Simple, a/an and adjective + noun
word order.
GRAMMAR SPOT
1 Read the notes as a class. Elicit further examples
of adjective + noun from the class. Ask students
if the word order is the same in their language.
2 Read the notes as a class. Elicit further plural
examples from the class. Ask students how they
make adjectives plural in their language.
Refer students to Grammar Reference 5.3 on p!25.
SUGGESTION
You can bring in adverts from magazines to give
students further practice with nationality adjectives
and nouns. Select pictures of cars, cameras,
computers, TVs, food, and drinks. Elicit simple
adjective + noun phrases, e.g. an American computer,
Spanish wine, etc. and then get students to use the
pictures to practise Do you have/eat/drink/like ... ?
and short answers Yes, I do./No, I don’t. If pairs of
students interview other pairs, you can also practise
the they form. (If students try to generate he/she
forms, tell them these are different and that they
will practise them in Unit 6.)
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 5
Exercises 11 and 12 Languages and nationalities
LISTENING AND SPEAKING (SBP38)
At a party
1 This is a fairly long, though fairly simple, unseen
listening. Set the scene by pointing to Flavia and Terry
in the illustration and introducing the word party.
Get students to say what nationality they think they
are (I think he’s/she’s ...).
[CD 1: Track 71] Play the recording through
once and let students check their predictions (Flavia is
Italian and Terry is English).
Give students time to read the pairs of sentences 1-8.
Check comprehension of love in number 5 and very
much in number 7. Play the first part of the recording
again, and focus on number 1 as an example. Make
sure students understand they have to focus on what
Terry says. Elicit the answer to number 1.
Play the rest of the recording and get students to select
the correct sentence from each pair.
Get students to check their answers in pairs before
checking with the whole class. Go over the answers
by playing the conversation again and pausing the
recording after each correct answer.
Answers
1 Iwork in London.
2 Idon’t live in London.
3 I’man actor.
4 You speak English very well.
5 I love Italy.
6 I don’t know Naples.
7 I like Rome very much.
8 I don’t speak Italian.
ТБ.10
F Hello. I’m Flavia. Flavia Rossi. What’s your name?
T Hi, Flavia. I’mTerry. Terry Adams.
F Do you work here in London, Terry?
T Well, I work in London, but I don’t live in London. I live in
Brighton.
F And what’s your job?
T I’m an actor. What’s your job, Flavia? Do you work in London?
F Yes, I do. I work in a hotel. A big hotel near here.
T Flavia, you aren’t English, but you speak English very well. Where
do you come from?
F I come from Italy, from Napoli. Or Naples I think you say.
T Ah, Italy. I love Italy.
F Do you know Naples?
T No, I don’t. I don’t know Naples, but I know Rome. I like Rome
very much. It’s very beautiful.
F Naples is beautiful, too. Do you speak Italian, Terry?
T No, I don’t. I speak French, but I don’t speak Italian.
F It’s nice to meet you, Terry.
T You too.
T 5.13](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-49-2048.jpg)
![2 Check pronunciation of Brighton, Naples, and Rome
! from the recording. Turn to the tapescript on pi 15 and
get students to practise the conversation in pairs. If
students have problems with the pronunciation, drill
difficult lines as a class.
Replay
possible, rearrange the furniture, play some mood
sic, and bring in simple props like glasses of water to
'p add authenticity to the roleplay.
Tell students they are going to roleplay being at a party
and meeting new people. This stage prepares students
for the type of questions they can ask. Elicit the first
question as an example. Put students in pairs to
complete the rest of the questions. Check the answers.
Answers
What’syour name?
Where do you live?
Do you have a house or aflat?
What’s your job?
Where do you work?
How many languages do you speak?
What sports do you like?
Explain that students have to invent a new identity.
Focus on the cartoon of James Bond and point out that
his notes are answers to the questions in exercise 3. Ask
students to make notes with their new details. Monitor
and help with ideas and vocabulary.
Tell students to imagine they are at a party with people
of different nationalities who all speak some English.
Remind students of the expressions they can use
when meeting someone for the first time: (It’s) nice to
meet you. You too./And you. Demonstrate starting the
roleplay with two confident students. Get the class to
stand up to do the roleplay. Monitor, but do not expect
perfect accuracy or pronunciation. Make notes of major
errors to feed back on later, but try not to spoil students’
enjoyment of the roleplay. If some pairs do well, you
could ask them to act it out in front of the class.
EVERYDAY ENGLISH (SB P39)
How much is it?
The functional syllabus continues with a focus on
numbers 31-100 and asking about prices.
1 Review numbers 1-30 by getting students to count
round the class. Repeat until they can say the numbers
accurately without hesitation.
I M f [CD 1: Track 72] Focus attention on numbers
10-100. Play the recording and get students to repeat
chorally and individually. Get students to count to one
hundred in tens round the class. Check for accurate
word stress.
This is a pairs number dictation. See Unit 1 Suggestion
on ТВ pl3 for instructions for this task.
id -kH [CD 1: Track 73] This exercise presents
prices under and over one pound in English. Play
the recording and let students read and listen. Focus
attention on the use ofp /pi:/ for prices under a pound.
Also point out the plural pounds, and that we do not
say pounds and p in the same price, i.e. we do not say
*one pound sixty p but one pound sixty.
Play the recording again and gets students to repeat
chorally and individually.
Demonstrate the activity by getting students to say the
first two prices aloud. Students then continue saying
the prices in closed pairs. Monitor and check students
can distinguish the stress on:
seventeen pounds and seventy pounds
» i-Hr.^ [CD 1: Track 74] Play the recording and
get students to check their answers. If students had
problems with pronunciation, play the recording
again and get them to repeat. (With a weaker group,
you could say the prices as a class activity, drilling
the pronunciation as you go along, and then play the
recording for reinforcement.)
This is a discrimination exercise, which gets students
to distinguish between prices that sound similar. Focus
attention on the photos and check/elicit the name of
each object. (With a weaker group, you could elicit the
prices for each object orally first and then get students
to listen and tick.)
■■■UkA [CD 1: Track 75] Play the recording through
once and get students to tick the prices they hear.
Play it through a second time so that students can
check their answers. Get them to check in pairs before
checking with the whole class.
Answers and tapescript
1 The cheese sandwich is £2.90.
2 The football is £14.
3 The iPhone is £90.95.
4 The beer is £3.50.
5 The dictionary is £7.50.
6 The pair of jeans is £50.
7 The chocolate is 60p.
8 The bag is £44.99.
Unit 5 • The way I live 5](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-50-2048.jpg)
![7 Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Drill the
question and answer chorally and individually. (If
students query the use of How much ... ?, explain that
this is the question we use to ask about prices. Don’t
go into an explanation of the difference between How
much/How many at this stage.)
Practise two or three exchanges in open pairs. Then get
the students to continue in closed pairs. Monitor and
check for correct numbers and prices.
chocolate - 38p
camera - £125
television - £500
CD-£12.99
computer-£800
pizza - £8.99
SUGGESTION
You can give students extra practice with numbers
and prices by bringing in adverts, leaflets, and menus
that show prices and getting students to practise How
much is ... ?Make sure you select the items carefully
so that they show objects students know (or ones that
you can teach that are in the post-beginner range). If
you choose images that show plural objects, you will
need to pre-teach/check: How much are ...?
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 5
Exercises 13-16 How much is it?
Don’t forget]
Workbook Unit 5
Exercises 17-22 Revision
Word list
Ask the students to turn to p i32 and go through the word;
with them. Ask them to learn the words for homework,
and test them on a few in the following lesson.
Teacher’s Resource Disc
Unit 5 Test
Unit 5 Skills test
Progress test 1 (Units 1-5)
PHOTOCOPIABLE ACTIVITY
UNIT 5 How much is it? ТВ pl42
Materials: one copy of the worksheet per pair of
students. Before the lesson, ask students to check
the exchange rate for pounds sterling against their
own currency.
Procedure: Hold up your watch or similar everyday
object and ask How much is this (watch) in Great
Britain? Elicit a range of prices, making sure that
students include pounds and pence, e.g. £59.99.
Write the prices on the board and then tell the
students what the object would actually cost. If
appropriate, you could elicit the likely cost of the
object in the students’ own currency.
• Elicit the plural form How much are ...? Drill the
question with a range of plural items, e.g. How
much are these sunglasses/trainers? etc. and get
students to guess the price.
• Divide students into pairs and hand out a copy of
the worksheet. Ask students to match the words in
the box to the pictures. Check the answers, drilling
the pronunciation as necessary.
• Ask How much is the bag? Tell students to choose
the price they think fits the bag. Elicit a range of
answers, encouraging students to say I think it’s
(£29.99).
• Put the pairs of students into groups of four. Point
out that there are more prices on the worksheet
than objects. Remind students to use How much
are ...? and I think they’re ... about the trainers.
Students continue discussing the prices and
matching them to the objects.
• Check the answers with the class. The group who
matched the most prices correctly is the winner.
Answers
bag-£29.99
watch - £45.99
trainers - £80
mobile phone-£65
water - 99p
magazine - £2.75
Video/DVD
Unit 5 Internationalfood on iTools and iTutor](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-51-2048.jpg)
![Notes on the unit
STARTER (SB p40)
NOTE
It is useful to have a cardboard clock with movable
hands for this lesson and for subsequent revision of
telling the time. If you don’t already have one in your
school, then it is quite easy to make one.
The Student’s Book presents times with the numbers
students already know, without having to deal with quarter
past/to and halfpast. Exercise 1 in the section includes
times on the hour, half hour, and quarter hour. Other
times, e.g. 8.40 and 11.10 provide a manageable extension
for students in exercise 2. These are practised further in
a photocopiable task on ТВ pl43. See the Photocopiable
activity notes opposite.
1 H H H [CD 1: Track 76] Focus attention on the
clocks. Play the recording of the first five times,
pausing after each one and getting students to repeat
chorally and individually. Highlight the use of o’clock
for times on the hour and make sure students can
pronounce it accurately.
Get students to complete the remaining five times,
following the examples given in 1-5. Play the recording
of numbers 6-10 and get students to check their
answers. Play the recording again, getting students to
repeat chorally and individually.
2 H » 1 [CD 1: Track 77] Focus attention on the
conversation. Play the recording once and get students
to listen and read. Play the recording again, and get
students to repeat chorally and individually. Point
to one of the clocks/watches and demonstrate the
pairwork with one student. Ask students to give two or
three more examples in open pairs before continuing in
closed pairs.
PHOTOCOPIABLE ACTIVITY
UNIT 6 What time is it, please? ТВ p!43
Materials: one copy of the worksheet cut up per pair
of students
Procedure: Write the following times on the board:
11.05, 1.10, 7.20, 9.25, 8.40, 6.50, 12.55.
Remind students of the use of oh’ /эо/, which they
met in phone numbers, for 11.05. Get students to
say the times aloud, reading them as digital times,
e.g. one ten.
• Put students in pairs and assign the role of A or В
to each student. Hand out the relevant half of the
worksheet.
• Explain that each student has six times and six
empty clocks and that they have to ask What time
is it, please?and complete the clocks. Demonstrate
the activity with one student before getting the
class to complete the task in pairs. Monitor and
check for the correct use of the times.
• Students check their answers by comparing their
completed worksheets.
WHAT TIME DO YOU GET UP? (SB P4l)
Present Simple - I/you
1 This section presents daily routine verbs in context via
a series of pictures of a girl’s typical schoolday. Focus
attention on the pictures. Elicit some basic information
about the character: What’s her name? (Kim). How old
is she, do you think? (She’s about 18.)
Explain that students are going to hear Kim talking
about her schoolday. Review telling the time by getting
students to read the pairs of times aloud.
[CD 1: Track 78] Focus on the example and
play the first line of the recording. Play the recording
to the end and get students to continue circling the
correct times. Get students to check their answers in
pairs. Play the recording again before checking the
answers with the whole class.
Answers
1 7.45 3 8.30 53.30 711.00
2 8.00 4 12.15 64.30
T6.3
Well, on schooldays I get upat seven forty-five. I have breakfast at
eight and I goto school at eight thirty. I have lunch inschool with my
friends, that’s at twelve fifteen - it’searly inour school. I leave school
at three thirty inthe afternoon and I walk home with my friends.
I get home at four thirty, have tea, and watch television. I goto bed
at eleven o’clock on schooldays, but later at the weekend, of course!
Answers
1 nine o’clock
2 seven fifteen
3 one forty-five
4 eight forty
5 eleven ten
Answers and tapescript
1 It’s nine o’clock.
2 It’s nine thirty.
3 It’s nine forty-five.
4 It’s ten o’clock.
5 It’s ten fifteen.
6 It’s two o’clock.
7 It’s two thirty.
8 It’s two forty-five.
9 It’sthree o’clock.
10 It’sthree fifteen.
T6.3
54 Unit6 • Everyday](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-53-2048.jpg)
![■ [CD 1: Track 78] Say the sentences aloud or
play the recording again and get students to repeat
chorally and individually. Make sure students aren’t
confused by the spelling of breakfast and pronounce it
correctly /'brekfost/. Students practise the sentences in
closed pairs.
Demonstrate the activity by telling students about your
day, giving the same information as in the pictures.
Do this in a natural way, but don’t add in any new
language. Focus attention on the examples and elicit a
few single sentences from students about their day with
the verbs from exercise 1. Students continue talking
about their day working in pairs. Monitor and check
for correct use of the Present Simple and the times.
I f f [CD 1: Track 79] This exercise practises the
question What time ...? with the Present Simple. Focus
attention on the questions and get students to listen and
repeat chorally and individually. Make sure they can
reproduce the pronunciation of do you and the falling
.ntonation on the Wh- questions. Focus on the words in
гold showing the form of Present Simple questions, and
point out the word order do you get/have.
Drill the question and answer in the speech bubbles
and elicit other questions students can ask. If students
reed help, write the verbs on the board: get up, have
rreakfast, go to school/work, have lunch, leave school/
*vrk, get home, go to bed.
Get students to practise the questions in open pairs.
1 rrudents continue in closed pairs, working with a
different partner from exercise 2. Monitor and check
for correct use of the Present Simple and the times.
ODITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 6
Exercises 1-3 The time
Exercise 4 Present Simple he/she - Cathy and George
ELLIOT’S DAY (SB P42)
^sent Simple - he/she, always/sometimes/never
1 This section presents the he/she positive forms of the
Present Simple, along with frequency adverbs always,
sometimes, and never. Focus attention on the photos of
Elliot. Say This is Elliot. He’s in a magazine. Ask What’s
hisjob?, and elicit He’s a businessman. Get students to
read the description of Elliot. Check comprehension of
director, 24-hour, shopping site, Internet, and typical day.
Ask Are his days busy? and elicit Yes, they are.
Focus attention on the pictures of Elliot’s day and
check comprehension of have a shower, work late, buy,
and go out. Focus attention on the example sentence.
Get students to continue writing the times, working
individually.
Ч 1 И [CD 1: Track 80] Ask students to check their
answers in pairs before playing the recording for a
final check.
Answers
1 six o’clock
2 six forty-five
3 seven fifteen
4 one o’clock
5 eight o’clock
6 nine fifteen
7 eleven thirty
8 eleven forty-five
He gets up at six o’clock and has a shower. He has breakfast at six
forty-five. He leaves home at seven fifteen, and he goes to work by
taxi. He has lunch, a Coca-Cola and a sandwich, in his office at one
o’clock. He always works late. He leaves work at eight o’clock in the
evening. He sometimes buys a pizza and eats it at home. He gets
home at nine fifteen. He never goes out inthe evening. He works
at his computer until eleven thirty. He always goes to bed at eleven
forty-five. He watches television in bed.
GRAMMAR SPOT
1 Focus attention on the examples of third person
singular forms gets up and has. Students underline
the verbs in sentences 2-8. Check the answers
with the class.
Answers
2 has 6 buys, eats, gets
3 leaves, goes 7 goes out, works
4 has 8 goes, watches
5 works, leaves
Elicit the key last letter in each of the verbs (s).
■*.1ТД [CD 1: Track 81] Play the recording and
get students to repeat chorally and individually.
Make sure students can distinguish the /s/endings,
e.g. gets /gets/ from the Izl endings, e.g. has /haez1.
(The recording gives just the verb forms, not the
complete sentences from exercise 2.)
Tapescript
gets up has
buys goes
leaves
watches
works
Unit 6 • Every day 55](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-54-2048.jpg)
![2 Focus attention on the adverbs of frequency and
their meaning. Make sure that students understand
that sometimes is not a fixed reference and the
actual number of times that it refers to can vary.
Ask students to circle the examples of always,
sometimes, and never in the sentences about Elliot.
i f f [CD 1: Track 82] Play the recording and
get students to repeat chorally and individually.
Make sure students reproduce the third person
singular ending and encourage them to reproduce
the linking in the following sentences:
He sometimes buysa pizza.
He never goesoutTn the evening.
He always goes tobedatH1.45.
Ш 1
He always works late.
He sometimes buys a pizza.
He never goes out in the evening.
He always goes to bed at eleven forty-five.
Read Grammar Reference 6.1-6.3 on pl25 together
in class, and/or ask students to read it at home.
Encourage them to ask you questions about it.
Highlight the use of the -es ending, e.g. go - goes. If
appropriate, point out that the frequency adverbs can
be used with to be, but that they usually come after
the verb, e.g. I am never at home in the morning.
Pronunciation
3 Ч.Ц:И [CD 1: Track 83] This section highlights the
three possible ways of pronouncing the third person -s
ending. Focus attention on the chart. Play the recording
through once and get students just to listen. Then play
it again, drilling the verbs chorally and individually.
If students find it hard to hear and so reproduce the
difference between the /s/and /z/endings, don’t insist
on them repeating the sounds several times, as this may
make them self-conscious. Students very often forget to
add the -s ending anyway and so will need reminding
at regular intervals. Take the opportunity to check
students’ pronunciation of the endings and highlight
the features of pronunciation to help students get used
to the different sounds.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 6
Exercises 5 and 6 Present Simple he/she - Cathy and George
Exercise 11 Pronunciation - -s at the end of a word
Questions and negatives
4 This section introduces does/doesn’t in the question
and negative forms. Both Wh- and Yes/No questions ar<
presented at the same time, as students are dealing wit!
the third person singular form only at this stage, and
they have already had a lot of practice of the individual
question types.
Шf . m [CD 1: Track 84] Refer students back to the
pictures of Elliot. Read question 1 aloud and elicit
the answer (gets). Students continue completing the
answers, working individually. Get them to check in
pairs before playing the recording of the questions
and answers. Play the recording through once and let
students check their answers.
Play the recording again, pausing after each question anc
answer exchange, and get the students to repeat chorally
and individually. Make sure they can reproduce the
falling intonation on the Wh- questions and the rising
intonation on the Yes/No questions. Students practise the
questions and answers in open and then in closed pairs.
Answers and tapescript
1 A What time does he get up?
В He gets up at six.
2 A When does he goto bed?
В He goes to bed at eleven forty-five.
3 A Does he goto work by taxi?
В Yes, he does.
4 A Does he have lunch in a restaurant?
В No, he doesn’t.
5 A Does he goout in the evening?
В No, he doesn’t.
GRAMMAR SPOT
Focus attention on the example sentences and
questions. Make sure students understand that the
-s is on the verb in the positive form and on does in
the question and negative. Highlight doesn’t as the
contracted form of does not. Make sure students
understand that we repeat do/does or don’t/doesn’t
in the short answers rather than the main verb,
i.e. we cannot say: Do you have breakfast at 7.30?
Wes, I have breakfast.
Ask students to circle the -s ending and the use of
does/doesn’t in the questions and answers in exercise 1.
Refer students to Grammar Reference 6.4 on p!25.
5 Focus attention on the language in the speech bubbles.
Drill the question and answer about Elliot. Elicit two
or three more examples with students working in open
56 Unit6 • Everyday](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-55-2048.jpg)
![pairs. Students continue asking and answering in closed
pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of third person
-s and of does/doesn’t in the questions and negatives.
if.H M [CD 1: Track 85] Play the recording and
get students to check their answers. If students had
difficulties with questions and answers 1-6, drill the
questions and answers and get students to practise
them again, working with a new partner.
Answers and tapescript
A When does he leave home?
В He leaves home at 7.15.
2 A Does he goto work by bus?
В No, he goes to work by taxi.
3 A Where does he have lunch?
В He has lunch in his office.
- A Does he usually work late?
В Yes, he does, every day.
5 A Does he eat in a restaurant?
В No, he doesn’t. He eats at home.
5 A What does he do in the evening?
В He works. He never goes out.
This exercise gives students the opportunity to generate
negative third-person forms. Focus attention on the
example and ask one student to read it aloud. Students
write sentences 2-5 in the negative. Allow them to
check their answers in pairs before checking with the
class. Ask students to write the answers on the board
to check they are forming the negatives correctly,
including the inclusion of the apostrophe in doesn’t.
Answers
2 He doesn’t drive to work.
3 He doesn’t work in a bank.
4 He doesn’t have a lot of friends.
5 He doesn’t goto bed late.
Focus attention on the chart. Elicit the missing forms
for I and you (see below) and then get students to
complete the rest of the chart. Check the answers with
the whole class. Highlight again that the he/she form is
the only one that is different.
Answers
Positive Negative Question
1 work don’t work Do 1work?
You work don’t work Do you work?
He/She works doesn’t work Does she work?
We work don’t work Do we work?
They work don’t work Do they work?
Teacher’s Resource Disc
Communicative activity Unit 6 A day in the life
Workbook Unit 6
Exercise 7 Present Simple he/she - Questions
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL______________________________________
PRACTICE (SB p44)
Lois’s day
1 Remind students of Elliot from the previous section.
Point to the pictures of Lois and to rubric 1 and ask
Who is she? (She’s Elliot’s sister.) Check pronunciation
of Lois /'tauwis/. Pre-teach/check the following
using the introduction to the text, the pictures in the
Students Book, and simple board drawings: seaside,
artist, fill your day, walk (n), by the sea, eggs, toast, go
to the beach, dog, studio, cook, often, invitefriends, and
play the piano. It’s also useful to have a map to show the
location of Cape Cod, where Lois lives.
Read the first line of the text aloud. Ask How old is
Lois? and What’s her job? (She’s 25. She’s an artist.)
Focus attention on the pictures and ask What does Lois
do? Elicit a range of examples from the class. Students
are likely to make mistakes with the third-person forms
of the Present Simple, so don’t insist on total accuracy
with students’ first attempts. Encourage students
to self-correct by highlighting mistakes rather than
correcting them yourself. Also encourage students to
help and correct each other.
2 Focus attention on the verbs in the box. They are
already in the third-person form and so students just
need to use the context to help them choose the correct
verb. Get students to read the second sentence in the
text and focus attention on the example. Then get
students to complete the text, working individually.
Remind them to read the whole sentence around the
gap each time so that they get the complete context and
to cross out the verbs they have used as they go along.
j [CD 1: Track 86] Get students to check their
answers in pairs before playing the recording for a
final check.
Focus on the adverb usually in the text. Teach the
meaning by writing always sometimes never on the
board and eliciting that usually goes between sometimes
and always.
Answers
2 gets up 6 works 10 listens to
3 has 7 eats 11 plays
4 goes 8 cooks 12 phones
5 gets 9 invites 13 goes
T6.11
Unit6 • Everyday 57](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-56-2048.jpg)
![Т6.11
Lois Maddox - The seaside artist fills her day with work, walks,
music, and friends.
Lois Maddox is 25 and she’s an artist. She lives in a small house by
the sea in Cape Cod, Massachusetts. She always gets up late, at ten
o’clock inthe morning. She has a big breakfast - coffee, eggs and
toast - and then she goes to the beach with her dog. When she gets
home, she works in her studio until seven o’clock in the evening. She
never eats lunch, but she always cooks a big dinner
and she often invites friends.
After dinner, she usually listens to music or plays the piano.
Sometimes she phones her brother, Elliot, in New York. She goes
to bed very late, at one or two o’clock in the morning.
Answers and tapescript
E Hello.
L Hi, Elliot, how are you?
E I’mfine, thanks. Busy as usual.
L Oh, you’re always busy. You and your computers!
E I know, but I love my work.
L I love my work, too, but I relax sometimes.
E Huh! I don’t know about that. You paint all day!
L Yes, but I stop in the evening. You never stop!
E That’s not true. Hey, Lois, how’syour friend Nancy?
L Nancy? She’s OK. You know, Elliot, Nancy likes you. She often
asks about you.
E Mm, I like Nancy, too.
L Well, come and visit me soon. I want to cook for you and Nancy.
E Good idea! What about next weekend? Next Sunday?
L Yes, great! I often invite Nancy at the weekend.
E Great. See you on Sunday. Have a good week!
3 Focus attention on the example. Make sure students
realize that He refers to Elliot and She to Lois. Get
students to complete the answers and then check in
pairs. Check the answers with the whole class.
Answers
2 She 3 She 4 He 5 She 6 He 7 She 8 He
Ask a few students to read the sentences aloud. Then
get students to practise the sentences in pairs. If they
have serious problems with pronunciation, drill the
sentences with the whole class and get them to repeat.
4 Ask students Who does Lois phone sometimes? and elicit
Elliot, in New York. Focus attention on the conversation
and explain that Elliot and Lois are on the phone.
Most of the gapped words are ones that students have
already met and so students should be able to complete
the conversation without too many problems. Give
students time to read through the conversation before
they listen, especially with weaker classes. Deal with
any vocabulary problems. Encourage students to use
the context to help them but be prepared to explain
as usual, too, relax, paint, that’s not true, at the weekend,
and Sunday.
[CD 1: Track 87] Play the first two lines,
including the example. Play the rest of the recording
without stopping and get students to complete the
conversation. Give them time to check their answers
in pairs before playing the recording again for a
final check.
Put students in pairs to practise the phone
conversation. If possible, get them to sit back-to-back
so that they cant see each other. If students have
problems with pronunciation/intonation, play selected
lines from the recording again and drill chorally and
individually.
Negatives and pronunciation
5 This exercise practises the negative form and also
highlights the importance of contrastive stress when
correcting or disagreeing with a statement. Focus
attention on the example and ask positive or negative?
about each sentence in the answer (first sentence -
negative, second sentence - positive).
Elicit the answer to sentence 2 (He doesn’t get up at
ten o’clock! He gets up at six o’clock!). Tell students to
continue correcting the sentences, referring back to
the information about Elliot and Lois on pp42 and
44. (With a weaker group, you could do this as a class
activity on the board and then play the recording for
reinforcement.)
[CD 1: Track 88] Play the recording through
once, getting students to check their sentences
for grammatical accuracy. Then write the pairs of
sentences for numbers 2 and 3 and elicit where the
main stress falls with the whole class. Remind students
that the stress helps to indicate the main difference in
the information in the pairs of sentences, and so falls
on the key words.
Get students to work in pairs and mark where they
think the main stress falls in the rest of the pairs of
sentences. Play the recording again and get students to
check their answers. Also check the answers orally with
the whole class in case students have problems hearing
the main stress.
Play the recording again if necessary and then get
students to practise the sentences with a partner.
T 6.12
T6.13
58 Unit6 • Everyday](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-57-2048.jpg)
![Answers and tapescript
1 She doesn’t live in a flat! She lives in a house!
1 He doesn’t get up at ten o’clock! He gets up at six o’clock!
: She isn’t a businesswoman! She’s an artist!
- He doesn’t go to work by bus! He goes to work by taxi!
: She doesn’t watch television in the evening! She listens to music
or plays the piano!
ng about you
Demonstrate the activity by writing the names of two
people (one male, one female) from your family on
the board. Get students to ask you questions about
them, using the language in the speech bubbles and the
cues in the Students Book. If students have problems
-witching from questions with be to the Present Simple
questions, drill the language as a class.
Get students to write the name of two family members
on a piece of paper. Remind them to choose one male
and one female. Students work in pairs and ask and
answer about the family members. Monitor and check
for correct use of he/she, his/her and the third person
singular Present Simple forms.
SUGGESTION
You could ask students to bring in family photos for
the above activity.
Check it
7 This exercise consolidates the auxiliary forms do/don’t
and does/doesn’t in Present Simple questions and short
answers. Focus attention on number 1 and elicit the
answers (Do, do). Students continue completing the
questions and answers, working individually.
Ask students to check their answers in pairs before
checking with the whole class.
Answers
Do you like ice-cream?’ ‘Yes, I do.’
I Does she work in London?’ ‘Yes, she does.’
3 Where does he work?’ ‘In a bank.’
- Do you goto work by bus?’ ‘No, I don’t.’
5 Does she goto bed early?’ ‘No, she doesn’t.’
: Do they have a dog?’ ‘Yes, they do.’
Does he speak German?’ ‘No, he doesn’t.’
8 Do they live in the US?’ ‘No, they don’t.'
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 6
Exercises 8 and 9 Cathy’s bedroom
Exercise 10 do!does!am!is/are
VOCABULARY AND SPEAKING (SBP46)
Words that go together
This section reviews and extends some of the collocations
for everyday activities that students met in Unit 5.
1 Make sure students understand that TV stands for
television and check comprehension of shopping. Focus
attention on the examples. Students work in pairs to
continue matching the verbs and nouns/phrases.
[CD 1: Track 89] Play the recording and get
students to check their answers. If necessary, check the
meaning of stay at home.
Answers and tapescript
get up early
go to bed late
listen to music
watch TV
cook dinner
work in an office
go shopping
drink coffee
eat in restaurants
have a shower
play the piano
stay at home
2 This is a questionnaire activity to practise Yes/No
questions. As a variation, students use Yes, always,
Yes, usually; Yes, sometimes; or No, never in their
answers, rather than Yes, I do./No, I don’t. This allows
them to practise the frequency adverbs in a simple but
meaningful way.
[CD 1: Track 90] Focus attention on the
questionnaire. Play the recording and get students to
repeat chorally and individually. Drill the intonation if
necessary.
T 6.14
T 6.15
Unit6 • Everyday 59](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-58-2048.jpg)
![1 Do you get up early?
2 Do you have a big breakfast?
3 Do you walk to school or work?
4 Do you go to school or work by bus?
5 Do you watch TV in the evening?
6 Do you go shopping at the weekend?
7 Do you eat in restaurants?
8 Do you drink wine?
9 Do you go to bed late?
3 Focus attention on the language in the speech bubbles.
Drill the question and three possible answers. Get
students to ask you a few of the questions and give
true answers. Demonstrate how to record the answers
by putting the four adverbs on the board and ticking
under the appropriate one.
Students then work in closed pairs, asking and
answering, and noting down their partner’s answers.
4 This follow-up phase allows students to talk about
themselves and their partner and so get practice in
switching from first to third person. Focus attention
on the example and then elicit more information from
individual students about themselves and their partner.
Don’t over-correct students during the feedback stage,
just allow them to say what they want to say and then
correct any common mistakes at a later stage.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 6
Exercise 13 Words that go together
EVERYDAY ENGLISH (SB P47)
Days of the week
1 I H M [CD 1: Track 91] Explain that students are
going to learn the days of the week in English. Play
the recording and get students to write the days in
the correct order on the calender. Pause the recording
if necessary to give students time to write. Play the
recording again and get students to repeat chorally and
individually. Make sure they can distinguish Tuesday
and Thursday and that they only produce two syllables
in Wednesday/'wenzdei/.
Answers and tapescript
Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday
Saturday Sunday
Students practise the days again with each student
saying one day of the week in the correct order.
Elicit the answer to question 1 as an example. Students
do the exercise in pairs. Have a brief feedback session
by getting students to give their answers to individual
questions.
Here students learn which prepositions are used with
the days, parts of the day, and times. Elicit the answer
for times and the weekend (at) and then get students to
write the correct preposition for the other phrases.
Check the answers. Highlight the difference between
in the afternoon but on Friday afternoon, in the evening
but on Saturday evening, etc.
Answers
at nine o’clock
at ten thirty
at twelve fifteen
at the weekend
on Sunday
on Monday
on Saturday evening
on Thursday morning
on Friday afternoon
in the morning
in the afternoon
in the evening
4 Focus attention on the example and then get students
to complete the other sentences with either in, on, or a
Check the answers.
Answers
2 on 3 in 4 on 5 at
Focus attention on the example answers in the speech
bubbles. Get students to practise asking and answering
questions 1-5 in closed pairs. This allows them to
practise the we form of the Present Simple. Get them
to complete the sentences in writing about when they
do have English lessons. Encourage them to include the
day, part of the day, and time: We have English lessons
on (Monday evening) at (seven thirty).
Talking about you
5 Students complete the questions with the correct
preposition, then ask and answer the questions in
closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct question
formation, use of short answers, and prepositions of
time. If you have time, conduct a brief feedback session
to allow students to talk about their partner and so
practise the third person singular.
Answers
Do you...
have a shower in the morning/evening?
get up early on Sunday morning?
goto work/school on Saturday?
eat in restaurants at the weekend?
watch TV in the afternoon?
stay at home on Friday evening?
60 Unit6 • Everyday](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-59-2048.jpg)
![Notes on the unit
F
TARTER (SB p48)
section sets the theme of the unit - favourites - and
students the opportunity to recycle some of the
bulary from earlier units in a personalized way.
Give an example of your own favourite for two or three of
the categories. Elicit possible answers for each category to
check students understand what they refer to. Then give
students a short time to think of their own favourites.
Focus attention on the speech bubbles to demonstrate
the activity. Students met the pronoun it for
recognition in Unit 5. Ask them what it refers to
here (pizza) but don’t go into a presentation of object
pronouns at this stage.
Students ask and answer about some of the things in
exercise 1 in open and then closed pairs.
Elicit a few more examples of students’ favourites in a
short feedback session.
LOVE IT! (SB p48)
tion words - me/him/us/them
section reviews questions and answers, and presents
V.' and because. At this stage there’s no need to pre-teach
the new vocabulary unless you feel that students will
difficulty understanding from context. If this is the
or if you have a weaker group, you could pre-teach/
к some of the following items-.fashion model, divorced,
~n show, choose, clothes, designer, kids, adore, Swedish,
work hard, free time.
Focus attention on the photos and the text. Ask Where
is the textfrom: a magazine, a book, or a website?
I heck students understand that it’s from a website and
it shows a webpage with questions and answers. Ask
•7io is Gina Macy? and elicit She’s a fashion model.
1 W [CD 1: Track 92] Focus attention on the
: uestions in exercise 2. Ask students to read the text
and listen to the recording, and note down the relevant
nformation about Ginas favourites. Play the recording
md check the answers.
Answers
3 -as favourite.
• city is Paris.
• day is Friday.
designer is Chanel,
food is pizza.
Tell students they are going to review the questions that
Gina’s fans asked her on her website. Focus attention
on the example and then give students time to find the
missing question words. Check the answers. Highlight
the use of Why and because to ask for and give reasons.
Check the pronunciation: why /wai/ and because /bi'koz/.
Answers
2 Who 5 Who 8 How many
3 What 6 How 9 Why
4 When 7 Why 10 What
Elicit any further information students can remember
ioout Gina, e.g. She’s married. She has three children.
She loves her job, etc.
Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Drill the
examples chorally and individually. Make sure students
understand that they need to answer as Gina, and
remind them to take it in turns to ask the questions so
that both students get practice in giving the answers.
Get students to practise the questions and answers
in closed pairs while you monitor. If students have
problems with pronunciation, drill key sentences and
highlight the falling intonation. Then get students to
continue practising in closed pairs.
! * » ■ [CD 1: Track 93] Play the recording and let
students compare their answers.
Ш 1
1 Where do you live?
I live in France, in Paris.
2 Who are you married to?
Julien Caribe. He’s French.
3 What does your husband do?
He’s a photographer.
4 When are you in Sydney again?
Next October.
5 Who are the kids in the photos?
My daughters, Freya and Frida, and my son, Pierre-Louis.
6 How old are they?
They’re six, four, and ten months old.
7 Why do your daughters have Swedish names?
Because their father is Swedish.
8 How many shows do you do every year?
About eight.
9 Why do you work so hard?
Because I love my work.
10 What do you do in your free time?
I go out with my family.
This exercise highlights the use of object pronouns
and possessive adjectives. Focus attention on the
examples and then put students in pairs to complete
the sentences. Encourage them to work from memory
as much as possible and only to refer back to the text if
they need to.
Unit 7 • My favourites 63](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-62-2048.jpg)
![Answers
2 him, me 5 Their, them
3 our, them, us 6 our
4 my, our, them
6 Focus attention on the example and then set a time
limit of 2-3 minutes to encourage students to work
quickly to complete the task. Put students in pairs to
compare the details.
[CD 1: Track 94] Play the recording and get
students to check their answers. Put students in new
pairs to read the corrected text aloud. Encourage them
to read as fluently as possible so that they don’t sound
stilted. Be prepared to drill difficult words and lines as
a class and get students to repeat the task.
Answers and tapescript
Gina is afashion model. Paris is her favourite city. She loves it there.
Next October she’s in Sydney for a fashion show. She’s now married
to a Frenchman. They have a baby son. Friday is their favourite day.
In a brief follow-up, ask students Do you ask questions
on websites? and elicit a range of answers from the class.
Allow students to give as much detail in their answers
as they can.
GRAMMAR SPOT
1 Give students time to complete the matching task.
Then check the answers.
Answers
Where? In America.
When? On Sunday.
Who? Peter.
Why? Because...
How many? Ten.
2 Check comprehension of the terms subject and object
pronouns by writing this simple table on the board.
Subject Verb Object
I like you.
You like it.
She likes them.
We like him.
Focus attention on the chart in the Student’s Book
and on the examples. Get students to complete
the missing words, working in pairs. Check the
answers with the whole class.
Answers
Subject 1 you he she it we they
Object me you him her it us them
Possessive my your his her its our their
Ask students to underline the object pronouns in the
webpage.
Read Grammar Reference 7.1-7.2 on p i26 together
in class, and/or ask students to read it at home.
Encourage them to ask you questions about it.
SUGGESTION
To give more practice with question words, you
can have a quiz in which the students generate the
questions. You can give different groups sets of answers
and get them to write the questions. You will need to
choose answers that can only generate one question
and only focus on the present tense at this stage. Check
the questions with each group, and then divide the
students into pairs so that each student in the pair has
a different set of questions. Students ask and answer in
pairs, scoring a point for each correct answer.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL_____________________________________________
Workbook Unit 7
Exercise 1 Questions - An interview with Johnny Depp
Exercises 6 -8 Pronouns and possessives - me/him; my/his
THIS IS MY FAVOURITE... (SBP50)
this and that
1 Pre-teach/check the difference between this and that.
To demonstrate this, stand next to a student and say, e.g
This is (Yuko). Pick up an object and say, e.g. This is {my
new bag). Repeat with other students and objects. To
demonstrate that, point to a student at a distance from
you and say, e.g. That is {Katya). Point to an object at
a distance from you and say, e.g. That is {a map o f the
world). Repeat with other students and objects.
Also introduce the questions What’s this? and What’s
that? in the same way. Make sure students understand
that we use this to refer to people and things that are
near to us and that to refer to people and things that
are not near to us.
Focus attention on the pictures. Give students time
to read the conversations. Encourage them to use the
context and information in the pictures to help them
with new vocabulary. With weaker students, ask where
and/or who the people are in each picture to help them
T 7.3
64 Unit 7 • My favourites](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-63-2048.jpg)
![-nderstand the context. If students query the use of
:ne in number 7, explain that we say one not to repeat
сoat, but don’t go in to a grammatical presentation of
:ne/ones at this stage.
[CD 1: Track 95] Focus attention on the
examples in numbers 1 and 2. Then give students time
to complete the rest of the conversations, working
individually. Get students to check their answers in
pairs before playing the recording as a final check.
answers and tapescript
A This is my favourite family photo.
В Ah, yes. You all look very happy!
С Who’sthat?
D The guy inthe hat? That’sthe boss!
E What’sthat?
F It’s my new MP3 player.
E Wow! It’s great!
G How much is this?
H £9.50.
G I’ll have it, please.
I How much is that?
J It’s£500.
I I love it. It’sfantastic!
К Is this your phone?
L Yes, it is. Thanks.
M I like that coat.
N The blue one?
M No, the red one!
О I like this wine.
P Where’s it from?
О Chile. It's delicious.
Q This is for you.
R A present? For me? Why?
Q Because I love you!
If vou have time, get students to practise the
с mversations in pairs before referring to them to
I-rammar Reference 7.3 on p i26.
Review the names and pronunciation of some of the
ubjects in the classroom by asking What’s this/that in
English?Make sure you include an object or picture of
an object beginning with a vowel so that students review
M’s an (umbrella). Focus attention on the examples in the
r>eech bubbles. Drill the examples in open pairs. Elicit
:cher examples in open pairs and encourage students to
_se the possessive s where appropriate, e.g. It’s (Konrad) s
coat Then get students to ask and answer about other
;.assroom objects in closed pairs. Monitor and check
tor correct use of What’s this/that? and the possessive s.
T-.eck the answers by getting students to ask and answer
bcross the class.
Workbook Unit 7
Exercise 9 this/that
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
PRACTICE (SB p51)
I like them!
1 This section practises object pronouns and allows students
to personalize the language by talking about people and
things. Pre-teach/check hate and ofcourse. Focus attention
on the example and make sure students understand what
the answer it refers back to (ice-cream). Students complete
the other sentences, working individually.
[CD 1: Track 96] Get students to check their
answers in pairs before letting them check against the
recording. Ask students what the pronoun refers back
to each time (given in brackets in the key below).
Sentence 5 assumes the teacher is a woman. Check what
pronoun would be used if the teacher were a man (him).
Answers and tapescript
1 Do you like ice-cream?
Yes, I love it. (ice-cream)
2 Do you like dogs?
No, I hate them, (dogs)
3 Do you like me?
Of course I like you! (me)
4 Does your teacher teach you French?
No, she teaches us English, (you)
5 Do you like your teacher?
We like her very much, (your teacher)
What do you like?
2 Check comprehension of the items in the box.
Focus attention on the speech bubbles and check
comprehension of love, hate, and adore. This can be
done with simple board drawings of faces - a smiling
face © for love/adore and a frowning face © for hate.
If appropriate, also teach It’s/They’re all right, if students
want to give a more neutral answer.
Drill the language in the speech bubbles chorally and
individually. Check for correct sentence stress in the
answers:
Yfs, I love it!
No, I hate it!
Oh yes! I adore them.
Get students to give two or three more examples
in open pairs across the class. Then get students to
continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for the
correct use of object pronouns.
T7.4
T 7.5
Unit 7 • My favourites 65](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-64-2048.jpg)
![Questions and answers
3 Pre-teach/check marry, chocolate, sit next to, and
carrots. Focus attention on the question in the example
and review the formation of Present Simple questions
with do and does. Focus attention on the answer and
review the use of the object pronoun it. Check students
know what the pronoun refers back to {London).
Review the use of -s in third-person Present Simple
verbs. Point out that sentences 5 and 6 are negative
questions.
Give students time to write the questions and answers
individually. Monitor and check for grammatical
accuracy. Check the answers and then get students to
ask and answer the questions in pairs.
Answers
2 Why does Annie want to marry Peter?
Because she loves him.
3 Why do you eat so much chocolate?
Because I adore it.
4 Why does Dan always sit next to Maria?
Because he likes her.
5 Why don’t you watch football?
Because I hate it.
6 Why don’t you eat carrots?
Because I hate them.
If students had a lot of problems with the question
formation or the object pronouns, go over the key
grammar in each question and answer, model each
exchange, and get students to repeat it.
4 Pre-teach/check learn, on you (referring to money
you have with you), start (verb), a lot (of bands).
Check comprehension of How?to ask about manner
by eliciting the answer to question 1 {By bus.). Then
get students to continue matching the questions and
answers, working individually.
■ [CD 1: Track 97] Play the recording and get
students to check their answers.
Answers and tapescript
1 с How do you come to school?
By bus.
2 h What do you have for breakfast?
Toast and coffee.
3 e Who’syour favourite band?
I don’t have a favourite. I like a lot.
4 b Where does your father work?
In an office in the centre of town.
5 g Why do you want to learn English?
Because it’s an international language.
6 d How much money do you have on you?
Not a lot. About £2.
7 a What time do lessons start at your school?
They start at nine o’clock.
8 f How many languages does your teacher speak?
Three.
Get students to practise the questions and answers
in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct
pronunciation and intonation. If students have
problems, drill the questions and answers chorally.
Demonstrate the personalization phase by getting
the students to ask you the questions. Students then
continue in closed pairs, talking about themselves.
Check it
5 Focus attention on the first pair of sentences as an
example. Students continue working individually to
choose the correct sentences.
Get students to check their answers in pairs before
checking with the whole class.
Answers
1 What do you do at the weekend?
2 Who is your boyfriend?
3 How much money do you have?
4 I don’t drink beer. I don’t like it.
5 Our teacher gives us a lot of homework.
6 She loves me and I love her.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL__________________________________________
Teacher’s Resource Disc
Communicative activity Unit 7 Q and A
Workbook Unit 7
Exercises 2 -4 Question words
Exercise 5 Why? Because ...
VOCABULARY (SB P52)
Adjectives
1 This exercise reviews and extends common adjectives
in context. Focus attention on the example and explal
that each missing word is an adjective. The word is
given in jumbled order in brackets and sentences 1-6
contain positive adjectives, and 7 and 8 negative
adjectives. Give students time to unscramble the wore
and complete the sentences, working in pairs. Reminc
them to cross out each letter in the anagrams as they
go along to make sure they have spelled the word
correctly. With weaker students, write the first letter с
each adjective on the board to help get them started.
66 Unit 7 • My favourites](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-65-2048.jpg)
![Check the answers with the class, getting students
to spell out the adjectives each time. Drill the
pronunciation if necessary.
Answers
I nee 6 beautiful
3 :Ovely 7 terrible
4 -appy 8 awful
5 nteresting
This exercise introduces some key adjectives and their
jpposites. It also reviews It’s. Focus attention on the
pictures and the example. Get students to tell you any
other of the adjectives they recognize or let them guess.
?re-teach the remaining adjectives, using mime. Make
>ure students understand they only have to write It’s and
:he appropriate adjective, not the name of the objects.
Answers
I It's expensive. / It’s cheap.
3 It's new. / It’s old.
x It's hot. / It’s cold.
3 Its black. / It’s white.
: It's right. / It’s wrong.
Drill the pronunciation of the sentences chorally and
.ndividually.
[CD 1: Track 98] Focus attention on the
example. Give students a few moments to read through
;he gapped conversations before they listen. Play the
recording and get students to fill in the gaps. Play the
recording a second time if necessary.
Check the answers with the class and then get them
to practise the conversations in pairs. If students have
problems with the pronunciation, especially the voice
range, drill the conversations from the recording and
rhen get students to practise again in their pairs.
Answers and tapescript
1 A It’s so hot today, isn’t it?
В 1know. It’s 35 degrees!
2 С Hey! 1like your new shoes!
D Thank you! They’re really nice, aren’t they?
С They’re fantastic!
3 E 1live in a very small flat.
F How many bedrooms do you have?
E Only one!
4 G How much is that coat?
H £150.
G Wow! That’stoo expensive for me.
5 1 Your name’s Peter, isn’t it?
J Yes, that’s right.
1 Nice to meet you, Peter.
PHOTOCOPIABLE ACTIVITY
UNIT 7 It’s an old computer ТВ pl44
Materials: one copy of the worksheet cut up per pair
of students
Procedure: this activity practises adjective and noun
combinations in a ‘pictionary’-type activity.
• Divide students into pairs. Give each pair a set of
adjective and a set of noun cards, kept in separate
piles.
• Each student takes an adjective card and a noun
card. If their noun card cannot be matched with
their adjective card, then they replace it at the
bottom of the pile and take another, until they find
a combination which they are able to depict in a
drawing. Each student then draws a picture of their
combination.
• When they have finished drawing, students show
their picture to their partner, asking What’s this?
Their partner has to guess which adjective/noun
combination has been depicted, and reply using
It’s a(n) ....
• Students continue until all the adjective cards have
been used.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 7
Exercise 10 Adjectives - happy/miserable
READING AND WRITING (SB P53)
A postcard from San Francisco
1 This section extends the focus on adjectives in the
context of a description of a place. Focus attention on
the photos and elicit information about the place that
is shown, e.g. Is it a big city? Is it in the United States?
Where do you think it is? Tell students they are going
to read and listen to the postcard. Encourage them to
guess the meaning of new words.
[CD 1: Track 99] Play the recording and get
students to follow in their books. Check comprehension
of the following, using the context and photos to help
where possible: on holiday, comfortable, friendly, easy to
understand, speakfast, seafood, wonderful, amazing, rain,
fog, wet, see you next week.
2 Elicit the answer to question 1 as an example (It’sfrom
Ruben and Pasha.). Get students to answer the other
questions, working individually. Check the answers
with the whole class.
T 7.7
T 7.8
Unit 7 • My favourites 67](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-66-2048.jpg)
![Answers
1 It’sfrom Ruben and Pasha. 4 Yes, it is.
2 They're in San Francisco. 5 The weather.
3 They’re on holiday.
3 Focus attention on the adjectives Pasha and Ruben use
to describe their hotel. Get students to continue finding
the appropriate adjectives. Point out that for one of
the adjectives for San Francisco they will need to use a
negative formed with not.
Get students to check their answers in pairs before
checking with the whole class.
Answers
the people: friendly
the food: delicious
the cafes and restaurants: wonderful
San Francisco: beautiful, big, not expensive
the shops: great
the Golden Gate Bridge: amazing
the weather: awful, cold, wet
Writing
4 Focus attention on the skeleton of the postcard. You
can get students to write their postcard in full in class,
feeding in vocabulary where relevant, or give it for
homework. With a weaker class, you could draft the
postcard as a class activity on the board, and then get
students to write a different postcard for homework,
based very closely on the draft.
EVERYDAY ENGLISH (SB P54)
Can I... ?
1 This section focuses on requests in everyday situations.
Students are introduced to Can I ...?, but don’t give a
detailed explanation of the grammar of can at this stage.
Focus attention on the main photo of the young
woman. Explain that her name is Iveta and she’s Czech.
Tell students that they are going to see and hear her in
different places and situations.
Focus attention on exercise 1. Check comprehension
of the vocabulary in the activities list by reading out
each activity and getting students to point to the correct
picture. Repeat this procedure for the places vocabulary.
Focus attention on the example. Students then write the
correct numbers and letters for the rest of the pictures.
Check the answers.
Answers (down)
2 d 5 a lb 4 e 3 c
Iveta in town
2 1 W [CD 2: Track 1] Explain that students are goin
to hear Iveta in different places in town. Focus on the
example in the table and play the first conversation.
Play the other four conversations, pausing after each
one. Get students to complete their answers, choosing
from the places from exercise 1. Play the conversations
through again if necessary. Check the answers with the
whole class.
Answers
2 in a clothes shop; to try on ajumper
3 in a post office; to post some letters
4 in a cafe; a coffee
5 in a chemist’s; some aspirin
T 7.9
1 Can I have a return ticket to Oxford, please?
2 I like this jumper. Can Itry it on?
3 I want to post these letters to the Czech Republic, please.
4 Can I have a coffee, please?
5 Some aspirin, please.
3 И [CD 2: Track 2] Focus attention on the gappei
conversations. Pre-teach/check a return ticket, pay by
credit card, machine, enter your PIN number, changing
rooms, scales, stamp, latte (a type of white coffee),
take away, Pardon?, and packet. Elicit as many answers
for conversation 1 as the students can remember.
Play the recording and get students to check. Students
continue completing the other conversations, working
in pairs.
Play the recording of all five conversations and get
students to check/complete their answers.
Answers and tapescript
1 In a railway station
I Can I have a return ticket to Oxford, please?
A Sure.
I How much is that?
A Twenty-two pounds fifty, please.
I Can I pay by credit card?
A No problem. Put your card in the machine. And enter your
PIN number, please.
2 In a clothes shop
I Hello. Can Itry on this jumper, please?
В Of course. The changing rooms are over there.
3 In a post office
I Can I post these letters to the Czech Republic, please?
С Sure. Put them on the scales. That’s£1.68.
I Thank you. How much is a stamp for a postcard to the
United States?
С Sixty-two p.
I Can I have three, please?
68 Unit 7 • My favourites](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-67-2048.jpg)
![Notes on the unit ROBERT’S LIVING ROOM (SB P57)
STARTER (SB p56)
■ Focus attention on the questions in exercise 1.
Pre-teach/check garden and balcony, and the difference
! between house andflat. You can draw these on the
[ board to highlight the difference. Demonstrate the
activity by talking briefly about your own home. Only
include language that students have already met,
I e.g. adjectives big, small, etc. As a class, students talk
i briefly about where they live. Let students exchange
information freely and don’t interrupt or over-correct
at this stage.
3 ■ * :* ■ [CD 2: Track 3] Focus attention on the picture
I of the house. Play the recording and get students to
point to the correct room and repeat the words chorally
! and individually. Check for accurate pronunciation of
[ kitchen /'kitfin/.
Tapescript
:athroom, bedroom, kitchen, dining room, living room
p Focus attention on the example. Then get students to
find the rest of the things in the house and write the
correct number, working in pairs. Check the answers
with the class.
Answers and tapescript
I T ] abed
[6] a cooker
T5] a sofa
Ш a TV
Q] a shower
jT] a toilet
[7] a table
| [5] afridge
[CD 2: Track 4] Students listen and repeat
the words chorally and individually. (See above for
tapescript.) Check for accurate pronunciation and word
stress of the following words, getting students to repeat
several times if necessary:
a cooker/'кикэ/
a sofa /'soofo/
a TV /ti:'vi:/
a shower /'Jauo/
a toilet /'toilot/
a fridge Ifnd'rJ
a picture /'piktJo/
a magazine /msego'zim/
a DVD player /di: vi: 'di: pleio/
There is/are...
1 Focus attention on the photograph and the rubric for
exercise 1. Ask What’s his name? (Robert) and Where is
he? (In his living room.) Pre-teach/check PlayStation”,
games, posters, walls, and tidy.
[CD 2: Track 5] Play the recording through
once and get students to read and listen to the text, not
writing anything at this stage. Write the sentence There’s
an old sofa, and there are two armchairs, on the board.
Underline There’s and there are. Focus attention on the
first gap in Roberts text and elicit the answer (There).
Play the recording again and get students to complete
the text. Check the answers with the whole class.
Answers and tapescript
My living room isn’t very big, but I think it’s great. There’s an old
sofa, and there are two armchairs. There’s a table with a TV and a
DVD player on it. There’s also a PlayStation®. I love all the games.
There are some books, and there are a lot of pictures and posters
on the walls. There are two lamps. My room’s not very tidy, but it’s
really comfortable.
If students query the use of some, ask How many
books? and elicit We don’t know, to get over the idea of
indefinite quantity.
2 Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Write the
sentences on the board and ask Singular or plural?
(There’s an old sofa. - singular and There are two
armchairs. - plural). If you know the students’ mother
tongue, you can translate There is/are. If you don’t, they
should be able to pick up the meaning from the context.
Drill the language in the speech bubbles chorally and
individually. Check students can accurately reproduce
the linking in both forms:
There’sjmjold sofa.
Thereare two armchairs.
Elicit more singular and plural examples from the class,
using the other nouns in the exercise. Students then
repeat the sentences working in closed pairs. Monitor
and check for correct use of there is and there are.
Get students to practise there is and there are with the
objects in the classroom. Write lists on the board of the
things you have in your classroom, e.g.
Singular: a picture, a table, a CD player, a photo
Plural: lots o f books, chairs, desks, bags
Students work in pairs and take it in turns to make
sentences about objects in the classroom. Monitor and
check for correct use of there is and there are.
Ql] an armchair
[T] a lamp
[8] a picture
[M] a magazine
Ц a DVD player
Щ a laptop
[Ш] a desk
T 8.2
T 8.3
Unit 8 • Where I live 71](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-70-2048.jpg)
![■ * :* ■ [CD 2: Track 6] In this exercise, students
practise the question form and short answers. Focus
attention on the questions and answers. Play the
recording and get students to listen to the questions
and repeat chorally and individually. Check students
can accurately reproduce the intonation in the
questions, and the linking in the short answers:
Are there any photographs?
Yes, thereis.
No, there isn’t.
Yes, thereare.
No, therearen’t.
Highlight the singular and plural forms and point
out that we use any in questions in the plural. Get
students to practise the questions and answers in closed
pairs. Monitor and check for correct formation of the
questions and short answers, and the correct use of any.
GRAMMAR SPOT
Focus attention on the completed examples. Check
students know that There’s is singular and is the
contracted form of There is, and that Are there is plural.
Focus attention on the gapped sentences. Check
students notice that the first and third sentences
require plural forms and the second sentence
singular, by focusing on the nouns. Students then
complete the sentences.
Answers
Positive There’s a sofa.
There are two armchairs.
Question Is there aTV?
Are there any pictures?
Negative There isn’t a computer.
There aren’t any photographs.
Give students the opportunity to practise the negative
statements by referring to the classroom, e.g. There
isn’t a DVD player. There aren’t any magazines. Write
a list of nouns on the board and get students to make
negative sentences.
Read Grammar Reference 8.1 and 8.2 on pl26
together in class, and/or ask students to read it at
home. Encourage them to ask you questions about it.
Tell students they are going to ask and answer
questions about Robert’s living room. Check
comprehension of the items in the list. Focus attention
on the speech bubbles and get students to ask and
answer the questions in open pairs. Elicit one or two
more exchanges using different nouns and then get
students to continue in closed pairs. Monitor and
check for correct formation of the questions and shorl
answers, and the correct use of any.
Check the answers with the whole class by getting
students to ask and answer across the class.
Answers
Is there aTV?
Are there any photographs?
Is there a desk?
Is there a telephone?
Are there any lamps?
Is there a DVD player?
Is there a PlayStation®?
Are there any magazines?
Yes, there is.
No, there aren’t.
No, there isn’t.
No, there isn’t.
Yes, there are.
Yes, there is.
Yes, there is.
Yes, there are.
Focus attention on the photo of Robert’s mother. Say
He’s on the phone to his mother. Focus on the picture
of Robert’s living room again and ask Is is tidy? (No.)
Give students time to read the questions. Students
should be familiar with all the main structures and
vocabulary in the recording but it is slightly longer th;
the conversations in earlier units. Remind students th
they don’t need to understand every word to be able t
answer the questions.
[CD 2: Track 7] Explain that students need
to listen for the objects in question 1 and the actual
questions in 2. Play the recording through once
without stopping and let students discuss their answe:
in pairs. Play the recording again and let students che
or complete their answers. With weaker students, for
their first listening you can put a list of nouns on the
board in random order, e.g. desk, sofa, photographs, et
and get students to number them in the order they ar
mentioned in the recording. For their second listenin;
get them to focus on the actual questions Robert’s
mother asks.
Check the answers and elicit any other information
from the conversation that the students can remembe
e.g. Robert’s mother wants to visit with his father.
Answers and tapescript
1 She asks about a sofa, chairs, a TV, a PlayStation®, a desk, picture:
and photographs.
2 Is there a nice sofa?
Are there any chairs?
Is there aTV?
A PlayStation®? Why?
Is there a desk?
Are there any pictures on the walls?
Any photographs of your family?
3 She wants to visit next weekend.
72 Unit 8 • Where I live](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-71-2048.jpg)
![Т 8.5
ROBERT’S BEDROOM (SB P58)
R=Robert, M =Mum
R Hi, Mum.
M Robert. How are you? How’s the new flat?
R It’s great, Mum. I love it. It’s really comfortable.
M And tidy?
R Er, well...
M So, tell me about it. Is there a nice sofa?
R Well, there’s an old sofa, but it’s OK.
M Mmm. And are there any chairs?
R Yes, of course, there are chairs. There are two big armchairs.
M Good. And a TV. Is there a TV?
R Oh, yes, there is. The TV’s really big. And I have a DVD player and
a PlayStation®and...
M A PlayStation®? Why?
R Mum, I love playing games!
M OK, OK. So, is there a desk?
R There isn’t a desk in the living room, but there’s one in the
bedroom.
M Good. Now, are there any pictures on the walls? Any
photographs of your family?
R Well, in the living room there are my posters of New York and
Sydney, but there aren’t any photographs, they’re all in my
bedroom.
M OK. Now your father and I want to see this flat. Can we visit
next...?
R Visit? You want to visit?
M Yes. We’re free next weekend. Can we come?
R Er, next weekend... er, sorry Mum,... er, I think, er...
Refer the students to the tapescript on SB pi 17. Get
students to practise the conversation in closed pairs.
Monitor and check for correct pronunciation and
intonation. If students have problems, drill key sections
chorally and then get students to repeat the closed
pairwork. If you have time, students can perform the
conversation as a roleplay for the rest of the class.
6 Demonstrate the activity by describing your own living
room. Include positive and negative sentences. Get
students to work in closed pairs. Encourage students
to ask questions if their partner runs out of things to
say. Monitor and check for correct use of there is/are in
all forms, any, and pronunciation and intonation. Feed
back on any common errors with the whole class.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
•cdcbook Unit 8
Exercises 1-3 Rooms and furniture
Exercises 4 -7 There is/There are - In the garden
Prepositions
1 Focus attention on the prepositions. Check students
understand the difference between in and on by putting
something in your book and then on your book and
eliciting the correct preposition.
2 Ask students What can you remember about Robert?
and elicit any information about him, e.g. He likes
computer games, or his home, e.g. There’s a TV and a
DVD player in his living room.
Focus attention on the photograph of Robert. Ask
What room is this? (Robert’s bedroom.) Briefly review
the vocabulary in the picture by pointing to the objects/
furniture and eliciting the correct words. Pre-teach/
check the new vocabulary in the gap-fill: floor, car keys,
drawer, and trainers.
Focus attention on the example. Students then
complete the sentences, working individually.
[CD 2: Track 8] Get students to check in pairs
before checking with the whole class.
Answers and tapescript
1 His laptop is on the desk.
1 The CD player is next to the laptop.
3 There are three books on the floor next to his bed.
4 His car keys are in the drawer.
5 There’s a football on the floor under the desk.
6 His trainers are next to his bag under his bed.
Students practise the sentences. Monitor and check for
accurate pronunciation. If students have problems, drill
the sentences and get students to practise them again.
3 This exercise practises questions with Where? and the
prepositions. Focus attention on the speech bubbles.
Remind students of the singular form is and the plural
form are. Highlight the use of It’s in the singular answer
and They’re in the plural. Drill the questions and
answers chorally and individually. Make sure students
can reproduce the falling intonation on the questions.
Check comprehension of the items in the lists. Elicit
two or three more exchanges using the nouns in the
list. Students then continue in closed pairs. Monitor
and check for correct use of is/are, It’s/They’re, and the
prepositions.
Check the answers with the whole class by getting
students to ask and answer across the class.
T 8.6
Unit 8 • Where I live 73](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-72-2048.jpg)
![Answers
Where’s his sports bag? It’s under his bed.
Where are his pens? They’re in the drawer.
Where are his magazines? They’re on the floor next to the bed.
Where are his credit cards? They’re in the drawer.
Where’s his jumper? It’s on the bed.
Where’s his lamp? It’s next to the bed.
Where’s his alarm clock? It’s next to the bed.
Where are his trainers? They’re under the bed next to his
sports bag.
Where are his photos? They’re on the wall.
Where’s his mug? It’s on the books, next to his bed.
4 Give students time to write about six questions each.
Demonstrate the activity by closing your eyes and
getting students to ask you one or two questions. Then
get them to continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check
for correct use of is/are, Its/They’re, and the prepositions.
SUGGESTION
You can use the picture of Roberts bedroom on p58
to review there is/are in the positive, negative, and in
questions. This can be done as a warm-up activity at
the beginning of a lesson or as a ‘filler’. For further
practice, bring in pictures of rooms from magazines.
These can be used for vocabulary consolidation,
question and answer practice, and describe and
draw activities.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 8
Exercise 8 Prepositions - on/under/next to ...
2 Demonstrate the activity by asking a few students the
questions in exercise 1. Students continue asking and
answering in closed pairs. Encourage them to also ask
different questions from those in exercise 1. Monitor
and check.
Two different rooms
3 This is an information gap using different pictures.
Tell students that they are going to work with a partner
and ask questions to find the differences between two
similar pictures of a room. Pre-teach/check the names
of all the parts of the room and the furniture, including
window and curtains. Divide the class into pairs. Refer
the Student As to p59 and Student Bs to pl41. Tell
them they shouldn’t look at each other’s picture. Focus
attention on the examples in the speech bubbles and
drill the language. Tell students to circle the differences
they find in their pictures. Students work in pairs to
find all the differences. Monitor and check.
Students compare their pictures to check they have
found the differences.
Answers
Student A’s picture
There’s a cat on the floor.
There are two pictures on
the wall.
There are some books on
the small table.
There’s atelephone on
the sofa.
Theres a TV and a DVD player.
Under the DVD player there
are some DVDs.
Student B’s picture
There’s a cat on the sofa.
There aren’t any pictures on
the wall.
There are some books under
the table.
There’s a telephone on
the small table.
There’s a CD player.
Under the CD player there
are some CDs.
PRACTICE (SB p59)
Questions and answers
1 Focus attention on the example. Then get students to
write the words in the correct order to form questions.
Remind them to cross out the words in each set as they
use them.
[CD 2: Track 9] Play the recording and get
students to check their answers.
Answers and tapescript
1 Do you live in a house or aflat?
2 How many bedrooms are there?
3 Is there a phone in the kitchen?
4 Is there a television in the living room?
5 Is there a DVD player under the television?
6 Are there a lot of books in your bedroom?
7 Are there any pictures on the wall?
4 [CD 2: Track 10] Tell students they are going
to hear a description of one of the rooms and that
they have to decide which one it is. Play the recording
through once and get students to vote for either pictun
A or B. If there is disagreement, play the recording
again. Check the answer with the whole class.
Answer and tapescript
Which room is it? (Answer: picture B)
There’s a cat on the sofa, and there’s a phone on a small table next
to the sofa. There’s a CD player with some CDs under it. Not a lot of
CDs. There isn’t aTV, and there aren’t any pictures or photographs
on the walls. There’s one lamp. It’s next to the table with the phone.
There are two tables and two armchairs. There are some books
under one of the tables.
74 Unit 8 • Where I live](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-73-2048.jpg)
![Г-еск it
I Focus attention on the first pair of sentences and elicit
•_-.ecorrect one as an example. Students continue
working individually to choose the correct sentence.
Answers
5 there a sofa in the living room?
. '-ere's a DVD player on the floor.
I --ethere any posters on the wall?
• keys are in the drawer.
: ~-e lamp is next to the bed.
*HOTOCOPIABLE ACTIVITY
.N IT 8 Is there...? Are there...? TBpl45
Materials: one copy of the worksheet cut in half per
ri:r of students
? rocedure: Briefly review the rooms and furniture
shown on the worksheet without showing students
the picture. Pre-teach/check wardrobe, bookshelf,
chair, mirror, bath, stairs, mug, and cupboard. Drill the
pronunciation as necessary.
• Put students in pairs and assign the role of A or В
:o each student. Hand out the relevant half of the
■.orksheet. Give students a few moments to look at
me picture and deal with any vocabulary queries
they may have.
• Pre-teach/check gold coin. Tell students they are
qoing to hide six gold coins in their picture of
the house. Give them time to draw in the coins
wherever they like, without letting their partner see.
• Explain that students need to ask and answer
questions to locate the gold in their partner’s house.
Elicit example questions, e.g. Are there any gold
:jins in the kitchen? Is there a gold coin on the table?,
etc. Explain that students have only three minutes
each to find the coins and remind students not to
iook at each other’s pictures.
'tudent A asks Student В questions to find the gold
". B’s house. Monitor and help as necessary. After
three minutes shout Stop!
Audents change roles and Student В asks A
euestions to find the gold in As house. Monitor and
help as necessary. After three minutes shout Stop!
• Ask which students managed to find all the coins
in a brief feedback session.
READING AND VOCABULARY (SB P60)
Vancouver - the best city in the world
This skills section continues the theme of describing
‘Where I live’ with a text on visitor information for the
city of Vancouver. The text is slightly longer than in
previous units and there is an increase in the amount
of new vocabulary, but the tasks are carefully staged to
help students, and there is a lot of visual support. (With
weaker classes, you could get students to check new
words for homework before the lesson - see the list of
new vocabulary in the notes for exercise 4 below.) The
vocabulary exploitation of the text covers a wide range of
adjectives and the nouns that they go with.
There are examples of superlative forms in the text (best
and biggest) and too + adjective. Students have already met
best in the context of my bestfriend in Unit 4, and they
should be able to work out the meaning of biggest and too
from context. There’s no need to do a full presentation of
comparatives and superlatives or too/enough at this stage.
1 Ask students What do you know about Vancouver? Let
students give any information that they know. Focus
attention on the text on pp60-61. Ask Where is the text
from? and Who is itfor? Check students understand
that it is a webpage for people who want to visit
Vancouver.
Focus attention on the map and ask students to point to
Canada and the US. Say Where is Vancouver? Is it near
the US? {Yes, it is.) If appropriate, ask students to guess
how far Vancouver is from the US border and then
check when they read the text.
2 Focus attention on the pictures. Ask students to find a
trolley bus as an example and then get students to find
the other things in the lists, working in pairs. Monitor
and help as necessary. Check the answers by saying the
things in the list and getting students to point to the
correct picture.
3 Read the introduction as a class and ask students to
point to the relevant pictures. Focus attention on the
headings and elicit the words that might appear in each
paragraph, e.g. Where is it?: In Canada, near the US;
Where to stay: hotels, city centre, etc.
Focus attention on the example and read the first main
paragraph as a class. Tell students not to worry if they
don’t understand every word in the text and just to
focus on the matching task. Get students to read the
text as far as rains a lot in autumn and winter. Elicit
what heading goes in the first space {When to go).
Students continue reading and putting in the headings.
[CD 2: Track 11] Play the recording and get
students to check their answers.
Unit 8 • Where I live 75](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-74-2048.jpg)
![Answers and tapescript
Vancouver is called the ‘best city in the world’. Why? Is it the
spectacular mountains? The beautiful beaches? The excellent shops
and restaurants? It's all of this and more!
Where is it?
Vancouver is in south-west Canada, next to the Pacific Ocean,
24 miles from the US border.
When to go
It is always a good time to visit Vancouver. The weather is never too
cold or too hot. It is warm and sunny in summer, but it rains a lot in
autumn and winter.
What to do
In spring, go skiing in the mountains in the morning and sunbathe
on the beach in the afternoon. In summer, go swimming, sailing or
fishing, or go walking in North America’s biggest park, Stanley Park.
There are excellent shops in Yaletown, and there is also theatre,
opera, and music of every sort. Vancouver is the ‘City of Festivals’.
Where to eat
Vancouver is a cosmopolitan city, so there are French, Italian,
Japanese, Indian, Thai, and Chinese restaurants. Vancouver’s
Chinatown is the second biggest in North America, after San
Francisco. There is also a lot of delicious, fresh seafood.
Where to stay
In the busy city centre there are some excellent, expensive hotels.
The beautiful Fairmont Hotel is $400 a night, but next to the sea
there are a lot of cheap, comfortable hotels from $59 a night.
How to travel
You don’t need a car in Vancouver. There are slow, old trolley buses
and there is the fast, modern Sky Train. Take the ferry - it is a great
way to see the city.
4 The vocabulary listed below is new. Encourage
students to use the context to help them understand,
but be prepared to explain some of these words and
expressions as necessary: spectacular, excellent, all
o f this and more, south-west, border, warm, sunny,
autumn, winter, spring, sunbathe, summer, go walking,
north (America), theatre, opera, o f every sort, festivals,
cosmopolitan, Indian, Thai, fresh, seafood, slow, modern.
Elicit the answer to the first question as an example.
Students ask and answer in closed pairs. Monitor and
help where necessary. Check the answers.
Answers
1 Vancouver is in Canada, near the US border.
2 It is always a good time to visit Vancouver.
3 Yes. It rains a lot in autumn and winter.
4 People go skiing in the mountains. They sunbathe on the beach.
They go walking in Stanley Park.
5 There is swimming and sailing.
6 Because Vancouver is a cosmopolitan city.
7 No. There are a lot of cheap hotels next to the sea. Expensive
hotels are $400 a night, and cheap hotels are $59 a night.
8 The ferry is a good way to see the city.
5 Focus attention on the examples in the chart. Students
continue finding the adjectives, working in pairs.
Check the answers with the whole class, correcting
students’ pronunciation as necessary.
Answers
Adjectives
busy, cosmopolitan
spectacular
beautiful
excellent
cold, hot, warm, sunny
delicious, fresh
excellent, expensive, cheap,
comfortable
slow, old
fast, modern
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 8
Exercise 9 Vocabulary - Revision
Exercise 13 Reading - Berkhamsted
LISTENING AND WRITING (SB P62)
My home town
This section continues the theme of talking about cities
with a listening task based on a character who lives in
Vancouver. Students go on to talk about their own home
town and then do a guided writing task.
1 Ask students What can you remember about Vancouver?
Put them in pairs to exchange ideas and then elicit any
details in a short feedback session.
Focus attention on the photo. Ask What’s his name?
(Steve), Where does he live? (Vancouver), Who is he
with, do you think? (His wife or girlfriend.) Where are
they? (At the beach.) Give students time to read the list
of topics and check the vocabulary.
[CD 2: Track 12] Ask What does Steve
talk about? Play the recording as far as have a small
apartment there. Elicit the first two topics (his job and
his apartment). Tell students they are going to listen
to the rest of the recording. Tell them to focus just on
the list of things at this stage and not to worry about
the details of what Steve says. Make sure students
understand they have to write / for the things Steve
talks about. Play the recording through once and get
students to complete the task. Let them check in pairs
and play the recording through again if necessary.
Check the answers with the whole class.
Nouns
city
mountains
beaches
shops and restaurants
the weather
seafood
hotels
trolley buses
Sky Train
T 8.10
76 Unit 8 • Where I live](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-75-2048.jpg)
![Answers
Answers given in same order as the tapescript.)
Steve talks about hisjob, his apartment, his girlfriend, Chinatown,
~e weather, skiing, golf, cycling, Stanley Park.
T 8.10
- ! My name’s Steve and I live in Vancouver. I work at an
-ternational bank in the centre of the city but I live in English Bay
-ear the beach. I have a small apartment there. Vancouver’s a great
: ty. It’s really cosmopolitan. People from all over the world live
-ere. Every Friday after work my girlfriend and I goto Chinatown
and have delicious Chinese food - it’s my favourite.
tkethe weather because it’s never too hot or too cold, but it
-ins a lot and I don’t like that.
•vork hard and I play hard! I love sport and Vancouver’s good
for so many sports. In winter I go skiing every weekend, I like
snowboarding, too. In summer I go swimming and I play golf,
often go cycling with my girlfriend. Sometimes we cycle along
the Vancouver Seawall to the park - Stanley Park. The mountains
ook fantastic from there.
•vhy doesn’t everyone want to live in Vancouver? It’s the best
oiace to live in the world!
[CD 2: Track 12] Give students time to read
through the questions. Introduce the two place names
English Bay and Vancouver Seawall and pre-teach/check
snowboarding. Play the recording again as far as near the
beach and elicit the answers to questions 1 and 2. Play
the rest of the recording and get students to note down
their answers. Give students time to check in pairs
before checking with the class. With weaker students, be
prepared to play selected sections of the recording again
to highlight key information.
Answers
He works at an international bank in the centre of the city.
I He lives in English Bay, near the beach.
3 No. His apartment is small.
a His favourite food is Chinese food.
5 No. He doesn’t like the weather when it rains.
6 He goes to Chinatown.
7 He likes skiing, snowboarding, swimming, cycling, and golf.
: He cycles along the Vancouver Seawall to Stanley Park.
[CD 2: Track 13] This is another in a series
of short listening tasks that get students to focus on
the key points of a situation. Focus attention on the
chart and read the questions as a class. Play the first
conversation and elicit the answers as an example.
Play the rest of the recording, pausing at the end to
allow students to complete the chart.
Check the answers, playing the recording again if
students had any problems with individual sections.
Answers
What isthe conversation about? Who is Steve talking to?
1 Monday mornings and meetings a colleague
2 goingto a Chinese restaurant his girlfriend
3 the weather and golf afriend
4 cyclingto Stanley Park his girlfriend
T 8.11
1 S Morning. Monday again!
A Yeah. I hate Mondays and it’s another busy day.
S I know. I have three meetings this morning.
2 S Hi, can I meet you after work?
В Yeah, that’s great.
S Six o’clock OK? We can go to that restaurant next to the
Chinese supermarket.
В Fine. I want to go there again. The food’s delicious.
3 S Oh no! Rain again!
С It’s not so bad.
S Yes, it is. The sky’s really black.
С You’re right. No golf today, then!
4 S It’s a lovely afternoon. Do you want to go out?
D Yeah, where do you want to go?
S What about Stanley Park?
D Great, I love that park! The mountains look fantastic from
there.
S Come on then! Let’s get the bikes.
Refer the students to the tapescript on SB pi 17. Get
students to practise the conversations in closed pairs.
Monitor and check for correct pronunciation and
intonation. If students have problems, drill key sections
chorally and then get students to repeat the closed
pairwork. If you have time, students can perform the
conversations as a roleplay for the rest of the class.
4 Get students to ask you the questions in the Students
Book and give true answers. Write up relevant
vocabulary on the board in the categories given below
and get students to add to each list, e.g.
Where/live? house with a garden, flat, in the centre,
near the beach
What/in your town? theatre, opera, beaches,
mountains, beautiful buildings, good restaurants, an
amazing bridge
What/do with your friends? go to restaurants/clubs/
bars/the cinema/theatre, playfootball/tennis/golf, go
shopping/swimming/sailing/surfing/walking/skiing/
snowboarding
T 8.10
T 8.11
Unit 8 • Where I live 77](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-76-2048.jpg)
![Where/go shopping? in the town centre, at the
supermarket/department store/clothes shop/market
How/travel? by саг/bus/train/trolley bus/bike, on foot
good place? Yes - exciting/amazing/interesting; no - a
bit boring/dull/quiet.
Put the students into groups and get them to talk about
their home town or a town they like. Get them to refer to
the ideas on the board to help them, but also encourage
them to say as much as they can for themselves. Monitor
and check, but only help if asked, as it’s important for
students to have the opportunity for freer practice and to
rely on each other for help. Feed back on any common
errors, but only focus on things which are potential
blocks to communication. Correcting every small
mistake will only discourage the class.
Writing
5 This writing task can be done in class or for homework.
Tell students they are going to write about a town they
know. Focus attention on the paragraph headings and
the ideas. If you have time, you might like to build up
a full writing model on the board, based on the town
where students are studying. If the writing is done in
class, get students to exchange their descriptions with a
partner for checking/editing. If you check the writing,
feed back on any general errors, but again do not pick
up on every small mistake.
SUGGESTION
If you have access to computers, you could ask
students to do the writing task as part of a mini
project to be uploaded onto the schools network, or
onto the Internet. Students can research maps and
photographs to produce a webpage similar to the one
on Vancouver on pp60-61.
EVERYDAY ENGLISH (SB P63)
Directions
NOTE
This section uses s with the names of individual
shops like newsagent’s and chemists. There’s no need
to explain this use of the apostrophe s but if students
query it, just explain it stands for the chemist’s (shop).
1 Pre-teach/check the items in the box and drill the
pronunciation chorally. Demonstrate the activity by
getting students to find and point to the hotel and the
bank. Students continue locating the places on the map.
2 Focus attention on the signs. Copy them onto the
board and drill the pronunciation of turn left, turn
right, and go straight on.
Answers
a turn left
b turn right
с go straight on
3 [CD 2: Track 14] Tell students they are going
to listen to some directions which they have to follow
on the map. Tell students to find the start point You
are here on the map. Play the first conversation as an
example and get students to follow on the map.
Play the rest of the conversations, pausing after each
one and getting students to write in their final location.
Get students to check in pairs. Play the recording again
and get students to check/complete their answers.
Check the answers with the whole class. If students
had problems, go over the exercise again, holding up
your book and following the route as you read the
script aloud.
Answers
2 at the cinema
3 at the railway station
4 at the Grand Hotel
5 at the park
T 8.12
1 Go up North Road. Turn left at the bank into Charles Street.
It’s on the right next to the theatre.
2 Go up North Road. Turn right at the school into Hillside Road, and
it’s on the left next to the chemist's.
3 Go up North Road. Turn right at the church into Station Road. Go
straight down, and it’s on the right next to the car park.
4 Go straight on up North Road for five minutes, and it’s in Albert
Square. It’s a big building on the right.
5 Go straight on up North Road. At the post office turn left into
Park Lane. It’s on the right, past the Chinese restaurant.
Refer the students to the tapescript on SB pi 18. Get
students to practise the conversations in closed pairs.
Monitor and check for correct pronunciation and
intonation.
If students have problems, drill key sections chorally
and then get students to repeat the closed pairwork.
If you have time, students can perform the
conversation as a roleplay for the rest of the class.
4 Focus attention on the language in the speech bubbles.
Drill the language chorally and individually. Check that
students can reproduce the falling intonation on Excuse
me! and the fall then rise on Is there a ... near here?
78 Unit 8 • Where I live](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-77-2048.jpg)
![•cs/were born The equivalent structure in students’ own
ar.guage is often different, leading students to say *1 am
■pm or *1 born. The unit provides a whole section on this
^rructure to help students become familiar with the
correct forms.
*ist Simple irregular verbs The unit introduces the Past
Scmple in the positive. The focus is on a limited number
z f irregular verbs which are presented as a lexical set
a story context. This allows students to get initial
iliarization with some of the highest frequency
mlar past forms before they move on to the use of
in questions and negatives in Unit 10.
kave/do/go This vocabulary section highlights common
collocations with have, do, and go to form verbs for
everyday activities, e.g. have lunch, do my homework,
go shopping. Students match and practise the past forms
:t the verbs as well as the infinitives.
•veryday English This covers months of the year, ordinal
cumbers in dates, and personalizes the language by talking
ibout students’ birthdays.
Workbook Saying years is consolidated in writing and
fctening exercises. Was/were and was/were born are
:: nsolidated through a range of exercises, including a
fctening exercise, and a reading exercise about famous
reople from the past. Past Simple irregular verbs are
-orther practised. There is further practice of collocations
•nth have, do, and go, and of months, ordinal numbers,
and dates.
^lotocopiable activity There is a photocopiable activity to
review the past of be, was/were born, and dates on ТВ pl46.
Notes on the unit
STARTER (SB p64)
Briefly review numbers 1-20 round the class. Write
numbers in the 30s, 40s, 50s, etc. on the board to review
numbers up to 100. Pre-teach/check a thousand.
[CD 2: Track 15] Write the two years from
number 1 on the board. Play the recording for
number 1 and ask a student to underline the correct
answer. Play the rest of the recording and get students
to underline the correct years.
Get students to check their answers in pairs before
checking with the whole class.
Answers and tapescript
1 nineteen ninety-six 4 seventeen ninety-nine
2 nineteen sixteen 5 eighteen forty
3 two thousand and two 6 two thousand and five
2 Focus attention on the dates. Read the first two dates
aloud and write them on the board. Highlight that we
divide dates in English like this:
1 8 -4 0 1 9 -9 6
Focus attention on the last two dates. Read them aloud
and highlight the use of and in dates after 2000, and the
two forms for 2010. Write 2011, 2012, etc. on the board
and elicit the two possible forms: two thousand and
eleven/twenty eleven-, two thousand and twelve/twenty
twelve.
Ш 1 [CD 2: Track 16] Play the recording and get
students to repeat chorally and individually. Elicit
how we read each of the dates in exercise 1. Then get
students to practise saying the dates in closed pairs.
Monitor and check.
3 Elicit the answers to the questions. The second question
includes was for recognition. If students query it, just
tell them it’s the past of be, but do not go into a full
presentation of was!were at this point.
WHEN WAS SHE BORN? (SB P64)
was/were born
1 Focus attention on the photos. Ask Who was he/she?
about each of the people to check the names. Check
comprehension of When were they born? Focus
attention on the information about the people. Check
comprehension of writer, south, and north. Tell students
that they will hear a short description of each person
and that they have to write the year they were born.
■ЕЖИ [CD 2: Track 17] Play the recording and get
students to write the years. Check the answers with
the class.
Answers and tapescript
Jane Austen, the English writer, was born in 177S in Hampshire in the
south of England.
Luciano Pavarotti, the Italian opera singer, was born in 1935 in
Modena in the north of Italy.
POSSIBLE PROBLEMS
There are a lot of irregular verbs for students to learn
in the course of their studies. The initial presentation
is limited to a small number of verbs, and students
access them by matching to their present forms.
Students are referred to the irregular verb list on p i42
to help them do this and they should be encouraged
to refer to the list as they work through the remaining
units in the book.
T 9.1
Unit 9 • Times past 81](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-79-2048.jpg)
![2 П Д [CD 2: Track 18] Focus attention on the
sentences. They present the I and he/she/it forms with
was. Play the recording and get students to repeat
chorally and individually. Encourage students to
reproduce the weak form /э/in was.
3 Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Get students
to ask you the questions and give the answers. Drill
the language chorally and elicit a few exchanges in
open pairs. Students continue in closed pairs. Monitor
and check for correct use of am and was, and correct
pronunciation.
4 [CD 2: Track 19] This exercise presents the
you and they forms with were, the Wh- question form,
and also reviews dates. Play the recording and get
students just to listen. Play the recording again and get
students to repeat chorally and individually. Encourage
students to reproduce the weak form /э/in was and
were, and the correct intonation and sentence stress:
When were you born ?I was born in 1994.
Get students to practise the questions and answers
in open pairs and then in closed pairs. Monitor and
check for correct reading of dates, pronunciation, and
intonation.
GRAMMAR SPOT
5 Focus attention on the photo. Ask What’s her name?
(.Magalie Dromard.) How old do you think she is?
(Students guess her age.) Draw a family tree on the
board and review/check the following vocabulary:
brother, sister, father, mother, grandmother. Focus
attention on the names of Magalie’s family. Read
the names aloud so that students can recognize the
pronunciation. Ask When was Magalie born? and
elicit 1994.
Ш 1 [CD 2: Track 20] Tell the students they are
going to hear Magalie describing her family. Ask Whe
was Tristan born? Play the recording as far as His
name’s Tristan, and he was born in 1985. and elicit the
answer. Play the rest of the recording and get students
to complete their answers.
Get students to check their answers in pairs. Play the
recording again if necessary to allow students to ched
complete their answers. Check the answers with the
whole class.
Answers
Tristan 1985
Cecilia 1988
Matt 1996
Andre 1958
Ella 1961
Edith 1935
■ m
My name’s Magalie. It’s a French name, but I’m not French. I’m
English. I was born in 1994.1have two brothers and a sister. My
eldest brother’s a doctor. His name’sTristan, and he was born in
1985. My sister is also older than me. Her name’s Cecilia and she’s
ateacher, and she was born in 1988. And my little brother is Matt,
and he was born in 1996. He’s stilt a student. My father is French. His
name’s Andre, he’sfrom Marseilles, and he was born in, Ithink...
1958. My mother is English, her name’s Ella, she’s from Manchester,
and she was born in, er... 1961. My grandmother, who is my mother’:
mother, is called Edith. Isn’t that a lovely name?
She was born in Bristol in... I'm not sure, but I think about 1935.
Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Highlight
the uses of the present and past forms. Ask the first
two questions and get students to answer. Elicit the
complete questions and answers for the remaining
questions (They’re her parents. When were they born?
Andre was born in 1958. Ella was born in 1961.)
Drill the questions and answers chorally. Elicit
some questions and answers about the other people
in Magalie’s family with students working in open
pairs. Students continue in closed pairs. Monitor and
check for correct use of is/are, was/were born, dates,
pronunciation, and intonation.
6 Pre-teach/check grandfather, aunt, and uncle, drilling
the pronunciation. Demonstrate the activity by writing
the names of some of your family on the board. Focus
attention on the example conversation. Elicit similar
questions about your family from the class. Briefly
review he/she if students have problems with this and
make sure they use is and was correctly. Students
work in closed pairs and ask and answer about their
respective families. Tell them to make brief notes of
the dates when people in their partner’s family were
Focus attention on the chart. Read out the present
forms of to be and focus on the past examples with
were. Elicit the I form in the past (was). Then get
students to complete the rest of the chart.
Answers
Present Past
1 am was
You are were
He/She/It is was
We are were
They are were
Read Grammar Reference 9.1 on p i27 together
in class, and/or ask students to read it at home.
Encourage them to ask you questions about it.
82 Unit 9 • Times past](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-80-2048.jpg)
![born in preparation for the next exercise. Monitor and
check for correct use of is/are, was/were born, dates,
pronunciation, and intonation.
7 This is a transfer activity to consolidate the third
person singular form. Elicit information from several
students about their partner’s family.
a d d it io n a l m a t e r ia l
book Unit 9
rcises 1-4 Saying years
: RACTICE (SB p66)
were they?
Pre-teach/check the words in the box, and the
countries Pakistan and Austria. Drill the pronunciation
chorally and individually. Focus attention on the box.
Say Who was a singer? and elicit Michael Jackson.
Students write number 5 in the singer box. Get students
to continue matching the people to the jobs.
Answers
5 singer
2 musician
7 actor
1 writer
4 artist
3 princess
6 politician
8 racing driver
1 [CD 2: Track 21] Tell the students they are
going to hear when each of the people in exercise 1 was
born. Play the first sentence and focus on the example
about Shakespeare. Play the rest of the recording and
get students to write the other years.
Get students to check their answers in pairs. Play the
recording again if necessary to allow students to check/
complete their answers. Check the answers with the
whole class.
[ Answers and tapescript
1 Shakespeare was born in 1564 in Stratford-upon-Avon, England.
2 Mozart was born in Salzburg, Austria, in 1756.
3 Diana Spencer was born in Sandringham, England, in 1961.
4 Andy Warhol was born in 1928 in Pittsburgh, in the United States.
5 Michael Jackson was born in 1958 in Indiana, in the United States.
6 Benazir Bhutto was born in Karachi, Pakistan, in 1953.
7 Marilyn Monroe was born in 1926 in Los Angeles, in the United
States.
8 Ayrton Senna was born in 1960 in Sao Paulo, Brazil.
3 1 К Д [CD 2: Track 22] This exercise extends Wh-
question forms with was. Play the recording and get
students just to listen. Play the recording and get
students to repeat chorally and individually. Encourage
students to reproduce the weak form /э/in was and the
correct intonation and sentence stress.
Get students to practise the questions and answers in
open pairs and then in closed pairs. Monitor and check
for correct pronunciation and intonation.
Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Ask the
question about Andy Warhol and elicit the answer
{He was an artist.). Elicit the other questions with
Where and When and get students to practise in open
pairs. Students continue asking and answering in
closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct question
formation and intonation, and for correct reading of
the dates.
Negatives and pronunciation
4 This exercise introduces the negative forms wasn’t/
weren’t, and highlights the change in pronunciation of
the vowel from positive to negative. It also highlights
the need for contrastive stress when students correct
information.
PHOTOCOPIABLE ACTIVITY
UNIT 9 Who were they? ТВ pl46
Materials: one copy of the worksheet cut up per
pair of students
Procedure: Explain that students are going to
exchange information about famous people from
the past.
• Pre-teach/check scientist, dancer, and Jamaica.
• Divide the class into pairs. Assign the role of A or
В to each student and hand out the relevant half
of the worksheet.
• Elicit the questions students will need to ask: Who
was number {1)? What was his/herjob? When was
he/she born? Where was he/she born?
• Demonstrate the activity by getting one pair of
students to ask about picture 1 {Einstein). Remind
students to ask How do you spell that? when they
don’t know the spelling of the proper nouns.
• Students then complete the task, working in closed
pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of was,
reading of the dates, and use of the alphabet.
• Get students to compare their sheets to check they
have exchanged the information correctly.
Unit 9 • Times past 83](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-81-2048.jpg)
![ШH ' l [CD 2: Track 23] Focus attention on the
examples. Remind students that the shading indicates
the main stress of each sentence. Play the recording
and get students to repeat chorally and individually.
Encourage them to produce quite a wide voice range,
the correct sentence stress, and strong vowel forms in
wasn’t and weren’t.
5 Focus attention on the example and ask a student
to read it aloud. Students continue correcting the
information, working individually. Remind students
they will need a plural verb form in numbers 3 and 5.
[CD 2: Track 24] Play the recording and get
students to check their answers.
Play the recording again and get students to repeat.
If students have problems, highlight the weak and strong
verb forms in the Caution Box again and elicit where the
main stress goes on each sentence. Then get students to
repeat again. Get students to practise the sentences in
pairs, Student A reading the first sentence and Student В
the correction. Monitor and check for correct sentence
stress and correct pronunciation of the past verb forms.
Today and yesterday
6 Pre-teach/check yesterday and briefly review the days
of the week round the class. Briefly elicit other items
that can complete the sentences, e.g.
Today/Yesterday ...
I’m/I was in town/at the shops/at the cinema/in the
country/in the park
the weather is/was good/all right/bad
my parents are/were (see above examples)
Demonstrate the activity by saying where you and your
parents are today and were yesterday. Elicit an example
of the days of the week and the weather and then get
students to continue in closed pairs. This exercise can
be extended also to practise the negative. Monitor and
check for correct present and past verbs forms, and for
correct pronunciation.
Check it
7 Focus attention on the example. Students complete the
other sentences, working individually.
Get students to check their answers in pairs before
checking with the whole class. Get students to read
the complete sentences out in order to get more
pronunciation practice.
Answers
2 When were your parents born?
3 No, my parents weren’t both born in 1951. My father was born
in1951, and my mother was born in 1953.
4 I was on holiday in New York in 2008.
5 ‘Was he at home yesterday?’ ‘No, he wasn’t.'
6 ‘Were you at work yesterday?’ ‘Yes, we were.’
7 ‘Were they at school yesterday morning?’ ‘No, they weren’t.’
Focus attention on the Caution Box.
1/2 Focus attention on the examples and read
the full sentences aloud. Then read the
positive and negative verb forms in isolation,
emphasizing the change from the weak form
/э/in was and were to the strong forms /d/in
wasn’t and /з:/ in weren’t. Drill the sentences
and individual verb forms chorally and
individually.
Make sure students understand that wasn’t
and weren’t are contracted forms and what
the corresponding full forms are (was not
and were not).
T 9.10
Answers and tapescript
1 A Ayrton Senna was an actor.
В No, he wasn’t! He was a racing driver!
2 A Jane Austen was a princess.
В No, she wasn’t! She was a writer!
3 A Marilyn Monroe and Michael Jackson were Italian.
В No, they weren’t! They were American!
4 A Mozart was a scientist.
В No, he wasn’t! He was a musician!
5 A Luciano Pavarotti and MichaelJackson were politicians.
В No, they weren’t! They were singers!
6 A Benazir Bhutto was a writer.
В No, she wasn’t! She was a politician!
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 9
Exercises 5 -8 was/were - was born
Exercise 9 Reading - Andy Warhol and Princess Diana
READING AND SPEAKING (SB P68)
Past Simple - irregular verbs
ABOUT THE TEXT
A small set of irregular past forms is presented in
the context of a simple, true story about a painting.
Students access the verbs through their knowledge
of the Present Simple and the main focus is a lexical
rather than grammatical one. It is therefore not
84 Unit 9 • Times past](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-82-2048.jpg)
![advisable to go into a detailed presentation of the
Past Simple at this stage. This is covered in Unit 10.
The painting in the story is by the abstract artist
lackson Pollock (1912-1956). Born in Wyoming and
brought up in California, he studied at the Los Angeles
Manual Arts High School. In 1930, he moved to New
York, where he continued his art studies. In the 1940s,
he developed his characteristic technique of dripping
liquid paint directly onto a canvas on the floor, rather
than using a canvas on an easel and conventional
paints and brushes. In October 1945, he married
another American painter, Lee Krasner. By the late
1940s, Pollock had become well known both inside
and outside the art world, appearing in Life magazine
m 1949. In the 1950s, he underwent changes in style
in his work and he didn’t paint at all in the last year
of his life. He had suffered from alcoholism for many
vears and his career was cut short when he died in a
car crash when driving under the influence of alcohol.
People continued to be fascinated by Pollocks life and
work. A biographical film was made in 2000 and the
chance purchase of a Jackson Pollock in a charity shop
m 1992 for $5 caused huge interest. This is the true
story that appears in exercises 2 and 3 of this section.
Check the meaning ofpresent and past and review
the meaning of the verbs in their present form.
Demonstrate the activity by eliciting the past of be
(was). Refer students to the Irregular verbs list on p i42.
Get students to match the verbs forms, working in pairs.
[CD 2: Track 25] Play the recording through
?nce and get students to check their answers.
Answers and tapescript
^resent Past
go went
come came
~ave had
oe was
-axe made
see saw
ruy bought
say said
5nd found
Г
' ? 'ay the recording again and get students to repeat
chorally and individually. Make sure students aren’t
; : nfused by the silent g in bought - /bo:t/. Say
± e present forms and get students to say the past
j equivalent round the class. Refer students to Grammar
Reference 9.2 on p i27.
T 9.11
2 Focus attention on the photo and ask When was
Jackson Pollock born? (1912). Use the dates to teach
When did he die? (1956). Ask What do you know about
Jackson Pollock? Elicit any information students know,
in LI if appropriate.
Pre-teach/check the following vocabulary, using the
pictures where appropriate: painting, charity shop,
an expert,fingerprint, rich, film company, fo r sale,
art gallery.
Focus on the example to demonstrate the activity.
Students continue matching the pictures and sentences,
working in pairs. Check the answers with the whole
class.
Answers
2 f 3d 4 c 5 e 6 a
3 Tell students they are going to read a newspaper article
of the story about the painting. Focus attention on the
examples to demonstrate the activity. Tell students to
complete the rest of the story, working individually.
Encourage them not to worry if they come across new
words and to try to understand them from the context.
Put students in pairs. Ask them to take it in turns to
read sections of the article aloud and so compare their
answers.
Answers and tapescript
‘Who isJackson Pollock?’
Teri Horton, a 60-year-old lady from Los Angeles, (1) went shopping
in San Bernardino, a town in California, USA. She (2) was in a charity
shop when she (3) saw a colourful, modern painting. She (4) bought
it for $5.
An art teacher saw the painting and (5) said it was by the
American artist, Jackson Pollock. ‘Who isJackson Pollock?’ said Teri.
She (6) had no idea that he was a very famous modern painter.
Many art experts (7) came to her house to see the painting. Some
said that it wasn’t a ‘Pollock’, but one expert, Peter Paul Biro,
(8) found Pollock’s fingerprint on the back. Biro said, ‘This is a
real Pollock painting.’
A rich businessman was happy to pay $9 million for it, but Teri
said, ‘No! I want $50 million.’
In 2007, a Canadian TV company (9) made a film about Teri and
the painting. It is now for sale in an art gallery in Toronto.
Price: $50 million!
■ Ы > 1 [CD 2: Track 26] Play the recording and get
students to check their answers.
4 Get students to cover the text in exercise 3. Focus
attention back on the pictures. You could re-tell the
story as a class activity first and then get students to
repeat in pairs. Alternatively, set up the pairwork first
and then re-tell as a class in a checking phase. Either
Unit 9 • Times past 85](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-83-2048.jpg)
![way, when you monitor, don’t expect students to
reproduce the story with complete accuracy. Do not
over-correct in the feedback stage - just pick up on
common errors in the irregular past forms.
SUGGESTION
If appropriate, you can ask students to research
someone famous from the past and find some
basic biographical details, e.g. when born, where/
what studied, became famous for ..., married, died.
Students then exchange information in pairs/small
groups, or give simple presentations to the class.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 9
Exercises 10 and 11 Past Simple - Irregular verbs
Pre-teach/check a mess, go to the gym, and early. Focus
attention on the example and then get students to
complete the sentences, working individually.
H I H [CD 2: Track 27] Play the recording and get
students to check their answers. If students need more
help with pronunciation, get them to read the sentence
aloud, drilling any difficult lines with the whole class.
Answers and tapescript
1 Yesterday I met my mother at one o’clock and we had lunch in
a restaurant.
2 I hate doing housework, but last Sunday I did a lot because my
house was a mess.
3 Yesterday was a lovely day so I went for a walk in the park.
4 Usually I walk, but yesterday I went to work by bus.
5 On Saturday night I went to agreat party. I had a really goodtime.
6 I did a lot of exercise yesterday. I went to the gym.
7 The party wasn’t very good so we went home early.
VOCABULARY (SB P70)
have, do, go
This section highlights an important feature of English -
the range of meanings that can be generated from
high-frequency verbs like have, do, and go by creating
collocations with nouns, noun phrases, or adverbs. Students
have already met some of the collocations as lexical items in
earlier units, e.g. have a shower, have lunch, go shopping, so
this section provides revision and extension.
1 Focus attention on the pictures and the examples with
have, do, and go. Get students to read the sentences
aloud.
2 Focus attention on the examples with each verb. Elicit
another example for each one. Students complete the
task, working in pairs. Check the answers, making
sure students can pronounce the collocations correctly.
Check students understand the difference between do
my homework and do the housework.
Answers
have: a shower / a good time / breakfast
do: the housework / some exercise
go: for awalk / on holiday / home / to work
3 Give students time to write the past forms. Then check
the answers.
Answers
Present Past
have had
do did
go went
86 Unit 9 • Times past
Talking about you
5 This gives students the opportunity to personalize some
of the collocations. With weaker students, go through
the sentences and elicit what type of information
students need to provide in the second gap. Elicit a
possible answer for number 1. Students then complete
the task, working individually. Be prepared to feed in a
range of vocabulary for numbers 2 and 3. Elicit a range
of possible answers when checking the task.
Answers
Possible answers given in brackets.
1 Yesterday I had a shower at (seven) o’clock.
2 This morning I had breakfast at (eight) o’clock. I had coffee and
(croissants).
3 Last Saturday Iwent shoppingand I bought (apair oftrainers and
aCD).
4 Last weekend I did my homework at (five) o’clock on (Sunday).
5 Last year I went on holiday to (Morocco).
6 Elicit one or two examples of what students did.
Encourage them to describe the activities in a
connected way rather than just read out their
completed sentences. Put students in pairs to exchange
information. Monitor and check for correct use of past
tenses and the collocations. Highlight common errors,
but don’t correct every mistake students make.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Teacher’s Resource Disc
Communicative activity Unit 9 Yesterday
Workbook Unit 9
Exercise 12 Vocabulary - have/do/go](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-84-2048.jpg)
![EVERYDAY ENGLISH (SB P7l)
•Vhen’s your birthday?
I Focus attention on the months. Elicit the second month
of the year (February) and get students to continue
writing the months in order in the list.
[CD 2: Track 28] Play the recording and get
students to check their answers.
Answers and tapescript
January, February, March, April, May,June, July, August, September,
October, November, December
Focus attention on the stress shading on each word.
Play the recording again and get students to repeat
chorally and individually. Get students to say the
months in order round the class. Check for accurate
pronunciation and drill the months again if necessary.
1 Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles.
Check comprehension of So is my birthday! Drill the
language chorally and then get students to stand up and
practise the language in a mingle activity. Get them to
note down the months of other students’ birthdays as
they ask. Elicit the answers to the follow-up questions
and establish which is the most common month for
birthdays in your class.
3 This exercise presents ordinal numbers. Check that
students understand the difference between cardinal
numbers and ordinal numbers with the following
examples: There are seven days in a week and there are
twelve months in a year. Thefirst day is Monday and the
seventh day is Sunday. Thefirst month is January and
the twelfth month is December. Get students to tell you
the ordinal numbers (first, seventh, and twelfth).
[CD 2: Track 29] Focus attention on the
numbers and on how we form the abbreviations with
the numeral and the last two letters of the ordinal
number. Play the recording and get students to repeat
chorally and individually. Write the abbreviated
numbers on the board in random order and elicit the
ordinal from individual students.
4 Elicit the first ordinal as an example (sixteenth). Get
students to say the other ordinal numbers, working in
pairs. Monitor and check, noting down any common
errors.
[CD 2: Track 30] Play the recording and let
students check their answers. If necessary, drill any
ordinals students had problems with.
T 9.16
T 9.15
T 9.14
5 1 CAгД [CD 2: Track 31] This exercise presents how
we read dates in English. Tell students they are going
to hear eight dates and that they should write down the
correct ordinal. Play the first date and elicit the answer
(thefirst o fJanuary). Play the rest of the dates and get
students to complete the task.
Get students to check their answers in pairs before
checking with the whole class.
Answers and tapescript
the first ofJanuary
the third of March
the seventh of April
the twentieth of May
the second ofJune
the twelfth of August
the fifteenth of November
the thirty-first of December
Focus attention on the Caution Box and highlight
the use of the and the ordinal in spoken dates and
the use of the numerals, but not the in writing.
If appropriate, point out that students may also
see dates written as 3rd January, 10th March, etc.
Ask students to focus on the date in the American
format. Ask 4: day or month? (month - April) and
10: day or month? (day). Remind students that in
American English you put the month first.
Elicit the dates in exercise 5 orally and then get
students to continue practising in closed pairs. Monitor
and check for correct use of the, correct ordinals, and
pronunciation of the months.
6 Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Get students
to ask you the questions, and give answers. Drill the
language chorally and then get students to practise in
open pairs. Students continue in groups. Monitor and
check for correct falling intonation in the questions
and for the correct use of prepositions - on + date and
at + time. Tell the class the date and time of your birth,
following the example in the last speech bubble. Elicit
more examples from the class.
7 This unit ends of with the song Happy Birthday!
The tune should be familiar to students as it is often
used in other languages with adapted wording and
often appears in English-speaking films and TV
programmes. In LI if possible, explain that we usually
sing Happy Birthday! when the birthday cake is served.
Children and some adults have candles on their cake
(with children, one for each year), which they blow
out when the singers finish the song. Some people also
make a wish.
Unit 9 • Times past 87](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-85-2048.jpg)
![[CD 2: Track 32] Ask some simple questions
about the photograph: Why is there a party? {It’s Sarah’s
birthday). How old is she? (About seven). Who is at the
party? (Sarah’sfriends). What is on the table infront of
Sarah? (her birthday cake). Play the recording through
once and let students just listen. Play the recording
again and get students to join in the song.
T 9.18
Happy Birthday to you!
Happy Birthday to you!
Happy Birthday, dear Sarah!
Happy Birthday to you!
Hip hip! Hooray!
SUGGESTIONS
You can give students regular practice in dates by
asking What’s todays date? at the beginning of every
class. Encourage students to write the dates in full
at the top of any written work, i.e. January 3rd 2013,
rather than 3/1/13.
When one of the students has a birthday, get students
to sing the song to him/her and ask them about
their day.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 9
Exercises 13-15 Months and dates
Don’t forgetl
Workbook Unit 9
Exercises 16-20 Revision
Word list
Ask the students to turn to p i35-6 and go through
the words with them. Ask them to learn the words for
homework, and test them on a few in the following lesson.
Teacher’s Resource Disc
Unit 9 Test
Unit 9 Skills test
Video/DVD
Unit 9 Steve Jobs: a life on iTools and iTutor
T 9.18
88 Unit 9 • Times past](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-86-2048.jpg)
![Notes on the unit
Introduce the theme of the unit and review the expression
have a good/great time by writing the sentence starter on
the board and eliciting possible endings, e.g. I had a great
time (last weekend/at my party/at the beach).
STARTER (SB p72)
1 This section reviews days, present and past forms, and
key time expressions. Focus attention on the questions
and elicit the answers. Make sure students use is/was
and pronounce the days correctly.
2 Focus attention on the sentences. Go through and ask
Past or present?about each one, and also elicit which verb
is used in each sentence. Demonstrate the activity by
eliciting the time expression for the first line (now). Elicit
from students the fact that the other time expressions are
not possible and establish that this is because they refer
to the past. Students then match the remaining lines and
time expressions. Check the answers.
3 Elicit the past of have and then get students to write the
remaining Past Simple forms. If necessary, refer them
back to the Irregular verbs list on p i42. Check the
answers, drilling the pronunciation as necessary.
YESTERDAY WAS SUNDAY (SB P72)
Past Simple - regular and irregular
1 This section reviews and extends the irregular verbs
students met in Unit 9 and also presents regular -ed
forms. Focus attention on the photo and ask What’s her
name? (Angie.) Where is she? (In the kitchen at home.)
Tell students they are going to hear Angie talking about
what she did yesterday. Focus attention on the list of
verbs and ask Past or present? Check comprehension
of each verb and get students to tell you the infinitive
of the irregular past forms. (If students query the
regular -ed endings, tell them this is the ending for
most verbs in the Past Simple, but do not go into a long
explanation at this stage.)
[CD 2: Track 33] Play the first line of the
recording as far as eleven thirty and focus attention on
the example. Play the recording through to the end and
get students to tick the relevant verbs. Get students to
check their answers in pairs before checking with the
whole class. Finally, point to the list of actions Angie
did yesterday and ask What day was it? (Sunday).
Answers
got up late
had a big breakfast
went shopping
stayed at home
cleaned her flat
did some work
watched TV
went to bed early
T10.1
Angie’s weekend
Yesterday was Sunday, so I got up late, about 11.30.1had a big
breakfast, orange juice, toast, eggs, and coffee. Then I went
shopping, just to the supermarket, and I bought some tea, some
milk, and the Sunday papers. Then Ijust stayed at home for the rest
of the day. In the morning I cleaned my flat and in the afternoon
I did some work on my computer for a bit, then in the evening I
watched a film on TV. I went to bed early, about 11.00.1was tired.
I had a late night on Saturday.
GRAMMAR SPOT
1 Focus attention on the list of verbs and on the
example cooked. Ask students to write the other past
forms. Check the answers with the whole class. Elicit
the last two letters in each of the verb forms: -ed.
Answers
It/ cook cooked watch watched
Id/ play played listen listened
/id/ start started want wanted
Explain that these are regular verbs and so are
different from the ones students met in Unit 9.
Establish that adding -ed is the rule for the formation
of the Past Simple in the majority of verbs.
[CD 2: Track 34] Pronounce the sounds
/t/, /d/, and /id/. Then play the recording. Get
students to repeat chorally and individually. Make
sure students don’t divide out the -ed ending in past
forms with just one syllable, e.g. */koked/. Point out
that the ending is pronounced /id/ when the final
sound of the base verb is /t/. Encourage students to
reproduce the endings accurately, but do not overdo
this if students find it difficult. It is enough at this
stage for them to perceive the difference.
Answers
We’re at school now.
I went to the US in 2002.
I did my homework yesterday.
Answers
get-got buy - bought
have - had do-did
go- went see - saw
T10.1
T 10.2
90 Unit 10 • We had a great time!](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-88-2048.jpg)
![/t/ cooked
watched
/d/ played
listened
/id/ started
wanted
2 Read the Past Simple forms aloud. Check students
understand there is no difference in the verb forms
for different persons in the Past Simple. Contrast
this with the third person -s in the Present Simple.
Read Grammar Reference 10.1 on p i27 together
in class, and/or ask students to read it at home.
Encourage them to ask you questions about it.
Focus on the speech bubble and highlight the use of
Then to link a series of actions. Elicit from the class
••chat Angie did yesterday. Students then take it in turns
to say what Angie did, working in closed pairs. Monitor
and check for pronunciation of the -ed regular endings
but do not overcorrect if students have problems
during this initial production stage.
Refer students back to the list in exercise 1. Get
students to underline the things that they did last
Sunday. Demonstrate the activity by telling the class
things that you did on that day. If appropriate, write
the sentences on the board and underline the verbs,
e.g. I had a big breakfast. Elicit a few more short
examples from the class and then get students to
continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for
correct use of regular and irregular past forms.
DITIONAL MATERIAL_______________________________________________
book Unit 10
rcises 1-4 Past Simple - Regular and irregular verbs
stions and negatives
This section presents the Past Simple question and
negative forms. Focus attention on the photo. Ask
What’s her name? (Angie.) and What’s his name? (Rick.)
Where are they? (At work.) Tell students they are going
to hear Angie and Rick talking about the weekend.
Pre-teach/check get up early, cook a meal, and roast beef.
[CD 2: Track 35] Play the first two lines of the
recording and focus attention on the example. Play the
recording to the end and get students to complete the
conversation. Get students to check their answers in
pairs. Play the recording again if necessary. Check the
answers with the whole class.
Answers and tapescript
A =Angie, R =Rick
A Hi, Rick. Did you have a good weekend?
R Yes, I did, thanks.
A What did you do yesterday?
R Well, I got up early and I played tennis with some friends.
A You got up early on Sunday! /
R Well, yes, it was such a lovelyday.
A Where did you play tennis?
R In the park. We had lunch in the cafe there.
A Oh, great! Did you go oijt in the evening?
R No, I didn’t. I cooked a meal for my sister.
A Mmm! What did you have?
R Roast beef. It was delicipus! What about you, Angie? Didyou
have a good weekend?
2 a t lH f [CD 2: Track 36] Give students time to read
through the questions. Play the recording and get them
to repeat chorallyAnd individually. Encourage falling
intonation on the Wh- questions. Get students to listen
and repeat again if necessary. Focus on the use of bold
to highlight the form of Wh- and yes/no questions in
the Past Simple.
Students practise the conversation in pairs. Monitor
and check for pronunciation and the correct intonation
~4nAhe questions. If students have problems, play
the recording again and drill the questions, then get
students to repeat the task.
3 Explain that students are now going to hear Rick
asking Angie about her weekend. Ask What did Angie
do on Sunday? and elicit any examples students can
remember from exercise 1 on p72. Pre-teach/check go
to a party, oldfriends (= friends for a long time), and
too tired. Focus attention on the example and Rick’s
first question.
[CD 2: Track 37] Play the recording and get
students to complete the rest of Rick’s questions, using
the cues to help them.
Play the recording again and let students check or
complete their answers. Elicit what Angie did at the
weekend.
Answers
2 Who did you see at the party?
3 Did you go out on Sunday?
4 Did you do anything on Sunday evening?
Angie went shopping on Saturday morning. Then she went to a
party on Saturday evening. She met one or two old friends. She
stayed at home on Sunday. She watched afilm on TV on Sunday
evening.
T10.3
T 10.5
Unit 10 • We had a great time! 91](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-89-2048.jpg)
![Т 10.5
А =Angie, R =Rick
R What about you, Angie? Did you have a good weekend?
A Oh yes, I did, very good.
R What did you do on Saturday?
A Welt, on Saturday morning I went shopping. Then on Saturday
evening I went to a party. It was great!
R Who did you see at the party?
A Oh, one or two old friends.
R Did you go out on Sunday?
A Oh no, I didn’t. I didn’t go out because I was too tired. I stayed at
home most of the day.
R Did you do anything on Sunday evening?
A No, I didn’t do much. Ijust watched afilm on TV. I didn’t go to
bed late. About 11.00.
4 Ill'll [CD 2: Track 38] This exercise highlights the
negative form. Give students time to read through
the sentences. Play the recording and get them to
repeat chorally and individually. Encourage accurate
pronunciation of didn’t. Ask What didn’t Angie do?
Elicit answers using the she form.
Answers
She didn’t goout because she was too tired.
She didn’t do much on Sunday.
She didn’t go to bed late.
5 Focus attention on the examples. Highlight the
pronunciation of didn’t. Give students time to say the
other things Angie and Rick didn’t do. Monitor and
check for correct formation of the negatives. A common
error is the repetition of the positive past form after the
auxiliary didn’t - * He didn’t watched TV. If students have
this problem, highlight the errors in a general feedback
session, then refer students to the Grammar Spot.
GRAMMAR SPOT
6 Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Get students
to ask you the question and give two or three pieces of
information in your answer, e.g. I didn’t go out. I stayed
at home. I cooked dinner and then I watched TV. Drill
the questions and answers chorally and individually.
Elicit other questions and answers in open pairs.
Students continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check
for accurate formation and pronunciation of Past
Simple questions and negatives. If you have time, get
students to report back about their partner to the rest
of the class or to another student.
PHOTOCOPIABLE ACTIVITY
UNIT 10 What did she do yesterday? ТВ pl47
Materials: one copy of the worksheet cut up per pair
of students
Procedure: Explain that students are going to play a
memory game based on pictures of two flats, which
show what the occupants did yesterday.
• Pre-teach/check write a letter and irregular past
wrote, read a book/newspaper and irregular past
read /red/, have a bath, have a shower, and play the
guitar /gi'ta:/.
• Divide the class into pairs. Assign the role of A or
В to each student and hand out the relevant half of
the worksheet.
• Demonstrate the activity with two confident
students. Get Student A to look carefully at the
picture of Jane’s flat for 30 seconds and then put it
out of sight. Student В then uses the question cues
to ask about what Jane did yesterday. Pre-teach
I can’t remember.
• Get students to complete the task in closed pairs
for Student As picture. Students then change roles
with Student В looking at Paul’s flat for 30 seconds
and Student A using the question cues to ask about
what Paul did yesterday.
• Monitor and check for correct question formation
and use of regular and irregular past forms. (With a
weaker class, you could put all the A and В students
together in separate groups to give them time to
write out the cues as full questions. Then divide the
class into A and В pairs and continue as above.)
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 10
Exercises 5 -8 Past Simple - Questions and negatives
PRACTICE (SB p74)
Grammar
1 This exercise consolidates positive and negative Past
Simple forms. Focus attention on the example. Give
students time to complete the sentences, working
individually.
1/2 Working individually, students complete the
questions with did and the negatives with didn’t.
Make sure students understand that didn’t is the
contracted form of did not. Remind students that
did is used for all persons in Past Simple questions.
Refer students to Grammar Reference 10.2 on p i27.
92 Unit 10 • We had a great time!](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-90-2048.jpg)
![Let students check their answers in pairs before
checking with the class.
Answers
1 had 5 did... buy, bought
3 did 6 did... do, didn’t go, went
i didn’t clean
you have a good weekend?
Read out the list of activities in the questionnaire and
3et students to point to the relevant pictures.
Answers
The pictures show: go to the cinema, play football, have a meal
г arestaurant, do a lot of housework, do a lot of homework,
goshopping.
Tell students they are going to use the questionnaire
to ask and answer questions about what they did last
weekend. Explain that there are three columns in the
questionnaire - one for you, one for the teacher, and
one for your partner. Get students to tick the activities
they did last weekend in the You column.
Exercises 4 and 5 consolidate Yes/No questions in the
Past Simple. Focus attention on the speech bubbles.
Drill the question chorally and individually and then
give your answer. Get students to ask you the rest of the
questions and record the answers in the Teacher column.
Demonstrate the activity in open pairs and then get
students to continue in closed pairs, recording their
partners answers in the Partner column. Monitor and
check for correct Past Simple question formation and
short answers.
Focus attention on the example in the speech bubble.
Highlight the contrastive stress:
Maria went to the cinema, but ! didn’t. I went shopping.
Elicit two or three other examples from individual
students. Then get students to tell the class about what
they and their partner did last weekend.
£<ing conversation
This section highlights the importance of follow-up
questions in keeping a conversation going and also
introduces useful expressions for responding and
showing interest, e.g. Really?, Oh, good!, etc.
Read the rubric and example as a class. Make sure
students understand that В s response shows a range of
possible follow-up questions.
Focus attention on the example and ask two students
:o read it aloud. Put students in pairs to complete the
responses in numbers 2-5, using the cues.
[CD 2: Track 39] Play the recording and let
students check their answers.
Answers and tapescript
1 A I went shopping yesterday.
В Really? What did you buy?
2 A We went to that new Italian restaurant last night.
В Mmm! What did you have?
3 A We saw a lot of our friends in the coffee bar.
В Oh! Who did you see?
4 A I played tennis at the weekend.
В Oh, really? Where did you play?
5 A The party on Saturday was great!
В Oh, good! What time did you leave?
Play the recording again and get students to repeat the
exchanges. Encourage them to imitate the intonation
in the responses in order to show interest. If students
sound a little ‘flat’, give an exaggerated model of the
voice range and get students to repeat again.
7 This task gives students freer practice by extending the
conversations in exercise 6 with their own ideas. Ask two
confident students to read out the model conversation.
Remind them of the need to sound interested. Check
what one refers back to in lines 6 and 7 (coat).
Put students in pairs and let them choose the
conversation from exercise 6 that they want to
continue. Alternatively, assign a conversation to
different pairs if you want all of the conversations to
be covered. With weaker students, elicit another model
from the whole class and write it on the board, e.g.
A The party on Saturday was great!
В Oh, good! What time did you leave?
A About one o’clock in the morning.
В Who was there?
A Marta, Yuko, and Adam. And some other people
from school.
В Did you dance?
A Yes, of course!
Give students time to write their conversations.
Monitor and help with vocabulary as necessary.
[CD 2: Track 40] Play the recording and get
students to compare their conversations.
Answers and tapescript
1 A I went shopping yesterday.
В Really? Where did you go?
A Oxford Street.
В Oh! What did you buy?
A Well, I wanted a new coat and I went into Selfridges.
В Did you find one?
A Yes, I did. Ifound a beautiful black one. It was only £50!
T 10.7
T 10.8
Unit 10 • We had a great time! 93](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-91-2048.jpg)
![2 A Tom and I went to that new Italian restaurant last night.
В Mmm! What did you have?
A Well, I had pasta and Tom had pizza.
В Did you enjoy it?
A Very much. And it wasn’t expensive.
3 A We saw a lot of our friends in the coffee bar.
В Oh! Who did you see?
A Angie and Rick and some other friends from work.
В I don’t think I know them.
A They’re very nice.
4 A I played tennis at the weekend.
В Oh, really? Where did you play?
A In the park. It was lovely. It was so sunny.
В What a great thing to do on a Sunday morning!
5 A The party on Saturday was great!
В Oh, good! What time did you leave?
A Three in the morning. The music was fantastic!
В Did you dance?
A Of course! All night!
Let students roleplay the conversations they wrote
for the rest of the class. Monitor and check for good
intonation and that the students sound interested. If
you are short of time, let some of the students do their
roleplay in a subsequent lesson.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 10
Exercise 9 Making conversation - Was it a good match?
Time expressions
8 This task reviews and extends time expressions often
used with the Past Simple. It includes the prepositions
at, in, and on, and last + time period.
Focus attention on the phrase I went there ... and the
example with on. Tell students that they can use the
words in the box more than once. Students complete
the diagram, working in pairs. Check the answers with
the class.
Give one or two true examples that use the time
expressions, e.g. I saw my parents last week. I lived in
Paris in 2007. Elicit more true examples from the class.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Teacher’s Resource Disc
Communicative activity Unit 10 A love story
Workbook Unit 10
Exercises 10 Time expressions - in/at/on
Check it
9 Focus attention on the first pair of sentences and elic:
the correct sentence as an example. Students continui
working individually to complete the task.
Get students to check their answers in pairs before
checking with the whole class.
Answers
1 She bought an expensive car.
2 I played tennis on Sunday.
3 Did they go shopping yesterday?
4 What did you do last weekend?
5 ‘Did you like the film?’ ‘Yes, I did.’
6 I sawJohn last night.
SUGGESTION
Take the opportunity to review the Past Simple by
getting students to ask and answer questions about
the weekend in the first lesson that you have each
week. This provides a useful review and also highlights
the value of what students are learning in a realistic
situation. Also encourage students to use the response
expressions Really?, etc. when they are making
conversation in later lessons, e.g. when talking about
the weekend/a trip/a holiday/a party, etc.
VOCABULARY AND SPEAKING (SB P76)
Sport and leisure
1 Focus attention on the photographs and the example.
Students continue matching the photos and activities.
Check the answers with the whole class, drilling the
pronunciation as necessary.
Answers
[2] tennis QT] cards
Q] football Q3] walking
[4] skiing 1 ! swimming
0 golf 0 dancing
[8] sailing US cycling
|T| windsurfing [9] fishing
Ш rugby Щ horse-riding
[5] ice-skating
Answers
on/last Monday
at/last night
at 8 o’clock
last week
in 2007
last year
on/last Sunday morning
94 Unit 10 • We had a great time!](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-92-2048.jpg)
![This exercise focuses on collocations with play and
jo + -ing. Focus attention on the examples and then get
students to complete the categorizing, working in pairs.
Check the answers with the whole class. As a general
rule, you could tell students that sports with a ball,
and games like cards, chess, etc. take play, and physical
activities ending in -ing take go.
Answers
play go +-ing
tennis skiing
•'ootball sailing
golf windsurfing
-ugby ice-skating
cards walking
swimming
dancing
cycling
fishing
horse-riding
I This exercise practises Yes/No and Wh- questions with
the collocations from exercise 2. Focus attention on
the speech bubbles. Highlight the use of the tenses -
Present Simple to talk about general habits in the
present and Past Simple to ask When? in the past.
Drill the language chorally and individually. Elicit two
or three more examples from students working in open
pairs. Students continue in closed pairs. Monitor and
check for correct use of tenses, correct use ofplay and
go, and pronunciation.
I This exercise practises the third person forms. Focus
attention on the examples. Elicit more examples from
students about their partner. Check for accurate use of
the third person forms in the Present Simple. Highlight
common errors and get students to correct them.
ODITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 10
Exercises 11 and 12 Sports and leisure activities
USTENING AND SPEAKING (SBP77)
ack and Millie’s holiday
This section gives further practice of the Present
Simple and Past Simple in the context of holidays. It
also reviews the sport and leisure activities from the
Vocabulary and speaking section.
Revise the months of the year by getting students
to say them round the class. Check for accurate
pronunciation.
Then get students to say the months that correspond to
each season in their country, e.g. In England, spring is
March, April, and May.
Focus attention on the speech bubble and give an
example about yourself. Elicit more examples from the
class, and then get students to continue in pairs.
Focus attention on the photos. Ask Who are they? (Jack
and Millie.) What places are in the photos, do you think?
(possible answers: Switzerland or Germany; Italy or
France). Focus attention on the lists of information for
usually and last year.
Check comprehension of villa and diners (small
restaurants that sell simple, good-value food). Check
students recognize that the first list is in the Present
Simple and the second is in the Past Simple.
ЧИАЯ [CD 2: Track 41] Focus attention on the
example. Explain that students need to listen and
underline the correct information about Jack and
Millie’s holidays. Make sure they understand that they
will need to look at both columns of answers as they
listen. Play the recording through once and get students
to complete the task.
Get students to check their answers in pairs. Play the
recording through again and get students to check/
complete their answers. Check the answers with the
whole class.
But last year they...
went in winter
went to Colorado
stayed in a hotel
went out to restaurants
went skiing/ice-skating
went out every night
had a good time
Answers
They usually...
go in summer
goto Italy
stay in a villa
eat at home
go swimming
play cards
have a good time
J=jack, M =Millie
J Well, we usually go on holiday in summer...
M Yes, usually we goto Italy for our holidays, don’t we?
j But last year we did something different. We had a holiday in
winter, and we went to Colorado, in America.
M Because we wanted to learn to ski, you see, and we wanted a
change. In Italy we always stay in a villa...
J ... but in Aspen, Colorado, we stayed in a very nice hotel, and
because we were in a hotel, we had all our meals in restaurants.
M And that’s very special for us. In Italy we cook at home in the
villa. But in Colorado we went to a different restaurant every
night!
J In Italy, because it’s summer and it’s hot, we go swimming in
the swimming pool, and sit in the sun, and I play tennis
sometimes...
Unit 10 • We had a great time! 95](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-93-2048.jpg)
![M Jack loves his tennis, don’t you, darling? Ч 1 Я М [C D 2: T ra ck 42] Give students time to
J I do, but of course last year in Colorado we learned to ski, so complete the sentences. Then play the recording and
we went skiing every day. And Millie, you went ice-skating, get students to check their answers,
didn’t you?
M We both went ice-skating! Answers and tapescript
J That’s right! It was great fun! In Italy in the evening, we usually 1 Last yearJack and Millie didn’t go on holiday in summer. They
play cards or read... went in winter.
M ... but last year in Colorado we went out everynight, and we 2 They didn’t go to Italy.They went to Colorado,
met lots of lovely people, didn’t we? 3 They stayed in a hotel. They didn’t stay in a villa.
J We did. We had a really good time. 4 They didn’t eat at home. They ate in restaurants.
M And we have a good time in Italy, too,don’twe? 5 They went skiing. They didn’t go swimming.
J Mmm, we’re very lucky.
4 This exercise practises questions in the Present Simple
and Past Simple. Focus attention on the speech bubbles,
Drill the questions and answers, encouraging students
to reproduce the correct sentence stress:
When do they usually go on holiday?
When did they go last year?
Elicit the questions and answers for the second prompt
in open pairs. (Where do they usually go on holiday?
(To Italy). Where did they go last year? (They went to
Colorado.) Remind students that the questions for the
last prompt are a different type (Yes/No questions). Get
students to ask and answer in closed pairs. Monitor
and check for correct question formation in both
tenses, for correct sentence stress, and for correct use
of prepositions to and in. Check the answers by getting
students to ask and answer in open pairs across the
class. Feed back on any common errors if necessary.
5 This exercise consolidates positive and negative Past
Simple forms. Establish that this exercise is about Jack
and Millies holiday last year and so students will need to
use the Past Simple tense. Focus attention on the example
and then point out that students sometimes need a
positive verb in the first gap. With a weaker group, you
might like to elicit the verbs students will need to use
before they start: 2 - go, 3 - stay, 4 - eat, 5 - go.
SPEAKING AND WRITING (SBP78)
My last holiday
This section allows students to personalize the language
of holidays and the Past Simple with guided speaking
practice that leads into a writing task.
1 Focus attention on the photos and pre-teach/check the
activities shown (sitting on the beach, going sightseeing,
walking in the mountains, going camping). Check
comprehension and pronunciation of the activities in
the list. The spelling of mountains Гmauntinz/ and
sightseeing I'seatsv.ipl may create problems for students
so be prepared to drill these chorally and individually.
Give an example of your own favourite type of holiday
and say what you like and don’t like doing. Write the
activities on the board and put a tick (/ ) next to what
you like and a cross (/) next to what you don’t. Give
students time to complete the list in the same way.
Demonstrate the comparing activity by asking a
student to read out his/her choices as full sentences
using I like and I don’t like. Respond to the student with
expressions like Me too. Oh, yes? Really? Get another
pairs of students to compare in open pairs. Students
then take it in turns to read out their choices in closed
pairs. Remind students to show they are listening by
using the above response expressions.
2 This stage uses a speaking activity to activate students’
ideas for the writing task in exercise 4. Focus attention
on the examples in the speech bubbles and then
on the question cues in the list. Elicit the complete
questions and a range of possible answers. Write any
new vocabulary on the board and review/check any
irregular Past Simple forms students may need. Also
focus on the use of ago in the Grammar Spot (see notes
on next page). Questions and possible answers:
Where did you go?
I went to Spain!Cuba!the south of France/Riga, in Latvia.
Answers
• Where do they usually goon holiday? To Italy.
Where did they go last year? They went to Colorado.
• Where do they usually stay? In a villa.
Where did they stay last year? They stayed in a hotel.
• Where do they usually eat? At home.
Where did they eat last year? They went out to restaurants.
• What do they usually do? They usually go swimming and play
tennis.
What did they do last year? They went skiing and ice-skating.
• Do they usually have a good time? Yes, they do.
Did they have a good time last year? Yes, they did.
96 Unit 10 • We had a great time!](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-94-2048.jpg)
![[CD 2: Track 43] Play the first line of the
conversation and elicit the words for the first two gaps
{help you). Play the rest of the recording and get
students to complete the conversations. If necessary,
play the recording again and allow students to complete
any missing answers. Then check the answers with the
whole class.
Answers and tapescript
1 A Hello. Can I help you?
В Yes. Can I have a map of the city, please?
A Of course. Here you are.
В Can you show me where we are on the map?
A Yes. We’re here in Regent Street in the city centre.
2 С We want to go on a bus tour of the city.
A That’sfine. The next bus leaves at 10o’clock. It takes about
an hour and a half.
С Where does the bus gofrom?
A It goes from Trafalgar Square, but you can get on and off when
you want.
3 D I want to visit the British Museum. What time does it open?
A It opens at 10 in the morning and closes at 5.30 in
the evening.
D How much is it to get in?
A It’sfree.
Check pronunciation of the proper nouns: Regent Street
/'ri:d33nt stri:t/, Trafalgar Square /tro'faelgo skwea/,
and British Museum /'britij mju'ziam/. Get students
to practise the conversations in closed pairs. If students
have problems with pronunciation, drill key sections of
the conversation and get students to practise again in
closed pairs.
3 This exercise gives students the opportunity to talk
about sights in their town or city. Focus attention
on the examples in the speech bubbles. Check
comprehension of market and old town. Give an
example of places to visit in your town and elicit more
examples from the class about places where they live.
Students continue in closed pairs.
Write key words from the students’ examples on the
board to help them during the roleplay in exercise 4,
e-g-
Nouns: cathedral, museum, art gallery, square,
monument, college, theatre, palace
Verbs: go on a tour, see, visit, buy, go to, take a photo of
Roleplay
4 Divide the class into pairs and get them to make up
conversations, using the conversations in exercise 2 a:
model. Let students write their conversations down ir
the initial stage and go round monitoring and helping
Give students time to rehearse their conversations a f<
times but then encourage them not to refer to the text
when they act out the roleplays. (With a weaker grouj
you could draft the conversations as a class activity ar
write them up on the board. Students rehearse from ti
text on the board. Then rub off some of the words fro
the board so that there are just key words left and get
students to act out the conversations.)
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 10
Exercise 15 Going sightseeing
Don’t forget1.
Workbook Unit 10
Exercises 16-18 Revision
Word list
Ask the students to turn to p i36 and go through the won
with them. Ask them to learn the words for homework,
and test them on a few in the following lesson.
Teacher’s Resource Disc
Unit 10 Test
Unit 10 Skills test
Stop and check 3 (Units 7-10)
Progress test 2 (Units 6-10)
Video/DVD
Unit 10 What did you do last weekend? on iTools and
iTutor
T 10.11
Unit 10 • We had a great time!](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-96-2048.jpg)
![Notes on the unit
STARTER (SB p80)
NOTE
In New Headway Beginner, Fourth edition, we have
chosen to spell email without a hyphen. Students may
have seen the hyphenated form e-mail and both are
acceptable in current usage.
This Starter section focuses on possible uses of a computer
and provides a useful introduction to the overall topic of
computing and the Internet. Pre-teach/check the
language in the list of questions. Drill the pronunciation
as necessary.
Give an example of how you use computers, e.g. I have a
computer at home and at work. I use my work computer
to prepare lessons and my home computerfor shopping
and emails.
Elicit one or two more examples from the students and then
get them to continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check.
Elicit a few more examples in a short class feedback session.
WHAT CAN THEY DO? (SB p80)
can/can’t
1 This section presents different people and their skills,
and so highlights the use of the positive form can.
It also reviews the use of a/an with jobs/roles.
Focus attention on the photos and on the example.
Students continue matching the words and photos,
working in pairs. Check the answers with the whole
class, drilling the pronunciation as necessary.
Answers
2 Laura: architect
3 Justin: pilot
4 George: farmer
5 Lola: athlete
6 Oliver: schoolboy
7 Margaret: grandmother
2 Pre-teach/check speak (French) fluently, draw well, run
fast, drive a tractor, fly 747jum bo jets, and make cakes,
using the information in the photos. Focus attention
on the example, highlighting the use of an. Students
complete the rest of the sentences with a or an.
[CD 2: Track 44] Play the recording and let
students check their answers.
Answers and tapescript
1 Marcus is an interpreter. He can speak French and German
fluently.
2 Laura is an architect. She can draw well.
3 Justin is a pilot. He can fly 747jumbo jets.
4 George is a farmer. He can drive a tractor.
5 Lola is an athlete. She can run very fast.
6 Oliver is a schoolboy. He can use a computer really well.
7 Margaret is Oliver’s grandmother. She can make fantastic cakes.
Play the recording again line by line and get students
to repeat. Encourage them to reproduce the weak
form in the positive form of can /кэп/. If students find
this hard, get them to highlight the main stresses in
each sentence and then practise the sentences again.
Students practise in closed pairs. Monitor and check
for correct pronunciation of can.
3 Focus attention on the language in the speech bubble.
Drill the example chorally and individually. Give
another example about yourself and elicit one or two
more examples from the class. Students then continue
in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use and
pronunciation of can. Don’t overdo the practise of the
weak form /кэп/, as students will have the opportunity
to review this in contrast with the other forms at
various points in the unit.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 11
Exercises 1 and 2 can/can’t - cook/run fast
Questions and negatives
1 Ш И [CD 2: Track 45] This section presents the
question and negative forms. Play the recording
through once and get students to just listen. Play the
recording again and get students to repeat the question:
and answers. Encourage them to reproduce the weak
form /кэп/ in the question, the strong form /каеп/ in th<
positive short answer, and the negative form /ka:nt/.
If students query the use of at all, give them a scale
of examples from good’ to ‘bad’, e.g. (Andrea Bocelli)
can sing really well. (Kylie Minogue) can sing. (My
brother) can’t sing. (I) can’t sing at all. If appropriate, use
board drawings or mime to demonstrate the meaning
depending on the verb you choose.
Get students to ask and answer the questions in open
pairs across the class. Students then continue in closed
pairs. Monitor and check for correct pronunciation of
the different forms of can.T 11.1
100 Unit 11 • I can do that!](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-98-2048.jpg)
![GRAMMAR AND PRONUNCIATION
1 Read the notes with the whole class. Highlight that
can/cant is used with all persons, and that cant is
the contraction of can not. Highlight the use of
can in the positive and question forms.
2 ailfck [CD 2: Track 46] Tell students they are
going to hear the three ways of pronouncing can.
Play the recording and get students to just listen.
Play the recording again and get students to repeat
chorally and individually.
If students have severe problems with the
pronunciation, drill the sentences again, but don’t
make students self-conscious about using the new
language.
Point out that we don’t use do/does in question
forms with can.
Read Grammar Reference 11.1-11.2 on p128
together in class, and/or ask students to read it at
home. Encourage them to ask you questions
about it.
2 Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles.
Highlight the use of can for both the she and the I
forms. Drill the examples in open pairs. Elicit some
more examples about the people in exercise 1, and
also some student-student examples. Students then
continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct
use and pronunciation of can and can’t.
Of course I can!
’ 1111ЕЯ [CD 2: Track 47] Focus attention on the photo.
Ask What’s his name? Does he have ajob? (Oliver. No,
he’s a schoolboy.) Ask What’s her name? (Dominique.)
Pre-teach/check (draw) a bit, planes, and grandma.
Play the recording through once and get students to fill in
the gaps. Ask them to check their answers in pairs. Play
the recording again and get students to check/complete
their answers. Check the answers with the whole class.
Answers and tapescript
D=Dominique, О =Oliver
D Can you use a computer, Oliver?
0 Yes, of course Ican! All my friends can. I use acomputer at home
in my bedroom and we use computers at school all the time.
D That’s great. What other things can you do?
0 Well, I can run fast, very fast, and I can draw a bit. I can draw
really good cars, but I can’t drive them of course! I can draw
good planes, too. When I’m big I want to be a pilot and fly 747s.
D Excellent. Now, I know you can speak French.
0 Yes, I can. I can speak French fluently because my dad’s French.
We sometimes speak French at home.
D Can you speak any other languages?
0 No, Ican’t. I can’t speak German or Spanish, just French - and
English of course! And I can cook! I can make cakes. My grandma
makes fantastic cakes and I sometimes help her. Yesterday we
made a big chocolate cake!
Get students to practise the conversation in closed pairs.
Monitor and check. If students have problems with
pronunciation, drill key sections of the conversation and
get students to practise again in closed pairs.
4 Elicit the answer to question 1 as an example (He can
use a computer, run fast, draw planes and cars, speak
French and English, cook, and make cakes.). Students
continue asking and answering in closed pairs.
Check the answers by getting students to read the
questions and answers across the class.
Answers
1 Fie can use a computer, run fast, draw planes and cars, speak
French and English, cook, and make cakes. Fie can’t drive, or speak
German or Spanish.
2 Yes, he does.
3 He wants to be a pilot.
4 He can speak French well because his dad is French.
5 He made a chocolate cake with his grandma.
SUGGESTION
You could ask students to practise similar conversations
to the one in exercise 3 by getting them to roleplay
the other people in the photos on p80. Students can
imagine the skills for their character and then ask and
answer, using the conversation in exercise 3 as a model.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 11
Exercise 3 can/can’t - Questions and short answers
Exercise 4 can!cant - Negatives
PRACTICE (SB p82)
Pronunciation
1 This is a discrimination exercise to practise recognizing
and producing can and can’t. It includes both can for
ability and can used in requests. Pre-teach/check quite
well and read music.
[CD 2: Track 48] Play sentence 1 as an example
and elicit the answer (can). Play the rest of the sentences,
pausing at the end of each one, and get students to
underline the correct word.
Get students to check their answers in pairs before
checking with the whole class.
T 11.5
Unit 11 • I can do that! 101](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-99-2048.jpg)
![I love it here. Saturday night is dancing night and I go dancing with
friends. A lot of my friends can play the guitar really well. I can’t
play a musical instrument but I can dance very well. I love the music.
On Sundays I often go riding here. I can ride quite well now. Or
sometimes I watch friends playing golf. I can’t play golf, but I like
watching it. Sunday is also the day for ‘asado’ or barbecues.
We always cook beef. I can’t cook at all, but I want to learn. It’s a
great life here, everyone is really friendly.
Answers and tapescript
1 I can ski quite well.
2 She can’t speak German at all.
3 He can speak English fluently.
4 Why can’t you come to my party?
5 We can’t understand our teacher.
6 They can read music.
7 Can I have an ice-cream, please?
8 Can cats swim?
Play the recording again line by line and get students to
repeat chorally and individually. Students then practise
the sentences in closed pairs. Monitor and check for
correct pronunciation of can/can’t, but don’t insist on
perfect pronunciation from all students.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 11
Exercise 5 Pronunciation - /кэп/ and /ka:nt/
She can speak Spanish very well!
2 This section gives students the opportunity to listen to
a person talking about their skills in a more extended
context. Focus attention on the photos and the rubric.
Ask What’s her name? (Jenni Spitzer). Where is shefrom ?
(the United States). Where does she live? (Argentina).
Focus attention on the chart. Check comprehension of
the verbs in the list, using the photos as appropriate.
Tell students that they will get the answers for Jenni
from the recording, they will complete the You column,
you will give answers for the T column, and another
student for the S column.
[CD 2: Track 49] Tell students they are going
to hear Jenni in the recording and that they should
tick the things she can do in her column of the table.
Pre-teach/check barbecues. Play the recording as far as
German a little bit. Elicit the boxes that require a tick
(speak Spanish and speak German). Play the rest of the
recording and get students to complete their answers.
Play the recording again and get students to check their
answers before checking with the whole class.
3 This exercise highlights the use of adverbs when
talking about abilities. With weaker students, you
could consolidate the meaning by listing the words
and expressions in a scale from ‘good’ to ‘bad’, e.g.
very well /really well /fluently (languages)
quite well
a little bit
(not) at all
Elicit the missing word for number 1 as an example
(fluently). Students complete the exercise, working
in pairs.
[CD 2: Track 49] Play the recording again
and get students to check/complete their answers.
Get students to practise the sentences in open and
then closed pairs. If students have problems with
pronunciation, drill the examples, highlighting the
sentence stress.
GRAMMAR SPOT
1 Explain that an adverb describes a verb, e.g. run -
run fast, draw - draw well. Copy the examples onto
the board and highlight the word order with the
adverbs coming after the verbs.
2 Focus attention on the examples. Elicit the
adjective in each one (fluent and slow). Copy them
onto the board and highlight the formation of the
adverb by adding -ly.
Refer students back to the examples in exercise 1.
Explain thatfast and well are special examples that
don’t take -ly. Elicit the adjectives and adverbs for
each one (fast -fast; good - well).
Read Grammar Reference 11.3 on pl28 together
in class, and/or ask students to read it at home.
Encourage them to ask you questions about it.
T 11.6
T 11.6
Answers
1 I can speak Spanish fluently.
2 I can speak German a little bit.
3 My friends can play the guitar really well.
4 I can dance very well.
5 I can ride quite well.
6 I can’t cook at all.
Answers
speak Spanish
speak German
dance
ride a horse
T 11.6
I live in the city of Tucuman. Iteach English. I can speak Spanish
fluently and German a little bit.
102 Unit 11 • I can do that!](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-100-2048.jpg)
![Talking about you
4 Refer students back to the chart in exercise 2 and elicit
a few examples about what Jenni can and cant do.
Students complete the You column in the chart.
Drill the pronunciation of the verbs in the list. Then
elicit the question forms from a range of students and
give true answers for yourself. Get students to complete
the T column.
Focus attention on the language in the speech bubbles.
Drill the language chorally and individually. Elicit
two or three more examples in open pairs. Then get
students to continue asking and answering in closed
pairs, noting their partner’s answer to each question in
the S column. Monitor and check for the correct use
and pronunciation of can/cant.
5 Focus attention on the example in the speech
bubble. Drill the language and highlight the different
pronunciation of can and cant and the contrastive
stress in the second sentence:
/а/
Isabel and I can dance very well.
/э/ /а:/
She can cook, too, but I cant cook at all.
Elicit two or three more examples from the class and
then get students to continue in closed pairs. Monitor
and check for the correct use and pronunciation of
can/cant. Feed back on any major common errors, but
do not expect students to produce perfect pronunciation
of can/cant as this may prove demoralizing.
PHOTOCOPIABLE ACTIVITY
UNIT 11 I can’t ... at all ТВ pl48
Materials: one copy of the worksheet cut up per
group of three students
Procedure: Explain that students are going to play a
miming game and practise can/cant and adverbs.
• Pre-teach/check say the alphabet and type. Mime
a few actions done well and badly, e.g. play tennis
well, singing badly and elicit sentences with You ...,
e.g. You can play tennis well. You cant sing very well.
• Divide the students into groups of three. Fland out
sets of cards to each group and put them face down
on the desk. Demonstrate the activity by picking
up a card from one set, miming the activity shown,
and getting students to say what you can/can’t
do. If they don’t include an adverb, e.g. they say
You cant sing, gesture that they need to add more
information, e.g. You cant sing at all.
• Students take it in turns to choose a card and mime
the activity. The others in the group guess and say a
sentence. The student that gets the wording on the
card or closest to it wins the card. If no-one guesses
correctly, it goes to the bottom of the pile and can
be used again. Monitor and help as necessary. If
necessary, remind students that they need to say
how well the action is done to win the card.
• The student with the most cards in each group wins.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL____________________________________________
Workbook Unit 11
Exercise 6 Adverbs - very well/ not at all
REQUESTS AND OFFERS
Can I help you?
This section introduces other uses of can and helps to
consolidate the question forms.
1 Focus attention on the pictures. Elicit where the people
are in each one (picture 1 a shop, 2 by a bus stop,
3 someone’s house, 4 a restaurant, 5 London, 6 a car).
Focus attention on the example. Remind students
to cross out the words in each set as they use them
starting each sentence with Can. Students write the
other questions, working individually. Get students to
check their answers in pairs but don’t check with the
whole class until after exercise 2.
Answers
1 Can I help you?
2 Can you tell me the time, please?
3 Can you come to my party?
4 Can I have a glass of water, please?
5 Can you speak more slowly, please?
6 Can I give you a lift?
2 Elicit the question to item a (3 Can you come to
my party?). Students continue matching, working
individually.
[CD 2: Track 50] Play the recording and let
students check their answers to the question formation
and the matching phase.
Answers
a 3 b 2 с 4 d 1 e 6 f 5
1 Can I help you?
Yes, please. I want to buy this postcard.
2 Can you tell me the time, please?
It’s about three thirty.
3 Can you come to my party?
Sorry. I can’t. It’s my grandma’s birthday on Saturday.
T 11.7
Unit 11 • I can do that! 103](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-101-2048.jpg)
![request it. Do not feed back on the questions at this
stage, as students will find answers to the questions in
the reading text.
4 >!!>:■ [CD 2: Track 51] If you haven’t set the
vocabulary checking as homework, pre-teach/check
the items listed in the Note at the start of the section,
especially with weaker groups. Ask students to read
and listen to the text and to find the answers to the
questions in exercise 3. Get students to compare their
predictions in exercise 3 with the information in the
text. Check the answers with the whole class.
Answers
1 The Internet started in the 1960s.
2 It started because the US Department of Defense wanted a
computer network to help the American military.
3 People can ‘google’ for information, buy and sell clothes and cars,
book a hotel, a holiday or tickets for the cinema, pay their bills;
watch their favourite TV programme, play chess with a partner
in Moscow; ‘chat’ to their friends and share photographs on
Facebook, write a blog.
5 Get students to read the text again and find and correct
the false sentences. Ask students to check their answers
in pairs before checking with the whole class.
Answers
1 False. The Internet started in the 1960s.
2 False. The US Department of Defense started it.
3 True.
4 True.
5 True.
-Vhat do you do on the Internet?
6 Tell students they are going to hear different people
talking about when and why they use the Internet.
Focus attention on the photos and the age of each
person. Give students a few moments to discuss how
each one might use the net.
Pre-teach/check: Wikipedia (an online encyclopaedia),
geography, science, post photos (on Facebook), songs.
■i1ИД [CD 2: Track 52] Play the first extract and
focus attention on the example. Remind students that
they don’t have to understand every word to be able to
complete the exercise. Play the rest of the recording and
get students to note down their answers for each person.
Get students to check their answers in pairs. Play the
recording again and get students to check/complete
their answers. Check the answers with the whole class.
Elicit any other information students understood about
each Internet user.
Answers
Charlotte
Lauren
Santiago
Alan Krum
Max
Edna
When?
every day
3or 4 times a day
in the evenings
on Sundays
after school
every Friday
Why?
help with homework
hear friends’ news
find songs
get information about his
family history
play games
shopping
1 Charlotte, age 14
1use the Internet a lot. Every day, I think. It helps me with my
homework. I ‘google’ for information or I use Wikipedia. It helps
me with everything - history, geography, science, English - er,
everything. Yesterday I got a lot of information aboutJane Austen.
2 Lauren, age 20
I go on Facebook a lot, sometimes three or four times a day.
It’s a great way to hear all your friends’ news and see all their
photographs. Yesterday I posted all the photos from my party last
weekend. You can see them if you want.
3 Santiago, age 23
I play the guitar and I can find lots of songs on the Internet.
Yesterday I got the words and music for Can’t buy me love, you
know, by the Beatles. I can play it now. I use the Internet in the
evenings, when I have time.
4 Alan Krum, age 47
Well, my surname, - er, my family name is Krum and I want to
write about my family, so I use the Internet to find out about my
family’s history. There are special websites for this. Also, I can chat
to people with the same name from all over the world - Canada,
Germany, Argentina. It’s really interesting. I usually use it on Sundays,
because I have more time then.
5 Max, age 10
I play games a lot. And I go on websites for my favourite pop groups
and football players. I want to be on the computer all the time, but
my mum says I can’t. She says I can only use it after school for an
hour, and then I stop.
6 Edna, age 71
I go shopping on the Internet. Every Friday I go to my son’s house
and I use his computer. It’s fantastic - the supermarket brings all my
shopping to my home. I want a computer now. I want to send emails
to my friends. Most of my friends have computers.
Elicit examples of other uses of the Internet that don’t
appear in the text, e.g. read the weather forecast, get
help with your English, get maps and directions, get
names and addresses of businesses, etc.
Give the names of a few good websites that you know
and describe what you can do on these sites. Feed in
useful language for talking about websites:
(Name of site) is good for (shopping).
I visit (name of site)/or (information on travel).
You can (read the news) at (name of site).
A good sitefor (games) is (name of site).
Unit 11 • I can do that! 105](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-103-2048.jpg)
![Divide the class into groups and get them to talk about
how they use the Internet and about good websites that
they know. Monitor and help as necessary.
Get students to tell the whole class of any interesting
sites in a brief feedback session. Highlight any common
errors to the class, but do not over-correct as this may
prove demoralizing.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL____________________________
Workbook Unit 11
Exercises 9 and 10 Reading - Meet ASIMO
VOCABULARY AND SPEAKING (SBP86)
Adjective +noun
This section consolidates and extends the adjective + noun
collocations students have met to date in the course.
1 Focus attention on the illustration and elicit a few
examples of what is shown.
Focus on the example match of old/young/tall to
people. Put students in pairs to continue the matching
task. Check the answers, drilling the pronunciation as
necessary.
Answers
old/young/tall people
fast/expensive car
delicious/fresh food
big/busy/cosmopolitan city
dangerous/exciting sport
funny/interesting/boring films
warm and sunny/cold and wet weather
2 Elicit a possible ending for number 1 (a fast car/an
expensive car). If necessary, remind students of the use
of a/an with a singular noun.
Explain that students sometimes need an adjective +
noun combination and sometimes just an adjective on
its own. Give students time to complete the sentences
and then compare with a partner.
[CD 2: Track 53] Tell students they are going
to hear short conversations that talk about the people
and things in sentences 1-7. Sometimes the wording
is quite similar to the sentences and sometimes it is
a bit different. Play number 1 as an example and get
students to compare their version.
Play the rest of the recording and get students to
compare the adjectives used.
Refer students to H H M on SB p i20. Put students in
pairs to practise the conversations. Monitor and check.
If students have problems with pronunciation, drill
difficult lines from the recording again. Be prepared to
give an exaggerated model of the voice range if student!
sound a little flat.
T 11.10
1 A A Ferrari is a fantastic car. It’s so fast.
В Yeah, I know, but it’s also so expensive.
2 A Flow tall is your brother?
В He’s very tall, 1.9metres. I’monly 1.7metres.
3 A I think motor racing is a really dangerous sport.
В I know it’s dangerous, but it’s exciting too. That’s why I love it!
4 A Can I have afresh orange juice, please?
В I’mafraid we don’t have fresh.
A OK. Just a glass of water then.
5 A New York is a very cosmopolitan city. I love it.
В Me too. I can’t believe I’m here.
6 A Charlie Chaplin made some very funny films, don’t you think?
В No. I don’t like his films. Ithink they’re really boring.
7 A We can’t gofor a walk, it’s too cold and wet.
В Yes, we can. Look, it’s sunny again! Come on!
3 Check comprehension offilm star. Elicit a few possible
examples for each category and write them on the
board. Put students in groups of three or four to draft
their lists. Feed in useful language for this stage, e.g.
What’s an example of an expensive car? A Mazda?
I don’t really agree with that. How about a Porsche?
Students continue in their groups. Make sure one
student writes down the examples.
Students then work with people from another group to
compare their lists. Elicit the most common example
for some of the categories in a short feedback session.
SUGGESTION
Students can play ‘10 questions’ with the examples in
exercise 3. One student thinks of a category, e.g. an old
city, without telling the others in the group. They have
a maximum of 10 questions to find out what it is.
SUGGESTION
If your students are interested in the Internet, you can
get them to work in groups and write a summary of
how they use the Net, referring to script Ч)А'Д as a
model. They can also produce a mini-guide of their
favourite websites divided into categories according
to students’ interests, e.g. sports, learning English,
shopping, local information, news, etc.
T 11.10
106 Unit 11 • I can do that!](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-104-2048.jpg)
![ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Teacher’s Resource Disc
Communicative activity Unit 11 Ready, steady, go!
Workbook Unit 11
Exercise 11 Adjective + noun
EVERYDAY ENGLISH (SB P87)
Everyday problems
1 Focus attention on the photos and ask students where
the people are in each one (1 in the city, 2 at work, 3 in
a car park, 4 at home, 5 in the street, 6 in town).
Get students to match the problems to the photos.
Check the answers.
Answers
1 directions 4 a lost passport
2 computers 5 an accident
3 a ticket machine 6 arriving late
2 Focus attention on the example. Students match the lines
to the pictures, working individually. Get students to check
their answers in pairs before checking with the class.
Answers
[4] /can’t find it anywhere!
[3] This machine doesn’t work.
Q] I'm lost.
[6] I’m so sorry I’m late!
|T] I can’t get on the Internet.
[5] Areyou all right?
This stage allows students to use their imagination
and create a conversation around one of the situations
in the photos. Ask a confident student to choose a
photo and improvise a short conversation around the
situation he/she selected.
Students continue in pairs. Monitor and help as
necessary, but don’t try to control the wording too
much. It’s best just to let students do what they can with
the language they already know. If appropriate, you can
pair more confident students with weaker ones.
If you have time, allow a few pairs to act out their
conversations to the class.
3 Briefly review the language of giving directions from
Unit 8: turn left/right, go straight on. Also pre-teach/
check the following words from the conversations: you
cant miss it (= it’s easy to find), What’s the matter?, push
(a button), airport, miss the bus, it doesn’t matter.
ЧНИИ [CD 2: Track 54] Play the first line of
conversation 1 and elicit the missing word (lost). Play
the rest of the recording and get students to complete
the rest of the task.
Play the recording again and let students complete/
check their answers. Check the answers with the class.
Answers and tapescript
1 A Excuse me! Can you help me? I’mtost.
В Where do you want to go?
A Grand Central Station.
В Turn left onto Park Avenue. It’s straight on. You can’t miss it.
2 A Oh, no!
В What’s the matter?
A There’s something wrong with my computer. I can’t get on the
Internet, so I can’t send my emails.
В Turn everything off and try again. That sometimes works.
3 A Excuse me! This ticket machine doesn’t work.
В Did you push the green button?
A Oh! No, I didn’t.
В Ah, well. Here’s your ticket.
A Thank you very much.
4 A Come on! It’stime to go to the airport.
В But I can’t find my passport! I can’t find it anywhere!
A You put it in your bag.
В Did I? Oh, yes. Here it is! Phew!
5 A Are you all right?
В Yes, I think so.
A Does your arm hurt?
В It hurts a bit, but I think it’s OK.
6 A I’mso sorry I’m late.
В It’s OK. The film starts in 15minutes.
A I missed the bus.
В Itold you, it doesn’t matter. Come on! Let’s go.
4 Get students to practise the conversations in closed
pairs. Monitor and check for pronunciation. If students
have problems, drill key sections from the recording
and get students to repeat the pairwork.
Get students to choose two conversations to learn and
act out for the rest of the class. Encourage them to
stand up and roleplay the situation, rather than just say
the conversations face to face. This helps students with
the acting out and with the overall delivery. Encourage
the other students to listen carefully to the students
who are acting and give feedback on pronunciation.
SUGGESTION
If class time is short, you could get students to learn
their lines for homework and then give them a short
time to rehearse in pairs. With a weaker group, you
could put simple cues on the board to help if students
forget their lines.
Unit 11 • I can do that! 107](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-105-2048.jpg)
![Notes on the unit
STARTER (SB p88)
This Starter section reviews and extends the lexical set of
shops and amenities and also reviews can.
1 Focus attention on the chart and give students time
to read the Activities column. Check bread, milk,
fruit, meat, and conditioner. Deal with any vocabulary
queries and focus attention on the example. Then get
students to continue matching in pairs. Check the
answers.
Answers
2 e 3 c 4 a 5 b 6 f 7 d
2 Focus attention on the example. Then get students to
make sentences with the phrases in exercise 1 using
You can ....
[CD 2: Track 55] Play the recording and get
students to check their answers. Explain any individual
words that students query. (If you think students need
further practice in the pronunciation of can, you could
get students to listen again and repeat the sentences.)
SAYING WHAT YOU WANT (SB P88)
I’d l i k e s o m e and any
1 Focus attention on the photos and get students to point
to Adam in each one. Pre-teach/check slices, anything
else, Emmental, Gruyere (types of Swiss cheese), and
dry/normal hair.
[CD 2: Track 56] Play the first line of
conversation 1 and elicit the missing word (morning).
Play the rest of the recording through once without
stopping and elicit where Adam is in each conversation
(1 in a supermarket, 2 in a chemists). Allow students to
check their answers in pairs. Play the recording again
to let students check/complete their answers.
Check the answers with the whole class. (If students
query the use of one in try this one in conversation 2,
check they understand it means try this type ofshampoo.)
Drill the pronunciation of the lines containing would
like from conversation 1: Id like some ham, please.
How much would you like? Would you like anything else?
Check students can reproduce the contracted form
Id /aid/ and the pronunciation of would /wud/.
Put students in pairs to practise the conversations.
Monitor and check for correct pronunciation. Be
prepared to drill key lines again if necessary.
Answers and tapescript
Conversation 1
A Good morning. I’d like some ham, please.
В How much would you like?
A Four slices.
В Would you like anything else?
A Yes, I’d like some cheese. Do you have any Emmental?
В I’mafraid we don’t have any Emmental. What about Gruyere?
A No, thank you. Just the ham, then. How much is that?
Conversation 2
С Can I help you?
A Yes, please, I’d like some shampoo.
С We have lots. Would you like it for dry or normal hair?
A Dry, Ithink.
С OK. Try this one. Anything else?
A Er - oh yeah. I don’t have any conditioner. I’d like some
conditioner for dry hair, please.
С Yes, of course. That’s £6.90, please.
GRAMMAR SPOT
would like
1 Read the notes as a class. Make sure students
understand the difference in register between
want and the more polite would like, and that
d like is the contracted form.
2 Read the notes as a class. Make sure students
understand that Would you like ... ?is used when
we offer things.
Ask students to find more examples of would like
in the conversations in exercise 1.
some and any
1/2 Read the notes as a class, highlighting the use
of some with positive sentences, and any in
questions and negatives.
Ask students to find more examples of some and
any in the conversations in exercise 1.
Read Grammar Reference 12.1-12.2 on pl28
together in class, and/or ask students to read it at
home. Encourage them to ask you questions
about it.
T 12.1
Answers and tapescript
1 You can buy a magazine in a newsagent’s.
2 You can buy bread, milk, fruit, and meat in a supermarket.
3 You can get US dollars from a bank.
4 You can buy stamps and send a parcel in a post office.
5 You can buy a dictionary in a bookshop.
6 You can get a medium latte in a coffee shop.
7 You can buy shampoo and conditioner in a chemist’s.
T 12.2
Unit 12 • Please and thank you](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-108-2048.jpg)
![Explain that students are going to hear Adam from
exercise 1 shopping in town. Pre-teach/check The
Times (newspaper),first/second class, and Drink here or
take away? Focus attention on the chart and read the
questions out so that students know what to listen for.
Explain that for What does he want? students can just
write words and for What are his words? students write
the sentences Adam uses.
[CD 2: Track 57] Play the recording of
conversations 1 and 2 through once. Play it again,
pausing at the end of key lines if necessary to allow
students to write Adam’s words. Check the answers
with the class.
Answers
Conversation 1 Conversation 2
Where is he? in a newsagent’s in a coffee shop
What does
he want?
The Times and two
magazines; some
stamps
a medium latte;
some chocolate
cake
What are
his words?
I’d like some stamps
too.
Two books of first-
class stamps, please.
I’d like a latte,
please.
I’d like some
chocolate cake.
T 12.3
Conversation 1
С Is that all? The Times and the two magazines?
A Yes, that’s all. Oh, I nearly forgot - I’d like some stamps too.
С First or second class?
A First. Two books of first-class stamps, please.
С OK. Would you like a bag?
A No, thanks. I don’t need a bag.
С That’s£9.65.
Conversation 2
A I’d like a latte, please.
В Drink here or take away?
A To drink here, please.
В Small, medium or large?
A Medium, please.
В Would you like something to eat?
A Er - yes. I’d like some chocolate cake.
С Sure. Anything else?
A That’s it, thanks.
If students ask why stamps can be first or second class,
explain that in Britain there is a system of two classes of
post with first class being quicker and more expensive.
This may seem strange to students who are used to a
flat tariff for sending basic letters.
3 Explain that in the conversations in this exercise Adam
is talking to a visitor at his home. Pre-teach/check
orange/apple juice. Elicit the second missing word in
the first line {like). Give students time to complete
conversations 1 and 2. Let them check in pairs before
playing the recording.
[CD 2: Track 58] Play the recording and get
students to check their answers.
Answers and tapescript
A=Adam, V =Visitor
Conversation 1
A What would you like to drink?
V Ajuice. I’d like an apple juice, please.
A Er... I have some orange juice, but I don’t have any apple juice.
V Don’t worry. Orange juice is fine. Thanks.
Conversation 2
A Would you like something to eat?
V Yeah, OK. A sandwich. A cheese sandwich?
A Er... I don’t have any cheese. Sorry. I have some ham. Would you
like a ham sandwich?
V I don’t like ham.
A Would you like some cake, then?
V Yes, please. I’d love some.
Check pronunciation of apple juice /'aepl d3u:s/,
orange juice /'Drind3 d3u:s/, and sandwich /'saenwitf/.
Put students in pairs to practise the conversations.
Monitor and check for accurate pronunciation and
intonation. Check students reproduce I’d like correctly
and make sure students don’t say I like. If students have
problems with pronunciation, drill key sections of the
conversations and get students to practise again in
closed pairs.
Roleplay
4 This exercise practises question forms with would
like. Focus attention on the pictures and get students
to imagine they are at home with a friend. Check
comprehension offeel at home. Focus attention on
the examples in the speech bubbles. Remind students
of the use of would like + noun and would like + to-
infinitive. Drill the examples chorally and individually.
Encourage students to reproduce correct intonation,
using a wide voice range on the answers, starting ‘high’.
Check comprehension of the food, drinks, and activities
on offer. Elicit two different exchanges from each of the
boxes from the students in open pairs. Then get them to
continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct
use of would you like + noun and fo-infinitive, and
pronunciation. If you have time, get students to act out
their roleplay for the rest of the class.
T 12. J
T 12.4
Unit 12 • Please and thank you 111](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-109-2048.jpg)
![ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 12
Exercise 1 What’s in the basket?
Exercises 2 and 3 some!any
Exercise 4 I'd like - I ’d like a ... II’d like to ...
Exercise 5 Offering things - What would you like?
PRACTICE (SB p90)
It’s my birthday!
Exercises 1-4 of Practice focus on would like in the context
of birthdays. It consolidates the use of would like + noun
and would like + io-infinitive.
1 Introduce the topic by asking When’s your birthday?
and What do you usually do on your birthday?
Explain that students are going to hear a conversation
between two friends. It’s the man’s birthday soon and
the woman is asking what he would like. Pre-teach/
checkforget, presents, take you outfor a meal, and silly.
Ask students to cover the text of the conversation in
exercise 2. Ask the questions in exercise 1.
[CD 2: Track 59] Play the recording through
once and elicit the answers.
2 Ask two students to read out the first three lines of
the conversation and elicit the missing words in line 3
(would you like). Give students time to complete the
rest of the conversation.
[CD 2: Track 59] Play the recording again and
let students check their answers.
Put students in pairs to practise the conversation.
Monitor and check for accurate pronunciation and
intonation. Check students reproduce I ’d like correctly
and make sure students don’t say I like. If students hav
problems with pronunciation, drill key sections of the
conversations and get students to practise again in
closed pairs.
Birthday wishes
3 Tell students they are going to hear three people talkin
about their birthday. Focus attention on the chart and
elicit possible answers to the two questions, e.g.
What would they like? A book, a CD, a picture, a
jumper, a camera, etc.
What would they like to do in the evening? Go to the
theatre, have a party, go to a restaurant, go shopping, et<
[CD 2: Track 60] Play the recording of Kelly
and elicit the answers (breakfast in bed and to go to the
theatre). Play the rest of the recording and get students
to complete the chart.
Get students to check their answers in pairs before
checking with the whole class.
Answers
Kelly: breakfast in bed with the newspapers; goto the theatre
Mike: a new computer; go to a good restaurant
Jade: a new mobile phone; go out with all her friends
T 12.6
Kelly
What would I like for my birthday? That’s easy! I’d like to have
breakfast in bed. With the newspapers. And in the evening I’d like to
go to the theatre.
Mike
Well, I’d like a new computer, because my computer is so old that
new programs don’t work on it. And then in the evening I’d like to
go to a good restaurant. I don’t mind if it’s Italian, French, Chinese,
or English.Just good food.
Jade
I’d love a new mobile phone. My mobile is so old now. I’d like one
that takes good photos - your phone has a really good camera and
it wasn’t that expensive. And in the evening I’d like to go out with all
my friends and have a great time!
4 Ask students to imagine it’s their birthday soon. Focus
attention on the examples in the speech bubbles. Drill
the language and check students say I’d like rather than
I like. Get students to give one or two more examples,
working in open pairs. Students continue in closed
pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of would like -
noun and would like + to-infinitive.
Answers and tapescript
A Hey, isn’t it your birthday soon?
В Yeah, next week on the 15th.
A So, what would you like for your birthday?
В I don’t know. I don’t need anything.
A But I’d like to buy you something.
В That’s kind, but I think I’d like to forget my birthday this year.
A What? You don’t want any presents! Why not?
В Well, I’m 30 next week, and that feels old.
A Thirty isn’t old. Come on. I’d like to take you out for a meal with
some friends. You can choose the restaurant.
В OK, then. Thank you. I’d like that. Just don’t tell anyone it’s my
birthday.
A Oh, that’s silly!
T 12.5
Answers
She wants to take him for a meal.
He wants to forget his birthday.
- see belowT 12.5
T 12.5
T 12.6
112 Unit 12 • Please and thank you](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-110-2048.jpg)
![ke and would like
This section explains the difference between like and
would like and gives students further practice in using the
two forms.
1 Read the sentences aloud and ask What’s the difference?
Allow students to express a range of ideas, in LI if
appropriate. Do not confirm or explain the difference
at this stage, as students get further help in exercise 2.
2 [CD 2: Track 61] Pre-teach/check tonight and
What about you? Play the recording and get students to
read the conversations. Point out the use of I ’d love to
in reply to Would you like to ...? Explain that we don’t
usually repeat the verb from the question.
Ask the concept questions in the Student’s Book and
check the answers.
Answers
Conversation 1is about what you like day after day.
Conversation 2 is about what you want to do today.
Put students in new pairs to practise the conversations.
Monitor and check for accurate pronunciation
and intonation. Check students use I like and
I’d like correctly. If students have problems with
pronunciation, drill key sections of the conversations
and get students to practise again in closed pairs.
GRAMMAR SPOT
1 Read the notes as a class. Make sure students
understand that like is used to talk about
something which is always true. Focus attention
on the example sentences and elicit other examples
from the class.
2 Read the notes as a class. Make sure students
understand that d like is used to talk about
something we wish to have or do now or soon.
Focus attention on the examples and highlight the
use of the noun and fo-infinitive in questions with
would like. Elicit other examples from the class.
Read Grammar Reference 12.3 on pl28 together
in class and/or ask students to read it at home.
Encourage them to ask you questions about it.
Talking about you
3 Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles.
With weaker classes, review the difference between
like and would like by asking General or specific? about
each sentence (like = general meaning; would like = a
specific wish). Also highlight the use of like + -ing and
would like + fo-infinitive.
Elicit examples of complete conversations. Encourage
students to ask What about you? and follow-up
questions, e.g.
A What do you like doing in your free time?
В I like shopping and reading. What about you?
A I like swimming and listening to music.
В What music do you like?
A Jazz and classical. What about you?
В I like pop and rock.
В What would you like to do this weekend?
A I’d like to go out with my friends. What about you?
В I’d like to go shopping.
A What would you like to buy?
В Some clothes and a CD.
Then get students to continue working in closed pairs.
Monitor and check for correct use of like + -ing and
would like + fo-infinitive. Feed back on any common
errors which might interfere with comprehension, e.g.
*1 like to visiting my parents.
Listening and pronunciation
4 M W [CD 2: Track 62] This is a discrimination
exercise to help students distinguish like and would
like. Play the first sentence as an example and elicit the
sentence that is recorded {W ouldyou like a Coke?) Play
the rest of the recording and get students to choose the
correct sentences. Get students to check in pairs. If there
is disagreement on the answers, play the recording again
and then check the answers with the class.
Answers and tapescript
1 Would you like a Coke?
2 I like watching films.
3 We’d like a flat with two bedrooms.
4 What would you like to do?
5 I like new clothes.
T 12.8
1 A What would you like? Would you like a Coke?
В Yes, please. I’mvery thirsty.
2 A What sort of thing do you like doing at the weekend?
В Well, I like watching films.
3 A What sort of flat do you want to move into?
В Well...
С We’d like a flat with two bedrooms. Somewhere near the
centre.
4 A We have this weekend free. What would you like to do?
В I’d like to have the weekend with you, and only you!
A Oooh!
5 A What do you spend all your money on?
В Well, I like new clothes. I buy new clothes every week.
Unit 12 • Please and thank you 113](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-111-2048.jpg)
![Ask students to report back about their partners
preferences. Use this as an opportunity to review the
third person -s on likes/doesn’t like.
2 Tell students they are going to hear Liam and Maddy
ordering a meal at the Cafe Fresco. Check they
understand that Liam is a mans name and Maddy is a
womans name. Also check what the letters L, M, and
W stand for. Give students time to read through the
sentences.
[CD 2: Track 63] Focus attention on the
example and play the first line of the recording. Play
the rest of the recording and get students to complete
the task.
Ask students to check their answers in pairs. If there is
disagreement on the answers, play the recording again
and get students to check/amend their answers. Check
the answers with the whole class.
3 Divide the class into groups of three. Get students to
practise the conversation in their groups. If students
have problems with pronunciation, drill key sections of
the conversations and get students to practise again.
Roleplay
4 Give students time to prepare their roles and what
they want to order. Encourage them to rehearse the
conversation a few times. Once they are more confident
with the language, encourage them not to refer to the
text in the Student’s Book, but to work from their own
memory. (With a weaker group, you could write simple
sentence cues on the board to help with the roleplay.)
Monitor and help as necessary. Get students to act out
their conversations for the rest of the class.
SUGGESTION
If you have access to other real menus from British
or American restaurants, bring copies of them into
class and get students to roleplay other conversations,
using the different menus. You will need to be careful
that the menus you select contain language that is
appropriate for the post-beginner level.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 12
Exercises 8 and 9 Pronunciation - /е/ /i:/ /u:/ III
Exercise 10 Food
EVERYDAY ENGLISH (SB P9S)
Signs all around
This section focuses on the meaning of everyday signs
and also recycles can/cant in the context o f‘be allowed to’.
Lead in to the topic by drawing some of the signs in and
around your school on the board. Elicit where you can
see them.
1 Focus attention on the signs in exercise 1. Elicit where
you can see them.
Answers
You can see the signs in a variety of places, including shops, offices,
restaurants, libraries, hospitals, etc.
2 Pre-teach/check smoke, push/pull, upIdown,floor
(= storey), stand (verb). Focus attention on the
example. Put students in pairs to continue matching
the signs to the meanings. Check the answers.
Answers
2 a 3 e 4 j 5 o 6m 7 k 8 i 91 10 n 11 b
12 h 13 g 14 c, d
3 4 > m l [CD 2: Track 64] Explain that students are
going to hear eight single lines of conversation. Pre-
teach/check gate. Play number 1 and elicit the correct
sign (SALE).
Play the rest of the recording and get students to find
the remaining seven signs. Allow students to check in
pairs. If there is any disagreement, play the recording
again and get students to check/amend their answers.
T 12.9
Answers and tapescript
W Are you ready to order?
L Well, 1am. Are you ready, Maddy?
M Yes, 1am. What’s the soup of the day?
W French onion soup.
M Lovely. I’d like the French onion soup to start, please.
W And to follow?
M I’d like the salmon salad with some chips on the side.
w Thank you. And you sir? What would you like?
L Er - I’d like the tomato and mozzarella salad, followed by the
hamburger and chips.
w Would you like any side orders?
L No, thank you. Just the hamburger.
W And to drink?
M Sparkling water for me, please. What about you, Liam?
L The same for me. We’d like a bottle of sparkling water, please.
W Fine. I’ll bring the drinks immediately.
116 Unit 12 • Please and thank you](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-114-2048.jpg)
![Notes on the unit
STARTER (SBP96)
1 This Starter section reviews and extends the lexical set
of colours and clothes. Focus attention on the colours
and the example. Students continue labelling the
colours, working in pairs. Check the answers, drilling
the pronunciation as necessary.
Answers
2 green 6 grey
3 white 7 brown
4 black 8 yellow
5 blue
Give an example of your own favourite colour(s)
and then elicit examples from the class. If necessary,
consolidate the vocabulary by pointing to different
objects in the class and eliciting the correct colour.
2 Focus attention on the clothes and the example.
Students continue labelling the clothes, working in
pairs. Check the answers.
Answers and tapescript
1 ajumper 7 trainers
2 a shirt and tie 8 ajacket
3 aT-shirt and shorts 9 a scarf
4 a skirt 10 boots
5 a dress 11 a suit
6 shoes and socks 12 trousers
[CD 2: Track 65] Play the recording, getting
the students to repeat chorally and individually. Check
students can pronounce the vowels sounds in the
following words correctly:
skirt / shirt /sk3:t/ /|зТ/
trousers /'trauzoz/
boots /bu:ts/
suit /su:t/
tie /tai/
Check students can distinguish shirt and skirt. Elicit
which items in exercise 2 are for women (a skirt and
a dress). Highlight the use of a with the singular items,
e.g. a jumper, and that the plural items do not need a,
e.g. boots. Highlight that the word trousers is plural in
English, because this may be different in the students’
own language.
3 Demonstrate the activity by talking about the colours
of your clothes, e.g. My shirt is blue. My trainers are
black and white, etc. Don’t use I ’m wearing at this stage.
Elicit examples from one or two students. If necessary,
remind them of the s to talk about possessions. Then get
students to continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check
for correct pronunciation of the colours and clothes.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL _____________________________
Workbook Unit 13
Exercises 1 & 2 Colours and clothes
WHAT ARE THEY WEARING? (SB P97)
Present Continuous
1 This section introduces the positive forms of the
Present Continuous in the context of talking about
clothes. A limited number of verbs apart from wear are
introduced to help students get used to the form of this
new tense.
Focus attention on the pictures of the people. Point
to Nigel and elicit the missing words (suit and shirt).
Give students time to complete the other descriptions,
working individually. If they query the use of is/are
wearing or the other verb forms, tell them they are
in the Present Continuous, but do not go into a full
explanation at this stage.
[CD 2: Track 66] Play the recording and get
students to check their answers. Play the recording again
and get students to repeat chorally and individually.
Encourage students to reproduce the contracted forms
and the linking between -ing and a vowel:
He’s wearingagrey suit.
If students have problems, drill just the first part of
each sentence with wearing, e.g. Nigel’s wearing a grey
suit. Lily’s wearing a yellow T-shirt, etc. Then drill the
sentences with the other verbs: He’s reading his emails.
She’s running, etc.
Answers and tapescript
1 Nigel’s wearing a grey suit and a white shirt. He’s reading his
emails.
2 Lily’s wearing a yellow T-shirt and white trainers. She’s running.
3 Rick’s wearing blue jeans and a red jumper. He’s playing the guitar.
4 Eva's wearing a green jacket and brown boots. She’s carrying a
black bag.
5 Polly and Penny are wearing yellow dresses and blue shoes.
They’re eating ice-cream.
T13.1
T 13.2
Unit 13 • Here and now 119](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-117-2048.jpg)
![GRAMMAR SPOT
1 Focus attention on the examples and read the
notes with the whole class. Ask students to
underline the Present Continuous forms in the
sentences about Nigel, etc. in exercise 1.
2 Read the notes with the whole class. Remind
students of the -ing form by giving students the
infinitive and eliciting the -ing form, e.g. wear -
wearing, run - running, play - playing, etc. Check
students understand that s is the contracted form
of is, and ’re the contracted form of are.
Focus attention on the sentences and the example.
Students complete the other sentences, using
contracted forms.
Answers
You/We/They’re wearing jeans.
He/She’s playing in the garden.
Highlight that the Present Continuous can be used
for actions happening now, e.g. You’re wearing
jeans, and around now, e.g. I ’m studying English.
Read Grammar Reference 13.1 on pl29 together
in class, and/or ask students to read it at home.
Encourage them to ask you questions about it.
Say wear - wearing, read - reading, sit and elicit
sitting. Focus attention on the example and drill the
pronunciation. Describe another student without
saying their name and get students to guess who it is.
Students continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check
for correct formation of the Present Continuous.
Highlight any errors after the task and encourage
students to self-correct as far as possible.
Focus attention on the example and then talk about
your own clothes. Students take it in turns to stand up
and describe their clothes. In larger classes, students
can do this in groups.
SUGGESTION
You can provide further practice of Present
Continuous positive forms by getting students to
think about what their family and friends are doing.
Write the following questions on the board:
• What are you doing now?
• What are your parents/friends/brothers and sisters/
children doing now?
Demonstrate the activity by giving your own
answers, e.g.
I ’m teaching English. I ’m working in Room ... with
Class...
My mother’s working at home.
Elicit some more examples from one or two
students, e.g.
I ’m studying English. I ’m sitting in Room ... next to ...
My parents are working.
Divide the class into pairs and get students to
continue exchanging examples. Monitor and check
for correct formation of the Present Continuous.
Feed back on any common errors with the tense,
and if necessary drill the corrected forms.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 13
Exercise 3 Present Continuous - She’s wearing/talking
Exercise 5 Present Continuous - Negatives
4 Ч В 1 [CD 2: Track 67] Write a big question mark
on the board to show students they are going to
practise questions. Focus attention on the examples.
Play the recording and let students just listen. Play the
recording again and get students to repeat chorally an
individually. Make sure students include the contract*
form ’s in What’s he doing? and the schwa sound /э/in
What are they doing?
What’s he doing? /'wots hi 'du:iq/
What are they doing? /'wot э 6ei 'du:ii]/
Check the pronunciation of the names in exercise 1.
Focus attention on the language in the speech bubbles
and elicit full answers He’s wearing a grey suit and a wh
shirt, and He’s reading his emails. Drill the questions
and answers chorally and individually. Get students
to continue asking and answering about the people in
exercise 1, working in closed pairs. Monitor and check
for correct formation of Present Continuous questions
and statements. If students have problems, highlight th*
changes from statement to question form on the board:
He is wearing a white shirt.
What is he wearing?
PRACTICE (SB p98)
Asking questions
1 This exercise gives practice in the he/she and they forn
of Present Continuous questions and statements. Foci
attention on the pictures and briefly review the verbs
students will need to use {cook, drive, have a shower,
write, ski, eat an ice-cream, run, dance, and play golf.).
With a weaker group, you could write the verbs on
the board.
120 Unit В • Here and now](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-118-2048.jpg)
![Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles
and highlight the use of the contracted forms. Elicit one
or two more examples and then get students to continue
asking and answering in pairs. Monitor and check for
correct formation of Present Continuous questions and
statements.
[CD 2: Track 68] Play the recording and
get students to check their answers. If students had
problems during the task, play the recording again
and get students to repeat. Elicit the extra information
provided in each answer.
Answers and tapescript
1 A What’s he doing?
В He’s cooking dinner for friends.
2 В What’s he doing?
A He’s driving to London.
3 A What’s he doing?
В He’s having a shower after work.
4 В What’s she doing?
A She’s writing an email to her mother.
5 A What’s she doing?
В She’s skiing in France.
6 В What’s she doing?
A She’s eating a strawberry ice-cream.
7 A What are they doing?
В They’re running fast.
8 В What are they doing?
A They’re dancing at a party.
9 A What are they doing?
В They’re playing golf in the rain.
Demonstrate the meaning of mime. Focus attention
on the examples in the speech bubbles and drill the
language. Choose an activity that you can mime for
the students and get them to guess what you are doing.
Encourage them to give sentences in the Present
Continuous rather than just call out the infinitive verb
forms. Divide the students into pairs and get them to
continue miming and guessing. Get them to change
roles after each mime. Monitor and check for correct
formation of the Present Continuous.
• Divide the class into pairs. Assign the role of A or
В to each student and hand out the relevant half of
the worksheet. Remind students they shouldn’t look
at each other’s picture.
• Drill the type of questions students can ask, e.g.
What is (thefather) wearing?Is (the mother)
listening to music?, etc.
• Students work in closed pairs to find all six
differences. Tell them to circle the part of their
picture when they find a difference. Monitor and
help as necessary.
• Students compare their pictures to check they have
found the differences.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 13
Exercise 4 Present Continuous - Questions
HE’S ON HOLIDAY AT THE MOMENT (SBP98)
Present Simple and Present Continuous
This section reviews the Present Simple and contrasts it
with the Present Continuous. Exercise 1 highlights the use
of Present Simple for facts and repeated actions.
1 Refer students back to the picture of Nigel on SB p97.
Tell students they are going to read about his job.
Review/checkfeel tired and enjoy and then focus
attention on the example. Ask students to complete the
rest of the text with the verbs.
[CD 2: Track 69] Ask students to check their
answers in pairs before playing the recording for a
final check.
Answers and tapescript
Nigel is a businessman. He works from 9.00 to 5.30 every day. He
always wears a suit and tie for work. He usually has lunch at his desk
at LOO. He arrives home at about 7.00 every evening and he reads
to his children before they go to bed. He often feels very tired at
the end of the day.
2 This exercise consolidates the use of the Present
Continuous for actions happening now and around
now. Focus attention on the picture of Nigel and his
family. Read the rubric and ask Where is Nigel? (on
holiday in Spain). Who is phoning Nigel? (his boss).
Where is his boss, Bill? (in England/in his office).
[CD 2: Track 70] Play the recording and get
students to read the text.
PHOTOCOPIABLE ACTIVITY
UNIT 13 What are they doing? ТВ pl50
Materials: one copy of the worksheet cut up per pair
of students
Procedure: This is an information gap using different
pictures. Tell students that they are going to work with
a partner and ask questions to find six differences
between two similar pictures of a family.
T 13.4
T 13.5
T13.6
Unit 13 • Here and now 121](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-119-2048.jpg)
![GRAMMAR SPOT
Read the examples with the class. Ask Which verb is
the Present Simple? {he wears), Which is the Present
Continuous? {he’s wearing).
Ask students to discuss the concept questions in pairs.
Then check the answers.
Answers
He’s wearing aT-shirt. (=now)
He wears a suit for work. (=true day after day, but not now)
Read Grammar Reference 13.2 on pl29 together
in class, and/or ask students to read it at home.
Encourage them to ask you questions about it.
3 Focus attention on the list of names in the chart. Ask
Who’s Karen? {Nigel’s wife). Who’s Bill? {Nigel’s boss).
Briefly highlight the use of is/isn’t and are/aren’t by
getting students to say which subject can go with
which verb {Nigel, Karen, Bill, It + is/isn’t; The children,
They + are/aren’t). If necessary, briefly review the
pronunciation of aren’t /a:nt/.
Demonstrate the activity by eliciting a range of true
sentences about Nigel {Nigel is enjoying the holiday/talking
to Bill/relaxing.). Students continue making sentences,
working individually. Get students to compare their
sentences in pairs before checking with the whole class.
If students query the use of No, we’re not in line 6 of
the dialogue, explain that this is an alternative for
No, we aren’t.
4 This exercise consolidates Wh- and Yes/No questions
in the Present Continuous. Briefly review the -ing form
by saying the infinitive and eliciting the correct form,
e.g. have - having, do - doing, swim - swimming,
wear - wearing.
Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles
Elicit the wording for question 2 and highlight the
falling intonation on the Wh-question:
Where are they staying?
Students ask and answer the questions in pairs. With
weaker students, you could elicit the question forms
with the whole class first and then get students to ask
and answer.
[CD 2: Track 71] Play the recording and get
students to check the questions and answers.
Answers and tapescript
1 Are they having a good time?
Yes, they are.
2 Where are they staying?
They’re staying in a house with a swimming pool near the beach.
3 What are the children doing?
They’re swimming in the pool.
4 What’s Karen doing?
She’s sunbathing.
5 What’s Nigel doing?
He’stalking on the phone.
6 Is he wearing a suit?
No, he isn’t.
7 Why is Bill calling?
Because he has a problem.
5 This exercise consolidates the contrast between the
two present tenses. Focus attention on the examples in
number 1. Ask Which verb means true day after day,
but not now? {lives); Which verb means now? {’s staying
Students complete the sentences, working individually
Remind them to use contracted forms, and point out
that sentence 3 includes never and so needs a positive
verb. Allow students to check their answers in pairs
before checking with the whole class. If there are
sentences that students disagree on, deal with them as
a whole class, referring students back to the Grammar
Spot on SB p99.
Answers
2 He usually wears a suit, but today he’s wearing shorts.
3 He never relaxes at work, but now he’s relaxing by the pool.
4 Karen works in a shop, but today she’s enjoying her holiday.
5 The children work hard at school, but today they’re swimming
in the pool.
6 It often rains in England and it’s raining there now.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 13
Exercise 6 Present Simple or Continuous? - wear/are
wearing
Answers
Nigel is enjoying the holiday.
Nigel istalking to Bill.
Nigel is relaxing.
Nigel isn’t staying in a hotel.
Karen is enjoying the holiday.
Karen is relaxing.
Karen isn’t swimming in the pool.
Bill is calling Nigel.
Bill isn’t relaxing.
The children are enjoying the holiday.
The children are swimming in the pool.
It isn’t raining in Spain.
They are enjoying the holiday.
They aren’t staying in a hotel.
T 13.7
122 Unit 13 • Here and now](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-120-2048.jpg)
![Answers
They leave their home, and live and work with people who
need help.
The other people don’t know they are rich.
3 The main part of the text contains some new
vocabulary. Encourage students to use the context
as much as possible to help them understand the
new words. Students can also ask a partner or use a
dictionary if appropriate. With weaker students, you
could pre-teach some or all of the new vocabulary, or
ask students to check it before the lesson. The following
items are new: be worth (£60 million), teenage, country
house, private plane, especially, married couple,
apartment block, run a hostel, homeless, miss (your
family), build, bring (someone to a place).
Give students time to read the paragraph about Colin.
Deal with any vocabulary queries they may have. Focus
attention on the questions. Elicit the missing word in
number 1 (did). Get students to complete the questions,
working individually. Check students’ questions. Don’t
give the answers in brackets at this stage.
Elicit the answer to question 1 and then put students
in pairs to continue asking and answering. Check the
answers by getting students to ask and answer again
across the class (see Answers in brackets above).
4 Give students time to read the rest of the text. Deal
with any vocabulary queries they may have. Check
pronunciation of the names in the text: Colin /'kolin/,
Roger /'гоёзэ/, and Margaret /'ma:grit/. Read
sentence 1 and ask True orfalse? Elicitfalse and the
correction He went to Manchester by train.
Put students in pairs to complete the true/false task.
Remind students to provide the corrections where
necessary. Check the answers with the class.
4 False. The hostel is for homeless boys.
5 True.
6 False. They think that he is a good teacher.
7 False. He’s enjoying his time with Roger and Margaret.
8 True.
Listening
5 Tell students they are going to hear Colin talking in
four different situations. Ask students to guess from
the information in the reading text who he might be
talking to, e.g. his family, Margaret and Roger, etc.
[CD 2: Track 72] Focus attention on the
questions and on the chart. Play the first conversation
and elicit the answers to the two questions (see Answer.
below). Play the rest of the recording without stopping.
Allow students to compare their answers in pairs, and
play the recording again if necessary.
Check the answers with the class.
Answers and tapescript
Who’s he talking to? What’s he talking about?
1 Roger and Margaret They are saying hello. Margaret
is thanking Colin for helping them.
2 One of the boys from
the hostel.
Colin is helping the boy to read.
3 His wife. They are talking about Colin’s time
with Roger and Margaret.
4 His sons. They are talking about working
hard and meeting the people in
Manchester.
T 13.8
С =Colin R =Roger M =Margaret CW =Colin’s wife
CS =Colin’s sons В =boy in the hostel
Conversation 1
С Hello, I’mColin.
R Hi, Colin. Lovely to meet you. This is my wife, Margaret.
M It’s very good of you to come and help us.
С I’m pleased to be here.
Conversation 2
С That’s much better. Now, read it again.
В There was a man who work -ed, worked hard and his
busi- busi...
С Business.
В ... his business became very sue - sue - cess - ful, successful!
С Great. You’re doing well.
Conversation 3
С Hello, darling.
CW Colin! How are you? We’re all missing you.
С I’m missing you too, but I’mhaving a good time. It’s very
interesting here. Roger and Margaret are wonderful people.
Answers
1 False. Colin went to Manchester by train.
2 False. He’s staying in a flat in a poor area of the city.
3 True.
Answers
1 When did he start his business? (He started in business 25 years
ago when he was 19.)
2 Where does he live? (He lives in a beautiful, big country house.)
3 Does he have any children? (Yes, he has two teenage sons.)
4 Why is he a lucky man? (He also has a house in Majorca, and
apartments in London and New York. He drives a yellow
Lamborghini and has a private plane.)
5 Who does he want to help? (He wants to help people who aren’t
as lucky as him, especially young people.)
T 13.8
124 Unit 13 • Here and now](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-122-2048.jpg)
![Conversation 4
С Hi, boys!
CS Dad! Hi! We’re doing our homework.
С Hey, that’s good. I’mworking hard too.
CS Are you having a good time?
С I am. I’mwith some really interesting people.
CS Can we meet them?
С Yes, you can. I’d like you to meet them.
CS See you soon, Dad.
С Yeah, can’t wait! See you soon!
•Vhat do you think?
Read through the questions as a class and elicit a few
responses from a range of students. Give students time
no discuss the questions in groups. Elicit a range of ideas
from the class in a short feedback section. Ask students if
they know any other examples of rich people who want to
help others.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 13
Exercise 7 Reading - Todays different
VOCABULARY AND LISTENING (SBP102)
Opposite verbs
This section focuses on another vocabulary pattern -
opposites. Students first met the concept of opposites with
the focus on adjectives in Unit 7. This section focuses on
verbs. It reviews a number of verbs students have already
met, e.g. ask and answer, and also introduces some new
pairings, e.g. win and lose. The set also includes some
common phrasal verbs, e.g. put on and take off.
1 Introduce the concept of opposites by saying a number
of adjectives and eliciting the opposite, e.g. hot - cold,
expensive - cheap, etc.
Read the sentences with the class. Ask students to
underline the verbs s asking and ’re answering. Explain
that these are verbs with opposite meaning.
2 Focus attention on the example. Pre-teach What’s
the opposite o f (leave)? to allow students to help each
other with the task. Then put students in pairs to
continue matching. If appropriate, allow students to use
dictionaries. Monitor and help.
Check the answers, drilling the pronunciation as
necessary.
Answers
2 work play
3 buy sell
4 walk run
5 love hate
6 open close
7 turnon turn off
8 start finish
9 get up go to bed
10 remember forget
11 put on take off
12 win lose
3 Focus attention on the pictures. Ask Who are the
people? Where are they? Elicit a few ideas about some
of the pictures. Elicit the missing verb for sentence 1
as an example (answer). Remind students that they
will need to use different tenses in the sentences.
With weaker students, elicit the tenses needed (but
not the verbs) before students complete the task
(Present Simple 1/3/6; Present Continuous 2; Past
Simple 4/5; imperative 7). Remind students that never
in sentence 6 is followed by a positive verb. Also refer
students to the Irregular verbs list on p i42 to check the
Past Simple answers.
Students complete the sentences, working individually.
Monitor and help. Let students check their answers
in pairs. Deal with any disagreement on the tense or
choice of verb together on the board.
[CD 2: Track 73] Play the recording for a
final check. As a follow-up, check what one refers to
in sentence 2 (car) and it in sentence 7 (the TV).
SUGGESTION
The reading text contains a series of numbers in
different formats. You could list these on the board
and get students to check what they refer to:
4 - the number of the TV channel
ten - the number of days the millionaire works
with people
19 - the age when Colin started his business
£60 million - what Colin is worth
two - the number of sons Colin has
8th - the floor Margaret and Roger live on
one - the number of bedrooms Margaret and
Roger have
£100,000 - the money Colin wants to give
Margaret and Roger
T 13.9
Unit 13 • Here and now 125](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-123-2048.jpg)
![Answers and tapescript
1 Please don’t ask me any more questions. I can’t answer them.
2 I’m selling my old car, and I’m buying a new one.
3 We always get up at seven in the morning and go to bed at eleven
at night.
4 It was cold, soTom took off his T-shirt and put on a warm jumper.
5 I usually walk to school, but yesterday I was late so I ran all
the way.
6 John’s playing tennis with Peter today. He always loses.
He never wins.
7 Don’t turn off the TV, I’mwatching it! Please turn it on again!
Tell students they are going to hear six short
conversations that contain opposite verbs. Explain that
they don’t need to understand every word, but just
to write the pairs of verbs. Also, point out that they
should write the verbs in the infinitive as they appear
in exercise 2, rather than the full verb forms, i.e. work,
rather than I ’m working.
Ч И И [CD 2: Track 74] Focus attention on the
examples and play conversation 1. Play the rest of the
recording and get students to write the correct pairs
of verbs. Play the recording again if necessary to let
students check/complete their answers.
Answers and tapescript
2 start,finish
3 play, work
4 leave, arrive
5 remember, forget
6 open, close
T 13.10
1 A Would you like an espresso?
В No, thank you, I hate black coffee.
A Do you? I love it.
2 A What time does the film start?
В 6.45.
A And do you know when it finishes?
В About 8.30,1think.
3 A Would you like to play tennis after work?
В Sorry, I can’t. I’mworking late again.
4 A Our train leaves London at 13.55.
В And what time does it arrive in Paris?
A 16.05.
В Wow! That’sfast.
5 A Did you remember to bring your dictionary?
В Oh, sorry. I forgot it.
A Not again!
6 A Can I open the window? I’m hot.
В Of course. Just remember to close it when you leave
the room.
pairs to practise the conversations. Monitor and chec
If students have problems with pronunciation, drill
difficult lines from the recording again. Be prepared 1
give an exaggerated model of the voice range if studei
sound a little flat.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 13
Exercise 8 Opposite verbs
EVERYDAY ENGLISH (SB P103)
What’s the matter?
This section presents the language of talking about feeling
minor medical problems, and offering suggestions.
1 Focus attention on the pictures and the question
What’s the matter? Establish that What’s the matter? i<
a common way of asking ‘What’s the problem?’
Focus attention on the example for picture 1. Student
continue completing the sentences, working in pairs.
МШ1И [CD 2: Track 75] Play the recording through
once and get students to check their answers.
Answers and tapescript
She’s cold.
2 He’s hungry.
3 They’re tired.
4 He’sthirsty.
5 They’re hot.
6 She’sbored.
7 He’sangry.
8 She’s worried.
9 He has a headache
10 She has a cold
Refer students to | ) on SB p!22. Put students in
Play the recording again and get students to ч
chorally and individually. Make sure they гг:«я
tired and bored as one syllable - /'taiod/, /Ъзш
than */'taired/, */'bo:red/. Ask students to mn
cold and have a cold to check they have uncs-a
difference.
Get students to work in pairs. Student А p e s a
cartoon and Student В says the corresponds^:
Focus attention on the photos and two gappes
conversations. Give students time to compie-j
with words from exercise 1.
i i m n [CD 2: Track 76] Play the recording
students to check their answers. Highlight the
Why don’tyou ... ?for making suggestions. Шi
query I’ll in conversation 1, explain that it s z mpi
making an offer, but don’t go into an exp1an s
grammar behind it.
Play the recording again and get students to ■
Students practise the conversations in pairs
126 Unit 13 • Here and now](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-124-2048.jpg)
![Answers and tapescript
Conversation 1
A What’s the matter?
В I’mtired and thirsty.
A Why don’t you have a cup of tea?
В That’s a good idea.
A Sit down. I’ll make it for you.
Conversation 2
С What’s the matter?
D I have a bad headache.
С Oh dear! Why don’t you take some aspirin?
D I don’t have any.
С It’s OK. I have some.
: oleplay
3 Check comprehension of the ideas in the lists. Elicit
one or two more conversations from the class and
then get students to continue in closed pairs, using the
words from exercise 1. Monitor and check for correct
use of the adjectives and Why don’t you ... ?
SUGGESTION
Try to integrate language from the Everyday English
sections in your lessons and encourage students to do
the same. This language can be used quite naturally in
the classroom context to reinforce the communicative
value of what the students are learning.
Good (morning).
How are you?
Em sorry Em late.
Have a nice day.
See you later.
I don’t know.
I don’t understand.
Please./Thank you.
How do you spell... ?
What’s the date today?
Is there a ... near here?
Pardon?
All right.
Excuse me.
(Em) sorry.
That’s OK.
Can I ... ?
What’s the matter? Em ...
Are you all right?
I can’tfind m y ...
My ... doesn’t work.
I can’t get on the Internet.
Why don’tyou ... ?
That’s a good idea.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 13
Exercises 9 and 10 What’s the matter?
Don’t forget]
Workbook Unit 13
Exercises 11-16 Revision
Word list
Ask the students to turn to p i38-9 and go through
the words with them. Ask them to learn the words for
homework, and test them on a few in the following lesson.
Teacher’s Resource Disc
Unit 13 Test
Unit 13 Skills test
Video/DVD
Unit 13 Clothes on iTools and iTutor
Unit 13 • Here and now 127](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-125-2048.jpg)
![Elicit the answer to number 1 as an example (London).
Also explain that students will sometimes need to
write a verb. Elicit the answer to number 5 (drive) as
an example. Get students to complete the sentences,
working individually. Monitor and help as necessary.
[CD 2: Track 77] Get students to check in pairs
before playing the recording as a final check.
Play the recording of sentences 1-4 again and get
students to repeat chorally and individually. Students
then take it in turns to practise the sentences in closed
pairs. Monitor and check. If students have problems
with the pronunciation of going to, drill key examples
and get students to practise the sentences again.
Answers and tapescript
1 On Sunday they’re flying to London.
2 On Monday they’re going to have a bus tour of London.
3 On Tuesday they’re travelling through Belgium and into Germany.
4 On Wednesday they’re going to drive down the ‘Romantic Road’
to the Alps and Austria.
5 On Thursday they’re goingto drive over the Europa Bridge.
6 On Friday they’re goingto stop in Verona. They're going to see
Juliet’s balcony.
7 On Saturday evening they’re having dinner in a bistro in Paris.
8 On Sunday morning they’re going to the Louvre to see the Mona
Lisa. In the evening, they’re flying back to the US.
[CD 2: Track 79] Playing the recording and ge
students to check their answers. With weaker students,
write the questions on the board to allow students to
check the verb forms.
Get pairs of students to ask and answer questions 1 anc
2 across the class. Encourage them to give long answer:
and so practise the two future forms (see Answers
in brackets below). Students then ask and answer
in closed pairs. Monitor and check. If students have
problems with the form or pronunciation, drill key
examples and get students to practise again.
Answers and tapescript
1 What are they doing on Tuesday? (They’re travelling through
Belgium into Germany.)
2 What are they goingto do on Wednesday? (They’re going to drive
down the ‘Romantic Road’ to the Alps and Austria.)
3 When are they goingto drive over the Europa Bridge? (They’re
going to drive over the Europa Bridge on Thursday.)
4 What are they goingto do in Verona? (They’re going to seeJuliet’s
balcony.)
5 Where are they having dinner on Saturday? (They’re having dinner
in a bistro in Paris.)
6 When are they goingto the Louvre? (They’re going to the Louvre
on Sunday morning.)
7 When are they flying back to the US? (They’re flying back to the
US on Sunday evening.)
T 14.1
T 14.3
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 14
Exercises 1 and 2 Future plans - going to study/work/travel
Questions
4 IIEI1 [CD 2: Track 78] This section focuses on Wh-
questions with the future forms. Focus attention on
the examples. Play the recording and get students to
repeat chorally and individually. Encourage them to
reproduce the correct stress and falling intonation on
the questions.
What are they doing on Sunday?
What are they going to do on Monday?
5 Elicit the complete question about Tuesday (What are
they doing on Tuesday?). Give students time to write
the rest of the questions, working individually. Monitor
and check. If students mix the two future forms, remind
them to look carefully at the cues and use going to only
where specified.
PRACTICE (SB p!06)
Eddie’s plans
1 This exercise consolidates question formation with the
Present Continuous, reviews Wh- question words fron
previous units, and introduces How long... ?to refer to
duration in the future.
Focus attention on the photo and on rubric 1. Ask
What’s his name? (Eddie). What’s he doing? (He’s lookin
at a map and talking to a friend about his holiday
plans.)
Pre-teach/check rucksack, go on safari, sleep in a tent,
byjeep, and cost (verb).
I [CD 2: Track 80] Focus attention on the
example and play the first two lines of the recording.
Then get students to complete the conversation with
the question words. Allow students to use the context
to help them place how long in the correct line of the
conversation.
Get students to check in pairs before playing the whok
recording. Check the answers with the class.
T 14.4
130 Unit 14 • It’s time to go!](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-128-2048.jpg)
![Point out that the sentences should talk in general
about People/You/A ..., rather than be personal
statements with I.
Students continue making the connections in pairs.
Check the answers.
Answers
station-train: Trains travel between stations./People catch trains
from stations./You can travel by train from stations,
beach-swimming: People go swimming at the beach./You can go
swimming at the beach.
journalist-newspaper: Journalists write for newspapers./
Ajournalist writes for a newspaper.
airport-planes: Planes fly between airports./People catch planes
from airports.
shampoo-chemist’s: People buy shampoo from a chemist’s./
You can buy shampoo from a chemist’s,
fridge-kitchen: People usually put their fridge in the kitchen,
nurse-hospital: Nurses work in hospitals./A nurse works in a hospital,
waiter-menu: Waiters bring menus./A waiter brings you the menu.
3 Read the rubric with the class and focus attention on
the example. Elicit why bridge is different (A ‘bridge’ is
part o f a city but the others are allforms o f transport.).
Students then continue the task, working in pairs.
Check the answers.
Answers
2 waiter - A waiter is ajob, but the others are people in a family.
3 awful - Awful is a negative adjective, but the others are positive.
4 trousers - You wear trousers on your legs, but you wear the
others on your feet.
5 laptop - A laptop is a piece of equipment, but the others are
furniture.
6 cooker - A cooker is a piece of equipment, but the others are
jobs.
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL
Workbook Unit 14
Exercise 7 Lists - Monday/Tuesday
Exercise 8 Words that go together - tired/work hard
Pronunciation
4 Write these words on the board and ask How many
syllables?: train (one), waiter (two), hospital (three).
If necessary show where the two- and three-syllables
words divide: wailter, hos/pi/tal.
Demonstrate the two stress patterns in the chart. Write
the words on the board and ask Where’s the stress?: pilot
(stress on first syllable) and hotel (stress on second
syllable). Point out that the bigger circle in the pattern
indicates the stressed syllable. Students complete the
chart, working in pairs.
[CD 2: Track 81] Play the recording and let
students check their answers. Play the recording again
and get students to listen and repeat.
Answers and tapescript
• • • •
pilot hotel
women arrive
married shampoo
chocolate enjoy
Focus attention on the words with three syllables and
the example. Elicit a word for the other two stress
patterns: stress on the second syllable (banana) and
stress on the third syllable (souvenir).
[CD 2: Track 82] Students complete the chart,
working in pairs. Then play the recording and let
students check their answers. Play the recording again
and get students to listen and repeat.
Answers and tapescript
• • • • • • • • •
photograph designer magazine
vegetable assistant understand
interesting banana souvenir
5 И Е»Д [CD 2: Track 83] Focus attention on the
example and play the first three words of the recording.
Explain that words that have the same spelling
sometimes have different pronunciation. Remind
students to focus on the sounds in each set of words
rather than the spelling.
Play the recording and get students to underline the
words that rhyme. Play the recording again and get
students to listen and check, and then repeat.
Answers and tapescript
1 some home come
2 goes knows does
3 were here her
4 make steak speak
5 near wear there
6 eat great wait
If appropriate, refer students to the Phonetic symbols
chart on SB p i43 and get them to match the sounds to
the words in exercise 5.
T 14.5
T 14.6
Unit 14 • It’s time to go! 133](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-131-2048.jpg)
![READING AND SPEAKING (SB P108)
Life’s big events
The final skills section in the Beginner Student’s Book
gives students an opportunity to pull together the three
main time references in the course - past, present,
and future. The jigsaw reading task on life’s big events
describes the past, present, and future of three people of
different ages and backgrounds. The section integrates
listening, reading, and speaking and gives students
opportunities to personalize some of the key language.
2 Focus attention on the photos of the people and
check pronunciation of the names: Milena /'mileno/,
Georg /'geo:g/, Archie /'a:tji:/.
[CD 2: Track 84] Read the questions as a class.
Play the recording through once and get students to
answer the questions in pairs. Play the recording again
to let students complete/check their answers about
who talks about what. Elicit any other details that the
students understood from the recording, but don’t focus
too much on details about jobs and studies, as students
will exchange this information in exercises 3 and 4.
T 14.8
NOTE
Encourage students to use the context in the reading
texts as much as possible to help them with new words.
They can also pool their knowledge of vocabulary
when working in groups, or, if appropriate, use a
dictionary. Students may need help with the following
words in terms of meaning and/or pronunciation.
You may want to pre-teach/check (some of) the items
before students do the reading task.
Nationalities: Scottish, Czech /tjek/; Place names:
Prague /рга:д/, Munich /'mjumik/, Glasgow
/'glaesgou/, Edinburgh /'edinboro/; Jobs/Work:
journalist/'d33:nolist/, chef/Jef/, housewife
/'hauswaif/; banking, research company /ri's3:tj
,клтрэш/; Subjects: psychology /sai koisd^i/,
economics /.iiko'nomiks/, modern languages /,nmdn
lcEggwid3iz/, biology /bai'nladji/, chemistry
/'kemistri/,physics /'fiziks/, medicine /'medsn/;
Verbs: hope, move (to another country), look
forward to something, go out (with someone), work in
developing countries /di.vebpir) 'kAntriz/, train (other
people to do something)
1 Lead into the topic by writing Life’s big events on the
board and eliciting examples, e.g. having a baby, going
to university, etc. Pre-teach/check get married (irregular
past got), grow up (irregular past grew), and study.
Focus attention on the example and then get students
to order the events, working in pairs. Check the
answers with the class.
Answers
1 was born
2 grew up
3 went to school
4 met a boyfriend/girlfriend/studied at university
5 studied at university/met a boyfriend/girlfriend
6 got married
Answers
Milena talks about her parents and where she lives.
Georg talks about his wife, his studies, and where he lives.
Archie talks about his studies, his girlfriend, and where he lives.
T 14.8
Milena Dusek
My parents are divorced. My father is ajournalist, and works for a
newspaper called Blesk. My mother works as a chef in a restaurant
in the Old Town. I see my father quite often. He lives nearby.
Georg Reinhardt
I was born in Frankfurt, where I grew up and went to school.
I studied architecture at the University of Munich. I met Karlotta
at university, she was a student of modern languages. We moved
to Berlin in 1995.
Archie McCrae
I went to Drumchapel High School. I studied biology, chemistry,
and physics. At school I met Fiona, and we started going out when
we were 16. We studied medicine together at the University of
Edinburgh, and now we live in Edinburgh.
3 Students did a jigsaw reading in Unit 12, but each stage
of this task needs careful setting up. Put students into
three groups, A, B, and C. (With larger classes, have
multiple sets of the three groups.) Assign a text to each
group and remind students to read only their text:
Group A - Milena
Group В - Georg
Group С - Archie
Write an example about your own past, present, and
future in jumbled order on the board, e.g. I really enjoy
(my job). I ’m (getting married) next year. I was born in
(the USA). Ask Past, present orfuture? and get students
to say the correct sentence for each time period.
See above Note about new vocabulary. You may want
to pre-teach/check some of the items, especially with
weaker groups. Get students to read their text quickly
to find the information about their person’s past,
present, and future. Give students time to compare
their ideas. Monitor and help as necessary.
134 Unit 14 • It’s time to go!](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-132-2048.jpg)
![EVERYDAY ENGLISH (SB pill)
Social expressions (2)
This section focuses on a range of different situations
and includes expressions for wishing people good luck,
apologizing, saying thank you, etc.
1 Focus attention on the photos. Ask Where are they?
about each one (1 in a school/university, 2 at home,
3 in the street, 4 in a car/in the street, 5 in the street,
6 on a train/at the station).
l i t H [CD 2: Track 85] Play the recording through
once and get students to read and listen to the
conversations. (See H t A'i below.)
Focus attention on conversation 1 and elicit As first
missing word (luck.). Students continue completing the
conversations in pairs.
М ЕШ [CD 2: Track 85] Play the recording again
and get students to check their answers. Check
understanding of the following expressions: do my
best ( - try as hard as I can), it doesn’t matter (= it isn’t
a problem), anything special? (= anything different
or unusual). Also check the pronunciation of special
/'spejl/, journey /'d33:ni/, and pleasure /'р1езэ/.
Answers and tapescript
1 A Good luck in the exam! I hope it goes welt.
В Thanks. I’ll do my best.
A See you later. Bye!
2 С Oh, no!
D Don’t worry. It doesn’t matter.
С I’m so sorry!
3 E Have a good weekend!
F Thanks! Same to you! What are you doing? Anything special?
E We’re goingto a birthday party.
(F Oh, lovely!)
4 G Goodbye! Drive carefully!
H Thanks! I’ll phone you when I arrive.
G See you again soon!
5 I I have a present for you.
J For me? Why?
I It’sjust to say thank you.
J That’s so kind of you!
6 К Bye! And thanks for everything!
L It was a pleasure. We enjoyed having you.
2 Put students in pairs to rehearse the conversations.
If they sound a little flat, play the recording again,
drilling the intonation chorally and individually.
Encourage students to start high to achieve a good
voice range.
Get students to choose two or three conversations to
learn. Encourage students to test each other on their
lines and prompt each other as necessary.
If possible, rearrange the room to make the situations
feel more authentic and bring in basic props. Ask
students to put their books down and perform the
conversations from memory. Be prepared to prompt
students a little, or ask other students to do so.
Get students to stand up to perform the conversations,
as it will help their pronunciation and acting skills!
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL_______________________________________________
Teacher’s Resource Disc
Communicative activity Unit 14 The category game
Workbook Unit 14
Exercise 9 Form filling - Questions and answers
Exercise 10 Social expressions (2)
Don’t forget1
Workbook Unit 14
Exercises 11 and 12 Revision
Word list
Ask the students to turn to p i39 and go through the words
with them. Ask them to learn the words for homework,
and test them on a few in the following lesson.
Teacher’s Resource Disc
Unit 14 Test
Unit 14 Skills test
Stop and check 4 (Units 11-14)
Progress test 3 (Units 11-14)
Video/DVD
Unit 14 What are you doingfor your next holiday? on
iTools and iTutor
Unit 14 • It’s time to go! 137](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-135-2048.jpg)
![Unit 2 Where’s he from? ТВ p!7
■ | New
HeadwayB eg inner f o u r t h e d itio n *
NAME J
I
|Yoshi
NAME j
1
] Karim
|Kumico J Yasmine
COUNTRY j j
В Зарап COUNTRY 6q>[pt
, — ---1
1
NAME j
*
]|Fernando
NAME 1
1
J Dimitri
J Marta J Katerina
__________ —1
COUNTRY j | ______ Spain COUNTRY ^a P-ussia J■ «»ян«мвпи1^^9
1
-J
.........1
NAME j
1
J MiKe
NAME |
1
| Michel
1 Earol J Marie
COUNTRY ^
В
..ills»®»
England COUNTRY | France----------------------------------------------------------------------------------/
i -------- 1
I
1 1 p^bert
МДМС I V ----------- ----------------------------- ' NAME j
I
j l Marco
HAIVIC
1 1 Eritne>( 1 %ara J
COUNTRY Щ
штттштщ
Hwmw* ........................... "
EES the United States1 J
COUNTRY |
3 M i ---------------------------------------------------------------)
i
i
...J
■ И
NAME j
1
1 Mam J NAME j
I
] Luis _j
l £ v a --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 3 Лпа J
COUNTRY 1 - Hungary COUNTRY J
о
N
Eraz.il
i -------- 1
1
И И
MtUE W ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7 NAME |
3 ? a u i J
NAMt -----------------------------------------
g j T u n J 1 * » J
COUNTRY Ц
mEhina -s
COUNTRY ^
изшв
j |
-----------------------------------------
Australia J
Photocopiable Worksheet ©Oxford University Press 2013 139](https://image.slidesharecdn.com/newheadwaybeginner-200814015944/75/New-headway-beginner-teacher-s-book-4th-ed-2011-151p-137-2048.jpg)
More Related Content
Similar to New headway beginner. teacher's book. 4th ed 2011 151p
New headway beginner. teacher's book. 4th ed 2011 151p
- 1. Fourth edition Beginner Teacher'sBook John and Liz Soars Amanda Maris
- 2. U N IT! UNIT2 UNIT 3 UNIT 4 UNIT 5 UNIT 6 UNIT 7 UNIT 8 UNIT 9 UNIT 10 UNIT 11 UNIT 12 UNIT 13 UNIT 14 Contents Introduction 4 Teaching beginners - tips and techniques 6 am /areIis, my/your • This is ... • How are you? • Good morning! W hat’s this in English? • Numbers 1-10 • Plurals 8 Countries • he/she/they, his/her • W here’s he from? fantastic/aw ful/beautiful • Numbers 11-30 15 Jobs • am /are/is • Negatives and questions • Personal information Social expressions (1) 23 our/their • Possessive s • The family • has/have • The alphabet 32 Sports/Food/Drinks • Present Simple - IIyou/we/ they • atan Languages and nationalities • Numbers and prices 43 The time • Present Simple - he/she • always/sometimes/never Words that go together • Days of the week 53 Question words • т е/him /us/them • this/that • Adjectives •Can I...? 62 Rooms and furniture • There is/are • Prepositions • Directions 70 Saying years • was/were born • Past Simple - irregular verbs • have/do/go W hen’s your birthday? 80 Past Simple - regular and irregular • Questions and negatives • Sport and leisure Going sightseeing 89 can/cant • Adverbs • Adjective + noun • Everyday problems 99 I ’d like - som e/any • In a restaurant • Signs all around 109 Colours and clothes • Present Continuous • Opposite verbs •W hat’s the matter? 118 Future plans • Gram m ar revision • Vocabulary revision • Social expressions (2) 128 Photocopiable worksheets Units 1-14 138 TEACHER’S RESOURCE DISC (inside back cover) Communicative activities Student’s Book word lists Tests with test audio Class tapescripts Grammar Reference with practice Workbook tapescripts 3
- 3. Introduction New Headway Beginner NewHeadway Beginner, Fourth edition is a foundation course for adult and young adult true beginners. It is also suitable for students who have already learned a little English, perhaps some years ago, but who don’t yet feel confident enough to move on. They want to go back before they move forward. New language is introduced gradually and methodically, in measured amounts, and in a logical order. Listening material is provided across two class CDs. Vocabulary has been selected carefully to avoid overloading. There are many controlled practice activities, which aim to give beginners the confidence to proceed, but there is also some simple skills work, which incorporates manageable communicative activities appropriate for low-level students. In the Everyday English sections, we deal with social and functional language, and survival skills. Organization of the course Each unit of New Headway Beginner, Fourth edition has these components: • Starter • Presentation of new language • Practice • Vocabulary • Skills work - always speaking, combined with reading and/or listening and/or writing • Everyday English Starter The Starter section is designed to be a warmer to the lesson and has a direct link with the unit to come. This link might be topical or grammatical, or it might revise input from a previous unit. Presentation of new language New language items are presented through texts, often dialogues, which students can read and listen to at the same time. This enables students to relate the spelling to the sounds of English, and helps with pronunciation, as well as form and use. Sometimes there are two presentation sections. This is to break up what would otherwise be too large a chunk’ of new language. The main verb forms taught are: • to be • Present Simple • there is/are • Past Simple to • can/can’t • I’d like • Present Continuous for now and future, going to We have chosen not to teach have got, for two reasons. Firstly, its Present Perfect form (have + the past participle) is confusing as have got refers to the present, not the past; secondly, have with its do/does/did forms is perfectly acceptable. This pattern has the advantage of fitting in witl all the other verbs that students are learning. There are Grammar Spots in the presentation sections. The aim to focus students’ attention on the language of the uni There are questions to answer, charts to complete, and sho exercises. The Grammar Spot ends by cueing a section of f Grammar Reference at the back of the book. Practice This section contains a variety of controlled and freer practice exercises. The primary skills used are speaking an listening, but there is also some reading and writing. There are information gap exercises, mingle activities, information transfer listening exercises, questionnaires, ar a lot of personalized activities. There are exercises where tl aim is overt analysis of the grammar, such as Check it. Vocabulary There is a strong lexical syllabus in New Headway Beginner, Fourth edition. The vocabulary is carefully graded and recycled throughout, so that students don’t suffer from overloading. Lexical sets are selected according to two criter They complement the grammatical input, for example, daily activities with the Present Simple; or members of the family with apostrophe s. However, they are mainly chosen for thei usefulness. Low-level students need to know the words of everyday life - food, sports, numbers, dates, travel, time, job describing people and places, shopping, sightseeing, saying how you feel. Students are also given exposure to a key featu ofvocabulary in English - collocation. Students work on a range ofpatterns including adjective + noun, and words tha go together to form high-frequency verbs, e.g. have lunch, gc shopping, etc. This way offorming verbs is practised across the course and students also focus on other patterns such as adjectives and their opposites, and verbs and their opposites Skills work Listening Regular unseen listening sections, in dialogue or monologi form, provide further practice of the language of the unit and, later in the course, help to develop students’ ability to understand the main message of a text. 4 Introduction
- 4. : eading At thebeginning of the course, the language in the readings в tightly controlled and graded, and only one or two words will be unknown to the students. As the course progresses, the readings become longer, with slightly more unfamiliar xabulary in the texts. This gives students practice in dealing with new words and prepares them for the longer texts in at the Elementary level. Soeaking In the presentation sections, students have the opportunity to practise the pronunciation and intonation of new language. In the practice sections, less controlled exercises lead to freer speaking practice. There are many speaking exercises based around the listening and reading activities, including regular roleplays. There are speaking opportunities before a text, to launch the topic and create interest; and there are speaking activities after a text, often in the form of discussion. Writing Writing exercises are usually, but not always, small in scope. Students are invited to write about their best friend, a postcard, a short description of a town they know, and a description of a holiday. Everyday English This is a very important part of the syllabus of New Headway Beginner, Fourth edition. There is language input md practice of several kinds: • survival skills, such as numbers, saying dates, the alphabet, saying prices, recognizing signs, and asking for directions • social skills, such as social expressions and greetings • functional areas, such as making requests, going shopping, and saying how you feel There is sometimes an element of ‘phrasebook language’ in these sections. We are not asking students to analyse too deeply how a piece of language operates. For example, in Unit 7 we introduce Can I ...? in a variety of situations. We don’t want teachers or students to worry too much about the grammar of can as a modal verb. We merely want -tudents to see how this phrase can be used to get what you ■•.ant in a polite manner. Grammar Reference This is at the back of the Student’s Book, and it is intended tor use at home. It can be used for revision or for reference. Revision The new iTutor disc that accompanies the Student’s Book .Tows students to review the Student’s Book content and revise what they know using interactive exercises. There is also a photocopiable activity for each of the 14 units at the back of this Teacher’s Book, allowing students to review Language in class. These photocopiables also feature on the Teacher’s Resource Disc (TRD), along with an additional 14 photocopiable activities. There are also 14 Unit tests, 14 Skills tests, four Stop and check tests, three Progress tests, and an Exit test on the Disc. Workbook All the language input - grammatical, lexical, and functional - is revisited and practised. The Workbook now comes with the iChecker disc, allowing students to test themselves throughout the course. The disc includes Writing Support activities and worksheets. There are also pronunciation and listening exercises on the iChecker. This includes listen and repeat exercises, and unseen listenings which are particularly beneficial to students who lack confidence in speaking and who have listening and/or pronunciation problems. Students can refer to the tapescripts on WB p88. Teacher’s Book with Teacher’s Resource Disc The Teacher’s Resource Disc can be found inside the back cover of the Teacher’s Book. It contains additional printable material to support the teacher with course. The Disc also has customizable versions of all 28 photocopiable worksheets, along with tips on what to change, so that the activities can be adapted to be more applicable to your students. The Disc also includes all testing materials - Unit tests, Stop and check tests, Progress tests, an Exit test, and Skills tests with audio files. It also contains the Student’s Book reference materials - Tapescripts, Word list, and Grammar Reference with related grammar exercises. Other materials for New Headway Beginner Video Brand new video clips, along with classroom worksheets are available on the new Headway Beginner Fourth edition iTools. There are fourteen clips, one for each unit. The language and theme in each clip are linked to the relevant Student’s Book unit. Students can also access the video on their iTutor disc that accompanies the Student’s Book. The majority of the clips follow a documentary style, and include native speaker interviews. Teacher’s Resource Book This contains photocopiable games and activities to supplement the New Headway Beginner syllabus. Finally!___________________________________ The basic criterion for selection of every activity in New Headway Beginner, Fourth edition is its usefulness for the survival of a low-level student in an English-speaking environment. We are trying to lay the foundations for what we hope will be a successful and enjoyable language-learning future. Introduction 5
- 5. Teaching beginners- tipsand techniques A step-by-step approach Beginners require a very careful, staged approach with plenty of repetition, practice, and revision to help them internalize new language and to give them confidence. Suggested stages are as follows: Starter This short warmer to the lesson must not be allowed to go on too long. Generally speaking, five minutes is the maximum. Presentation of language point You can vary the presentations if you like. Sometimes it is useful to play a recording first while the students look at the picture with the text covered. Then, after that, they can read and listen. This method may be helpful for some non-European students who are not very familiar with Roman script. Listening and repeating (drilling) When introducing a new item of language, stop and practise pronunciation when students have grasped the meaning. You can use the recording as a model, or provide the model yourself. You may need to stop the CD to give students time to repeat at an appropriate pace. Allow students to listen to the word, phrase, or sentence two or three times before you ask them to repeat it. For example, to drill the sentence How are you? Play the recording and/or model the sentence yourself two or three times using the same pronunciation and intonation, then ask the students as a class to repeat the phrase, i.e. choral drilling. Don’t say it with them, but instead listen to what they are saying. Say Again for them to repeat a second time. If it sounds as if they have got it right, ask one or two students individually to say it again for you to check, i.e. individual drilling. If the choral repetition doesn’t sound right, remodel the phrase for students to listen to again, then ask them to repeat chorally again, before moving on to individual drilling. Practice Move carefully from controlled to freer practice. Beginners require plenty of practice in order both to get their mouths round new language and vocabulary, and also to internalize and remember it. Don’t limit the time spent on practice or revision, but equally do not spend too long on any one thing, or the students may get bored and switch off. You can always come back later and do more work on it. The following techniques ensure enough practice as well as variety. Pairwork A lot of work can be done in pairs. Open and closed pairwork are often referred to in the teaching notes. Open pairwork S2 Ur © As a stage after drilling and before closed pairwork, you can call on two students at a time to practise the lines of a dialogue, ask and answer a question, etc. across the room, with the rest of the class listening. Do open pairwork: • to set up and demonstrate a closed pairwork activity. • to check understanding of a task. • to check students’ grammar, pronunciation, and intonation before they go on to closed pairwork. • after a closed pairwork activity or a written exercise to check performance of the task. Don’t call on the whole class to perform open pairwork. Two or three pairs of students, each performing one or twc exchanges, should be sufficient to check language. More than this may make the activity drag and become boring. Closed pairwork S 3 )* ----- ►(S4 © With closed pairwork, students talk and listen only to each other. This gives them more speaking time and a chance to practise with a peer without having to ‘perform’ in front of you and the class. It is important, though, for you to monitor students’ performances unobtrusively. This will help you to identify persistent errors and misunderstandings. Do not interrupt and correct students while you monitor unless absolutely necessary, as this inhibits fluency. Instead, make a note of persistent errors and put some of them on the board for students to correct afterwards. (It is probably not necessary to identify the culprits!) 6 Teaching beginners - tips and techniques
- 6. practice я i goodway of using picture/cue cards in a practice : activity. It offers variety, a change of pace, and l :: -peaking practice of the language point without S c- boring. The following example describes a way of ж ncture cards of famous people. L -' end in a circle with the students, with the cards in »our hand. 7_m to SI on your left, show the first card, and ask a c-estion, e.g. What’s his/her name?SI answers, and receives the card from you. I S1then turns to S2 and asks the same question. S2 mswers, and receives the card. •> While Si is asking S2, turn to SA on your right, show the second card, and ask the question What’s his/her name? SA answers, receives the card, and turns to ask SB. 5 While SA is asking SB, turn back to SI with the third card, and ask the same question. 6 Continue the process until all the cards are in circulation and the students are asking and answering. There will be i bottleneck when the student opposite you starts getting questions from both sides at once, but it’s part of the fun. Eventually the cards should all come back to you. This rractice game can get faster and faster! room practices Whether you have a monolingual or a multilingual class, it will save a great deal of time and effort if, at the beginning, : uset up clear classroom practices and establish familiar routines. This will quickly provide comfort and reassurance lor beginners who can find it nerve-racking to deal with a new and alien language. Also, many complete beginners are adults who haven’t been in the classroom for a long time, *nd whose previous experience of learning a language was rrobably very different. Tiassroom language Numbers 1-30 and the alphabet will have been introduced by Unit 4 so that you can refer students to page and exercise -.umbers in English, and spell words for them. You could ilso spend a little time at the beginning pre-teaching some useful classroom language, e.g. Sorry, I don’t understand. Can you spell it, please? and instructions, e.g. Work with a partner, Read, Listen, Repeat, All together, Again, Homework, etc. All of this will enable you to keep an ‘English’ atmosphere. When having to give instructions for an activity, rehearse them beforehand so that they are simple, clear, and concise, and demonstrate rather than explain wherever possible. Avoid repeating yourself or over-explaining, as it tends only to create further confusion. Explaining new vocabulary Explanation of new vocabulary to beginners can be problematic, particularly in multilingual classes, and/ or where you have no knowledge of the students’ mother tongue. Make sure that students have a simple bilingual dictionary. Use pictures and/or draw on the board whenever possible. Do not worry if you are not a brilliant artist - simple line drawings are very quick and effective. Start collecting picture cards, posters, photos, etc. to help you. Example sentences with the new word in context are often better than explanations. Giving a similar word or the opposite can also be useful, e.g.finish = stop, get up Фgo to bed. Pronunciation of new vocabulary When you introduce new vocabulary, make sure you drill the pronunciation of the words as well. This should be done after the meaning has been established so that students are not mouthing words that they do not understand. It is also a good idea to get yourself into the habit of highlighting and marking up on the board the main stress of new words, and asking students to copy this down, e.g. teacher or teacher. Use of mother tongue There can be no doubt that it is useful to know the students’ own language (LI), especially if you have a monolingual class. How much you use it is another matter. It is probably best to use it sparingly: • Perhaps in the first lesson talk to students in LI about the course, how they will work, etc. and explain that you will be using English with them. • Perhaps use LI to check instructions for a new and unfamiliar activity, or to check understanding of a new language point, but only after using English. • You can use LI for translation of new vocabulary (where there is a one-to-one direct translation) and to deal with students’ queries, particularly when it would waste a lot of time trying to explain in English. Otherwise, you may find that if beginners feel that it is acceptable to use their own language freely in the classroom, they are inhibited from taking the plunge and speaking English to you and to each other, and it becomes more difficult for them to make that important leap. Teaching beginners - tips and techniques 7
- 7. am/are/is, my/your •This is... • How are you? Good morning! • What’s this in English? Numbers 1-10 • Plurals Hello! Introduction to the unit If you are about to start Unit 1 of New Headway Beginner, Fourth edition, you are probably beginning a new course with a new group of students. This is an exciting time for both teacher and students alike, with a very important initial stage of getting to know each other. The title of Unit 1 is ‘Hello!’ with the aim of students getting to know each other and you, and for you to get to know them of course! A range of settings allows students to practise greetings and introductions in different contexts and so shows them how they can communicate in English in a meaningful way with even quite basic language. Some essential building blocks of learning English are also introduced in manageable chunks and meaningful contexts. These include parts of to be, my/your, the introduction of some basic vocabulary (including some international words), numbers 1-10, and -s/-es plural endings. Language aims Grammar - am/are/is The verb to be is introduced in the singular with the subjects I, you, this, and it (he/she/they are introduced in Unit 2). The focus is on the positive and on questions with the question words what and how. The question words are introduced through the functions of meeting people and greeting: What’s your name?, How are you?, and talking about objects: What’s this in English? Other question words are introduced and reviewed systematically throughout the course. Possessive adjectives My and your are introduced in the unit, with the other possessive adjectives being presented across the first four units of the course. Vocabulary and speaking A set of key everyday words is introduced, some of which are international words, e.g. camera. There is an opportunity to extend this basic set via the classroom context. Numbers 1-10 and -s/-es noun plurals are also introduced and practised. Students are introduced to the pronunciation of the -s/-es plural endings: /s/ /z/ /iz/ books cars houses Everyday English This section focuses on greetings at different parts of the day (Good morning, Good night, etc.) and key situational language such as Bye! and See you later! Workbook To be and my/your are consolidated through further practice on greetings and introductions; key vocabulary, numbers 1-10 and -s/-es plurals are also practised. Photocopiable activity There is a photocopiable activity to review What’s this?, It’s a ... and everyday objects on ТВ p i38. 8 Unitl • Hello!
- 8. totes on theunit i5 " E R (SB рб) ТИ CD 1: Track 2] Smile, greet the class, and say г p*rn name - Hello, I ’m (Liz). Point to yourself to ti tbe meaning clear. Point to the speech bubbles and r tbe recording. xe -Tjdents to say their own name, including the Oing Hello. If you have a very large group, you could i irw students to say their name and then get students ■otmue in pairs. Keep this stage brief, as students will e die opportunity to introduce themselves and each er m the next section. -A TS YOUR NAME? (SB P6) r. zre/is, my/your 1 1 * 1 [CD 1: Track 3] Focus attention on the photo at Pablo and Mika. Point to the conversation on p6 m i ask students to read and listen. Demonstrate these actions to the class if necessary. Play the recording through once. Pfay the recording twice more, first pausing at the end each line and getting the students to repeat as a class. >r_xients then repeat lines individually before practising ~ e conversation in open and then in closed pairs f>ee Teaching beginners - tips and techniques, ТВ рб). Encourage an accurate voice range - the amount by which pitch of the voice changes. (Many languages do dc: use such a wide voice range as English so this needs l : be actively encouraged.) Also make sure students can accurately reproduce the contracted forms I’m and '-.mes. If necessary, model the sentences again yourself to help emphasize the pronunciation in a visual way. GftAMMAR SPOT E: cus attention on the contractions. Ask students to circle the contracted forms in exercise 1. Demonstrate this by writing the conversation on the board and rutting a circle round the first contraction I ’m. This is a mingle activity. Demonstrate the conversation with one student to the rest of the class. Then ask another two students to repeat the conversation in :ren pairs (see Teaching beginners - tips and techniques, ТВ рб). Demonstrate the meaning o f‘stand up’ and re: the students to move around the class practising the conversation. You may like to encourage them to 'Г.аке hands as they introduce themselves, particularly if ‘Jiey don’t know each other. Monitor and check for pronunciation. INTRODUCTIONS (SBP7) This is... 1 И 1 И [CD 1: Track 4] This section gets students to practise introducing each other, still using just first names. Focus attention on the photo of Pablo, Ben, and Mika on p7. Point to the conversation and ask students to read and listen. Play the recording through once. Play the recording again and get students to point to the correct characters as they are referred to in the conversation. Play the recording twice more, first pausing at the end of each line and getting the students to repeat as a class. Students then repeat lines individually before practising the conversation in open and then in closed pairs. Encourage accurate pronunciation of the short sound III and of the linking: /6is iz/ th isjs Ben 2 Point to the gapped conversation. Choose two confident students to demonstrate the conversation with you to the rest of the class. Introduce the students to each other and encourage them to shake hands when they say Hello. Choose two more groups of three to practise the conversation in front of the class. Divide the class into groups of three and get each student to take it in turns to introduce the other two. Monitor and check for pronunciation and intonation. Depending on the class, when the activity is over, you may like to ask one or two groups to go through the conversation again while the whole class listens. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 1 Exercises 1 and 2 Introductions Nice to meet you 3 This section focuses on introducing people in a slightly more formal context, giving surnames as well as first names, and practising the phrase Nice to meet you. Give your first name again: I'm (Liz). Write it on the board: (Liz) is myfirst name. Then say your surname and write it on the board: My surname is (Brown). Repeat I ’m (Liz Brown) - (Liz) is myfirst name, (Brown) is my surname. Then ask a student whose first name you know: Mayumi - Mayumi is yourfirst name, what’s your surname? Elicit surnames from other students. Unitl • Hello! 9
- 9. [CD 1: Track5] Focus attention on the photo of Judy Koblenz and Robert Smith on p7. Point to the conversation and ask students to read and listen. Play the recording through once. Play the recording again and get students to point to the correct characters as they are referred to in the conversation. Play the recording twice more, first pausing at the end of each line and getting the students to repeat as a class. Students then repeat lines individually before practising the conversation in open and then in closed pairs. Encourage accurate stress in the key expressions Nice to meet you. And you. 4 Point to the gapped conversation. Choose a confident student to demonstrate the conversation with you to the rest of the class. Choose two more pairs to practise the conversation in front of the class. Remind students to smile and shake hands when they say Nice to meet you. 5 [CD 1: Track 6] This activity gives students further practice, using other English names. Check students understand the male and female symbols in the activity by pointing to male and female students and then to the correct symbol. Play the recording through once and let students just listen. Play the recording again and get students to repeat each name chorally and individually. Focus attention on the conversation with James Bond. Choose a name for yourself and demonstrate the mingle activity with two or three confident students. Get the class to stand up and move around the class to practise the exchanges, using the new names. Monitor and check for pronunciation. If students sound rather ‘flat’ when greeting each other, model the conversation in exercise 4 again, emphasizing the voice range needed and the correct stress. HOW ARE YOU? (SB P8) 1 Ч 1Г Д [CD 1: Track 7] Focus attention on the photo of Pablo and Ben in conversation 1 on p8. Check students can remember the names of the characters by asking Who’s this?Refer students back to the photos on pp6-7 if necessary. Point to conversation 1 and ask students to read and listen. Play the recording through once. Focus attention on the photo of Ben and Mika in conversation 2 on p8. Check students can remember the names of the characters. Follow the same procedure as for conversation 1. If students query the difference between Fine, thanks, and Very well, thank you., explair that they are both possible answers to How are you? Play the recording twice more, first pausing at the end of each line and getting the students to repeat as a class. Students then repeat the lines individually before practising the conversations in open and then in closed pairs. Encourage accurate stress and intonation on the questions: How are you? And you? 2 Ask individual students How are you? to elicit the answer Fine, thanks/Very well, thank you. And you? Reply to each student in turn. Make sure students realize that And you? requires an answer Fine/Very well, thanks. Get students to ask and answer you and each other in open pairs across the class. It may be helpful to gesture to your partner when you say And you? to aid comprehension. 3 Students now have free practice in a mingle activity. (You may like to develop a gesture which means ‘mingle’.) Focus attention on the speech bubbles. If necessary, check comprehension of OK, fine, very well with simple board drawings of faces - a straight face for OK © , a half smile forfine © , and a full smile for very well ©. Get the students to move around the class practising the conversation. Monitor and check for pronunciation and intonation. SUGGESTION If appropriate, you can play a memory game based on the students’ names. Ask one student to go round the class saying everyone’s name while the other students help if necessary. Encourage students in a multilingual group to pronounce everyone’s name as accurately as possible. (You might want to do the memory game yourself, too, to make sure you have remembered all the students’ names!) T 1.4 ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 1 Exercises 3 and 4 Nice to meet you
- 10. -SIMAR SPOT attention onthe gapped sentences. Elicit the ore to complete the first sentence with the whole as an example ( m). Then ask students to -.r.ete the other sentences. Sandra, are you? isJohn. Bead Grammar Reference 1.1-1.3 on pl23 together I :.i'S , and/or ask students to read it at home. B k Mirage them to ask you questions about it, in Ll appropriate. Focus attention on the photos and conversations. Point t ; уour students and say You are students in a language s ioo.. Point to the characters in the photos and say Tney are students in a language school. I- i students 30 seconds to read the gapped . nversations. Hold up the book so the class can see the pbotos. Read out the first line of the first conversation ir.d point to the female character in the photo. Ask Ana •r Mario? {Ana). Point to the male and ask Who’s this? {Mario). Elicit the identities of Carla and Max, and Eda and David in the other photos. Ь is a good idea to write the first conversation gap-fill oo the board and do it with the whole class, as students may not be familiar with this kind of exercise. Write adents’ suggestions (right or wrong) in the gaps, jive students time to complete the second and third ; : nversations. You could put them in pairs to try to do the task together. Go round and monitor, but don’t cc rrect any mistakes yet. 4 f [CD 1: Track 8] Play the conversations for : idents to listen and check. See if they can hear and ; : rrect any mistakes themselves before you offer : : rrection. Then check the answers with the whole class. Answers and tapescript A Hello, My name’s Ana. What’s your name? В My name’s Mario. 1 A Max, this is Carla. В Hi, Carla. С Hello, Max. Nice to meet you. ; A Hi, Eda. How are you? В Fine, thanks, David. And you? A Very well, thanks. Get students to practise the conversations first in open pairs and then in closed pairs. Monitor and check for accurate pronunciation. If necessary, model the conversations again, either yourself or from the recording, and get students to practise again. Let students refer to the photos, but discourage them from reading the conversations word for word, as they will lose the correct intonation and not make eye contact with the other students. (If appropriate, get them to stand up, as this often encourages a more dynamic performance!) If you think more practice is needed at this stage, get students to repeat the conversations using their own names. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 1 Exercise 5 How are you? EVERYDAY ENGLISH (SB P9) Good morning! This section focuses on the appropriate greetings to use at different times of day, along with other simple phrases used in different everyday situations. 1 Focus attention on the photos and the gapped conversations. Use the photos, mime, and simple clocks on the board to explain that the situations show different times of day. Get two students to read out conversation 1, including the example. Write the complete conversation on the board and point out that Good morning is crossed out from the expressions in the box. Students continue completing the conversations, working in pairs and using the photos to help. Monitor and help, using the photos to help deal with any vocabulary queries. Ч Ш [CD 1: Track 9] Play the recording and get students to check their answers. Students then practise the conversations in open and then in closed pairs. Encourage a wide voice range in expressions like What a lovely day! and See you later! Answers and tapescript 1 A Good morning! В Good morning! What a lovely day! 2 A Good afternoon! В Hello. A cup of tea, please. 3 A Goodbye! В Bye! See you later! 4 A Good night! В Good night! Sleep well! Unitl • Hello! 11
- 11. 2 This exerciseconsolidates the everyday expressions in this section in a word order exercise. Copy the first example onto the board with the words in the wrong order. Ask a student to read out the correct order and write the answer on the board, crossing out the words in the wrong order as you go. Students complete the conversations, using the words given. Give students time to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. Ч И Ё [CD 1: Track 10] Play the recording, pausing at the end of each conversation to allow students to check their answers. Students then practise the conversations in open and then in closed pairs. Again, encourage a wide voice range in expressions like Have a nice day. If necessary, play the recording again and get the students to repeat to get the correct stress and intonation. Answers and tapescript 1 A Good morning! How are you today? В Fine, thanks. 2 A Good afternoon! В Good afternoon! A cup of coffee, please. 3 A Goodbye! Have a nice day. В Thank you. And you. See you later. 4 A Good night! Sleep well. В Thank you. And you. SUGGESTION Encourage students to use the expressions in the Everyday English section as often as possible. Always get them to greet you and each other at the beginning of each lesson in English. This is real communication in a real situation and it also provides a useful marker that it is time for English. You can also adapt and extend the expressions to cover other time references, e.g. Have a nice weekend. See you next week, etc. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Teacher’s Resource Disc Communicative activity Unit 1 Nice to meet you Workbook Unit 1 Exercises 11 and 12 Good morning! VOCABULARY AND SPEAKING (SBplO) What’s this in English? 1 Many of the words in the lexical set may be known to the students as they are ‘international’ words or may be similar in their own language. Focus on the example and then get students to work individually or in pairs or groups of three to match the rest of the words to the photos. Monitor and check for correct spelling. Check the answers with the whole class. Answers 1 a book 7 a hamburger 2 a computer 8 a sandwich 3 atelevision 9 a camera 4 a phone 10 a photograph 5 a bus 11 a bag 6 a car 12 a house 2 l i i l i l [CD 1: Track 11] Play the recording and get students to listen and repeat the words. Check for accurate word stress and, if necessary, explain the system of stress marks used in New Headway by pointing to the stress highlighting in the Students Book and modelling the pronunciation yourself, highlighting the stressed syllables: camera photograph computer hamburger television sandwich 3 Ч В1И [CD 1: Track 12] Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Demonstrate the conversation by pointing to the photograph and asking What’s this in English? Elicit the reply It’s a photograph. Play the recording and get students to repeat. Point to different pictures on plO and get students to ask and answer in open pairs. Make sure students answer with full sentences, not just one word. Also check for accurate pronunciation of It’s a and if students produce *Is a, repeat the drill. Students then continue asking and answering about the objects in exercise 1, working in closed pairs. GRAMMAR SPOT Focus attention on the contracted form. Ask students to circle the same form in the conversation in exercise 3.
- 12. ^ a bookand ask What’s this in English? Elicit Its a book. Pick up another object that hfrtos don’t know how to say in English and elicit the What’s this in English? Give the answer, e.g. {dictionary). Students then continue picking up or to objects in the classroom and asking questions. ^ m *4t their questions, and write up the words on the Ьвагс. highlighting the word stress if necessary. (Try to words beginning with a vowel and the need for to use an. Also, try to limit students’ questions 'ary that will be useful to them at this stage in learning, e.g. pen, dictionary, and try not to let the ity go on too long!) ••C'O CO PIA BLE ACTIVITY ito ’ 1 What’s this in English? ТВ p!38 Materials: one copy of the worksheet cut up per р о с т of 15 students ^rcvcdure: Pre-teach/check table, chair, and window b f pc ..-.ting to the relevant object in the classroom » - --King What’s this in English? Elicit It’s a (chair). tttx e '..re students use the contracted form It’s and 3ae article a. • Giv e each student a picture card. • S o dents mingle showing their cards and asking each other What’s this in English? After each exchange, students swap cards and move on to ■_-.e next student. Go round listening, making sure jdents are asking and answering the question correctly. • Encourage students to help each other if they can’t remember the name of the item. If neither student can remember, they should ask you What’s this in English? SUGGESTIONS You can give students more practice with the vocabulary in this section with a range of word games, including describe and draw, a memory game based on a detailed image such as a street scene, or a crossword/word search. You could also ask students for more examples of ‘international’ words or cognates with the students’ own language (e.g. supermarket, cinema, hospital, telephone, radio, taxi, tennis, golf, football). Put the words on the board and practise the pronunciation. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL •Yorkbook Unit 1 Exercise 6 What’s this in English? Numbers 1-10 and plurals SUGGESTION Students need a lot of practice with numbers, so from now on, use numbers as much as possible when referring to pages and exercises. Continue to do quick number revisions in future lessons, especially as more numbers are introduced. This can include number dictations, either with you dictating or with the students working in pairs: Teacher dictation: Say numbers at random, writing them down yourself so that you have a means of checking. Students write the figures, not the words, as you say them. Have one student read their list of numbers out to check. Pairs dictation: Students prepare a list of random figures to dictate to their partner. They take it in turns to dictate their list. The student who is taking down the dictated numbers writes the figures, not the words, and then reads the list back to their partner to check the answers. Make sure you limit the range of numbers to those covered at any stage in the course, e.g. Unit 1: numbers 1-10. 1 О Д Д [CD 1: Track 13] Play the recording once and get students to read and listen to the numbers. Write two and eight on the board and put a stroke through the w and the gh to show that they are silent. Play the recording again and get students to repeat. 2 Get students to say the numbers round the class, starting again at one once they reach ten. You can also get students to say the numbers in reverse order if appropriate. If students need more practice, write figures at random on the board and get students to say the numbers as you write. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 1 Exercises 7 and 8 Numbers 1-10 3 This exercise presents and practises formation of plurals with -s/-es, and reviews the vocabulary from this unit and numbers 1-10. Focus attention on the pictures and on the example. Count up the books in the first item a and get students to read the example aloud. Then get students to complete the rest of the exercise, referring back to the list of numerals and words on the page. Monitor and check for correct spelling. Unitl • Hello! 13
- 13. Ч И П[CD 1: Track 14] Play the recording and get Don’t forget! students to check their answers. Get students to write the words on the board as a final check. Workbook Unit 1 Exercises 13-17 Revision Answers and tapescript a five books b three cars с eight houses d seven cameras e nine photographs f two sandwiches g four computers h six buses i ten students 4 Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Model the pronunciation of the question and answer, and get students to repeat. Students practise in open and then closed pairs. Monitor and check for accurate pronunciation. Drill the numbers and words again if necessary. If students need more practice, ask them to work with a new partner and repeat the activity, covering exercise 1 to make it more challenging if necessary. GRAMMAR SPOT Focus attention on the singular nouns and the plural noun endings. Ask students to underline the plural endings in exercise 3. Refer students to Grammar Reference 1.4 on p!23. Word list Ask the students to turn to p i30 and look at the word list for Unit 1. Explain that this contains important words from the unit. Go through the words in class and then ask students to learn the words for homework. Test students on a few of the words in the following lesson. Teacher’s Resource Disc Unit 1 Test Unit 1 Skills test Video/DVD Unit 1 What’s your name? on iTools Units 1 & 2 on iTutor 5 M R E I [CD 1: Track 15] Play the recording through once and let students just listen. Play the recording again and get the students to repeat chorally and individually. If students have problems distinguishing between /s/and /z/, get them to put their hands on their throat to feel the vibrations that occur when /z/ is pronounced because the sound is voiced. (Don’t introduce the terms voiced and voiceless at this early stage, but just get students used to the idea that the pronunciation is different.) ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 1 Exercises 9 and 10 Plurals
- 14. duction to theunit title of Unit 2 is ‘Your world’ and :s on countries and cities, diking about where people are The characters introduced in 1 are shown again in a different The syllabus of Wh- question is reviewed and extended, ts continue with numbers and there is an introduction adjectivesfantastic, awful, and ful. In terms of skills, students their first unseen listening task Yso a short reading text. These important first steps in developing ig and reading skills and help epare students for handling cressively longer listening and g texts across the course. Countries he/she/they, his/her Where’s he from? • fantastic/awful/beautiful Numbers 11-30 Your world Language aims Grammar - Where’s he from?; he/she/they Students build on the Wh- questions introduced in Unit 1 with the introduction of Where’s he/she from ?and Where are you from? (How old is he/she? is also introduced for recognition.) The verb to be with I and you is consolidated and also extended to include he/she/they. Possessive adjectives His and her are introduced and my and your are reviewed from Unit 1. Vocabulary A set of cities and countries are introduced. The adjectives fantastic, awful, and beautiful are introduced in the context of talking about New York in the Reading and speaking section. Everyday English The numbers syllabus is extended to cover 11-30. Workbook The key lexical set of countries is reviewed, including focuses on spelling and pronunciation. He/she and his/her are consolidated through gap-fill activities. Questions are practised through a matching activity, and adjectives are also reviewed. Talking about places and where people are from are further practised through gap-fill activities, and reading and listening tasks. Numbers 11-30 are practised in a range of activities. Photocopiable activity There is a photocopiable activity to review I/you, my/уour, he!she, and his/her, on ТВ p i39. POSSIBLE PROBLEMS • Beginners often make mistakes with he/she and his/her (especially if subject pronouns are not used and/or if the possessives are expressed differently in their own language). The course provides a lot of practice on this possible area of confusion, but be prepared to monitor and check the use of he/she and his/her and go over these points whenever problems occur. Further confusion is possible with the contracted form he’s. It’s worth taking the time to drill the pronunciation of his /hiz/ and he’s /hi:z/ to help students perceive and produce the difference. • Students often have problems distinguishing ‘teen’ numbers (13-19) from ‘ten’ numbers (30, 40, 50, etc.). Highlight the different word stress: thirteen thirty fourteen forty • Note that in the presentation on SB p l7 the students will be counting numbers 11-20, and so the stress on the ‘teen’ numbers is on the first syllable. Unit 2 • Your world 15
- 15. Notes on theunit SHE’S FROM JAPAN (SB pl2) SUGGESTION Take the opportunity to review the greetings covered in Unit 1 at the beginning of each class. Greet each student as they arrive in class and ask how they are. Encourage students to greet each other in English so that they get into the habit of using the language they have learned in a meaningful way. STARTER (SB pl2) Focus attention on the map on p13 to introduce the context of talking about where you are from. Point to the country that you are from on the map and invite students to do the same. Remind them of the question What’s ... in English? from Unit 1 so that they can ask you for the name of their country, e.g. What’s (Belgique) in English? (If you do not recognize the name of the country in the students’ mother tongue, then ask them to point it out on the map.) Write up the names of the countries on the board and drill the pronunciation as necessary. Focus attention on the countries in the box. Demonstrate the activity by getting students to locate Australia on the map. Students continue locating the countries in exercise 1 on the map, working in pairs. If there is any disagreement, check the answers with the whole class. ■ [CD 1: Track 16] Play the recording and get the students to repeat chorally and individually. Pay particular attention to stress. If you have a lot of students from other countries, get them to say the name of their country and check their pronunciation. he/she, his/her 1 [CD 1: Track 17] This conversation introduces the second person question form. Focus attention on the photos of the characters who appeared in Unit 1. Elicit the names Pablo and Mika from the class. Point to the conversation and ask students to read and listen. Play the recording through once. Play the recording again and then ask Where’s Spain? Where’s Japan? Get students to point to the correct part of the map. Play the recording again, pausing at the end of each line and getting the students to repeat as a class. Students then repeat lines individually before practising the conversation in open and then in closed pairs. Encourage accurate reproduction of the contrastive stress in the questions, and of the falling intonation: Where are you from ? Where are you from? 2 This is another mingle activity. If you have a multilingual class, make sure that all the students’ countries are written on the board and practised beforehand. If you have a monolingual class, you might like to teach them I’m from (town/city) in (country) to vary the answers. Demonstrate the conversation with one student for the rest of the class. Then ask another two students to repeat the conversation in open pairs. Get the students to move around the class practising the conversation. Monitor and check for pronunciation. 3 [CD 1: Track 18] Focus attention on the photos of Pablo and Mika. Point to the sentences and ask students to read and listen. Play the recording through once. Play the recording again and get students to repeat. Encourage students to reproduce the long and short sounds in his and he’s: /hiz/ /hi:z/ His name’s Pablo. He’sfrom Spain. Write the sentences about Pablo on the board. Circle his and he. Repeat His name’s Pablo. He’sfrom Spain. Then model the sentence on another male class member: His name’s Erdi. He’sfrom Turkey. Now contrast with a female student: But Her name’s Ali. She’sfrom Indonesia. Write up the sentences about Mika and circle Her and She. Elicit more examples from the class to consolidate the use of he!she and his/her. Answers 16 Unit 2 • Your world
- 16. RAMMAR SPOT GRAMMARSPOT Focus attention on the contractions. Ask students to circle the contracted forms in exercise 3. Read Grammar Reference 2.1 and 2.2 on p i23 together in class, and/or ask students to read it at home. Encourage them to ask you questions about it. MTIONAL MATERIAL____________________________________________ sk Unit 2 rises 1 and 2 Countries rises 3 and 4 am /are/is - Her name’s .../She’sfrom . QUESTIONS (SB pB) IWtere’s he from? Focus attention on the photos on pl3. Read the sentences in number 1 with the whole class as an example. Students work individually to complete the sentences about the other people. Give students time to check their answers in pairs. ■ > [CD 1: Track 19] Play the recording through nee and let students check their answers. Play the recording again and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Answers and tapescript His name’s Kevin. He’s from the United States. 1 His name’s Laszlo. He’s from Hungary. : Her name’s Karima. She’s from Egypt. - Her name’s Tatiana. She’sfrom Russia. : Her name’s Rosely. She’sfrom Brazil. : His name’s Simon. He’s from England. His name’s Yong. He’s from China. : Her name’s Hayley. She’sfrom Australia. ■ [CD 1: Track 20] This exercise introduces third person question forms. Note that every time the cuestion form is introduced, it is clearly displayed on the page with the question mark icon. This enables students to review question forms across the course more easily. Play the recording and get the students to repeat chorally and individually. Check students can reproduce the falling intonation of the Wh- questions. 1 Focus attention on the contraction Where’s. Ask students to circle the contraction Where’s in exercise 2. Check students recognize What’s in exercise 2 as the contraction of What is. 2 Focus attention on the gapped sentences. Complete the first sentence with the whole class as an example (is). Then ask students to complete the other sentences. Answers Where is she from? Where is he from? Where are you from? Refer students to Grammar Reference 2.3 on pl23. 3 Go through the photographs on pl3 yourself first asking What’s his/her name? and Where’s he/she from? and eliciting the answers, before getting students to do the same in pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of he/she and his/her. Drill the forms again if necessary, referring to different male and female students to make the difference clear. PHOTOCOPIABLE ACTIVITY UNIT 2 Where’s he from? ТВ pl39 Materials: one copy of the worksheet cut up per group of 12 students Procedure: This activity provides further practice of I/you, my/your, he/she, and his/her by giving students a new name and country. The cards provide a male and a female name from each of the countries in the Students Book. • Review the exchanges What’s your name? My name’s (Robert). Where are you from? I’m from (the United States), writing them on the board if necessary. Also review when to use he/she. • Give the role cards out to the students, telling them this is their new name and country. Ask students to stand up and go round the class asking and answering the questions. Tell them they must try to remember everyone’s new name and country. • When students have finished, point to various students and ask the class What’s his/her name? and Where’s he/shefrom? If the class is good, you can also check with the student in question whether the class has remembered correctly, asking Is that right?, and having them answer Yes or No. Unit 2 • Your world 17
- 17. Alternatively, or inaddition to the above suggestion, you could bring in pictures of famous people for further practice. You could use them for open pairwork, or you could try a question and answer chain as follows: 1 Stand in a circle with the students, with the pictures in your hand. 2 Turn to SI on your left, show the first card and ask What’s his/her name?and Where’s he/shefrom? 51 answers, and receives the picture from you. 3 Si then turns to S2 and asks the same question. 52 answers, and receives the picture. 4 While SI is asking S2, turn to SA on your right, show the second picture, and ask the questions What’s his/her name? and Where’s he/shefrom? SA answers, receives the picture, and turns and asks SB. 5 While SA is asking SB, turn back to SI again with the third picture, and ask the question. 6 Continue the process until all the pictures are in circulation and the students are asking and answering. There will probably be a bottleneck when the student opposite you starts getting questions from both sides at once, but that’s part of the fun. Eventually the pictures should all come back to you. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 2 Exercises 5 -7 am /are/is - Her name’s .../She’sfrom ... PRACTICE (SB p!4) Cities and countries 1 Focus attention on the names of the cities on pl4 and drill the pronunciation chorally and individually. Model the conversation and get students to repeat chorally. Students repeat the conversation with a different city, e.g. Cairo, in open pairs. Students continue working in closed pairs. B U M [CD 1: Track 21] Play the recording and let students check their answers. Answers and tapescript Where’s Barcelona? It’s in Spain. Where’s Beijing? It’s in China. Where’s Moscow? It’s in Russia. Where’s Cairo? It’s in Egypt. Where’s Los Angeles? It’s in the United States. Where’s Sao Paulo? It’s in Brazil. Where’s Sydney? It’s in Australia. Where’sTokyo? It’s inJapan. Where’s Budapest? It’s in Hungary. Where’s London? It’s in England. 2 This is the first information gap exercise that students have met in the book, and it therefore needs careful setting up. Make sure students understand that they shouldn’t look at each other’s pages until the end of the activity. Each student has the name and city of four of the eight people in the photos. The aim is for each student to find out about the other four by asking their partner. If possible, explain this using the students’ own language and demonstrate a couple of question and answer exchanges with a good student yourself first. Remind students of the forms they will need to talk about the men and women in the photos (What’s his/her name? and Where’s he/shefrom?). Drill all four questions again if necessary. Divide the class into pairs and make sure students know if they are Student A or B. Student A should look at pl4 in the unit and Student В at p i40 at the back of the book Students can refer to each photo by saying the number. They should write their answers in the spaces provided. While the students are asking and answering about the people in the photos, go round monitoring and helping. If the names cause problems, get students to write them on a separate piece of paper and show it to their partner When they have finished, you can check by asking individual students to tell you about one of the people in the photos. Say Tell me about number one, etc. Answers Tell students to look at each other’s pages. 18 Unit 2 • Your world
- 18. [ aro.T you It i few students and ask the class What’s his/ Шт'- and Where’s he/shefrom? Focus attention 4 c ^jeech bubbles and get students to practise the and answers in open pairs across the class, srcdents to replace the examples in exercise 3 ts’ names and countries, and to include the a city/town if appropriate. Students continue e in closed pairs. and answers CD 1: Track 22] Focus attention on the photo dv and Bruno on pl5. Ask students What’s her •rout Rosely and elicit the answer. Ask What’s about Bruno and use the opportunity to I don’t know. conversation through once and get students aplete as many gaps as possible. (With a weaker r* vou may want to let them listen through once ■■сге they fill in the gaps.) Play the conversation again ж : ге: students to complete their answers. Check the •with the whole class. and tapescript I'm Rosely. What’s your name? В ы, --ame's Bruno. Ь *e£o. Bruno. Where are you from? 1 Гт from Brazil. Where are you from? R Ok i mfrom Brazil, too. I’m from Sao Paulo. | I leaity? I'm from Sao Paulo, too! 1 On. nice to meet you, Bruno. ГVbv the recording again, pausing at the end of each ir e and getting the students to repeat as a class. Get a cc<_rle of pairs of students to practise the conversation r : ren pairs and then get the class to continue in ckrsed pairs. SUGGESTION Шyou have pictures of famous people of different rationalities, you can use these for further practice, r not, you can write on the board the names of some tamous people whose nationalities students will know, Ь r further question and answer practice. I H B [CD 1: T rack23] This exercise consists of three short conversations with people from different с : untries and it is the students’ first unseen listening. They should be well prepared for the language by now, rut some students tend to panic without the support of the written word. Explain that they only have to listen tor two countries in conversations 1 and 2, and one country in conversation 3. Tell them not to worry if they don’t understand every word! Play the first conversation and focus on the example about Claudio. Then elicit where Akemi is from (Japan). Play the rest of the recording and let students compare their answers in pairs. Play the recording again as many times as is necessary to let students complete their answers. Answers 1 Claudio: Italy Akemi: Japan 2 Charles: England Bud: the United States 3 Loretta andJason: Australia 1 С Hello, I’mClaudio. I’m from Italy. A Hello, Claudio. I’mAkemi, fromJapan. 2 С Hello. My name’s Charles. What’s your name? В Hi, Charles. I’m Bud. I’mfrom the United States. Where are you from? С I’m from London, in England. В Oh, right! I’mfrom Chicago. 3 L Hi, I’m Loretta. I’mfrom Sydney, Australia. J Hi, Loretta. I’mJason. I’mfrom Australia, too. L Oh, wow! Are you from Sydney? J No. I’m from Melbourne. SUGGESTION Allowing students to tell you other details that they have understood from a listening can help build their confidence, so you can ask extra questions within the students’ language range, e.g. What’s his/her name? Where in (England)? Look at the example with the whole class. Elicit the match for question 2 (Her name’s Tatiana) and then get students to continue working individually before checking their answers in pairs. 1 И Д [CD 1: Track 24] Play the recording and let students check their answers. Answers and tapescript 1 d Where are you from? I’mfrom Brazil. 2 f What’s her name? Her name’sTatiana. 3 a What’s his name? His name’s Bruno. 4 b Where’s he from? He’s from Sao Paulo. 5 g What’s this in English? It’s a computer. 6 e How are you? Fine, thanks. 7 с Where’s Montreal? It’s in Canada. This is an extension to the matching activity to consolidate the question and answer forms. Unit 2 • Your world 19
- 19. Demonstrate the meaningof cover’ and then ask a confident student to cover the answers in his/her book. Ask one or two of the questions and elicit the answers from the student. Students continue in their pairs. Students then change roles and cover the questions before practising the exchanges again. Check it 7 Focus attention on the first pair of sentences as an example. Check students understand that the convention of ticking (/ ) indicates that something is correct. Students continue working individually to choose the correct sentence. Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. Answers 2 What’s his name? 3 ‘What’s his name?’ ‘Kevin.’ 4 He’s from Spain. 5 Where’s she from? 6 What’s her name? ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 2 Exercise 8 Listening - At a party Exercise 9 Questions READING AND SPEAKING (SBP16) Where are they from? 1 This is the first reading text that the students have met in the book. It presents the subject pronoun they. Focus attention on the photo and get students to guess where Claude and Holly are in the photo (New York). Get students to read the text through quickly and check where they are from (Holly - Canada, Claude - France). Check comprehension by getting students to locate these countries on the map on pl3. [CD 1: Track 25] Play the recording and ask students to read and listen. Then explain any new words. Words and phrases not previously introduced are married, teacher, school, in the centre of, doctor, and hospital. Married can be explained by referring to a famous married couple. To explain doctor, you can turn to pl8 of the Student’s Book (the start of Unit 3), where there is a picture of a doctor. Ask students Where? about the doctor to elicit/explain hospital. Teacher and school should be easy to explain in the context of the classroom. In the centre o f can be illustrated on the board. 2 Students work in pairs to complete the sentences about the text. Make sure they understand there is more than one possible answer to number 4. Go over the answers by asking individual students to read out their completed sentences. Answers 1 Holly is from Montreal in Canada. 2 She's a teacher. 3 Her school is inthe centre of Montreal. 4 Claude is from France (or Montreal). 5 He’s a doctor. 6 His hospital is in the centre of Montreal. 7 They are in New York. 8 They are married. 3 Focus attention on the gapped questions in exercise 3. Elicit complete examples to practise is and are, e.g. What’s his name? Where’s shefrom? Highlight the use of the contraction s. Get students to ask and answer in open pairs. Students then work individually to write questions about Claude and Holly, using the prompts. Monitor and help as necessary. Students ask and answer in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of he/she and his/her, and for falling intonation on the Wh- questions. GRAMMAR SPOT Focus attention on the gapped sentences. Complete the first sentence with the whole class as an example (is). Then ask students to complete the other sentences. Answers She is a teacher. He is a doctor. They are from Canada. If necessary, highlight the use of he/she/they by pointing to a male student and saying he, a female student and saying she, a pair of students and a group of students and saying they. Refer students to Grammar Reference 2.4 on p!23. 4 This listening activity has Claude and Holly talking about different aspects of their trip to New York. It introduces basic adjectives and words related to visiting cities, e.g. buildings, weather. Focus attention on the words in the boxes and use the smiley symbols and the photos to pre-teach/check the vocabulary. T 2.10 20 Unit 2 • Your world
- 20. 'CD 1: Track26] Focus attention on the in number 1. Play the recording through get students to complete the rest of the s. Play it again so that students can ■answers. If necessary, play it a third time its listen and repeat. Encourage accurate ion and a wide voice range on the sentences fadjectives. Students practise the conversations If possible, get students to stand up and the characters, as this often helps with tion and overall delivery. and tapescript □h Look at the weather! ts awful! * Look at my hamburger! It’s fantastic! - ;-burger is really good, too! С *hafs this building? ts the Empire State Building! It’sfantastic! Г : Look at Central Park! • beautiful! 5.C-GESTI0N p b - can revise the language from SB p l6 exercise 4 „-.crease speaking practice by asking students rr.agine they are on a trip to a different city and Isubstitute key words from the conversations their own examples. They then roleplay the .rsations and get the rest of the class to guess : they are. NAL MATERIAL Unit 2 10 Adjectives -good/aw ful 11 and 12 Reading - Where are they? 13 and 14 Listening - She’s from Berlin ERYDAY ENGLISH (SB P17) ■u-Ders 11-30 I Get students to say numbers 1-10 round the class, repeating as many times as necessary until students can them without hesitation. . И И [CD 1: Track 27] Focus attention on numbers 11-20. Play the recording and get students to listen, read, and repeat chorally. Play the recording again and get students to repeat individually. If necessary, remind students that the gh in eighteen is silent by writing the word on the board and crossing out the letters. Get students to say numbers 1-20 round the class. Again, get them to repeat as many times as necessary until they can say the numbers without hesitation. Give students a number dictation. (See Unit 1 Everyday English Suggestion ТВ pl3.) Then write a random selection of numbers 1-20 (as figures) on the board and get students to say the numbers first chorally, then individually. Focus attention on the example. Then get students to continue matching in pairs. » ! ! ■ [CD 1: Track 28] Play the recording through once and get students to check their answers. Play the recording again and get them to repeat, first chorally then individually. Get students to say numbers 1-30 round the class. Get them to repeat as many times as necessary until they can say the numbers without hesitation. ■■>«£■ [CD 1: Track 29] Focus attention on the sets of numbers in exercise 5. Play the first number as an example and focus on the answer (12). Play the recording through once and get students to tick the numbers they hear. Let students check their answers in pairs and then play the recording again if necessary. Check the answers with the whole class. Answers and tapescript 1 12 2 16 3 9 4 17 5 23 Get students to do a number dictation in pairs using numbers 1-30 (See Unit 1 Everyday English Suggestion ТВ pl3). Student A should say the numbers and Student В write. Then get students to change roles. Monitor and check for accurate pronunciation and comprehension of the numbers. Note any common errors, and drill and practise the numbers again in the next lesson. This activity allows students to consolidate numbers via a guessing game based on peoples age. Say I’m (+ your age) and then ask How old is he/she? about famous people to establish the concept of age. Focus attention on the first photo and drill the examples in the speech bubbles. Pre-teach Yes, I agree to give students an alternative answer. Elicit students’ ideas of the girl’s age in the first photo. Unit 2 • Your world 21
- 21. Students continue talkingabout the age of the people in Video/DVD the photos, working in pairs or groups of three. (Don’t Unit 2 Where are you from? on iTools insist that students use the question How old is he/she? Unit 1 & 2 on iTutor as the focus is on the numbers at this stage. Students will go on to practise more personal information questions in Unit 3.) Elicit a range of answers from the class in a short feedback session. Tell students they are going to hear five short recordings that give the actual ages of the people in the photos on p i 7. Point out that in one of the recordings they will hear two ages. Remind them that they only need to understand the age of the person each time. [CD 1: Track 30] Play number 1 as an example and elicit the age of the child (two). Play the rest of the recording without stopping and then let the students compare their answers in pairs. Play the recording again if necessary to let students check/complete their answers. Then check the answers with the class. Ask students how many of the answers they got right or nearly right, and if there were any surprises. Answers and tapescript 1 This is little Becky. She’s two. 2 Her name’s Naomi. She’s seven. 3 He’s Nathan. He’s fifteen tomorrow. 4 How old is she? She’s 26. 5 This isJeremy. He’s 29, nearly JO. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Teacher’s Resource Disc Communicative activity Unit 2 Lottery! Workbook Unit 2 Exercises 15-17 Numbers 11-30 Don’t forget1. Workbook Unit 2 Exercises 18-21 Revision Exercise 22 Pronunciation Word list Ask the students to turn to pp 130-1 and go through the words with them. Ask them to learn the words for homework, and test them on a few in the following lesson. Teacher’s Resource Disc Unit 2 Test Unit 2 Skills test T 2.15 22 Unit 2 • Your world
- 22. 3Introduction to theunit ■ b e title of Unit 3 is ‘All about you’ and I t t e main aim of the unit is to allow j |sr_ients to exchange more information II jacout themselves. This includes job, I laae, address, phone number, and j whether they are married or not. The grammar of the verb to be is recycled I land extended to include the we form, relatives, Wh- and Yes/No questions land short answers. In terms of skills, |«udents get practice in reading and as:ening, and roleplaying an interview. ПЪе lexical set of jobs is presented, m i the Everyday English syllabus is -extended to include social expressions. Jobs am/are/is • Negatives and questions Personal information • Social expressions (1) All about you Language aims Grammar - am/are/is The verb to be is recycled and extended to include the subject pronoun we in the negative and positive, the negative forms ’m not, isn’t, questions with question words including How old and Who, Yes/No questions and short answers. Possessive adjectives My, your, his, and her are reviewed from Units 1 and 2. Vocabulary A set of common jobs is presented and there is an opportunity to extend this set with students’ own jobs. Everyday English This section focuses on social expressions including key situational language like I ’m sorry, Excuse me, I don’t understand, etc. Workbook The lexical set of jobs is recycled. The forms of to be are fully reviewed with exercises on negative forms, questions, and short answers. Students are given extra practice in listening and reading, and there is an exercise consolidating vocabulary from the unit. The social expressions from Everyday English are also reviewed. Photocopiable activity There is a photocopiable activity to review the language of exchanging personal information on ТВ p!40. Unit 3 • All about you 23
- 23. Notes on theunit STARTER (sb pie) NOTE In this section, students are asked to give their own job. If you have a multilingual group or you don’t speak the students’ own language, ask them to look up the name of their job in a dictionary before the lesson. Briefly check the pronunciation with the students so that they are prepared for Starter exercise 3. 1 This section introduces some job vocabulary and practises the question What’s his/her/yourjob? Students will already be familiar with doctor and teacher from the Reading in Unit 2, so use these as examples to demonstrate the activity. If you think students might know some of the jobs, put them in pairs and ask them to match any jobs they know and guess the others. Then check answers with the class. If you think students won’t know any of the vocabulary or won’t want to guess the answers, then do the matching activity as a whole-class exercise. [CD 1: Track 31] Play the recording and get students to listen and repeat the words, first chorally and then individually. Concentrate on correct pronunciation and word stress. Make sure students don’t get confused by the spelling of nurse, bus driver, businessman, and builder, and that they pronounce the vowel sounds correctly: nurse /n3:s/ bus driver/'bAS ,draivo/ businessman /'biznismon/ builder /'bikta/ 2 W [CD 1: Track 32] Briefly review his and her by pointing to a man and a woman in the Starter pictures and eliciting What’s his job? and What’s herjob? Read the questions and answers with the class. Play the recording, pausing at the end of each line and getting the students to repeat chorally and individually. Make sure students include the article a each time. Students practise talking about the people in the pictures in open and then in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct intonation, and use of his/her and a. 3 Focus attention on the questions and answers in the speech bubbles. Write the sentences up on the board and circle the a in each answer to emphasize that we use an article before jobs. Drill the question and answers chorally and individually. Quickly check if students have jobs which are different from those in the Students Book. If students want to use a job beginning with a vowel, e.g. engineer, point out they will have to use an - I ’m an engineer. SUGGESTION If you think students need more practice, you can use flashcards of the same jobs that appear in the Student’s Book. Get students to ask and answer What’s his/her job? in pairs, swapping the flashcards as they finish with them. HE ISN’T A STUDENT (SB P18) Negatives - he isn’t 1 This is the first time students meet the negative form, and so use the photos in this exercise to make the concept clear. Point to the close-up photo of the man in the circle, covering the larger photo of him if necessary. Ask Student or teacher? Then point to the larger photo of the man and say He isn’t a student. He’s a teacher. Shake your head as you say the negative sentence to reinforce the meaning. Point to the close-up photo of the woman, covering the larger photo of her if necessary. Ask Nurse or doctor? Then point to the larger photo of the woman and say She isn’t a nurse. She’s a doctor. Again, shake your head as you say the negative sentence. i i l l [CD 1: Track 33] Focus attention on the captions. Play the recording, pausing at the end of each line and getting the students to repeat chorally and individually. Make sure students can reproduce the negative form correctly and that they include the article a each time. Also check that they deliver the sentences fluently. If necessary, highlight the linking after the negative form: She isn’tji student. 2 Write the following cues on the board to demonstrate the activity: Number 1 He /shop assistant X /teacher / Number 2 She /teacher X /doctor / Answers and tapescript 1 a teacher 2 a doctor 3 a bus driver 4 a police officer 5 a builder 6 a shop assistant 7 a nurse 8 a student 9 a businessman T3.1 24 Unit 3 • All about you
- 24. students to givethe above sentences in full {He isn’t ■assistant. He’s a teacher, and She isn’t a teacher, a doctor.). Students then continue talking about the es in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct unciation of isn’t, linking and fluent delivery, and use of a. 4MMAR SPOT attention on the sentences and what the contracted forms are in full. Make sure students ■r.ierstand that the second sentence is negative. Ask •r_dents to circle the negative forms in exercises 1 and 2. iGESTION 1:'you think students need more practice with is/isn’t, у : a can get them to produce sentences with ■formation about each other. You can talk about their jobs and also review the language from Unit 2, e.g. Ana isn’t a student. She’s a teacher, b a n isn’t a teacher. He’s a doctor. Yoshi isn’tfrom Tokyo. He’sfrom Osaka. IONAL MATERIAL к Unit 3 1 Jobs laervise 2 is or isn’t? : £RSONAL INFORMATION (SBP19) ions and answers This section covers the personal information that students may need to exchange in a range of everyday ^tuations. The information about the character Ellie is г resented as a personal profile on a social networking site called Friendspace. This is intended to be similar to real sites like Facebook or MySpace. Focus attention on the photo of Ellie and the information in her profile. Read through the information with the class. Check comprehension of address, phone number, and age and drill the rronunciation of these words. Remind students of married from the Reading in Unit 2. Focus attention on the example in number 1. Put students into pairs to complete the questions and answers. Note that students will have to generate the question Where’s shefrom? for the Country category in the profile. This question should not be a problem for mem, as they have already practised it several times, students met the question How old is he/she? in Unit 2 but mainly for recognition, so make sure they understand that this is the question to ask about age. It is given in full in sentence 6 of the exercise so that students can familiarize themselves with it before they practise it. The short answer No, she isn’t is included in the exercise. Again, students will be able to generate the question {Is she married?) for this answer, and Yes/No questions and short answers are covered in the following exercise. (With a weaker group, you could complete the questions and answers with the whole class first and use the ‘Listen and check’ phase for repetition.) ■ W [CD 1: Track 34] Play the recording, pausing after each question and answer and get students to check their answers. Answers and tapescript 1 What’s her surname? Green. 2 What’s her first name? Ellie. 3 Where’s she from? England. 4 What’s her address? 29, Victoria Road, Birmingham. 5 What’s her phone number? 07700 955031. 6 How old is she? She’s twenty. 7 What’s her job? She’s a student. 8 Is she married? No, she isn’t. Play the recording again and get students to repeat all the questions and answers. Do this chorally and individually. Point out that in English we give our phone numbers using single figures 0-9, and that 0 is pronounced ‘oh’. Repeated numbers can be expressed with double, e.g. 455 - four doublefive. Get students to ask and answer about Ellie, working in open and then closed pairs. SUGGESTION For further practice, cut out a picture of a man from a magazine (or draw one on the board) and provide similar ID information about him. Students then practise asking and answering the questions with he/him. Yes/No questions and short answers, which appeared in exercise 2, are covered in full here. [CD 1: Track 35] Focus attention on the questions and answers. Ask students to read and listen. Play the recording through once. Play the recording again, pausing at the end of each line and getting the students to repeat as a class. Check for accurate reproduction of the rising intonation on the question and falling intonation on the answer: Is Elliefrom America? No, she isn’t. Unit 3 • All about you 25
- 25. 4 Focus onthe question cues in number 1 and demonstrate the first question and answer exchange with a confident student - Is shefrom London? No, she isn’t. Students continue to ask and answer about the other cities in question 1, working in open pairs. Students continue asking and answering the other questions in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct intonation and correct use of short answers. 5 This exercise practises the positive and negative forms in statements. Focus attention on the two examples in number 1. Students complete the sentences with the information about Ellie. Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. Be prepared to review and drill numbers 1-9 if students have problems saying the phone numbers. METRO 5 - T H E AUDITION (SBP20) Negatives - I’m not, they aren’t This second presentation of negative forms also covers Yes/No questions and short answers. The context is an interview with a band called Metro 5, who are entering a fictional TV talent competition called The Audition. 1 The negative forms I ’m not and they aren’t are presented along with Yes/No questions Are you ...?, Are they ...? and Is this...?, and the short answers. Focus attention on the photo. Ask Who are the people? Elicit Metro 5. Use the information in the photo and mime to pre-teach/check audition, band, and singer. Draw a simple family tree on the board to pre-teach brother, and refer students back to the map on Student’ Book pl3 to check Scotland and Ireland. 2 ВИ ГД [CD 1: Track 36] Play the recording through once and ask students just to listen and read. Play the recording again and get students to complete as many questions as they can. Get them to check in pairs and help each other to complete The Audition Interview. Play the recording again and get students to listen and check and/or complete anything they missed. Check the wording of the questions with the whole class. Answers and tapescript I Hi! is this your band, Metro 51 P Yes, it is. I Great! And are you Donny McNab? P No, I’mnot. I’m Paul McNab. This is Donny. He’s my brother. I Ah, yes, sorry. Hi, Donny. You’re a builder from Scotland, right? D Well, yes, I am a builder, but I’mnot from Scotland. I Oh, where are you from? P&D We’re from Ireland. I Aah! Are the other boys from Ireland too? D No, they aren’t. They’re all from different countries. I Oh! Interesting! And are they all builders? D No, they aren’t. Paul’s a bus driver and... P Yeah, I’ma bus driver and Ronan’sa nurse and Bo and Edson are students. I Interesting! And Donny, are you the singer in the band? D Yes, I am. Well, we’re all singers. I Oh, right! Nice to meet you. Good luck to you all! All Thank you very much. 3 This exercise asks basic comprehension questions about the band. Ask What’s the band’s name? as an example and elicit Metro 5. Put students in pairs to ask and answer the rest of the questions. Monitor and check for accurate pronunciation and formation of the short answers. 1 И 1 [CD 1: Track 37] Play the recording through once and get students to check their answers. If necessary, play it again and get students to listen and repeat. Then put them in new pairs to practise the questions and answers again. Answers and tapescript 1 What’s the band’s name? Metro Б. 2 Are Paul and Donny brothers? Yes, they are. 3 Are they from Scotland? No, they aren’t. 4 Are the other boys from Ireland? No, they aren’t. 5 Are they all builders? No, they aren’t. 6 Are they all singers? Yes, they are. Answers 1 Is she from London? No, she isn’t. Is she from Liverpool? No, she isn’t. Is she from Birmingham? Yes, she is. 2 Is she 16? No, she isn’t. Is she 18? No, she isn’t. Is she 20? Yes, she is. 3 Is she a teacher? No, she isn’t. Is she a nurse? No, she isn’t. Is she a student? Yes, she is. 4 Is she married? No, she isn’t. Answers 2 Her phone number isn’t 07700 995031. It’s 07700 955031. 3 She isn’t 18. She’s 20. 4 She isn’t married. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 3 Exercises 3 -6 Questions and negatives - is/isn’t 26 Unit 3 • All about you
- 26. : r am m a r s p o t 1 Focus attention on the negative sentences and what the contracted forms are in full. Make sure students understand that the sentences are negative. Ask students to circle the negative forms in the interview in exercise 2. 2 Focus attention on the short answers. Make sure students understand that we use the full form in the third person affirmative - Yes, it is, not *it’s, and that we cannot say *1 amn’t for the first person negative. Ask students to circle the short answers in the interview in exercise 2. Read Grammar Reference 3.1 on p i24 together in class, and/or ask students to read it at home. Encourage them to ask you questions about it. one with Diego and one with Grace. These are a little longer than in previous units, but reassure students that they only need to complete the information in the table and they don’t have to understand every word. [CD 1: Track 38] Ask students to listen for the city or town Diego is from. Play the first six lines of conversation 1 and then pause. Check the answer (Mexico City). Play the recording again from the beginning and get students to complete the information about Diego. Pause before moving on to conversation 2. Play conversation 2 through once and get students to complete the information about Grace. Get students to compare their answers in pairs. Play the conversations again, pausing after conversation 1 and get students to complete/check their answers. Check the answers with the whole class. This gives students the opportunity to practise a longer conversation than in earlier units. Put students m groups of three to practise the interview. With a confident class, you can let them start straight away but with weaker classes, it would be helpful to play the recording again line by line, drilling any difficult sections to help build students’ confidence. Encourage the appropriate intonation on the questions and voice range on replies like Interesting, Oh right, etc. Ta_< ng about you 5 In this exercise students get the opportunity to personalize the Yes/No questions. Get students to ask and answer the first question in open pairs. Students work in small groups to continue the task. Alternatively, students could stand up and do the activity as a mingle. Monitor and check for correct intonation and use of short answers. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Yacher’s Resource Disc Communicative activity Unit 3 Yes or No! Workbook Unit 3 Exercises 7-9 Negatives and questions - I ’m not/they aren’t PRACTICE (SB p21) s ~e a businessman? Focus attention on the photos of Diego and Grace. Ask Where are they? Elicit that Diego is by his taxi and Grace is in a cafe. 2 Get students to read through the information in the table so that they know what they have to listen for. Explain that they are going to hear two conversations, Answers First name Diego Grace Surname Hernandez Chou Country Mexico the United States City/Town Mexico City New York Phone number 5546-247312 212638-9475 Age 42 33 Job Taxi driver Shop assistant Married? No Yes T 3.8 1 I Good morning. D Hello. I What’syour name, please? D My name’s Diego Hernandez. I Thank you. And where are you from, Diego? D I’mfrom Mexico, from Mexico City. I Thank you. And your telephone number, please? D 5546-247312. I How old are you, Diego? D I’mforty-two. I And... what’s your job? D I’m a taxi driver. I And... are you married? D No, I’m not. I Thank you very much. 2 I Good afternoon. G Good afternoon. I What’syour name, please? G Grace, Grace Chou. I And where are you from? G From New York. I Ah! So you’re from the United States. G Yes, I am. I What’s your phone number? G 212638-9475. Unit 3 • All about you 2/
- 27. I Thank you.How old are you? G I’mthirty-three. I What’s your job, Miss Chou? G I’ma shop assistant. I And are you married? G Yes, I am. I That’s fine. Thank you very much. 3 Demonstrate the activity by asking a confident student the first question. Students continue asking and answering in closed pairs. Monitor and check. If students have problems with intonation or with the short answers, drill the questions and answers across the class and get students to repeat. Check the answers with the whole class. Answers Is Diego from Mexico City? Yes, he is. Is he a businessman? No, he isn’t. Is he 42? Yes, he is. Is he married? No, he isn’t. Is Grace from the United States? Yes, she is. Is she a nurse? No, she isn’t. Is she thirty-three? Yes, she is. Is she married? Yes, she is. SUGGESTION If students need further practice, get them to ask and answer more Yes/No questions with the information about Diego and Grace, e.g. Is Diegofrom Italy? Is Gracefrom Chicago? Is he a teacher? Is he 23? Is her phone number 212 463-9145? Is she a shop assistant? 4 This gives students the opportunity to practise he/she forms of to be in statements. Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles and elicit complete sentences. Students continue talking about Diego and Grace in closed pairs. Monitor and check for accurate use of the he/she forms. Talking about you 5 Focus attention on the example. Tell students they need a question word, e.g. Where, What, in all the questions except numbers 5 and 7. Get students to complete the questions in pairs. Check the answers with the whole class. Answers 1 What’s your first name? 2 What’s your surname? 3 Where are you from? 4 What’s your phone number? 5 How old are you? 6 What’s your job? 7 Are you married? Check the pronunciation of the questions. Make sure students know to use falling intonation on the Wh- questions and rising intonation on the Yes/No question (number 7). Divide the class into groups of three and get students to interview each other, using the questions. Ask students to write down information about one student to use in exercise 6. Writing 6 This is the first writing task in the course. It provides a useful way of consolidating the key language of personal information and the he/she forms of to be. Get students to use the information they found out in exercise 5 to write a short description. This can be doni in class time or for homework. As an extension, you could use the descriptions in a describe and guess gam< by not giving the students name each time. PHOTOCOPIABLE ACTIVITY UNIT 3 Is she a shop assistant? ТВ p!40 Materials: there are four cards for female students and four for male students, so photocopy and cut up the appropriate number of cards for the gender balance in your class. Procedure: Give out the role cards to the students, telling them this is their new identity. If necessary, review the questions students will need before they start the pairwork. • Divide the class into pairs and get them to ask and answer the questions and note down the answers. • Pair students with a different partner and get students to describe their first partner in order to review he/she, his/her. • If you want students to have more written practice, get them to use the information to write a description as in exercise 6 above. Check it 7 Focus attention on the first pair of sentences as an example. Remind students of the convention of ticking (/ ) to indicate that something is correct. Students continue working individually to choose the correct sentences. 28 Unit 3 • All about you
- 28. Get students tocheck their answers in pairs before necking with the whole class. latswers 1 Her name’s Anna. I She's a teacher. . His phone number is 796542. a mnot a doctor. : ~iey aren’t from Italy. & i~e isn’t married. ; £ADING AND LISTENING (SBP22) N *e in Las Vegas! This skills section follows on from p20, where students first meet the band Metro 5. It gives an update on the band’s progress with a magazine article and a recorded interview. The band have now won the TV talent competition The Audition. The text introduces the subject pronoun we and broadens students’ exposure Iо new lexical items. Focus attention on the photo and make sure students understand it shows the same band as on p20. Ask What’s the band’s name? and elicit any other information the students can remember. Point to the different band members in the photo and introduce me question word Who? Ask Who’s this? about each person. Other new vocabulary in the text includes boy band, winners, Sweden, on tour, guys, tired, happy, excited, and good luck. Encourage students to try to understand these from context, but be prepared to explain if necessary. Ask students to read the text through fairly quickly. Deal with any vocabulary problems. Elicit the names of any other talent contests and boy bands that students know. Tr.en deal briefly with the Grammar Spot. 5 3AMMAR SPOT f heck students understand we by gesturing to yourself and another student. Focus attention on the ifrirmative sentence and the contracted form We’re. Make sure students understand what the contracted form is in full. Ask students to circle the examples of were in the reading text. F :cus attention on the negative sentence and the contracted form aren’t. Make sure students understand what the contracted form is in full and that the sentence is negative. Ask students to circle the example of aren’t in the reading text. Refer students to Grammar Reference 3.2 on p!24. 2 Remind students of the they form by pointing to two students and eliciting They’re students. Focus attention on the questions. Elicit the answer to number 1 (No, they aren’t.). Students answer the other questions, working individually, before checking their answers in pairs. Then check the answers with the whole class. Answers 1 No, they aren’t. 2 No, they aren’t. 3 They’re in Las Vegas, in the United States. 4 Yes, they are. 3 This task consolidates positive and negative forms of to be in a correction exercise. Focus attention on the example answer. Say Sentence 1: positive or negative? (negative), then Sentence 2: positive or negative? (positive), Students work individually to complete the task. I t f [CD 1: Track 39] Play the recording, pausing at the end of each sentence to give students time to check their answers. Ask a few students to read out their answers. Check they can reproduce the contrastive stress in the pairs of sentences, e.g. They aren’t in Brazil. They’re in the United States! Drill the pronunciation if necessary and get students to practise the sentences again. Answers and tapescript 1 The band, Metro 5, are in Brazil. They aren’t in Brazil! They’re in the United States! 2 They’re in New York. They aren’t in New York! They’re in Las Vegas! 3 Bo’sfrom Australia. He isn’t from Australia! He’s from Sweden! 4 Edson’sfrom Sweden. He isn’t from Sweden! He’sfrom Brazil! 5 They’re very tired. They aren’t tired! They’re happy and excited to be here! Interview with the band 4 I H H l [CD 1: Track 40] Get students to read the questions through before they listen. If necessary, review numbers 11-30 to help students when picking out the ages of the characters. Play the first 8 lines of the conversation and elicit the answer to question 1 (Ronan is 24). Play the rest of the conversation and get students to listen for the answers to 2-4. If necessary, refer them back to the text so that they can remember the names of the characters. Play the recording through again and get students to check/complete their answers. Check the answers with the whole class. Unit 3 • All about you 29
- 29. Answers 1 Ronanis24. 2 Boand Edson are 21. 3 Paul is 22 and Donny is 19. 4 Ronan is married. Paul, Donny, Bo, and Edson aren’t married. T3.10 I Hi! All Hi! I Now, this is your first time in Las Vegas, yes? All Yeah. That’s right. It’sfantastic here! It’s great! I Good! Now, one by one. Ronan, you’re from Australia. R Yes, I am. I And how old are you, Ronan? R I’m24. I OK. And Bo, you’re from Brazil and Edson’s from Sweden... В No, no, I’m not from Brazil, Edson’s from Brazil. I’m from Sweden. I Sorry, guys. So Bo and Edson, how old are you? E We’re both 21. В Yeah, that’s right. I OK. Now, Donny and Paul. You’re brothers. D&PYeah, we are. I And you’re from Scotland? D&PNo, no. We aren’t from Scotland. We’re from Ireland. I Ireland. Oh, yes. Sorry. How old are you both? P I’m22. D And I’m19. I Thanks. Now, who’s married inMetro 51 В, E, D &P We aren’t married! R I am! I Ah, Ronan. You’re married. R Yeah, my wife’s name’s Lisa. She isn’t here. She’s in Australia. I Aah! Well, thank you, Metro 5. Welcome to Las Vegas! All It’s great to be here. Thanks! Roleplay 5 This is the first roleplay in the course. It is intended to be quite controlled, but also to give students important speaking practice at this early stage in their learning. As in all freer speaking tasks, its important to let students focus on communicating and not to highlight their errors during the task. Tell students they are going to invent a band. Focus attention on the questions. Check students understand Where are you now? by asking the same question about the classroom situation. Divide the class into groups of four. Try to get a mixture of males and females in each group and to put weaker students with stronger ones to help create balance in the task. Give students time to invent their imaginary identities and write down the details. Demonstrate the questions and answers with a confident group. For the answer to What are your names? encourage students to use I ’m ..., and This is ... to avoid the need for our, which is presented in Unit 4. If appropriate, set up the roleplay to feel more authentii by moving desks and/or letting students sit in small groups in different parts of the room. Then get the groups to ask and answer about their bands. Monitor and check. Note down any common errors and highlight them after the roleplay or in a subsequent lesson. As an extension, get one or two groups to describe themselves to the rest of the class. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 3 Exercises 10 and 11 Listening - An interview with Ella Exercise 12 Vocabulary - Revision EVERYDAY ENGLISH (SB P23) Social expressions (1) NOTE This section contains examples of the Present Simple {I don’t know and I don’t understand). At this stage, it’s best to treat these as useful expressions rather than explain the grammar behind the use of Present Simple. The grammar of the Present Simple will be covered in Units 5 and 6. Review the expressions in this section regularly so that they become part of the students’ productive vocabulary as early as possible. Highlight situations in the classroom in which students can use the expressions in a meaningful way. 1 This is the first focus on expressions used in everyday situations. Ask students to look at the pictures and ask Where are they? about each one (I in a school, 2 in a restaurant, 3 in a city, 4 in a car, 5 at a language school, 6 in a city). [CD 1: Track 41] Play the recording and get students to look at the picture and gapped conversation for each situation. 2 Focus attention on conversation 1 and elicit B’s answer (That’s OK.). Students continue completing the conversations in pairs, using the words in the boxes and the pictures to help them. Play the recording again and get students to check their answers. T3.11 30 Unit 3 • All about you
- 30. A-swers and tapescript AI'msorry. В That's OK. 1 С A coffee, please. D That's £1.20. С Thanks very much. E Excuse me! Where’s the station? f Its over there. • Thanks a lot. * G Thank you very much. That’s very kind. H That's OK. : i tQ uehoraes? J msorry. I don’t understand, i К Excuse me! Where’s the town centre? I'm sorry. I don’t know. If necessary, play the recording again and get the students to repeat, drilling the intonation chorally and individually. Put students in new pairs to practise the conversations. Get them to stand up to do this, as it rten helps their pronunciation and acting skills! As with the roleplay, rearrange the room if possible •o make the situations feel more authentic. You could also bring in some basic props. riONAL MATERIAL •cncbook Unit 3 Exercise 13 Social expressions (1) Гс- 1forget! Workbook Unit 3 Exercises 14-18 Revision •crd list the students to turn to p 131 and go through the words Karith them. Ask them to learn the words for homework, test them on a few in the following lesson. «aoer's Resource Disc Eust 3 Test ■ > at 3 Skills test H t :: and check 1 (Units 1-3) s/DVD : 3 Profile: Paula Harrid on iTools 3 & 4 on iTutor Unit 3 • All about you 31
- 31. Introduction to theunit The title of this unit is ‘Family and friends’ and it aims to extend the range of personal information students can give. The unit introduces the possessive s with family vocabulary, has/have, and some irregular plurals such as children. Students get practice in all four skills with listening and speaking tasks, reading texts on family and friends, and a guided writing task. The lexical set of family is presented, and another important communicative tool - the alphabet - is introduced in Everyday English. This section also covers phone language and how to say email addresses. our/their • Possessive’s The family • has/have The alphabet Family and friends Language aims Grammar - possessive’s The possessive s is introduced via the context of family. The way of expressing possession in English is different from many other languages and so students may initially have problems with this. Students are given lots of controlled practice in the Students Book and Workbook, and the Grammar Spot highlights possible confusion with s as a contraction of is. has/have Has/have are introduced in the affirmative. We introduce have rather than have got, as have can generate a broader range of uses, e.g. I have three children (possession), and I have lunch at 12 (have as main verb). Have got operates differently and may cause confusion when students meet the Present Simple and have to deal with do/does forms. This is avoidec in New Headway Beginner, Fourth edition as the Present Simple is introducec in Unit 5 after students have practised has/have in the affirmative. Apart from in the third person singular affirmative, have will operate like all the other verbs presented in the Present Simple and so students won’t be overloaded by new language. Have got is covered in New Headway Elementary, Fourth edition. Irregular plurals These are introduced as part of the presentation on familie and are covered in Grammar Reference 4.3 on SB pl24. Possessive adjectives Our and their are introduced in this unit, and there is a review of all possessive adjectives and subject pronouns. Vocabulary The lexical set of the family is introduced and practised and there is also a focus on the language of describing a friend. Basic adjective + noun combinations are introduced via the reading texts, e.g. a small hotel. Everyday English The alphabet is introduced and practised and valuable functional language is covered with a focus on phone language and saying email addresses. Workbook The lexical set of the family is recycled. Possessive s and possessive pronouns are consolidated. Has/have are reviewed and consolidated. Students are given extra practice in listening and reading, and there are exercises on vocabulary and pronunciation. The alphabet and phone language from Everyday English are also reviewed. Photocopiable activity There is a photocopiable dictation activity to review Present Simple sentences with has/have and the alphabet on ТВ p l41. 32 Unit 4 • Family and friends
- 32. *es on theunit TER (SB p24) section reviews all the possessive adjectives nts have seen in Units 1-3 and also presents and their. Focus students’ attention on the row s-oiect pronouns and briefly review I, you, etc. by ting to yourself and students and eliciting the pronoun. Focus attention on the examples the chart. Get students to continue completing chart, working in pairs. Then check the answers students’ pronunciation. Make sure they can nguish you/your, they/their, and that they can ounce our correctly. 3 Review the use of his and then focus attention on the other examples with possessive s. Ask students to circle the examples of possessive s in the text about Annie’s family. Make sure students don’t confuse the contracted form of is with possessive s. Read Grammar Reference 4.1 and 4.2 on p i24 together in class, and/or ask students to read it at home. Encourage them to ask you questions about it. Grammar Reference 4.3 on pl24 focuses on irregular plurals. Read it together in class, and/or ask students to read it at home. Ask students to find an irregular plural in the text about Annie on p24 (children). u he she we they ur his her our their attention on the examples in the speech bubbles, the sentences, pointing to relevant objects and tg students to repeat. Elicit more examples by ting to objects that belong to the students and cts in the classroom. Make sure students use just possessive adjectives my, your, his, etc., rather tr. _n students’ names, as this would require s, which is ;: ered in the next section. FAMILY (SB p24) I [CD 1: Track 42] Focus attention on the photographs and the heading Annie Taylor. Play —e recording and ask students to follow the text in ~ e ir books. Check comprehension of husband, bank nager, children, and university. at to one member of the family and ask Who’s this? :: elicit the person’s name. Take the opportunity to farther practise How old is ... ?and (I think) She’s ... by _r.ving How old is (Annie)?, etc. to elicit possible ages. DAMMAR SPOT Focus attention on the examples. Make sure that students understand that s is the contracted form of is. Review the use of her and then focus attention on the use of possessive’s. Make sure that students understand that we use this form to express possession. Focus on the example and elicit the answer to question 2 (It’s in London.). If necessary, briefly review the use of it to talk about things. Get students to continue answering the questions. [CD 1: Track 43] Play the recording and get students to check their answers. Put students in new pairs to practise the questions and answers. Answers and tapescript 1 Is Annie married? Yes, she is. 2 Where’s their house? It’s in London. 3 What’s Annie’sjob? She’s a doctor. 4 Where’s her hospital? In the centre of London. 5 What’sJim’sjob? He’s a bank manager. 6 Are their children both at school? No. Emma’s at school. Vince is at university. Who are they? 3 [CD 1: Track 44] Focus attention on the words in the table. Play the recording and get students to repeat as a class. Check students can reproduce the correct word stress. [CD 1: Track 45] Focus attention on the family tree. Ask Who’s Annie? and get students to point to the correct person in the photo on p24. Now focus attention on the example and play sentence 1 in the recording. Continue playing the sentences, pausing at the end of each one and getting students to write the correct words. Play the recording again and get students to check their answers. Unit 4 • Family and friends 33
- 33. Answers and tapescript 1Annie isJim’s wife. 2 Jim is Annie’s husband. 3 Emma is Annie andJim’s daughter. 4 Vince is their son. 5 Annie is Vince’s mother. 6 Jim is Emma’s father. 7 Emma is Vince’s sister. 8 Vince is Emma’s brother. 9 Annie andJim are Emma and Vince’s parents. 10 Emma and Vince areJim and Annie’s children. Play the recording through again, pausing after each sentence and getting students to repeat chorally and individually. Make sure they reproduce the possessive s accurately. SUGGESTION With a weaker group, use the family tree in a teacher-lead presentation, e.g. point to Annie and then to Jim and say wife. Annie is Jim’s wife. Have students repeat the word in isolation first, then the whole sentence chorally and individually. Make sure that they pronounce the possessive s. Students can then listen to the recording and write the words down as reinforcement. 5 Write the following on the board to reinforce the use of possessive’s. Whdts) Vince? s = is He’s Emma^s)brother. s = possessive, not is Drill the question and answers in open pairs. Then drill a plural example, e.g. Who are Jim and Annie? They’re Vince’s parents. Get students to continue asking and answering about Annie’s family in open pairs. Make sure that they give all possible answers about the different relationships and that they include plural examples, too. Students continue asking and answering in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of possessive s and is/are. SUGGESTION You can give students further practice on families and possessive s by referring to famous people. Draw the family tree of a famous family, e.g. the British or Spanish royal family and get students to ask and answer questions with Who? Alternatively, you can prepare true/false statements about the family relationships. You can also try a quiz based on famous people. Prepare questions based on relationships that your students will know. You can include film stars, pop stars, politicians, and sportspeople, e.g. Who’s Victoria Beckham? (She’s David Beckham’s wife.) Who’s Stella McCartney? (She’s Paul McCartney’s daughter.) Be prepared to modify the questions to suit the age and experience of individual groups. 6 Д И [CD 1: Track 46] This listening task focuses on short expressions used by member’s of Annie’s family in different situations. Tell students that they don’t need to understand every word to do the task, and they should use the context to help them. Play number 1 and focus on the example. Play the rest of the recording and get students to write the correct family member. Let students check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. Answers 1 Annie 2 Emma 3 Jim 4 Vince 5 Annie ■ем 1 Come on, Emma! Time for school! 2 Mum! Where are my school books? 3 Bye, everybody! I’moff to work! Have a good day! 4 Bye, Dad! See you this evening. 5 Good morning, Mrs Clark. How are you today? ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Teacher’s Resource Disc Communicative activity Unit 4 The Adams family PRACTICE (SB p26) An American family 1 Read out the rubric for exercise 1 and focus attention on the photos of Elena’s family and on the names of her brother and her parents. Ask some general questions about the family: Where are theyfrom? What are their names? Focus attention on the chart and make sure students understand what information they have to listen for by eliciting possible answers for each category, e.g. name - Oscar, age -1 6 , job - student. Ч 1Г .1 [CD 1: Track 47] Tell students they are going to hear Elena talking about her family. The script is quite short and students have met all the vocabulary in it, but remind them to listen for just the information they need. Play the first part of the recording as far as He’s a student in college. Elicit the answers about 34 Unit 4 • Family and friends
- 34. -.ena’s brother (Oscar,19, student). Play the rest of the recording and get students to complete the chart. Check the answers with the whole class. Answers Name Age Job Lena’s brother Oscar 19 student Lena’s mother Maria 47 Spanish teacher Lena’sfather Alfredo 52 businessman - My name’s Elena Diaz, and I’mfrom the United States. This is my Tmily. Our house is in Chicago. This is my brother. His name is Oscar, ard he's 19. He’s a student in college. This is my mother. Her name’s A'aria. She’s47, and she’s a Spanish teacher. And this is my father, - *>edo. He’s 52, and he’s a businessman. As a follow-up, point to each of Elenas relations and get students to give a brief description, e.g. This is Oscar. He’s Elenas brother. He’s 19 and he’s a student. Focus attention on the example and then get students to complete the sentences in pairs. Check the answers with the whole class, making sure students have included possessive s where necessary. my/our/your... 4 This section consolidates the possessive adjectives covered in the Starter section. Focus attention on the example and then get students to complete the sentences. [CD 1: Track 48] Play the recording and get students to check their answers. Answers and tapescript 1 ‘What’s your name?’ ‘My name’s Annie.’ 2 ‘What are your names?’ ‘Our names are Emma and Vince.’ 3 Jean-Paul and Andre are students. Their school is in Paris. 4 ‘My sister’s married.’ ‘What's her husband’s name?’ 5 ‘My brother’s office is in New York.’ ‘What’s his job?’ 6 We’re in our English class. 7 ‘Mum and Dad are in Rome.’ ‘What’s the name of their hotel?’ ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 4 Exercise 1 Possessive s Exercise 2 myIourIher... Exercise 3 Vocabulary - The family Answers 1 Her mother’s name is Maria. M ANNIE’S BROTHER (SBp27) j ; What’s Alfredo’s job?’ ‘He’s a businessman.’ a Where’stheir house?’ ‘It’s in Chicago.’ has/have Demonstrate the activity by writing the names of your own family on the board and talking about them. Give the information quite slowly but naturally and then ask a few questions to check understanding, e.g. Who’s :his?, What’s herjob?, etc. SUGGESTION If possible, it’s a nice idea to base family descriptions on real photos. Bring in photos of your family and ask students to do the same. If you have a small enough class, sit them around you and talk about the pictures slowly but naturally and pass them around. Encourage students to ask questions, following the models in exercise 3 on p26. Get students to draw their own family tree (and have their family photos ready if relevant). Divide the class into pairs and get students to ask about each other’s family. Monitor and check for correct use of he/she, nis/her, and a + job. Ask a few students to choose someone in a family tree or in a photo and give a brief description of him/her. The person can be from their own or their partner’s family. This section recycles the family vocabulary, possessive s, and possessive adjectives, and also presents has/have. The text is based on the family of some of the characters students have already met. Point to the picture of Annie on p24 and ask WTjo’s this? Elicit the answer It’s Annie Taylor. Tell students they are going to read about Annie’s brother. Students should be able to recognize/work out the new vocabulary items (hotel, apartment, and big) but be prepared to explain if necessary with simple board drawings. [CD 1: Track 49] Focus attention on the photograph of Paddy and his family and read out the heading. Play the first line of the recording as an introduction and point to the photo of Galway. If possible, indicate where Galway is on a map. Play the rest of the recording through to the end. Ask students Who are Paul and Donny? (They’re Paddy’s sons.) What’s their band’s name? (Metro 5.) Where are they now? (In Las Vegas.). Also ask students to look back and find the pictures of Paul and Donny on SB pp20 and 22. Read the examples with the class. Then get students to complete the exercise working individually. Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. Unit 4 • Family and friends 35
- 35. Answers I X 2/ З Х 4 X 5 / 6 X 7 / GRAMMAR SPOT Focus attention on the table and the examples. Students complete the table with the other forms of have. Answers I have You have He has She has We have They have Ask students to circle the examples of has and have in the reading text. Refer students to Grammar Reference 4.4 on p i24. 3 Ч И [CD 1: Track 50] This is a dictation activity with five short sentences, each recorded once. Demonstrate the activity by playing the first sentence and focusing attention on the example. Play the rest of the recording to the end and ask students to just listen and not write anything. Play the recording a second time and ask students to write the missing words in each sentence. Ask students to write the complete sentences on the board to check the answers. If they have made mistakes or missed words, play the relevant sentences again and elicit the correct wording. Answers and tapescript 1 I have a small hotel in the city of Galway. 2 My wife has a job in town. 3 We have three sons. 4 The boys have a band called Metro 5. 5 My sister has a big house in London. 4 In this exercise students write about themselves. Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles. Write a few more examples about yourself on the board and list the categories students can write about: brothers/ sisters, children, home, job, animals. Go round helping and checking. Then ask a few students to tell the rest of the class about themselves and their family. Correct any common errors in the use of has/have and possessive s, but do not over-correct students as this may affect their levels of confidence. PRACTICE (SB p28) has/have 1 Focus attention on the example. Students then complete the exercise, working individually. Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. Answers 2 My parents have a house in the country. 3 My wife has aJapanese car. 4 My sister and I have a dog. 5 You have a very nice family. 6 Our school has fifteen classrooms. 7 We have English classes in the evening. 2 This exercise provides some freer practice and extends the context to talking about the students’ school. It alsc provide practice in the it form of have. Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles. Drill the sentences chorally and individually. List the categories students can talk about on the board: number of teachers/students/classrooms; size of school; equipmer at your school (e.g. TV, DVD player, CD player, computers). You will need to modify the examples to include equipment that students know you have at you school so that they generate only affirmative sentences Divide the class into pairs and get students to talk about their school. Monitor and check for correct use of has/have. ADDITIONAL M A T E R I A L ___________________________ Workbook Unit 4 Exercise 4 has/have - Alfie and his family Questions and answers 3 This exercise reviews the question words students havi covered to date. Focus attention on the example and then get students to match the other questions and answers. [CD 1: Track 51] Play the recording and get students to check their answers. Then let them practis the questions and answers in pairs. Answers and tapescript 1 d How is your mother? She’s very well, thank you. 2 f What’s your sister’sjob? She’s a nurse. 3 e How old are your daughters? They’re ten and thirteen. T 4.10 36 Unit 4 • Family and friends
- 36. [ г эWho is Pedro? He’s a student from Madrid. 5 : Where’syour office? It’s in the centre of town. : a What’s your surname? Smith. ■СЬеск it I B Focus attention on the first pair of sentences and die example. Remind students of the convention of ticking (/ ) to indicate that something is correct. Students continue working individually to choose die correct sentence. Get students to check their answers in pairs before ; checking with the whole class. Answers Mary’s children are married. ; 2 What’s your daughter’s name? I 2* What’s hisjob? 4 They’re from Germany. 5 Their parents have a house in Bonn. : My brother has a good job. We have a lovely teacher. OOITIONAL MATERIAL ■orfcbook Unit 4 Exercises 5 -7 Listening - Alfie: EADING AND WRITING (SBP28) Ы. best friendГ Ш NOTE Students need access to dictionaries to check new exis in the reading text. This is an important step to get them used to using dictionaries on a regular oasis in their learning. If students don’t usually bring dictionaries to class or if there isn’t a class set of dictionaries available, ask students to check the new words (in red) in the text for homework before the reading lesson. The text introduces like + noun and like + -ing |paragraph d) and students practise it briefly in exercises 3, 5, and 6. At this stage, it’s best to treat this mainly as a phrase for recognition, as students io on to cover I/you/we/they like and question forms as part of the first presentation of the Present Simple in Unit 5. 1 Explain that the text is about a girl called Antonia and her boyfriend is Vince. Ask Who’s Vince?Ask students to look back earlier in the unit and find the answer. (He’s Annie’s son.) Refer students back to SB p24 and the information about Annie’s family if necessary. Working alone or in pairs, students read the text and check the new words (in red in the text). (If students have done the dictionary work for homework before the lesson, ask them to do the reading and matching in exercise 2 straight away.) If students query the use of have in have a really good time, explain that we often use have with a range of expressions as well as have + object. 2 Demonstrate the activity by eliciting the photo that goes with paragraph a (photo 1). Students continue to match the other photos and paragraphs, and say who they think the people in the photos are. Check the answers with the whole class. Answers Photo 1- paragraph a (Antonia and Vince) Photo 2- paragraph с (Toni’s brother Mark and sister Alison) Photo 3- paragraph b(Toni’s parents) Photo 4 - paragraph d (music, dance, and football magazines) 3 Focus attention on the example sentence. Students complete the activity, working individually, and then check their answers in pairs. Check the answers with the whole class. Answers 1 a student, funny, beautiful 2 a brother, a boyfriend, a lot of music 3 Toni’s boyfriend, great 4 Toni’s brother, a Manchester United fan, at school 5 a house, three children 6 Metro 5, dancing, football, Vince 4 This is another listening activity in which students use the context to help them work out who is talking. Make sure students understand that they only need to write the name of each person, not the complete sentences. With weaker students, write the names of the people in the recording on the board before students listen. Ч Ш Н [CD 1: Track 52] Focus attention on the example and play number 1 on the recording. Play the rest of the recording, pausing if necessary to allow students to write their answers. Allow students to compare their answers in pairs. Play the recording again to let students check/complete their answers. Then check the answers with the class. Unit 4 • Family and friends 37
- 37. SUGGESTION It’s a goodidea to let students look at each other’s written work to help correct it. When you correct the work, make a note of the most common mistakes in recent target language and get students to correct them as a class activity before you hand back individual work. If possible, display some of the students’ writing on the classroom wall. Remember to change the displays fairly frequently and, if appropriate, to ask students to vote for the description/story, etc. they liked best. Answers 1 Toni 2 Vince 3 Toni 4 Mark and Alison 5 Alison 6 Toni’s parents 7 Toni’s mother 8 Mark and Toni T 4.11 1 Listen to this band! It’sMetro 5! They’re fantastic! 2 My girlfriend is from the north of England. 3 London’s great! And my boyfriend’s great, too! 4 Our sister’s at university. Yeah, she’s at university in London. 5 I like my sister’s boyfriend, he’sfunny. 6 Our children’s school is near our house. 7 My bank is in the centre of Manchester. 8 Come on, United! Come on! Yes! A goal! 4 -1 to Man United! 5 Focus attention on the example and then get students to give more information about Toni. Divide the class into pairs and get students to take it in turns to talk about Toni, using the information they underlined in exercise 3. Monitor and check for correct use of he/she/they, his/her/their, is/are, has/have, and possessive s. Writing 6 This is one of a series of short writing tasks that help consolidate the key language students have covered and also provide a change of pace if done in class. Prepare students for the writing phase by eliciting what sort of information can complete each sentence. If you have time, build up a connected description on the board of an imaginary person to provide the students with a model. Get the students to write their description in class or for homework. Students can do the follow-up stage in the same or a subsequent lesson. Put students in pairs. If possible, get them to work with a new partner or someone they don’t know well so that the information they exchange is really new. Students take it in turns to read their description. Encourage them to ask questions about the person their partner is describing, using the language they have covered to date. If students try to ask questions with like, explain that they will cover this point in the next unit. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 4 Exercise 8 Reading - Who’s happy? Exercise 9 Vocabulary - Revision Exercise 10 Pronunciation - they’re or their? EVERYDAY ENGLISH (SB P30) The alphabet This section covers the alphabet and spelling and so is an important step in helping students to find out about and check vocabulary for themselves. Once students have learned the alphabet, take the opportunity whenever possible to spell new words to the students and to get them to spell words in class. Be prepared to review the pronunciation of letters students have problems with at regular intervals. 1 l t l » l [CD 1: Track 53] Focus attention on the letters on p30 and tell the students they are going to practise the alphabet in English. Play the recording through once and let students just listen and familiariz themselves with the letters. Play the recording again, pausing after each letter and getting the students to repeat as a class. Review the letters that students often find confusing and drill these thoroughly: a, r e, i, у g>j u, w 2 ИДИШ [CD 1: Track 54] The letters in this exercise are arranged according to sound. Demonstrate this by playing the recording of the first group of letters /ei/. Play the recording of the first group again and get students to repeat as a class. Repeat for the other groups of letters and then get individual students to read different letter groups aloud. 38 Unit 4 • Family and friends
- 38. Write different letterson the board at random and elicit ~em from the students. Pay special attention to the •:wels as these often give problems. Then put some kr.own words on the board and elicit the spelling. You could feed in How do you spell... ? at this point.) do you spell...? [CD 1: Track 55] Check comprehension of first name and surname and tell students they are going to hear five people spelling their names. Play the recording of the first name as an example. Then play the other names, pausing at the end of each surname. Students write the names and then check their answers in pairs. Then check the answers with the whole class by writing the names on the board and getting students to spell them aloud. Answers and tapescript 1 .Vhat’s your name? Annie Taylor. How do you spell your first name? A-N-N-l-E. How do you spell your surname? T-A-Y-L-O-R. 1 .Vhat’s your name? Quentin Wrexham. How do you spell your first name? Q-U-E-N-T-l-N. How do you spell your surname? W-R-E-X-H-A-M. 3 .Vhat’syour name? Takako Matsuda. How do you spell your first name? T-A-K-A-K-O. How do you spell your surname? M-A-T-S-U-D-A. •i .Vhat’s your name? Fabien Leclerc. How do you spell your first name? F-A-B-l-E-N. How do you spell your surname? L-E-C-L-E-R-C. : What’syour name? Idoia Ruiz Martinez. How do you spell your first name? I-D-O-I-A. How do you spell your surnames? R-U-l-Z, then M-A-R-T-l-N-E-Z. Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles md drill the exchanges chorally and individually. Make sure students can reproduce the correct stress on the questions: How do you spell yourfirst name? How do you spell your surname? Students practise spelling their own names in open and dosed pairs. Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles in exercise 5. Drill the exchange chorally and individually. Students practise the exchange with different words from the text, working in open pairs. Students continue working in closed pairs. Monitor and check for accurate pronunciation of the letters. 6 With weaker students, briefly review the names of some of the countries they practised in Unit 2. Focus attention on the example. Students continue with the other countries. Get them to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. Get the students to give the spelling of each country, rather than just the name. Answers France, Spain, Brazil,Japan, Australia, Italy, England 7 This activity practises the alphabet in the context of common abbreviations students might see in everyday life. Write VW on the board. Ask How do you say it? /vi: 'dvblju:/ and What is it? (a Volkswagen car). Students work in pairs or small groups to continue the activity. [CD 1: Track 56] Play the recording to let students check their answers. Drill the pronunciation of the letters again if students have problems. Answers and tapescript VW /vi: 'dvblju:/ a Volkswagen car BBC /bi: bi: 'si:/ British Broadcasting Corporation WWW /dAblju: dvblju: ‘dvblju:/ the world wide web UK /ju: 'kei/ United Kingdom US /ju: 'es/ United States UAE /ju: ei 'i: / United Arab Emirates NYPD /en wai pi: 'di:/ New York Police Department PC /pi: 'si:/ personal computer TV /ti: ’vi:/ television As an extension, get students to brainstorm other common abbreviations in small groups and then to exchange with other groups and test each other. Other possible examples include: BP (British Petroleum), EU (European Union), UN (United Nations), NASA (National Aeronautics and Space Administration), FA (Football Association), CD (compact disc), DVD (digital video disc), CNN (Cable News Network), IT (information technology), etc. T 4.14 T 4.15 Unit 4 • Family and friends 39
- 39. PHOTOCOPIABLE ACTIVITY UNIT 4My name’s Magda ТВ p!41 Materials: one copy of the worksheet cut in half per pair of students Procedure: Briefly review the alphabet by asking students to spell some of the words in the worksheet, e.g. How do you spell university’?Write the words on the board as students spell them out. Repeat for other key words, e.g. boyfriend, married, country, etc. • Explain that students are going to complete a gapped text by dictating the missing sections to each other. • Divide students into pairs and assign the roles A or В to each student. Hand out the relevant half of the worksheet. Tell students not to show each other their half of the activity. Give students a few moments to read their text and check any items of vocabulary. • Students sit opposite each other. Demonstrate the activity with two students. Student A begins by dictating the start of the text and Student В fills in the gaps with the appropriate words. When Student A comes to a gap, he/she stops and Student В continues reading out the text. Remind students that they can ask How do you spell... ?if they are unsure of the spelling. Point out that contracted forms like I’m and she’s correspond to one gap in the text. Feed in other useful language like Can you repeat that, please? I ’m sorry. I don’t understand. Students continue in their pairs. Monitor and help as necessary. • When they have finished, students check their texts together, correcting any mistakes. Complete text Hello! My name’s Magda and I’m from Madrid. I’m twenty and I’m a student. I have a sister and her name’s Pilar. She’s very beautiful, and she’s very funny. She has a good job. She’s a teacher. Her school is near my university. Pilar isn’t married but she has a boyfriend. He’s from the USA and he has a band. My sister and I have a small flat in town. Our parents have a big house in the country. My father is a bank manager and my mother is a businesswoman. When we’re together, we have a really good time. SUGGESTIONS 1 You can use anagrams such as the ones in exercise 6 on SB p30 to review vocabulary at any stage. Write the jumbled letters on the board and ask students to work out the word in pairs or teams. Always get the class to give the spelling letter by letter to review the alphabet as often as possible. 2 This is a spelling game called Hangman. You can use it at the beginning of lessons as a ‘warmer’ or as a ‘filler’ to revise vocabulary. You can divide students into two or three teams for this, or play as a class. 4 number of letters it has, using a dash for each letter (i.e. if your word is doctor, write__________). One team/The class suggests a letter. If the letter appears in your word, write it in the correct place on the dashes, as many times as it appears (i.e. if the letter suggested is o, you should write _ о о _ for the word doctor). If the letter doesn’t appear in your word, write the letter in that team’s column at the side of the board with a line through it, and draw one line of the gallows. Then the second team suggests a letter, and so on. If you are playing in teams, the winning team is the one that guesses the final letter to complete the word or that guesses the whole word at an earlier point. If you complete the drawing of the gallows before the teams/the class guess the word, then you win and the teams/class lose. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 4 Exercise 11 The alphabet Unit 4 • Family and friends
- 40. tfie phone section revisesthe alphabet and introduces basic language and how to say email addresses. Focus attention on the first business card and ask '■'■'hat’s his name? (Jose Gonzalez), Where’s his company? IBarcelona), What’s his job? (Export Manager), and ■'.'hat’s his phone number? (93-306 785 04). > f» r.l [CD 1: Track 57] Check students understand Aey are going to hear two conversations over the phone. Play the recording through once and get students to iollow in their books. Make sure students understand that And your name is? is a polite way of asking What’s four name? over the phone. If necessary, explain I’m connectingyou with a simple board drawing or mime. I tnf.fr [CD 1: Track 57] Play the first line of conversation 1 and elicit the answer to question 1 iaxcon International). Then play the rest of the recording and let students continue answering the с aestions about both conversations in pairs. If students 1 c aery the meaning of want in question 2, write a series I at options on the board for conversation 1 and get students to choose the correct one: ask for information sr'eak to the manager / ask a question ftvak to a friend Check the answers with the class. Refer students to exercise 3 if necessary when checking question 4. Check they understand the country codes at the end a t each address: es = Spain, jp = Japan. tswers xiversation 1 .axcon International •э speak to the manager G - O - N - Z - A - L - E - Z I с[email protected] Conversation 2 1 The King School of English 2 some information about the school 3 M - O - R - l - O - K - A 4 [email protected] Play the recording again line by line, getting students to repeat chorally and individually. If possible, get students to sit back to back to practise the conversation in closed pairs. Not looking at each other makes the situation more like a real phone conversation. Monitor and check for accurate pronunciation. Drill difficult lines again with the whole class if necessary. Email addresses 3 Read the notes with the class, eliciting the correct pronunciation for each part of the address. Elicit the code for students’ own countries or countries they have emailed, e.g ar = Argentina, pi = Poland, hu = Hungary. Write a few fictitious email addresses on the board and get students to read them aloud. 4 Focus attention on the names of service providers and country codes in the Student’s Book. Ask students to say them aloud, check the pronunciation, and elicit which countries the codes refer to: es = Spain, fr = France, cz = Czech Republic, it = Italy, au = Australia. Point out to students that some of these items will be in the email addresses they hear. ■ДИГД [CD 1: Track 58] Play the recording through once and get students to complete as much of the task as they can. Play the recording again if necessary. Get students to write the missing information on the board to check the answers. Give students the opportunity to correct each other if they make a mistake in reading the information. Answers and tapescript 1 A Your email address is? P [email protected] A B-A... P No, Pam. P-A-M. A Ah, OK. Pam. P Bowler. B-O-W-L-E-R. A Pam... Bowler... @ P @btinternet.com A @btinternet.com P That’s it. 2 В Can you tell me your email address? H Yes. [email protected] В harrylime... all one word ... H @hotmail... >ЮТЕ Гг.е phone conversations include examples of f_nctional language like (Sam Benting) speaking, Can you give me ...?, I ’l l ... (email you some mformation). Students should be able to use the :■■erall context to understand these phrases, so you ;an deal with them as lexical items. It’s better not ld go into a detailed explanation of the grammar behind them at this stage. Exercise 1 introduces What does he/she want? but, again, just deal with this for recognition. Unit 4 • Family and friends 41
- 41. В @hotmail... H .co.uk в.co.uk. Great. Thanks. 3 с What’s your email address? p [email protected] с paul... p martin. M-A-R-TTN. с paulmartin... p @wanadoo... с wanadoo... p ,fr с .fr. Got it. 4 D And your email address is...? G [email protected] D glennamiles... G @toronto... D @toronto... G .ca D .ca. That’s lovely. Thanks a lot. Don’t forget! Workbook Unit 4 Exercises 13-17 Revision Word list Ask the students to turn to ppl31-2 and go through the words with them. Ask them to learn the words for homework, and test them on a few in the following lesson. Teacher’s Resource Disc Unit 4 Test Unit 4 Skills test Video/DVD Unit 4 Profile: Ethan Followwill on iTools Units 3 & 4 on iTutor Elicit one or two email addresses from the class. Students then exchange addresses with a partner. You could do this activity as a mingle to increase the amount of practice. SUGGESTION If your students agree, you could draw up and circulate a list of their email addresses so that they can contact each other outside class and get some real practice in writing basic emails. Roleplay 5 This is another in a series of simple roleplay activities that allow students to personalize the key language. Ask students to write their own business card like the ones in the Students Book, or invent one for themselves. Look at the possible ideas for the phone calls and elicit things the callers can ask, e.g. to speak to the manager/ director/a member of staff, for information about a hotel/sports centre, etc. Elicit similar conversations to those in exercise 1 as a further model, using students’ own information. Students continue working in closed pairs. Remind them to change roles so that each student has the opportunity to play the caller. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 4 Exercise 12 On the phone 42 Unit 4 • Family and friends
- 42. traduction to theunit unit introduces the Present Simple I, you, we, and they in positive negative statement forms, n a tions, and Yes/No questions and rt answers are also practised. At point the Present Simple is used a fairly limited range of verbs so students can get used to the new Students get skills practice with ing and speaking, and listening speaking tasks. rts/food/drinks vocabulary is duced in the context of likes and kes. The lexical sets of languages nationalities are also presented practised in adjective + noun binations, e.g. an American car. ents are introduced to the idea of cation with a verb + noun/noun e matching task. The Everyday ;.ish section extends numbers from :00 and also includes a functional as on prices. Sports/Food/Drinks Present Simple - I/you/we/they • a/an Languages and nationalities • Numbers and prices The way I live Language aims Grammar - Present Simple The Present Simple is the most used tense in the English language and it is therefore important to introduce it to beginners in an accessible way. In New Headway Beginner, Fourth edition, the tense is presented over two units, starting in this unit with the subjects I, you, we, and they. The affirmative and negative forms are covered along with Wh- and Yes/No questions. The third person singular forms he/she/it are covered in Unit 6. a/an Students met a/an + job in Unit 3 and this focus is extended to cover a/an + adjective and noun. Vocabulary Students practise the lexical sets of sports, food, and drinks in the context of likes and dislikes. Countries are recycled, and languages and nationalities are introduced. Common verb + noun collocations, e.g. speak Spanish, drink beer are highlighted and practised. Everyday English Numbers 31-100, the phrase How much is it?, and prices are introduced and practised. Workbook The lexical set of sports/food/drinks is recycled. The Present Simple with I, you, we, they is further practised along with exercises on question formation. Languages and nationalities are consolidated in vocabulary and pronunciation exercises. Students are also given extra practice in reading and listening, and numbers and prices from the Everyday English section are reviewed. Photocopiable activity There is a photocopiable activity to review the language of asking about prices on ТВ pl42. Unit 5 • The way I live 43
- 43. Notes on theunit STARTER (SB p32) 1 Focus attention on the pictures and the headings Sports, Food, and Drinks. Focus attention on the example tennis and then elicit the correct word for numbers 2 and 3. Students match as many words as possible, working individually or in pairs. Encourage them to guess if they are not sure. Ask them to compare their answers before checking answers with the whole class. [CD 1: Track 59] Play the recording and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Make sure they can reproduce the correct word stress on each item. Consolidate the vocabulary by holding up the book and pointing to the pictures. Ask What’s this?/ What are these? and elicit replies about three or four items. Get students to continue asking and answering in pairs. 2 Write on the board three or four things that you like from exercise 1. Tick them and show by your expression that you like them. Get students to tick the things they like in exercise 1. Repeat the above procedure for the negative, crossing the things you don’t like and giving a clear expression and gesture of dislike. Then get students to cross the things they don’t like in exercise 1. THINGS I LIKE (SBP32) Present Simple 1 1 И 1 [CD 1: Track 60] Focus attention on the photos, the smiley face icons, and the sentences with I like. Play the recording once or twice before you ask students to repeat. Play the recording again and get students to repeat chorally and individually. 2 Give an example of three things you like from Starter exercise 1. Get students to point to the correct picture as you say I like ... each time. Elicit more examples from one or two students in the class. Then, in pairs, students take it in turns to talk to each other about what they like. Negatives 3 Students have met don’t as part of the phrases I don’t know and I don’t understand. These were introduced Unit 3 as part of the social expressions syllabus, but 1 is the first time students meet don’t as the grammatic marker of the negative. i i i l [CD 1: Track 61] Focus attention on the photos, the negative face icons, and the sentences with I don’t like. Say the sentences yourself, using mime, gestures, and facial expressions to reinforce tl meaning. Play the recording once or twice before yoi ask students to repeat. Play the recording again and students to repeat chorally and individually. Make sc students get the correct sentence stress: I don’t like tennis. 4 Refer students back to p32. Give three examples of things you don’t like and get students to point to the correct item as you say each sentence. Focus attentio on the speech bubble and drill the example with or. Make sure students can reproduce the sentence stres accurately: I don’t like oranges, coffee, or tea. Elicit more examples from one or two students in thi class. Then, in pairs, students take it in turns to talk to each other about what they don’t like. Ask a few students to give their examples to the class using I ... Avoid transferring to he/she until Unit 6. GRAMMAR SPOT 5 Т 1 У 1 [CD 1: Track 62] Focus attention on the phc of Harvey. Ask Where’s he from? and elicit the United States. Give students time to read the gapped sentem Ask them to guess what Harvey likes from the lists in Starter exercise 1. Play the recording once and get students to check their predictions. Focus on the example and play the first line of the recording again Play the rest of the recording and get students to wri their answers. Students check in pairs. Then check tl answers with the whole class. Answers and tapescript Sports Food Drinks 1 tennis 5 Italian food П tea 2 football 6 Chinese food 12 coffee 3 swimming 7 pizza 13 Coke 4 skiing 8 hamburger 14 beer 9 oranges 10 ice-cream 15 wine T 5.1 Focus attention on the examples. Make sure student: understand that don’t is the contraction of do not. If students ask what do means, you can explain simp (in the students’ own language if possible) that it hel to make negatives and questions. However, don’t giv a detailed grammatical explanation at this stage.
- 44. and tapescript *e? Well,I like sports a lot, but not all sports. I like - American football, of course - and I like skiing! But I tennis and ...erm, I don’t like swimming very much. And nnk? What do I like? Well, I like hamburgers, and pizza. " food a lot. But not Chinese food, I don’t like Chinese don't like tea. Tea is for the English. I'mAmerican so I like rmetimes, and Coke, of course. I love Coke. AL MATERIAL Unit 5 1 Sports, food, drink 2 Things I like - I like coffee I,you, we, they [CD 1: Track 63] The question form Do you ?is introduced here. Focus attention on the les. Play the recording a couple of times and let ts listen before you ask them to repeat line by chorally, and individually. Make sure students can iuce the pronunciation of do you /dju:/ and the mtonation on the Yes/No questions. students to ask you the questions and give true . Drill the pronunciation and intonation if attention on the examples in the speech bubbles, ts practise asking and answering in open pairs, them to work with a new partner and continue about the other things in Starter exercise 1. or and check for accurate formation of the ^ns and short answers, and for pronunciation. listening task introduces the we and they forms in context of an interview with Harvey and his sister. ■review the adjectives in the box by saying a of food, places, singers, actors, etc. and getting ents to respond with an adjective, e.g. New York - exciting. s attention on the photos. Ask Who’s Eva?and t She’s Harvey’s sister. Point to the photos and say ey is 12 and Eva is 12, too to explain twins. Explain students are going to hear an interview with the s about what they like and don’t like. Briefly review use of ticks and crosses to indicate like (/ ) and ’t like (X). [CD 1: Track 64] Focus attention on line 1 in - task. Play the recording as far as the end of Eva’s speech and get students to look at the examples. :t that Eva likes pizza, too. Point out that in her 5 Harvey and Eva disagree about football so students need to write two adjectives. Remind them that they don’t need to understand every word to be able to do the task. Play the rest of the recording without stopping and get students to write their answers. If necessary, play the recording again and get students to check/complete their answers before checking with the class. Answers HARVEY EVA pizza / / delicious ice-cream / / fantastic tea У X awful skiing / / exciting football / X great, awful T 5.6 I Harvey and Eva. You’re twins. Do you like the same things? H Well, we really, really like pizza! E Oh, yes! It’sdelicious! We have pizza a lot at home and in restaurants. I So, do you like the same food? E Well, we both like ice-cream. H Mmm, it’s fantastic! E But we really don’t like tea! Do we, Harvey? H No, we don’t. Ugh! It's awful! I And do you both like sports? H Yes, we do. We like skiing. E Yeah! We like skiing a lot. It’s really exciting! H And I love football! It’s great. E No, it isn’t. It’s awful! 9 This exercise practises the they form, talking about Harvey and Eva. Focus attention on the example and elicit a full sentence They like pizza and ice-cream. Students continue talking about Harvey and Eva, and their likes and dislikes. Monitor and check for accurate formation of the verb forms, and for pronunciation. If students have problems, go through the Grammar Spot with them and then get them to repeat exercise 9. GRAMMAR SPOT Focus attention on the positive examples. Elicit more true examples from the class. Focus attention on the question forms. Check students know that the question starting with What requires an information answer, e.g. Football, Italian food, and that the question starting with Do is answered Yes, I do. /No, I don’t. Also point out that we do not use like in short answers, i.e. you cannot say *Yes, I like or *No, I don’t like. Again, it is probably best not to explain the function of do at this stage. Refer students to Grammar Reference 5.1 on p!25. Unit 5 • The way I live 45
- 45. As an extension,get students to practise the we and they forms by talking about themselves and another student, or people in their family, e.g. Jan and I like swimming. My children don’t like coffee. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 5 Exercise 3 Things I like - Questions and answers PRACTICE (SB p34) Reading and speaking 1 In this skills section, students are introduced to more Present Simple verbs in context: comefrom, live, work, eat, drink, speak, play, and want. Have is also recycled from Unit 4. Other new words are waiter, drama, part-time, restaurant, language, and actor. The languages/nationalities Italian, Spanish, and French are also introduced. Students should be able to work out the most of the vocabulary from context, but use the photos in the Student’s Book to pre-teach/check the meaning if students have any problems. Point to the photos and say This is Colin Brodie. Ask What’s his job? Give students time to scan the text to find the answer He’s a waiter and he’s also a drama student. Check comprehension by asking students to point to the relevant picture for waiter and drama student. [CD 1: Track 65] Students read the text and listen to the recording once or twice. Try to get students to understand the new vocabulary in context and get them to refer to the information in the photos for help. Check comprehension of live and work by making sentences about yourself, e.g. I live in (town, country), I work in (this school), etc. Eat, drink, play, and speak should be understandable from the context, but if students need further help, mime the actions. (There’s no need to point out that drink is a verb here but a noun on p32.) If students query language and Italian, English, and French, write the corresponding countries on the board and link them to the languages. You may need to translate want to if students query this. If students query the pronoun it in I don’t like it, check they understand what noun it refers back to (beer). (Object pronouns it and them are presented in full in Unit 7.) 2 [CD I: Track 66] This interview with Colin presents Wh- and Yes/No questions with a range of verbs. Give students time to read through the question: and gapped answers. Play the recording for questions 1 and 2 and elicit the missing answers in number 2. Play the rest of the recording without stopping and get students to complete Colin’s answers. Play the recording again to let students complete/check their answers. Check the answers with the whole class. Answers and tapescript 1 I Hello, Colin, nice to meet you. Where do you come from? С I come from Scotland, from Dundee. 2 I Do you live in Dundee? С No, I don’t. I live and work in London. 3 I Do you live with friends? С Yes, I do. I live with two friends. 4 I Where do you work? С I work in an Italian restaurant. 5 I Do you like Italian food? С Yes, I do. I tike it a lot. 6 I Do you drink Italian wine? С Yes, I do. I drink wine, but I don’t drink beer. I don’t like it. 7 I Do you like your job? С No, I don’t. I want to be an actor. 8 I Do you speak Italian? С No, I don’t. I speak Spanish and French, but I don’t speak Italian. Ask students to read out the questions. Make sure students can reproduce the falling intonation on the Wh- questions. Be prepared to model the pronunciation and intonation, and drill the questions chorally and individually. 3 Before putting students into pairs, demonstrate by asking individual students the questions from exercise 2. Make sure they answer with information about themselves. Get individual students to ask you the questions and answer with true information. Students continue asking and answering in open pairs If necessary, drill the pronunciation and intonation of the questions again before getting students to continui in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of the Present Simple. As an extension, you could get students to think abou someone they know or imagine a different character, and repeat the question and answer exchanges using different information. 46 Unit 5 • The way I live
- 46. AMMAR SPOT attention onthe examples. Make sure students erstand that we use an before a vowel - я, e, i, o, u. Point out that this can be a noun, e.g. an actor, an adjective, an Italian restaurant. Irfve students time to write a or an. Check the answers, g sure students make the pronunciation link een an + vowel: an actor an Italian restaurant Answers an ice-cream an orange a student an American car a computer Lerer students to Grammar Reference 5.2 on p!25. jlary ; exercise highlights common collocations for ryday actions. Pre-teach/Check millionaire if you к students wont recognize it. Focus attention ithe example and then get students to continue tching, working individually. Give students time to ck in pairs before checking with the whole class. ers : two brothers •in a flat : in a bank ?fromJapan : Italian food nk beer rsports eak Spanish nt to be a millionaire rening and speaking This task helps students get used to using the context lo help them work out what is happening and who is talking in a range of situations. Explain that there ire four conversations all involving Colin. These are slightly longer than in earlier listening tasks of this rvpe, but reassure students that they don’t need to understand every word to do the task. Briefly review what students know about Colin by diciting a range of statements. Write cues on the board •o help with this if necessary, e.g. Job? Colin works in a restaurant. Flat? He lives with twofriends, etc. Г Г Е 1 [CD 1: Track 67] Focus attention on numbers I and 2 as examples and play conversation 1. Elicit the answers (see below). Play the rest of the recording, pausing at the end of each conversation to give students time to discuss their answers in pairs. Play the recording again if necessary to allow students to check/complete their answers. Check the answers with the class. Refer students to Ч-И'Д on SB pi 14. Divide students into groups of three. Ask a confident group to read out conversation 1. Remind students that conversation 4 is over the phone and so the student who plays Colin needs to sit away from the other two. If possible, arrange the furniture in the room to allow students to roleplay the different situations, especially waiting on the tables in conversation 2. If students have fixed desks, encourage them to stand up to do the roleplay as this often helps them interact with each other better. Students practise the conversations in their groups. If students have problems with pronunciation, be prepared to drill selected lines from the recording, or model the lines yourself. Answers 1 at home; Colin’s friends/flatmates 2 at home; Colin 3 in the restaurant; Colin 4 in the restaurant; customers 5 at drama school; Colin’steacher 6 at drama school; Colin’steacher 7 on the phone; Colin 8 on the phone; Colin’s mum T 5.9 1 Colin Goodbye, guys. Time for work. A Bye, Colin. See you later. Colin Yeah. Very late tonight. A Oh yes. It’s Friday. Colin Yes, I work late on Fridays. Bye. 2 Colin Good evening. Do you want to order? В Ah yes. We both want pizzas. С Yes, two Pizza Margheritas, please. Colin Fine. And do you want wine? В Oh yes, we do. Do you have a wine list? Colin Yes, of course. Here it is. 3 D OK, Colin and Anna come here! Colin What do you want? D I want you to read it again with Anna. OK? You are Romeo, Anna isJuliet, of course. Anna Fine. ‘Oh Romeo, Romeo, where...’ D No, no! Terrible. You love Romeo, really love him. Again. Anna ‘Romeo, Romeo, wherefore art thou Romeo...’ 4 Mum Hello? Colin Hi, Mum! Mum Oh, hello, Colin. Donald, It’s your big brother!... Colin, how are you? Colin I’mfine Mum, really fine. Unit 5 • The way I live 47
- 47. Mum Do youlike your flat? Colin Yes, 1do but it’s a bit small for three people. Mum Ah, yes. It is small. But do you like your work? Colin No, 1don’t. Not really. But 1like the food. Mum Oh, yes. Italian food is good. Colin Yeah, but 1like your food the best, Mum! It’s delicious! Mum Ooh, thank you, Colin. Now, do you want to speak to your brother? Colin Yes, of course. Hi, Donald. It’s your brother... SUGGESTION You can make use of the tapescripts in a variety of ways: • as a simple review by getting students to go back to earlier units and practise the conversations. • for intensive pronunciation practice. • as a model for students writing their own conversations/sketches. Students can replace key words to personalize the content or write new conversations based on people they know or new roles they have imagined. • as gapped exercises/information gaps for reviewing key language. You can adapt the Word version of the tapescripts on the Teachers Resource Disc by gapping target words, then print out copies for students to work on. Talking about you 6 This exercise consolidates Wh- and YesINo questions in the Present Simple. Briefly review/check the question words where, what, and how many by giving short answers and eliciting the appropriate question word, e.g. a dictionary /an actor - What? Australia /in a hospital - Where? three sisters /ten books - How many? Elicit the missing word in number 1. Put students in pairs to complete the rest of the questions. Check the answers. If students need more practice or if they finish quickly get them to work with a new partner and repeat the questions and answers. Check it 7 Focus attention on the first pair of sentences as an example. Remind students that the convention of ticking (/ ) indicates that something is correct. Students continue working individually to choose the correct sentence. Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. Answers 1 Do you live in Berlin? 2 Where do you come from? 3 Do you speak Portuguese? 4 I don’t speak Chinese. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Teacher’s Resource Disc Communicative activity Unit 5 Is this true? Workbook Unit 5 Exercise 4 Present Simple - The swimmer Michael Phel] Exercises 5 and 6 Present Simple - Questions Exercise 7 Present Simple - Negatives Exercises 8-10 Listening - Gracie and her parents VOCABULARY AND PRONUNCIATION (SBP36) Languages and nationalities 1 Check comprehension of Germany and Portugal by referring students back to the map on pl3. Focus attention on the example. Students continue the matching activity, working individually. [CD 1: Track 68] Play the recording through once and let students check their answers. 5 ‘Do you like football?’ ‘Yes, I do.’ 6 He’s an actor. T 5.10 Answers 1 do 4 Do 7 sports 2 live 5 do... speak 8 Do... want 3 do 6 like Give students a short time to think about their own answers. If students need extra vocabulary, e.g. languages, be prepared to feed these in. Demonstrate by asking and answering the first two questions with a confident student. Students continue in open and then in closed pairs. Monitor and check for accurate use of the Present Simple, and correct intonation. Answers and tapescript England English Germany German Italy Italian Mexico Mexican Brazil Brazilian japan Japanese Portugal Portuguese China Chinese France French the United States American Spain Spanish
- 48. Remind students ofthe system used in New Headway 3egitiner, Fourth edition to highlight word stress. Play the recording again and get students to repeat the pairs of words as a class. Make sure they can reproduce the change of stress from the country to the nationality/ language: Italy Italian Japan Japanese Portugal Portuguese China Chinese Play the recording through again and get students to repeat individually. 2 Focus attention on the photos and on the examples in the speech bubbles. Point to the photo of the people sitting in the town square and drill the examples chorally and individually. Elicit another pair of examples about different people in the photos. Students continue talking about the people in pairs. 3 This exercise reviews the they form of the Present Simple with the verb speak. Students shouldn’t have any difficulty with this form, as it’s the same as the I form they have already practised. Check comprehension of Switzerland. Focus attention on the example. Students continue making sentences working individually. [CD 1: Track 69] Play the recording and get students to check their answers. Answers and tapescript In Brazil they speak Portuguese. 2 In Canada they speak English and French. 3 In France they speak French. 4 In Germany they speak German. 5 In Italy they speak Italian. 6 InJapan they speakJapanese. 7 In Mexico they speak Spanish, i In Egypt they speak Arabic. 9 In Spain they speak Spanish. '3 In Switzerland they speak German, French, and Italian. 4 Drill the question form in the speech bubbles. Then get students to practise a few examples in open pairs. Students continue in closed pairs, taking it in turns to ask each other about the countries in exercise 3. Monitor and check for correct use of the question form and for pronunciation of the countries and languages. Adjective +noun 5 This exercise consolidates the nationalities and also highlights adjective + noun word order. Students of different nationalities often have problems with this, as in their own language the order is noun + adjective. Be prepared to review the correct order, using examples on the board, and gesturing to indicate a switch of word order if students get the order wrong. Focus attention on the photos and the example. Students complete the exercise by writing the correct nationalities. [CD 1: Track 70] Play the recording and get students to check their answers. Answers and tapescript 1 It’s an American car. 2 It’s German beer. 3 They’re Spanish oranges. 4 It’s aJapanese camera. 5 It’s Mexican food. 6 It’s an English dictionary. 7 It’s an Italian bag. 8 It’s Brazilian coffee. 9 It's French wine. Students work in pairs and take it in turns to point to the photos and practise the sentences. Monitor and check for correct pronunciation of Its a/an ... and drill the sentences if students produce *Is a/an .... Remind students of the plural form by contrasting Its an American car and They’re Spanish oranges on the board. Ask How many? to establish It’s a/an for singular and They’re for plural. Don’t go into the use of zero article (no article) with the plural sentence at this stage. 6 This exercise gives students the opportunity to practise the Present Simple, nationalities, and noun + adjective word order in a personalized way. Write the verbs have, eat, and drink on the board and elicit adjectives and nouns that can go with each verb. Possible combinations: have a/an Japanese/American/German/French/ Spanish car an Italian/American bag a Japanese camera an English dictionary eat Chinese/Italian/Japanese/French/Mexican food Spanish oranges American/Italian ice-cream TS.11 T 5.12 Unit 5 • The way I live 49
- 49. drink French/Italian/German/Portuguese/Spanish wine French/German/English/American beer Braziliancoffee Chinese tea Give examples of your own with have, eat, and drink. Try to highlight the use of a/an, e.g. I have a Japanese camera. I don’t have an Italian car. Then get students to write their own examples. Monitor and help. Check for accurate use of a/an and correct adjective + noun word order. 7 Focus attention on the example questions in the speech bubbles. Remind students of the use of it in I don’t like it. if necessary. Give students time to write at least four questions of their own using have, eat, and drink. Remind them of the possible adjective + noun combinations listed in the notes for exercise 6. Monitor and help. Drill the questions and answers in the speech bubbles. Get students to practise in open pairs across the class and then in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of the Present Simple, a/an and adjective + noun word order. GRAMMAR SPOT 1 Read the notes as a class. Elicit further examples of adjective + noun from the class. Ask students if the word order is the same in their language. 2 Read the notes as a class. Elicit further plural examples from the class. Ask students how they make adjectives plural in their language. Refer students to Grammar Reference 5.3 on p!25. SUGGESTION You can bring in adverts from magazines to give students further practice with nationality adjectives and nouns. Select pictures of cars, cameras, computers, TVs, food, and drinks. Elicit simple adjective + noun phrases, e.g. an American computer, Spanish wine, etc. and then get students to use the pictures to practise Do you have/eat/drink/like ... ? and short answers Yes, I do./No, I don’t. If pairs of students interview other pairs, you can also practise the they form. (If students try to generate he/she forms, tell them these are different and that they will practise them in Unit 6.) ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 5 Exercises 11 and 12 Languages and nationalities LISTENING AND SPEAKING (SBP38) At a party 1 This is a fairly long, though fairly simple, unseen listening. Set the scene by pointing to Flavia and Terry in the illustration and introducing the word party. Get students to say what nationality they think they are (I think he’s/she’s ...). [CD 1: Track 71] Play the recording through once and let students check their predictions (Flavia is Italian and Terry is English). Give students time to read the pairs of sentences 1-8. Check comprehension of love in number 5 and very much in number 7. Play the first part of the recording again, and focus on number 1 as an example. Make sure students understand they have to focus on what Terry says. Elicit the answer to number 1. Play the rest of the recording and get students to select the correct sentence from each pair. Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. Go over the answers by playing the conversation again and pausing the recording after each correct answer. Answers 1 Iwork in London. 2 Idon’t live in London. 3 I’man actor. 4 You speak English very well. 5 I love Italy. 6 I don’t know Naples. 7 I like Rome very much. 8 I don’t speak Italian. ТБ.10 F Hello. I’m Flavia. Flavia Rossi. What’s your name? T Hi, Flavia. I’mTerry. Terry Adams. F Do you work here in London, Terry? T Well, I work in London, but I don’t live in London. I live in Brighton. F And what’s your job? T I’m an actor. What’s your job, Flavia? Do you work in London? F Yes, I do. I work in a hotel. A big hotel near here. T Flavia, you aren’t English, but you speak English very well. Where do you come from? F I come from Italy, from Napoli. Or Naples I think you say. T Ah, Italy. I love Italy. F Do you know Naples? T No, I don’t. I don’t know Naples, but I know Rome. I like Rome very much. It’s very beautiful. F Naples is beautiful, too. Do you speak Italian, Terry? T No, I don’t. I speak French, but I don’t speak Italian. F It’s nice to meet you, Terry. T You too. T 5.13
- 50. 2 Check pronunciationof Brighton, Naples, and Rome ! from the recording. Turn to the tapescript on pi 15 and get students to practise the conversation in pairs. If students have problems with the pronunciation, drill difficult lines as a class. Replay possible, rearrange the furniture, play some mood sic, and bring in simple props like glasses of water to 'p add authenticity to the roleplay. Tell students they are going to roleplay being at a party and meeting new people. This stage prepares students for the type of questions they can ask. Elicit the first question as an example. Put students in pairs to complete the rest of the questions. Check the answers. Answers What’syour name? Where do you live? Do you have a house or aflat? What’s your job? Where do you work? How many languages do you speak? What sports do you like? Explain that students have to invent a new identity. Focus on the cartoon of James Bond and point out that his notes are answers to the questions in exercise 3. Ask students to make notes with their new details. Monitor and help with ideas and vocabulary. Tell students to imagine they are at a party with people of different nationalities who all speak some English. Remind students of the expressions they can use when meeting someone for the first time: (It’s) nice to meet you. You too./And you. Demonstrate starting the roleplay with two confident students. Get the class to stand up to do the roleplay. Monitor, but do not expect perfect accuracy or pronunciation. Make notes of major errors to feed back on later, but try not to spoil students’ enjoyment of the roleplay. If some pairs do well, you could ask them to act it out in front of the class. EVERYDAY ENGLISH (SB P39) How much is it? The functional syllabus continues with a focus on numbers 31-100 and asking about prices. 1 Review numbers 1-30 by getting students to count round the class. Repeat until they can say the numbers accurately without hesitation. I M f [CD 1: Track 72] Focus attention on numbers 10-100. Play the recording and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Get students to count to one hundred in tens round the class. Check for accurate word stress. This is a pairs number dictation. See Unit 1 Suggestion on ТВ pl3 for instructions for this task. id -kH [CD 1: Track 73] This exercise presents prices under and over one pound in English. Play the recording and let students read and listen. Focus attention on the use ofp /pi:/ for prices under a pound. Also point out the plural pounds, and that we do not say pounds and p in the same price, i.e. we do not say *one pound sixty p but one pound sixty. Play the recording again and gets students to repeat chorally and individually. Demonstrate the activity by getting students to say the first two prices aloud. Students then continue saying the prices in closed pairs. Monitor and check students can distinguish the stress on: seventeen pounds and seventy pounds » i-Hr.^ [CD 1: Track 74] Play the recording and get students to check their answers. If students had problems with pronunciation, play the recording again and get them to repeat. (With a weaker group, you could say the prices as a class activity, drilling the pronunciation as you go along, and then play the recording for reinforcement.) This is a discrimination exercise, which gets students to distinguish between prices that sound similar. Focus attention on the photos and check/elicit the name of each object. (With a weaker group, you could elicit the prices for each object orally first and then get students to listen and tick.) ■■■UkA [CD 1: Track 75] Play the recording through once and get students to tick the prices they hear. Play it through a second time so that students can check their answers. Get them to check in pairs before checking with the whole class. Answers and tapescript 1 The cheese sandwich is £2.90. 2 The football is £14. 3 The iPhone is £90.95. 4 The beer is £3.50. 5 The dictionary is £7.50. 6 The pair of jeans is £50. 7 The chocolate is 60p. 8 The bag is £44.99. Unit 5 • The way I live 5
- 51. 7 Focus attentionon the speech bubbles. Drill the question and answer chorally and individually. (If students query the use of How much ... ?, explain that this is the question we use to ask about prices. Don’t go into an explanation of the difference between How much/How many at this stage.) Practise two or three exchanges in open pairs. Then get the students to continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct numbers and prices. chocolate - 38p camera - £125 television - £500 CD-£12.99 computer-£800 pizza - £8.99 SUGGESTION You can give students extra practice with numbers and prices by bringing in adverts, leaflets, and menus that show prices and getting students to practise How much is ... ?Make sure you select the items carefully so that they show objects students know (or ones that you can teach that are in the post-beginner range). If you choose images that show plural objects, you will need to pre-teach/check: How much are ...? ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 5 Exercises 13-16 How much is it? Don’t forget] Workbook Unit 5 Exercises 17-22 Revision Word list Ask the students to turn to p i32 and go through the word; with them. Ask them to learn the words for homework, and test them on a few in the following lesson. Teacher’s Resource Disc Unit 5 Test Unit 5 Skills test Progress test 1 (Units 1-5) PHOTOCOPIABLE ACTIVITY UNIT 5 How much is it? ТВ pl42 Materials: one copy of the worksheet per pair of students. Before the lesson, ask students to check the exchange rate for pounds sterling against their own currency. Procedure: Hold up your watch or similar everyday object and ask How much is this (watch) in Great Britain? Elicit a range of prices, making sure that students include pounds and pence, e.g. £59.99. Write the prices on the board and then tell the students what the object would actually cost. If appropriate, you could elicit the likely cost of the object in the students’ own currency. • Elicit the plural form How much are ...? Drill the question with a range of plural items, e.g. How much are these sunglasses/trainers? etc. and get students to guess the price. • Divide students into pairs and hand out a copy of the worksheet. Ask students to match the words in the box to the pictures. Check the answers, drilling the pronunciation as necessary. • Ask How much is the bag? Tell students to choose the price they think fits the bag. Elicit a range of answers, encouraging students to say I think it’s (£29.99). • Put the pairs of students into groups of four. Point out that there are more prices on the worksheet than objects. Remind students to use How much are ...? and I think they’re ... about the trainers. Students continue discussing the prices and matching them to the objects. • Check the answers with the class. The group who matched the most prices correctly is the winner. Answers bag-£29.99 watch - £45.99 trainers - £80 mobile phone-£65 water - 99p magazine - £2.75 Video/DVD Unit 5 Internationalfood on iTools and iTutor
- 52. The time •Present Simple - he/she always/sometimes/never Words that go together • Days of the week Every day Introduction to the unit The title of this unit is ‘Every day’ and &covers the language of daily routines, ft presents the third person singular iof the Present Simple and so lows on from the language covered Unit 5. Basic frequency adverbs, telling the time, and days of the week are also introduced. The vocabulary syllabus is extended %nth a focus on an important aspect of English first introduced in Unit 5 - collocation. The lexical set is of daily routine verbs, allowing students to talk about their own routine and ask about «h er people’s. Language aims The time The unit opens with a section on telling the time in English. This is done without quarter to/past, halfpast, etc. so that students can use hie numbers they already know to tell the time, e.g.five fifteen. Grammar - Present Simple The I/you farms are reviewed and the presentation :f the Present Simple is completed ith he/she in the positive, negative, and question forms (both Wh- and Yes/No questions). The third person singular form is the one that causes most problems for students and so it is divided out into a section of its own for the initial presentation. All forms of the Present Simple are reviewed and recycled across the course so that students can deal with the differences m the I/you/we/they and he/she/it forms. Frequency adverbs Always, sometimes, and never are introduced and practised as part of the function of talking about routines. Vocabulary The vocabulary section focuses on words that go together and so reinforces an important aspect of English first introduced in Unit 5 - collocation. The section includes words that go with common verbs to produce a useful lexical set for talking about routines. Everyday English Days of the week and prepositions of time are presented and practised. Workbook The time is reviewed in a range of exercises. The he/she forms of the Present Simple positive are also reviewed, along with the frequency adverbs from the unit. Students practise third person singular Present Simple negatives and questions, and also review the use of the auxiliary verbs do!does!don’t/doesn’t in all forms. Words that go together are practised further, and students get skills practice with a reading text. The days of the week and prepositions from Everyday English are reviewed and consolidated. Photocopiable activity There is a photocopiable activity to review the language of telling the time on ТВ pl43. POSSIBLE PROBLEMS • The Present Simple has very few inflections when compared with equivalent structures in other languages. The addition of the third person singular -s is the only change in the positive and so students often forget to include it. Be prepared to give lots of practice in the he/she forms! • The use of does/doesn’t is an added complication which students often confuse with do/don’t. Again, regular review and practice will help students produce the forms accurately. • The third person singular -s can be pronounced in three ways: /s/ works /w3:ks/ Izl lives /livz/ /iz/ watches /'wotjiz/ This is introduced on SB p42, but students will need regular help in distinguishing and producing these endings. Unit6 • Everyday 53
- 53. Notes on theunit STARTER (SB p40) NOTE It is useful to have a cardboard clock with movable hands for this lesson and for subsequent revision of telling the time. If you don’t already have one in your school, then it is quite easy to make one. The Student’s Book presents times with the numbers students already know, without having to deal with quarter past/to and halfpast. Exercise 1 in the section includes times on the hour, half hour, and quarter hour. Other times, e.g. 8.40 and 11.10 provide a manageable extension for students in exercise 2. These are practised further in a photocopiable task on ТВ pl43. See the Photocopiable activity notes opposite. 1 H H H [CD 1: Track 76] Focus attention on the clocks. Play the recording of the first five times, pausing after each one and getting students to repeat chorally and individually. Highlight the use of o’clock for times on the hour and make sure students can pronounce it accurately. Get students to complete the remaining five times, following the examples given in 1-5. Play the recording of numbers 6-10 and get students to check their answers. Play the recording again, getting students to repeat chorally and individually. 2 H » 1 [CD 1: Track 77] Focus attention on the conversation. Play the recording once and get students to listen and read. Play the recording again, and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Point to one of the clocks/watches and demonstrate the pairwork with one student. Ask students to give two or three more examples in open pairs before continuing in closed pairs. PHOTOCOPIABLE ACTIVITY UNIT 6 What time is it, please? ТВ p!43 Materials: one copy of the worksheet cut up per pair of students Procedure: Write the following times on the board: 11.05, 1.10, 7.20, 9.25, 8.40, 6.50, 12.55. Remind students of the use of oh’ /эо/, which they met in phone numbers, for 11.05. Get students to say the times aloud, reading them as digital times, e.g. one ten. • Put students in pairs and assign the role of A or В to each student. Hand out the relevant half of the worksheet. • Explain that each student has six times and six empty clocks and that they have to ask What time is it, please?and complete the clocks. Demonstrate the activity with one student before getting the class to complete the task in pairs. Monitor and check for the correct use of the times. • Students check their answers by comparing their completed worksheets. WHAT TIME DO YOU GET UP? (SB P4l) Present Simple - I/you 1 This section presents daily routine verbs in context via a series of pictures of a girl’s typical schoolday. Focus attention on the pictures. Elicit some basic information about the character: What’s her name? (Kim). How old is she, do you think? (She’s about 18.) Explain that students are going to hear Kim talking about her schoolday. Review telling the time by getting students to read the pairs of times aloud. [CD 1: Track 78] Focus on the example and play the first line of the recording. Play the recording to the end and get students to continue circling the correct times. Get students to check their answers in pairs. Play the recording again before checking the answers with the whole class. Answers 1 7.45 3 8.30 53.30 711.00 2 8.00 4 12.15 64.30 T6.3 Well, on schooldays I get upat seven forty-five. I have breakfast at eight and I goto school at eight thirty. I have lunch inschool with my friends, that’s at twelve fifteen - it’searly inour school. I leave school at three thirty inthe afternoon and I walk home with my friends. I get home at four thirty, have tea, and watch television. I goto bed at eleven o’clock on schooldays, but later at the weekend, of course! Answers 1 nine o’clock 2 seven fifteen 3 one forty-five 4 eight forty 5 eleven ten Answers and tapescript 1 It’s nine o’clock. 2 It’s nine thirty. 3 It’s nine forty-five. 4 It’s ten o’clock. 5 It’s ten fifteen. 6 It’s two o’clock. 7 It’s two thirty. 8 It’s two forty-five. 9 It’sthree o’clock. 10 It’sthree fifteen. T6.3 54 Unit6 • Everyday
- 54. ■ [CD 1:Track 78] Say the sentences aloud or play the recording again and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Make sure students aren’t confused by the spelling of breakfast and pronounce it correctly /'brekfost/. Students practise the sentences in closed pairs. Demonstrate the activity by telling students about your day, giving the same information as in the pictures. Do this in a natural way, but don’t add in any new language. Focus attention on the examples and elicit a few single sentences from students about their day with the verbs from exercise 1. Students continue talking about their day working in pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of the Present Simple and the times. I f f [CD 1: Track 79] This exercise practises the question What time ...? with the Present Simple. Focus attention on the questions and get students to listen and repeat chorally and individually. Make sure they can reproduce the pronunciation of do you and the falling .ntonation on the Wh- questions. Focus on the words in гold showing the form of Present Simple questions, and point out the word order do you get/have. Drill the question and answer in the speech bubbles and elicit other questions students can ask. If students reed help, write the verbs on the board: get up, have rreakfast, go to school/work, have lunch, leave school/ *vrk, get home, go to bed. Get students to practise the questions in open pairs. 1 rrudents continue in closed pairs, working with a different partner from exercise 2. Monitor and check for correct use of the Present Simple and the times. ODITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 6 Exercises 1-3 The time Exercise 4 Present Simple he/she - Cathy and George ELLIOT’S DAY (SB P42) ^sent Simple - he/she, always/sometimes/never 1 This section presents the he/she positive forms of the Present Simple, along with frequency adverbs always, sometimes, and never. Focus attention on the photos of Elliot. Say This is Elliot. He’s in a magazine. Ask What’s hisjob?, and elicit He’s a businessman. Get students to read the description of Elliot. Check comprehension of director, 24-hour, shopping site, Internet, and typical day. Ask Are his days busy? and elicit Yes, they are. Focus attention on the pictures of Elliot’s day and check comprehension of have a shower, work late, buy, and go out. Focus attention on the example sentence. Get students to continue writing the times, working individually. Ч 1 И [CD 1: Track 80] Ask students to check their answers in pairs before playing the recording for a final check. Answers 1 six o’clock 2 six forty-five 3 seven fifteen 4 one o’clock 5 eight o’clock 6 nine fifteen 7 eleven thirty 8 eleven forty-five He gets up at six o’clock and has a shower. He has breakfast at six forty-five. He leaves home at seven fifteen, and he goes to work by taxi. He has lunch, a Coca-Cola and a sandwich, in his office at one o’clock. He always works late. He leaves work at eight o’clock in the evening. He sometimes buys a pizza and eats it at home. He gets home at nine fifteen. He never goes out inthe evening. He works at his computer until eleven thirty. He always goes to bed at eleven forty-five. He watches television in bed. GRAMMAR SPOT 1 Focus attention on the examples of third person singular forms gets up and has. Students underline the verbs in sentences 2-8. Check the answers with the class. Answers 2 has 6 buys, eats, gets 3 leaves, goes 7 goes out, works 4 has 8 goes, watches 5 works, leaves Elicit the key last letter in each of the verbs (s). ■*.1ТД [CD 1: Track 81] Play the recording and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Make sure students can distinguish the /s/endings, e.g. gets /gets/ from the Izl endings, e.g. has /haez1. (The recording gives just the verb forms, not the complete sentences from exercise 2.) Tapescript gets up has buys goes leaves watches works Unit 6 • Every day 55
- 55. 2 Focus attentionon the adverbs of frequency and their meaning. Make sure that students understand that sometimes is not a fixed reference and the actual number of times that it refers to can vary. Ask students to circle the examples of always, sometimes, and never in the sentences about Elliot. i f f [CD 1: Track 82] Play the recording and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Make sure students reproduce the third person singular ending and encourage them to reproduce the linking in the following sentences: He sometimes buysa pizza. He never goesoutTn the evening. He always goes tobedatH1.45. Ш 1 He always works late. He sometimes buys a pizza. He never goes out in the evening. He always goes to bed at eleven forty-five. Read Grammar Reference 6.1-6.3 on pl25 together in class, and/or ask students to read it at home. Encourage them to ask you questions about it. Highlight the use of the -es ending, e.g. go - goes. If appropriate, point out that the frequency adverbs can be used with to be, but that they usually come after the verb, e.g. I am never at home in the morning. Pronunciation 3 Ч.Ц:И [CD 1: Track 83] This section highlights the three possible ways of pronouncing the third person -s ending. Focus attention on the chart. Play the recording through once and get students just to listen. Then play it again, drilling the verbs chorally and individually. If students find it hard to hear and so reproduce the difference between the /s/and /z/endings, don’t insist on them repeating the sounds several times, as this may make them self-conscious. Students very often forget to add the -s ending anyway and so will need reminding at regular intervals. Take the opportunity to check students’ pronunciation of the endings and highlight the features of pronunciation to help students get used to the different sounds. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 6 Exercises 5 and 6 Present Simple he/she - Cathy and George Exercise 11 Pronunciation - -s at the end of a word Questions and negatives 4 This section introduces does/doesn’t in the question and negative forms. Both Wh- and Yes/No questions ar< presented at the same time, as students are dealing wit! the third person singular form only at this stage, and they have already had a lot of practice of the individual question types. Шf . m [CD 1: Track 84] Refer students back to the pictures of Elliot. Read question 1 aloud and elicit the answer (gets). Students continue completing the answers, working individually. Get them to check in pairs before playing the recording of the questions and answers. Play the recording through once and let students check their answers. Play the recording again, pausing after each question anc answer exchange, and get the students to repeat chorally and individually. Make sure they can reproduce the falling intonation on the Wh- questions and the rising intonation on the Yes/No questions. Students practise the questions and answers in open and then in closed pairs. Answers and tapescript 1 A What time does he get up? В He gets up at six. 2 A When does he goto bed? В He goes to bed at eleven forty-five. 3 A Does he goto work by taxi? В Yes, he does. 4 A Does he have lunch in a restaurant? В No, he doesn’t. 5 A Does he goout in the evening? В No, he doesn’t. GRAMMAR SPOT Focus attention on the example sentences and questions. Make sure students understand that the -s is on the verb in the positive form and on does in the question and negative. Highlight doesn’t as the contracted form of does not. Make sure students understand that we repeat do/does or don’t/doesn’t in the short answers rather than the main verb, i.e. we cannot say: Do you have breakfast at 7.30? Wes, I have breakfast. Ask students to circle the -s ending and the use of does/doesn’t in the questions and answers in exercise 1. Refer students to Grammar Reference 6.4 on p!25. 5 Focus attention on the language in the speech bubbles. Drill the question and answer about Elliot. Elicit two or three more examples with students working in open 56 Unit6 • Everyday
- 56. pairs. Students continueasking and answering in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of third person -s and of does/doesn’t in the questions and negatives. if.H M [CD 1: Track 85] Play the recording and get students to check their answers. If students had difficulties with questions and answers 1-6, drill the questions and answers and get students to practise them again, working with a new partner. Answers and tapescript A When does he leave home? В He leaves home at 7.15. 2 A Does he goto work by bus? В No, he goes to work by taxi. 3 A Where does he have lunch? В He has lunch in his office. - A Does he usually work late? В Yes, he does, every day. 5 A Does he eat in a restaurant? В No, he doesn’t. He eats at home. 5 A What does he do in the evening? В He works. He never goes out. This exercise gives students the opportunity to generate negative third-person forms. Focus attention on the example and ask one student to read it aloud. Students write sentences 2-5 in the negative. Allow them to check their answers in pairs before checking with the class. Ask students to write the answers on the board to check they are forming the negatives correctly, including the inclusion of the apostrophe in doesn’t. Answers 2 He doesn’t drive to work. 3 He doesn’t work in a bank. 4 He doesn’t have a lot of friends. 5 He doesn’t goto bed late. Focus attention on the chart. Elicit the missing forms for I and you (see below) and then get students to complete the rest of the chart. Check the answers with the whole class. Highlight again that the he/she form is the only one that is different. Answers Positive Negative Question 1 work don’t work Do 1work? You work don’t work Do you work? He/She works doesn’t work Does she work? We work don’t work Do we work? They work don’t work Do they work? Teacher’s Resource Disc Communicative activity Unit 6 A day in the life Workbook Unit 6 Exercise 7 Present Simple he/she - Questions ADDITIONAL MATERIAL______________________________________ PRACTICE (SB p44) Lois’s day 1 Remind students of Elliot from the previous section. Point to the pictures of Lois and to rubric 1 and ask Who is she? (She’s Elliot’s sister.) Check pronunciation of Lois /'tauwis/. Pre-teach/check the following using the introduction to the text, the pictures in the Students Book, and simple board drawings: seaside, artist, fill your day, walk (n), by the sea, eggs, toast, go to the beach, dog, studio, cook, often, invitefriends, and play the piano. It’s also useful to have a map to show the location of Cape Cod, where Lois lives. Read the first line of the text aloud. Ask How old is Lois? and What’s her job? (She’s 25. She’s an artist.) Focus attention on the pictures and ask What does Lois do? Elicit a range of examples from the class. Students are likely to make mistakes with the third-person forms of the Present Simple, so don’t insist on total accuracy with students’ first attempts. Encourage students to self-correct by highlighting mistakes rather than correcting them yourself. Also encourage students to help and correct each other. 2 Focus attention on the verbs in the box. They are already in the third-person form and so students just need to use the context to help them choose the correct verb. Get students to read the second sentence in the text and focus attention on the example. Then get students to complete the text, working individually. Remind them to read the whole sentence around the gap each time so that they get the complete context and to cross out the verbs they have used as they go along. j [CD 1: Track 86] Get students to check their answers in pairs before playing the recording for a final check. Focus on the adverb usually in the text. Teach the meaning by writing always sometimes never on the board and eliciting that usually goes between sometimes and always. Answers 2 gets up 6 works 10 listens to 3 has 7 eats 11 plays 4 goes 8 cooks 12 phones 5 gets 9 invites 13 goes T6.11 Unit6 • Everyday 57
- 57. Т6.11 Lois Maddox -The seaside artist fills her day with work, walks, music, and friends. Lois Maddox is 25 and she’s an artist. She lives in a small house by the sea in Cape Cod, Massachusetts. She always gets up late, at ten o’clock inthe morning. She has a big breakfast - coffee, eggs and toast - and then she goes to the beach with her dog. When she gets home, she works in her studio until seven o’clock in the evening. She never eats lunch, but she always cooks a big dinner and she often invites friends. After dinner, she usually listens to music or plays the piano. Sometimes she phones her brother, Elliot, in New York. She goes to bed very late, at one or two o’clock in the morning. Answers and tapescript E Hello. L Hi, Elliot, how are you? E I’mfine, thanks. Busy as usual. L Oh, you’re always busy. You and your computers! E I know, but I love my work. L I love my work, too, but I relax sometimes. E Huh! I don’t know about that. You paint all day! L Yes, but I stop in the evening. You never stop! E That’s not true. Hey, Lois, how’syour friend Nancy? L Nancy? She’s OK. You know, Elliot, Nancy likes you. She often asks about you. E Mm, I like Nancy, too. L Well, come and visit me soon. I want to cook for you and Nancy. E Good idea! What about next weekend? Next Sunday? L Yes, great! I often invite Nancy at the weekend. E Great. See you on Sunday. Have a good week! 3 Focus attention on the example. Make sure students realize that He refers to Elliot and She to Lois. Get students to complete the answers and then check in pairs. Check the answers with the whole class. Answers 2 She 3 She 4 He 5 She 6 He 7 She 8 He Ask a few students to read the sentences aloud. Then get students to practise the sentences in pairs. If they have serious problems with pronunciation, drill the sentences with the whole class and get them to repeat. 4 Ask students Who does Lois phone sometimes? and elicit Elliot, in New York. Focus attention on the conversation and explain that Elliot and Lois are on the phone. Most of the gapped words are ones that students have already met and so students should be able to complete the conversation without too many problems. Give students time to read through the conversation before they listen, especially with weaker classes. Deal with any vocabulary problems. Encourage students to use the context to help them but be prepared to explain as usual, too, relax, paint, that’s not true, at the weekend, and Sunday. [CD 1: Track 87] Play the first two lines, including the example. Play the rest of the recording without stopping and get students to complete the conversation. Give them time to check their answers in pairs before playing the recording again for a final check. Put students in pairs to practise the phone conversation. If possible, get them to sit back-to-back so that they cant see each other. If students have problems with pronunciation/intonation, play selected lines from the recording again and drill chorally and individually. Negatives and pronunciation 5 This exercise practises the negative form and also highlights the importance of contrastive stress when correcting or disagreeing with a statement. Focus attention on the example and ask positive or negative? about each sentence in the answer (first sentence - negative, second sentence - positive). Elicit the answer to sentence 2 (He doesn’t get up at ten o’clock! He gets up at six o’clock!). Tell students to continue correcting the sentences, referring back to the information about Elliot and Lois on pp42 and 44. (With a weaker group, you could do this as a class activity on the board and then play the recording for reinforcement.) [CD 1: Track 88] Play the recording through once, getting students to check their sentences for grammatical accuracy. Then write the pairs of sentences for numbers 2 and 3 and elicit where the main stress falls with the whole class. Remind students that the stress helps to indicate the main difference in the information in the pairs of sentences, and so falls on the key words. Get students to work in pairs and mark where they think the main stress falls in the rest of the pairs of sentences. Play the recording again and get students to check their answers. Also check the answers orally with the whole class in case students have problems hearing the main stress. Play the recording again if necessary and then get students to practise the sentences with a partner. T 6.12 T6.13 58 Unit6 • Everyday
- 58. Answers and tapescript 1She doesn’t live in a flat! She lives in a house! 1 He doesn’t get up at ten o’clock! He gets up at six o’clock! : She isn’t a businesswoman! She’s an artist! - He doesn’t go to work by bus! He goes to work by taxi! : She doesn’t watch television in the evening! She listens to music or plays the piano! ng about you Demonstrate the activity by writing the names of two people (one male, one female) from your family on the board. Get students to ask you questions about them, using the language in the speech bubbles and the cues in the Students Book. If students have problems -witching from questions with be to the Present Simple questions, drill the language as a class. Get students to write the name of two family members on a piece of paper. Remind them to choose one male and one female. Students work in pairs and ask and answer about the family members. Monitor and check for correct use of he/she, his/her and the third person singular Present Simple forms. SUGGESTION You could ask students to bring in family photos for the above activity. Check it 7 This exercise consolidates the auxiliary forms do/don’t and does/doesn’t in Present Simple questions and short answers. Focus attention on number 1 and elicit the answers (Do, do). Students continue completing the questions and answers, working individually. Ask students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. Answers Do you like ice-cream?’ ‘Yes, I do.’ I Does she work in London?’ ‘Yes, she does.’ 3 Where does he work?’ ‘In a bank.’ - Do you goto work by bus?’ ‘No, I don’t.’ 5 Does she goto bed early?’ ‘No, she doesn’t.’ : Do they have a dog?’ ‘Yes, they do.’ Does he speak German?’ ‘No, he doesn’t.’ 8 Do they live in the US?’ ‘No, they don’t.' ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 6 Exercises 8 and 9 Cathy’s bedroom Exercise 10 do!does!am!is/are VOCABULARY AND SPEAKING (SBP46) Words that go together This section reviews and extends some of the collocations for everyday activities that students met in Unit 5. 1 Make sure students understand that TV stands for television and check comprehension of shopping. Focus attention on the examples. Students work in pairs to continue matching the verbs and nouns/phrases. [CD 1: Track 89] Play the recording and get students to check their answers. If necessary, check the meaning of stay at home. Answers and tapescript get up early go to bed late listen to music watch TV cook dinner work in an office go shopping drink coffee eat in restaurants have a shower play the piano stay at home 2 This is a questionnaire activity to practise Yes/No questions. As a variation, students use Yes, always, Yes, usually; Yes, sometimes; or No, never in their answers, rather than Yes, I do./No, I don’t. This allows them to practise the frequency adverbs in a simple but meaningful way. [CD 1: Track 90] Focus attention on the questionnaire. Play the recording and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Drill the intonation if necessary. T 6.14 T 6.15 Unit6 • Everyday 59
- 59. 1 Do youget up early? 2 Do you have a big breakfast? 3 Do you walk to school or work? 4 Do you go to school or work by bus? 5 Do you watch TV in the evening? 6 Do you go shopping at the weekend? 7 Do you eat in restaurants? 8 Do you drink wine? 9 Do you go to bed late? 3 Focus attention on the language in the speech bubbles. Drill the question and three possible answers. Get students to ask you a few of the questions and give true answers. Demonstrate how to record the answers by putting the four adverbs on the board and ticking under the appropriate one. Students then work in closed pairs, asking and answering, and noting down their partner’s answers. 4 This follow-up phase allows students to talk about themselves and their partner and so get practice in switching from first to third person. Focus attention on the example and then elicit more information from individual students about themselves and their partner. Don’t over-correct students during the feedback stage, just allow them to say what they want to say and then correct any common mistakes at a later stage. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 6 Exercise 13 Words that go together EVERYDAY ENGLISH (SB P47) Days of the week 1 I H M [CD 1: Track 91] Explain that students are going to learn the days of the week in English. Play the recording and get students to write the days in the correct order on the calender. Pause the recording if necessary to give students time to write. Play the recording again and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Make sure they can distinguish Tuesday and Thursday and that they only produce two syllables in Wednesday/'wenzdei/. Answers and tapescript Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Students practise the days again with each student saying one day of the week in the correct order. Elicit the answer to question 1 as an example. Students do the exercise in pairs. Have a brief feedback session by getting students to give their answers to individual questions. Here students learn which prepositions are used with the days, parts of the day, and times. Elicit the answer for times and the weekend (at) and then get students to write the correct preposition for the other phrases. Check the answers. Highlight the difference between in the afternoon but on Friday afternoon, in the evening but on Saturday evening, etc. Answers at nine o’clock at ten thirty at twelve fifteen at the weekend on Sunday on Monday on Saturday evening on Thursday morning on Friday afternoon in the morning in the afternoon in the evening 4 Focus attention on the example and then get students to complete the other sentences with either in, on, or a Check the answers. Answers 2 on 3 in 4 on 5 at Focus attention on the example answers in the speech bubbles. Get students to practise asking and answering questions 1-5 in closed pairs. This allows them to practise the we form of the Present Simple. Get them to complete the sentences in writing about when they do have English lessons. Encourage them to include the day, part of the day, and time: We have English lessons on (Monday evening) at (seven thirty). Talking about you 5 Students complete the questions with the correct preposition, then ask and answer the questions in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct question formation, use of short answers, and prepositions of time. If you have time, conduct a brief feedback session to allow students to talk about their partner and so practise the third person singular. Answers Do you... have a shower in the morning/evening? get up early on Sunday morning? goto work/school on Saturday? eat in restaurants at the weekend? watch TV in the afternoon? stay at home on Friday evening? 60 Unit6 • Everyday
- 60. TIONAL MATERIAL к Unit6 se 12 Prepositions - in/at/on ~ses 14-17 Reading - Barack Obama 'se 18 Days of the week 't forget!________________________________ к Unit 6 !ses 19-23 Revision list the students to turn to pp 132-3 and go through words with them. Ask them to learn the words for work, and test them on a few in the following lesson. Л Resource Disc 6 Test 6 Skills test and check 2 (Units 4-6) /DVD 6 Sara’s day on iTools and iTutor
- 61. Question words •me/him/us/them this/that • Adjectives Can I... ? My favourites Introduction to the unit The title of this unit is ‘My favourites’ and it gives practice in describing lifestyles, preferences, and places. The grammar input includes revision and extension of question words, the introduction of object pronouns, and the demonstratives this and that. Students get skills practice with a reading and writing section linked to a focus on places. Useful adjectives and their opposites are introduced and practised. The situational and functional syllabus continues with an Everyday English focus on making requests with Can I...? Language aims Question words The question words introduced in previous units are reviewed, and Why is also introduced. Students met How many? in How many languages do you speak? and How much is it? used to ask about prices in Unit 5. Both questions are reviewed in context in this unit, but the grammar syllabus doesn’t deal with the use of much/many with uncountable countable nouns. This is covered in New Headway Elementary, Fourth editioi and so doesn’t need to be handled in any depth at this relatively early stage. Object pronouns Subject pronouns (I, you, he, etc.) are reviewed, and objecl pronouns (me, you, him, etc.) are introduced. The Grammar Spot on p49 als< lists possessive adjectives so that students can see the full set of patterns with these words that are easily confused. this/that This and that are introduced in the context of talking and asking about objects and people. How much is this/that? for asking about prices is also introduced. Vocabulary A set of key everyday adjectives and their opposites is introduced. This gives an opportunity to review objects introduced in earliei units. Students also review the use of a/an + adjective + noun. Everyday English Requests with Can I ...? are introduced and practised in a range of situations. Workbook There are exercises to practise object pronouns and possessive adjectives. This/that is consolidated, and students practise question words in a variety of exercises. The adjectives from the unit are also consolidated. Requests with Can I ...? from Everyday English are reviewed and consolidated. Photocopiable activity There is a photocopiable activity to review adjective + noun collocations on ТВ p i44. POSSIBLE PROBLEMS The similarity between subject and object pronouns and possessive adjectives often presents problems for students. Choosing the correct question word can also be problematic. The Student’s Book and Workbook give practice to help students with these areas, but be prepared to monitor them during pairwork and review as necessary. 62 Unit 7 • My favourites
- 62. Notes on theunit F TARTER (SB p48) section sets the theme of the unit - favourites - and students the opportunity to recycle some of the bulary from earlier units in a personalized way. Give an example of your own favourite for two or three of the categories. Elicit possible answers for each category to check students understand what they refer to. Then give students a short time to think of their own favourites. Focus attention on the speech bubbles to demonstrate the activity. Students met the pronoun it for recognition in Unit 5. Ask them what it refers to here (pizza) but don’t go into a presentation of object pronouns at this stage. Students ask and answer about some of the things in exercise 1 in open and then closed pairs. Elicit a few more examples of students’ favourites in a short feedback session. LOVE IT! (SB p48) tion words - me/him/us/them section reviews questions and answers, and presents V.' and because. At this stage there’s no need to pre-teach the new vocabulary unless you feel that students will difficulty understanding from context. If this is the or if you have a weaker group, you could pre-teach/ к some of the following items-.fashion model, divorced, ~n show, choose, clothes, designer, kids, adore, Swedish, work hard, free time. Focus attention on the photos and the text. Ask Where is the textfrom: a magazine, a book, or a website? I heck students understand that it’s from a website and it shows a webpage with questions and answers. Ask •7io is Gina Macy? and elicit She’s a fashion model. 1 W [CD 1: Track 92] Focus attention on the : uestions in exercise 2. Ask students to read the text and listen to the recording, and note down the relevant nformation about Ginas favourites. Play the recording md check the answers. Answers 3 -as favourite. • city is Paris. • day is Friday. designer is Chanel, food is pizza. Tell students they are going to review the questions that Gina’s fans asked her on her website. Focus attention on the example and then give students time to find the missing question words. Check the answers. Highlight the use of Why and because to ask for and give reasons. Check the pronunciation: why /wai/ and because /bi'koz/. Answers 2 Who 5 Who 8 How many 3 What 6 How 9 Why 4 When 7 Why 10 What Elicit any further information students can remember ioout Gina, e.g. She’s married. She has three children. She loves her job, etc. Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Drill the examples chorally and individually. Make sure students understand that they need to answer as Gina, and remind them to take it in turns to ask the questions so that both students get practice in giving the answers. Get students to practise the questions and answers in closed pairs while you monitor. If students have problems with pronunciation, drill key sentences and highlight the falling intonation. Then get students to continue practising in closed pairs. ! * » ■ [CD 1: Track 93] Play the recording and let students compare their answers. Ш 1 1 Where do you live? I live in France, in Paris. 2 Who are you married to? Julien Caribe. He’s French. 3 What does your husband do? He’s a photographer. 4 When are you in Sydney again? Next October. 5 Who are the kids in the photos? My daughters, Freya and Frida, and my son, Pierre-Louis. 6 How old are they? They’re six, four, and ten months old. 7 Why do your daughters have Swedish names? Because their father is Swedish. 8 How many shows do you do every year? About eight. 9 Why do you work so hard? Because I love my work. 10 What do you do in your free time? I go out with my family. This exercise highlights the use of object pronouns and possessive adjectives. Focus attention on the examples and then put students in pairs to complete the sentences. Encourage them to work from memory as much as possible and only to refer back to the text if they need to. Unit 7 • My favourites 63
- 63. Answers 2 him, me5 Their, them 3 our, them, us 6 our 4 my, our, them 6 Focus attention on the example and then set a time limit of 2-3 minutes to encourage students to work quickly to complete the task. Put students in pairs to compare the details. [CD 1: Track 94] Play the recording and get students to check their answers. Put students in new pairs to read the corrected text aloud. Encourage them to read as fluently as possible so that they don’t sound stilted. Be prepared to drill difficult words and lines as a class and get students to repeat the task. Answers and tapescript Gina is afashion model. Paris is her favourite city. She loves it there. Next October she’s in Sydney for a fashion show. She’s now married to a Frenchman. They have a baby son. Friday is their favourite day. In a brief follow-up, ask students Do you ask questions on websites? and elicit a range of answers from the class. Allow students to give as much detail in their answers as they can. GRAMMAR SPOT 1 Give students time to complete the matching task. Then check the answers. Answers Where? In America. When? On Sunday. Who? Peter. Why? Because... How many? Ten. 2 Check comprehension of the terms subject and object pronouns by writing this simple table on the board. Subject Verb Object I like you. You like it. She likes them. We like him. Focus attention on the chart in the Student’s Book and on the examples. Get students to complete the missing words, working in pairs. Check the answers with the whole class. Answers Subject 1 you he she it we they Object me you him her it us them Possessive my your his her its our their Ask students to underline the object pronouns in the webpage. Read Grammar Reference 7.1-7.2 on p i26 together in class, and/or ask students to read it at home. Encourage them to ask you questions about it. SUGGESTION To give more practice with question words, you can have a quiz in which the students generate the questions. You can give different groups sets of answers and get them to write the questions. You will need to choose answers that can only generate one question and only focus on the present tense at this stage. Check the questions with each group, and then divide the students into pairs so that each student in the pair has a different set of questions. Students ask and answer in pairs, scoring a point for each correct answer. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL_____________________________________________ Workbook Unit 7 Exercise 1 Questions - An interview with Johnny Depp Exercises 6 -8 Pronouns and possessives - me/him; my/his THIS IS MY FAVOURITE... (SBP50) this and that 1 Pre-teach/check the difference between this and that. To demonstrate this, stand next to a student and say, e.g This is (Yuko). Pick up an object and say, e.g. This is {my new bag). Repeat with other students and objects. To demonstrate that, point to a student at a distance from you and say, e.g. That is {Katya). Point to an object at a distance from you and say, e.g. That is {a map o f the world). Repeat with other students and objects. Also introduce the questions What’s this? and What’s that? in the same way. Make sure students understand that we use this to refer to people and things that are near to us and that to refer to people and things that are not near to us. Focus attention on the pictures. Give students time to read the conversations. Encourage them to use the context and information in the pictures to help them with new vocabulary. With weaker students, ask where and/or who the people are in each picture to help them T 7.3 64 Unit 7 • My favourites
- 64. -nderstand the context.If students query the use of :ne in number 7, explain that we say one not to repeat сoat, but don’t go in to a grammatical presentation of :ne/ones at this stage. [CD 1: Track 95] Focus attention on the examples in numbers 1 and 2. Then give students time to complete the rest of the conversations, working individually. Get students to check their answers in pairs before playing the recording as a final check. answers and tapescript A This is my favourite family photo. В Ah, yes. You all look very happy! С Who’sthat? D The guy inthe hat? That’sthe boss! E What’sthat? F It’s my new MP3 player. E Wow! It’s great! G How much is this? H £9.50. G I’ll have it, please. I How much is that? J It’s£500. I I love it. It’sfantastic! К Is this your phone? L Yes, it is. Thanks. M I like that coat. N The blue one? M No, the red one! О I like this wine. P Where’s it from? О Chile. It's delicious. Q This is for you. R A present? For me? Why? Q Because I love you! If vou have time, get students to practise the с mversations in pairs before referring to them to I-rammar Reference 7.3 on p i26. Review the names and pronunciation of some of the ubjects in the classroom by asking What’s this/that in English?Make sure you include an object or picture of an object beginning with a vowel so that students review M’s an (umbrella). Focus attention on the examples in the r>eech bubbles. Drill the examples in open pairs. Elicit :cher examples in open pairs and encourage students to _se the possessive s where appropriate, e.g. It’s (Konrad) s coat Then get students to ask and answer about other ;.assroom objects in closed pairs. Monitor and check tor correct use of What’s this/that? and the possessive s. T-.eck the answers by getting students to ask and answer bcross the class. Workbook Unit 7 Exercise 9 this/that ADDITIONAL MATERIAL PRACTICE (SB p51) I like them! 1 This section practises object pronouns and allows students to personalize the language by talking about people and things. Pre-teach/check hate and ofcourse. Focus attention on the example and make sure students understand what the answer it refers back to (ice-cream). Students complete the other sentences, working individually. [CD 1: Track 96] Get students to check their answers in pairs before letting them check against the recording. Ask students what the pronoun refers back to each time (given in brackets in the key below). Sentence 5 assumes the teacher is a woman. Check what pronoun would be used if the teacher were a man (him). Answers and tapescript 1 Do you like ice-cream? Yes, I love it. (ice-cream) 2 Do you like dogs? No, I hate them, (dogs) 3 Do you like me? Of course I like you! (me) 4 Does your teacher teach you French? No, she teaches us English, (you) 5 Do you like your teacher? We like her very much, (your teacher) What do you like? 2 Check comprehension of the items in the box. Focus attention on the speech bubbles and check comprehension of love, hate, and adore. This can be done with simple board drawings of faces - a smiling face © for love/adore and a frowning face © for hate. If appropriate, also teach It’s/They’re all right, if students want to give a more neutral answer. Drill the language in the speech bubbles chorally and individually. Check for correct sentence stress in the answers: Yfs, I love it! No, I hate it! Oh yes! I adore them. Get students to give two or three more examples in open pairs across the class. Then get students to continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for the correct use of object pronouns. T7.4 T 7.5 Unit 7 • My favourites 65
- 65. Questions and answers 3Pre-teach/check marry, chocolate, sit next to, and carrots. Focus attention on the question in the example and review the formation of Present Simple questions with do and does. Focus attention on the answer and review the use of the object pronoun it. Check students know what the pronoun refers back to {London). Review the use of -s in third-person Present Simple verbs. Point out that sentences 5 and 6 are negative questions. Give students time to write the questions and answers individually. Monitor and check for grammatical accuracy. Check the answers and then get students to ask and answer the questions in pairs. Answers 2 Why does Annie want to marry Peter? Because she loves him. 3 Why do you eat so much chocolate? Because I adore it. 4 Why does Dan always sit next to Maria? Because he likes her. 5 Why don’t you watch football? Because I hate it. 6 Why don’t you eat carrots? Because I hate them. If students had a lot of problems with the question formation or the object pronouns, go over the key grammar in each question and answer, model each exchange, and get students to repeat it. 4 Pre-teach/check learn, on you (referring to money you have with you), start (verb), a lot (of bands). Check comprehension of How?to ask about manner by eliciting the answer to question 1 {By bus.). Then get students to continue matching the questions and answers, working individually. ■ [CD 1: Track 97] Play the recording and get students to check their answers. Answers and tapescript 1 с How do you come to school? By bus. 2 h What do you have for breakfast? Toast and coffee. 3 e Who’syour favourite band? I don’t have a favourite. I like a lot. 4 b Where does your father work? In an office in the centre of town. 5 g Why do you want to learn English? Because it’s an international language. 6 d How much money do you have on you? Not a lot. About £2. 7 a What time do lessons start at your school? They start at nine o’clock. 8 f How many languages does your teacher speak? Three. Get students to practise the questions and answers in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct pronunciation and intonation. If students have problems, drill the questions and answers chorally. Demonstrate the personalization phase by getting the students to ask you the questions. Students then continue in closed pairs, talking about themselves. Check it 5 Focus attention on the first pair of sentences as an example. Students continue working individually to choose the correct sentences. Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. Answers 1 What do you do at the weekend? 2 Who is your boyfriend? 3 How much money do you have? 4 I don’t drink beer. I don’t like it. 5 Our teacher gives us a lot of homework. 6 She loves me and I love her. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL__________________________________________ Teacher’s Resource Disc Communicative activity Unit 7 Q and A Workbook Unit 7 Exercises 2 -4 Question words Exercise 5 Why? Because ... VOCABULARY (SB P52) Adjectives 1 This exercise reviews and extends common adjectives in context. Focus attention on the example and explal that each missing word is an adjective. The word is given in jumbled order in brackets and sentences 1-6 contain positive adjectives, and 7 and 8 negative adjectives. Give students time to unscramble the wore and complete the sentences, working in pairs. Reminc them to cross out each letter in the anagrams as they go along to make sure they have spelled the word correctly. With weaker students, write the first letter с each adjective on the board to help get them started. 66 Unit 7 • My favourites
- 66. Check the answerswith the class, getting students to spell out the adjectives each time. Drill the pronunciation if necessary. Answers I nee 6 beautiful 3 :Ovely 7 terrible 4 -appy 8 awful 5 nteresting This exercise introduces some key adjectives and their jpposites. It also reviews It’s. Focus attention on the pictures and the example. Get students to tell you any other of the adjectives they recognize or let them guess. ?re-teach the remaining adjectives, using mime. Make >ure students understand they only have to write It’s and :he appropriate adjective, not the name of the objects. Answers I It's expensive. / It’s cheap. 3 It's new. / It’s old. x It's hot. / It’s cold. 3 Its black. / It’s white. : It's right. / It’s wrong. Drill the pronunciation of the sentences chorally and .ndividually. [CD 1: Track 98] Focus attention on the example. Give students a few moments to read through ;he gapped conversations before they listen. Play the recording and get students to fill in the gaps. Play the recording a second time if necessary. Check the answers with the class and then get them to practise the conversations in pairs. If students have problems with the pronunciation, especially the voice range, drill the conversations from the recording and rhen get students to practise again in their pairs. Answers and tapescript 1 A It’s so hot today, isn’t it? В 1know. It’s 35 degrees! 2 С Hey! 1like your new shoes! D Thank you! They’re really nice, aren’t they? С They’re fantastic! 3 E 1live in a very small flat. F How many bedrooms do you have? E Only one! 4 G How much is that coat? H £150. G Wow! That’stoo expensive for me. 5 1 Your name’s Peter, isn’t it? J Yes, that’s right. 1 Nice to meet you, Peter. PHOTOCOPIABLE ACTIVITY UNIT 7 It’s an old computer ТВ pl44 Materials: one copy of the worksheet cut up per pair of students Procedure: this activity practises adjective and noun combinations in a ‘pictionary’-type activity. • Divide students into pairs. Give each pair a set of adjective and a set of noun cards, kept in separate piles. • Each student takes an adjective card and a noun card. If their noun card cannot be matched with their adjective card, then they replace it at the bottom of the pile and take another, until they find a combination which they are able to depict in a drawing. Each student then draws a picture of their combination. • When they have finished drawing, students show their picture to their partner, asking What’s this? Their partner has to guess which adjective/noun combination has been depicted, and reply using It’s a(n) .... • Students continue until all the adjective cards have been used. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 7 Exercise 10 Adjectives - happy/miserable READING AND WRITING (SB P53) A postcard from San Francisco 1 This section extends the focus on adjectives in the context of a description of a place. Focus attention on the photos and elicit information about the place that is shown, e.g. Is it a big city? Is it in the United States? Where do you think it is? Tell students they are going to read and listen to the postcard. Encourage them to guess the meaning of new words. [CD 1: Track 99] Play the recording and get students to follow in their books. Check comprehension of the following, using the context and photos to help where possible: on holiday, comfortable, friendly, easy to understand, speakfast, seafood, wonderful, amazing, rain, fog, wet, see you next week. 2 Elicit the answer to question 1 as an example (It’sfrom Ruben and Pasha.). Get students to answer the other questions, working individually. Check the answers with the whole class. T 7.7 T 7.8 Unit 7 • My favourites 67
- 67. Answers 1 It’sfrom Rubenand Pasha. 4 Yes, it is. 2 They're in San Francisco. 5 The weather. 3 They’re on holiday. 3 Focus attention on the adjectives Pasha and Ruben use to describe their hotel. Get students to continue finding the appropriate adjectives. Point out that for one of the adjectives for San Francisco they will need to use a negative formed with not. Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. Answers the people: friendly the food: delicious the cafes and restaurants: wonderful San Francisco: beautiful, big, not expensive the shops: great the Golden Gate Bridge: amazing the weather: awful, cold, wet Writing 4 Focus attention on the skeleton of the postcard. You can get students to write their postcard in full in class, feeding in vocabulary where relevant, or give it for homework. With a weaker class, you could draft the postcard as a class activity on the board, and then get students to write a different postcard for homework, based very closely on the draft. EVERYDAY ENGLISH (SB P54) Can I... ? 1 This section focuses on requests in everyday situations. Students are introduced to Can I ...?, but don’t give a detailed explanation of the grammar of can at this stage. Focus attention on the main photo of the young woman. Explain that her name is Iveta and she’s Czech. Tell students that they are going to see and hear her in different places and situations. Focus attention on exercise 1. Check comprehension of the vocabulary in the activities list by reading out each activity and getting students to point to the correct picture. Repeat this procedure for the places vocabulary. Focus attention on the example. Students then write the correct numbers and letters for the rest of the pictures. Check the answers. Answers (down) 2 d 5 a lb 4 e 3 c Iveta in town 2 1 W [CD 2: Track 1] Explain that students are goin to hear Iveta in different places in town. Focus on the example in the table and play the first conversation. Play the other four conversations, pausing after each one. Get students to complete their answers, choosing from the places from exercise 1. Play the conversations through again if necessary. Check the answers with the whole class. Answers 2 in a clothes shop; to try on ajumper 3 in a post office; to post some letters 4 in a cafe; a coffee 5 in a chemist’s; some aspirin T 7.9 1 Can I have a return ticket to Oxford, please? 2 I like this jumper. Can Itry it on? 3 I want to post these letters to the Czech Republic, please. 4 Can I have a coffee, please? 5 Some aspirin, please. 3 И [CD 2: Track 2] Focus attention on the gappei conversations. Pre-teach/check a return ticket, pay by credit card, machine, enter your PIN number, changing rooms, scales, stamp, latte (a type of white coffee), take away, Pardon?, and packet. Elicit as many answers for conversation 1 as the students can remember. Play the recording and get students to check. Students continue completing the other conversations, working in pairs. Play the recording of all five conversations and get students to check/complete their answers. Answers and tapescript 1 In a railway station I Can I have a return ticket to Oxford, please? A Sure. I How much is that? A Twenty-two pounds fifty, please. I Can I pay by credit card? A No problem. Put your card in the machine. And enter your PIN number, please. 2 In a clothes shop I Hello. Can Itry on this jumper, please? В Of course. The changing rooms are over there. 3 In a post office I Can I post these letters to the Czech Republic, please? С Sure. Put them on the scales. That’s£1.68. I Thank you. How much is a stamp for a postcard to the United States? С Sixty-two p. I Can I have three, please? 68 Unit 7 • My favourites
- 68. 4 In acafe D Yes, please! I Can I have a coffee, please? A latte. D Large or small? I Small, please. To take away. D Sure. Anything to eat? I No, thank you. Just a coffee. D Thanks a lot. : In a chemist’s E Next, please! I Hello. Can I have some aspirin, please? E Twelve or twenty-four? I Pardon? ( E Do you want a packet of twelve aspirin or twenty-four? I Oh, twelve’sfine, thanks. Get students to practise the conversations in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct pronunciation and intonation. If students have problems, drill key sections chorally and then get students to repeat the closed pairwork. fc-.eplay 4 Check comprehension of single ticket, jacket, T-shirt, parcel, letter, cheese and salad sandwich, shampoo, and toothpaste. Elicit likely prices for the train tickets and posting the parcel/letter. Choose a pair of students to demonstrate the conversation in a railway station. Get students to continue practising the conversations, working in closed pairs and taking it in turns to be the assistant and the customer. Monitor and check for correct pronunciation and intonation. If students have problems, drill key sections of the conversations and get them to practise again in pairs. Ask students to act out their roleplay to the class in a feedback session. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL «►crfcbook Unit 7 cise 11 Can I ...? Don’t forget! Workbook Unit 7 Exercises 12-14 Revision Word list Ask the students to turn to pp 133-4 and go through the words with them. Ask them to learn the words for homework, and test them on a few in the following lesson. Video/DVD Unit 7 Alfies Antique Market on iTools and iTutor Unit 7 • My favourites 69
- 69. 8 Rooms and furniture Thereis/are Prepositions • Directions Introduction to the unit The title of this unit is ‘Where I live’ and the theme is homes and cities. There is/are and any are introduced in the context of talking and asking about rooms and furniture. Prepositions of place are reviewed and extended. There is a range of skills practice, including a reading and vocabulary section on the city of Vancouver, and a listening and writing section on the students’ own home town. The lexical set is of rooms and furniture. The language of asking about local amenities and giving directions is introduced and practised in the Everyday English section. POSSIBLE PROBLEMS • There is/are Students will be familiar with the forms is/are from their knowledge of the verb to be. However, students may find it confusing to have a singular and plural form to talk about what exists, especially if the equivalent structure has a single form in their own language. Students can also confuse there and their, so they may need help in this area in written work. In terms of pronunciation, students need practice in the /6/ sound in there and also need help with linking Theresjx and Therejire. The intonation of the question form may need careful drilling. • any Students often ask what any means, as there is usually no direct translation in their own language. There is of course no real answer to this, so simply tell students that they need to use any in negatives and plural questions with there is/are. Students also sometimes have a tendency to use any in the positive, so be prepared to monitor and check for this. Language aims There is/are There is/are is introduced in the positive, question, and negative forms. any Any is introduced for negatives and plural questions with the structure there is/are. It is not used with any other structures at this stage so that students have the opportunity to get used to using it. Some is included for recognition, but is not given a full presentation or contrasted with any, as this is covered in Unit 12. Prepositions of place In, on, under, and next to are introduced and practised in the context of talking about furniture in rooms. Vocabulary The lexical set is of rooms and furniture. Students are given the opportunity to personalize the language by talking about their own home. Everyday English This covers the language of asking about local amenities and giving simple directions. Workbook The lexical set of rooms and furniture is consolidated, and there is also an exercise to practise the vocabulary introduced in the reading and vocabulary section. There is/are and any are practised in a range of exercises, and the prepositions of place from the unit are practised further. There is further practice in reading, and the language of local amenities and directions from Everyday English is consolidated in a range of exercises. Photocopiable activity There is a photocopiable activity to review there is/ are, rooms and furniture, and prepositions on ТВ p!45. 70 Unit 8 • Where I live
- 70. Notes on theunit ROBERT’S LIVING ROOM (SB P57) STARTER (SB p56) ■ Focus attention on the questions in exercise 1. Pre-teach/check garden and balcony, and the difference ! between house andflat. You can draw these on the [ board to highlight the difference. Demonstrate the activity by talking briefly about your own home. Only include language that students have already met, I e.g. adjectives big, small, etc. As a class, students talk i briefly about where they live. Let students exchange information freely and don’t interrupt or over-correct at this stage. 3 ■ * :* ■ [CD 2: Track 3] Focus attention on the picture I of the house. Play the recording and get students to point to the correct room and repeat the words chorally ! and individually. Check for accurate pronunciation of [ kitchen /'kitfin/. Tapescript :athroom, bedroom, kitchen, dining room, living room p Focus attention on the example. Then get students to find the rest of the things in the house and write the correct number, working in pairs. Check the answers with the class. Answers and tapescript I T ] abed [6] a cooker T5] a sofa Ш a TV Q] a shower jT] a toilet [7] a table | [5] afridge [CD 2: Track 4] Students listen and repeat the words chorally and individually. (See above for tapescript.) Check for accurate pronunciation and word stress of the following words, getting students to repeat several times if necessary: a cooker/'кикэ/ a sofa /'soofo/ a TV /ti:'vi:/ a shower /'Jauo/ a toilet /'toilot/ a fridge Ifnd'rJ a picture /'piktJo/ a magazine /msego'zim/ a DVD player /di: vi: 'di: pleio/ There is/are... 1 Focus attention on the photograph and the rubric for exercise 1. Ask What’s his name? (Robert) and Where is he? (In his living room.) Pre-teach/check PlayStation”, games, posters, walls, and tidy. [CD 2: Track 5] Play the recording through once and get students to read and listen to the text, not writing anything at this stage. Write the sentence There’s an old sofa, and there are two armchairs, on the board. Underline There’s and there are. Focus attention on the first gap in Roberts text and elicit the answer (There). Play the recording again and get students to complete the text. Check the answers with the whole class. Answers and tapescript My living room isn’t very big, but I think it’s great. There’s an old sofa, and there are two armchairs. There’s a table with a TV and a DVD player on it. There’s also a PlayStation®. I love all the games. There are some books, and there are a lot of pictures and posters on the walls. There are two lamps. My room’s not very tidy, but it’s really comfortable. If students query the use of some, ask How many books? and elicit We don’t know, to get over the idea of indefinite quantity. 2 Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Write the sentences on the board and ask Singular or plural? (There’s an old sofa. - singular and There are two armchairs. - plural). If you know the students’ mother tongue, you can translate There is/are. If you don’t, they should be able to pick up the meaning from the context. Drill the language in the speech bubbles chorally and individually. Check students can accurately reproduce the linking in both forms: There’sjmjold sofa. Thereare two armchairs. Elicit more singular and plural examples from the class, using the other nouns in the exercise. Students then repeat the sentences working in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of there is and there are. Get students to practise there is and there are with the objects in the classroom. Write lists on the board of the things you have in your classroom, e.g. Singular: a picture, a table, a CD player, a photo Plural: lots o f books, chairs, desks, bags Students work in pairs and take it in turns to make sentences about objects in the classroom. Monitor and check for correct use of there is and there are. Ql] an armchair [T] a lamp [8] a picture [M] a magazine Ц a DVD player Щ a laptop [Ш] a desk T 8.2 T 8.3 Unit 8 • Where I live 71
- 71. ■ * :*■ [CD 2: Track 6] In this exercise, students practise the question form and short answers. Focus attention on the questions and answers. Play the recording and get students to listen to the questions and repeat chorally and individually. Check students can accurately reproduce the intonation in the questions, and the linking in the short answers: Are there any photographs? Yes, thereis. No, there isn’t. Yes, thereare. No, therearen’t. Highlight the singular and plural forms and point out that we use any in questions in the plural. Get students to practise the questions and answers in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct formation of the questions and short answers, and the correct use of any. GRAMMAR SPOT Focus attention on the completed examples. Check students know that There’s is singular and is the contracted form of There is, and that Are there is plural. Focus attention on the gapped sentences. Check students notice that the first and third sentences require plural forms and the second sentence singular, by focusing on the nouns. Students then complete the sentences. Answers Positive There’s a sofa. There are two armchairs. Question Is there aTV? Are there any pictures? Negative There isn’t a computer. There aren’t any photographs. Give students the opportunity to practise the negative statements by referring to the classroom, e.g. There isn’t a DVD player. There aren’t any magazines. Write a list of nouns on the board and get students to make negative sentences. Read Grammar Reference 8.1 and 8.2 on pl26 together in class, and/or ask students to read it at home. Encourage them to ask you questions about it. Tell students they are going to ask and answer questions about Robert’s living room. Check comprehension of the items in the list. Focus attention on the speech bubbles and get students to ask and answer the questions in open pairs. Elicit one or two more exchanges using different nouns and then get students to continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct formation of the questions and shorl answers, and the correct use of any. Check the answers with the whole class by getting students to ask and answer across the class. Answers Is there aTV? Are there any photographs? Is there a desk? Is there a telephone? Are there any lamps? Is there a DVD player? Is there a PlayStation®? Are there any magazines? Yes, there is. No, there aren’t. No, there isn’t. No, there isn’t. Yes, there are. Yes, there is. Yes, there is. Yes, there are. Focus attention on the photo of Robert’s mother. Say He’s on the phone to his mother. Focus on the picture of Robert’s living room again and ask Is is tidy? (No.) Give students time to read the questions. Students should be familiar with all the main structures and vocabulary in the recording but it is slightly longer th; the conversations in earlier units. Remind students th they don’t need to understand every word to be able t answer the questions. [CD 2: Track 7] Explain that students need to listen for the objects in question 1 and the actual questions in 2. Play the recording through once without stopping and let students discuss their answe: in pairs. Play the recording again and let students che or complete their answers. With weaker students, for their first listening you can put a list of nouns on the board in random order, e.g. desk, sofa, photographs, et and get students to number them in the order they ar mentioned in the recording. For their second listenin; get them to focus on the actual questions Robert’s mother asks. Check the answers and elicit any other information from the conversation that the students can remembe e.g. Robert’s mother wants to visit with his father. Answers and tapescript 1 She asks about a sofa, chairs, a TV, a PlayStation®, a desk, picture: and photographs. 2 Is there a nice sofa? Are there any chairs? Is there aTV? A PlayStation®? Why? Is there a desk? Are there any pictures on the walls? Any photographs of your family? 3 She wants to visit next weekend. 72 Unit 8 • Where I live
- 72. Т 8.5 ROBERT’S BEDROOM(SB P58) R=Robert, M =Mum R Hi, Mum. M Robert. How are you? How’s the new flat? R It’s great, Mum. I love it. It’s really comfortable. M And tidy? R Er, well... M So, tell me about it. Is there a nice sofa? R Well, there’s an old sofa, but it’s OK. M Mmm. And are there any chairs? R Yes, of course, there are chairs. There are two big armchairs. M Good. And a TV. Is there a TV? R Oh, yes, there is. The TV’s really big. And I have a DVD player and a PlayStation®and... M A PlayStation®? Why? R Mum, I love playing games! M OK, OK. So, is there a desk? R There isn’t a desk in the living room, but there’s one in the bedroom. M Good. Now, are there any pictures on the walls? Any photographs of your family? R Well, in the living room there are my posters of New York and Sydney, but there aren’t any photographs, they’re all in my bedroom. M OK. Now your father and I want to see this flat. Can we visit next...? R Visit? You want to visit? M Yes. We’re free next weekend. Can we come? R Er, next weekend... er, sorry Mum,... er, I think, er... Refer the students to the tapescript on SB pi 17. Get students to practise the conversation in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct pronunciation and intonation. If students have problems, drill key sections chorally and then get students to repeat the closed pairwork. If you have time, students can perform the conversation as a roleplay for the rest of the class. 6 Demonstrate the activity by describing your own living room. Include positive and negative sentences. Get students to work in closed pairs. Encourage students to ask questions if their partner runs out of things to say. Monitor and check for correct use of there is/are in all forms, any, and pronunciation and intonation. Feed back on any common errors with the whole class. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL •cdcbook Unit 8 Exercises 1-3 Rooms and furniture Exercises 4 -7 There is/There are - In the garden Prepositions 1 Focus attention on the prepositions. Check students understand the difference between in and on by putting something in your book and then on your book and eliciting the correct preposition. 2 Ask students What can you remember about Robert? and elicit any information about him, e.g. He likes computer games, or his home, e.g. There’s a TV and a DVD player in his living room. Focus attention on the photograph of Robert. Ask What room is this? (Robert’s bedroom.) Briefly review the vocabulary in the picture by pointing to the objects/ furniture and eliciting the correct words. Pre-teach/ check the new vocabulary in the gap-fill: floor, car keys, drawer, and trainers. Focus attention on the example. Students then complete the sentences, working individually. [CD 2: Track 8] Get students to check in pairs before checking with the whole class. Answers and tapescript 1 His laptop is on the desk. 1 The CD player is next to the laptop. 3 There are three books on the floor next to his bed. 4 His car keys are in the drawer. 5 There’s a football on the floor under the desk. 6 His trainers are next to his bag under his bed. Students practise the sentences. Monitor and check for accurate pronunciation. If students have problems, drill the sentences and get students to practise them again. 3 This exercise practises questions with Where? and the prepositions. Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Remind students of the singular form is and the plural form are. Highlight the use of It’s in the singular answer and They’re in the plural. Drill the questions and answers chorally and individually. Make sure students can reproduce the falling intonation on the questions. Check comprehension of the items in the lists. Elicit two or three more exchanges using the nouns in the list. Students then continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of is/are, It’s/They’re, and the prepositions. Check the answers with the whole class by getting students to ask and answer across the class. T 8.6 Unit 8 • Where I live 73
- 73. Answers Where’s his sportsbag? It’s under his bed. Where are his pens? They’re in the drawer. Where are his magazines? They’re on the floor next to the bed. Where are his credit cards? They’re in the drawer. Where’s his jumper? It’s on the bed. Where’s his lamp? It’s next to the bed. Where’s his alarm clock? It’s next to the bed. Where are his trainers? They’re under the bed next to his sports bag. Where are his photos? They’re on the wall. Where’s his mug? It’s on the books, next to his bed. 4 Give students time to write about six questions each. Demonstrate the activity by closing your eyes and getting students to ask you one or two questions. Then get them to continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of is/are, Its/They’re, and the prepositions. SUGGESTION You can use the picture of Roberts bedroom on p58 to review there is/are in the positive, negative, and in questions. This can be done as a warm-up activity at the beginning of a lesson or as a ‘filler’. For further practice, bring in pictures of rooms from magazines. These can be used for vocabulary consolidation, question and answer practice, and describe and draw activities. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 8 Exercise 8 Prepositions - on/under/next to ... 2 Demonstrate the activity by asking a few students the questions in exercise 1. Students continue asking and answering in closed pairs. Encourage them to also ask different questions from those in exercise 1. Monitor and check. Two different rooms 3 This is an information gap using different pictures. Tell students that they are going to work with a partner and ask questions to find the differences between two similar pictures of a room. Pre-teach/check the names of all the parts of the room and the furniture, including window and curtains. Divide the class into pairs. Refer the Student As to p59 and Student Bs to pl41. Tell them they shouldn’t look at each other’s picture. Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles and drill the language. Tell students to circle the differences they find in their pictures. Students work in pairs to find all the differences. Monitor and check. Students compare their pictures to check they have found the differences. Answers Student A’s picture There’s a cat on the floor. There are two pictures on the wall. There are some books on the small table. There’s atelephone on the sofa. Theres a TV and a DVD player. Under the DVD player there are some DVDs. Student B’s picture There’s a cat on the sofa. There aren’t any pictures on the wall. There are some books under the table. There’s a telephone on the small table. There’s a CD player. Under the CD player there are some CDs. PRACTICE (SB p59) Questions and answers 1 Focus attention on the example. Then get students to write the words in the correct order to form questions. Remind them to cross out the words in each set as they use them. [CD 2: Track 9] Play the recording and get students to check their answers. Answers and tapescript 1 Do you live in a house or aflat? 2 How many bedrooms are there? 3 Is there a phone in the kitchen? 4 Is there a television in the living room? 5 Is there a DVD player under the television? 6 Are there a lot of books in your bedroom? 7 Are there any pictures on the wall? 4 [CD 2: Track 10] Tell students they are going to hear a description of one of the rooms and that they have to decide which one it is. Play the recording through once and get students to vote for either pictun A or B. If there is disagreement, play the recording again. Check the answer with the whole class. Answer and tapescript Which room is it? (Answer: picture B) There’s a cat on the sofa, and there’s a phone on a small table next to the sofa. There’s a CD player with some CDs under it. Not a lot of CDs. There isn’t aTV, and there aren’t any pictures or photographs on the walls. There’s one lamp. It’s next to the table with the phone. There are two tables and two armchairs. There are some books under one of the tables. 74 Unit 8 • Where I live
- 74. Г-еск it I Focusattention on the first pair of sentences and elicit •_-.ecorrect one as an example. Students continue working individually to choose the correct sentence. Answers 5 there a sofa in the living room? . '-ere's a DVD player on the floor. I --ethere any posters on the wall? • keys are in the drawer. : ~-e lamp is next to the bed. *HOTOCOPIABLE ACTIVITY .N IT 8 Is there...? Are there...? TBpl45 Materials: one copy of the worksheet cut in half per ri:r of students ? rocedure: Briefly review the rooms and furniture shown on the worksheet without showing students the picture. Pre-teach/check wardrobe, bookshelf, chair, mirror, bath, stairs, mug, and cupboard. Drill the pronunciation as necessary. • Put students in pairs and assign the role of A or В :o each student. Hand out the relevant half of the ■.orksheet. Give students a few moments to look at me picture and deal with any vocabulary queries they may have. • Pre-teach/check gold coin. Tell students they are qoing to hide six gold coins in their picture of the house. Give them time to draw in the coins wherever they like, without letting their partner see. • Explain that students need to ask and answer questions to locate the gold in their partner’s house. Elicit example questions, e.g. Are there any gold :jins in the kitchen? Is there a gold coin on the table?, etc. Explain that students have only three minutes each to find the coins and remind students not to iook at each other’s pictures. 'tudent A asks Student В questions to find the gold ". B’s house. Monitor and help as necessary. After three minutes shout Stop! Audents change roles and Student В asks A euestions to find the gold in As house. Monitor and help as necessary. After three minutes shout Stop! • Ask which students managed to find all the coins in a brief feedback session. READING AND VOCABULARY (SB P60) Vancouver - the best city in the world This skills section continues the theme of describing ‘Where I live’ with a text on visitor information for the city of Vancouver. The text is slightly longer than in previous units and there is an increase in the amount of new vocabulary, but the tasks are carefully staged to help students, and there is a lot of visual support. (With weaker classes, you could get students to check new words for homework before the lesson - see the list of new vocabulary in the notes for exercise 4 below.) The vocabulary exploitation of the text covers a wide range of adjectives and the nouns that they go with. There are examples of superlative forms in the text (best and biggest) and too + adjective. Students have already met best in the context of my bestfriend in Unit 4, and they should be able to work out the meaning of biggest and too from context. There’s no need to do a full presentation of comparatives and superlatives or too/enough at this stage. 1 Ask students What do you know about Vancouver? Let students give any information that they know. Focus attention on the text on pp60-61. Ask Where is the text from? and Who is itfor? Check students understand that it is a webpage for people who want to visit Vancouver. Focus attention on the map and ask students to point to Canada and the US. Say Where is Vancouver? Is it near the US? {Yes, it is.) If appropriate, ask students to guess how far Vancouver is from the US border and then check when they read the text. 2 Focus attention on the pictures. Ask students to find a trolley bus as an example and then get students to find the other things in the lists, working in pairs. Monitor and help as necessary. Check the answers by saying the things in the list and getting students to point to the correct picture. 3 Read the introduction as a class and ask students to point to the relevant pictures. Focus attention on the headings and elicit the words that might appear in each paragraph, e.g. Where is it?: In Canada, near the US; Where to stay: hotels, city centre, etc. Focus attention on the example and read the first main paragraph as a class. Tell students not to worry if they don’t understand every word in the text and just to focus on the matching task. Get students to read the text as far as rains a lot in autumn and winter. Elicit what heading goes in the first space {When to go). Students continue reading and putting in the headings. [CD 2: Track 11] Play the recording and get students to check their answers. Unit 8 • Where I live 75
- 75. Answers and tapescript Vancouveris called the ‘best city in the world’. Why? Is it the spectacular mountains? The beautiful beaches? The excellent shops and restaurants? It's all of this and more! Where is it? Vancouver is in south-west Canada, next to the Pacific Ocean, 24 miles from the US border. When to go It is always a good time to visit Vancouver. The weather is never too cold or too hot. It is warm and sunny in summer, but it rains a lot in autumn and winter. What to do In spring, go skiing in the mountains in the morning and sunbathe on the beach in the afternoon. In summer, go swimming, sailing or fishing, or go walking in North America’s biggest park, Stanley Park. There are excellent shops in Yaletown, and there is also theatre, opera, and music of every sort. Vancouver is the ‘City of Festivals’. Where to eat Vancouver is a cosmopolitan city, so there are French, Italian, Japanese, Indian, Thai, and Chinese restaurants. Vancouver’s Chinatown is the second biggest in North America, after San Francisco. There is also a lot of delicious, fresh seafood. Where to stay In the busy city centre there are some excellent, expensive hotels. The beautiful Fairmont Hotel is $400 a night, but next to the sea there are a lot of cheap, comfortable hotels from $59 a night. How to travel You don’t need a car in Vancouver. There are slow, old trolley buses and there is the fast, modern Sky Train. Take the ferry - it is a great way to see the city. 4 The vocabulary listed below is new. Encourage students to use the context to help them understand, but be prepared to explain some of these words and expressions as necessary: spectacular, excellent, all o f this and more, south-west, border, warm, sunny, autumn, winter, spring, sunbathe, summer, go walking, north (America), theatre, opera, o f every sort, festivals, cosmopolitan, Indian, Thai, fresh, seafood, slow, modern. Elicit the answer to the first question as an example. Students ask and answer in closed pairs. Monitor and help where necessary. Check the answers. Answers 1 Vancouver is in Canada, near the US border. 2 It is always a good time to visit Vancouver. 3 Yes. It rains a lot in autumn and winter. 4 People go skiing in the mountains. They sunbathe on the beach. They go walking in Stanley Park. 5 There is swimming and sailing. 6 Because Vancouver is a cosmopolitan city. 7 No. There are a lot of cheap hotels next to the sea. Expensive hotels are $400 a night, and cheap hotels are $59 a night. 8 The ferry is a good way to see the city. 5 Focus attention on the examples in the chart. Students continue finding the adjectives, working in pairs. Check the answers with the whole class, correcting students’ pronunciation as necessary. Answers Adjectives busy, cosmopolitan spectacular beautiful excellent cold, hot, warm, sunny delicious, fresh excellent, expensive, cheap, comfortable slow, old fast, modern ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 8 Exercise 9 Vocabulary - Revision Exercise 13 Reading - Berkhamsted LISTENING AND WRITING (SB P62) My home town This section continues the theme of talking about cities with a listening task based on a character who lives in Vancouver. Students go on to talk about their own home town and then do a guided writing task. 1 Ask students What can you remember about Vancouver? Put them in pairs to exchange ideas and then elicit any details in a short feedback session. Focus attention on the photo. Ask What’s his name? (Steve), Where does he live? (Vancouver), Who is he with, do you think? (His wife or girlfriend.) Where are they? (At the beach.) Give students time to read the list of topics and check the vocabulary. [CD 2: Track 12] Ask What does Steve talk about? Play the recording as far as have a small apartment there. Elicit the first two topics (his job and his apartment). Tell students they are going to listen to the rest of the recording. Tell them to focus just on the list of things at this stage and not to worry about the details of what Steve says. Make sure students understand they have to write / for the things Steve talks about. Play the recording through once and get students to complete the task. Let them check in pairs and play the recording through again if necessary. Check the answers with the whole class. Nouns city mountains beaches shops and restaurants the weather seafood hotels trolley buses Sky Train T 8.10 76 Unit 8 • Where I live
- 76. Answers Answers given insame order as the tapescript.) Steve talks about hisjob, his apartment, his girlfriend, Chinatown, ~e weather, skiing, golf, cycling, Stanley Park. T 8.10 - ! My name’s Steve and I live in Vancouver. I work at an -ternational bank in the centre of the city but I live in English Bay -ear the beach. I have a small apartment there. Vancouver’s a great : ty. It’s really cosmopolitan. People from all over the world live -ere. Every Friday after work my girlfriend and I goto Chinatown and have delicious Chinese food - it’s my favourite. tkethe weather because it’s never too hot or too cold, but it -ins a lot and I don’t like that. •vork hard and I play hard! I love sport and Vancouver’s good for so many sports. In winter I go skiing every weekend, I like snowboarding, too. In summer I go swimming and I play golf, often go cycling with my girlfriend. Sometimes we cycle along the Vancouver Seawall to the park - Stanley Park. The mountains ook fantastic from there. •vhy doesn’t everyone want to live in Vancouver? It’s the best oiace to live in the world! [CD 2: Track 12] Give students time to read through the questions. Introduce the two place names English Bay and Vancouver Seawall and pre-teach/check snowboarding. Play the recording again as far as near the beach and elicit the answers to questions 1 and 2. Play the rest of the recording and get students to note down their answers. Give students time to check in pairs before checking with the class. With weaker students, be prepared to play selected sections of the recording again to highlight key information. Answers He works at an international bank in the centre of the city. I He lives in English Bay, near the beach. 3 No. His apartment is small. a His favourite food is Chinese food. 5 No. He doesn’t like the weather when it rains. 6 He goes to Chinatown. 7 He likes skiing, snowboarding, swimming, cycling, and golf. : He cycles along the Vancouver Seawall to Stanley Park. [CD 2: Track 13] This is another in a series of short listening tasks that get students to focus on the key points of a situation. Focus attention on the chart and read the questions as a class. Play the first conversation and elicit the answers as an example. Play the rest of the recording, pausing at the end to allow students to complete the chart. Check the answers, playing the recording again if students had any problems with individual sections. Answers What isthe conversation about? Who is Steve talking to? 1 Monday mornings and meetings a colleague 2 goingto a Chinese restaurant his girlfriend 3 the weather and golf afriend 4 cyclingto Stanley Park his girlfriend T 8.11 1 S Morning. Monday again! A Yeah. I hate Mondays and it’s another busy day. S I know. I have three meetings this morning. 2 S Hi, can I meet you after work? В Yeah, that’s great. S Six o’clock OK? We can go to that restaurant next to the Chinese supermarket. В Fine. I want to go there again. The food’s delicious. 3 S Oh no! Rain again! С It’s not so bad. S Yes, it is. The sky’s really black. С You’re right. No golf today, then! 4 S It’s a lovely afternoon. Do you want to go out? D Yeah, where do you want to go? S What about Stanley Park? D Great, I love that park! The mountains look fantastic from there. S Come on then! Let’s get the bikes. Refer the students to the tapescript on SB pi 17. Get students to practise the conversations in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct pronunciation and intonation. If students have problems, drill key sections chorally and then get students to repeat the closed pairwork. If you have time, students can perform the conversations as a roleplay for the rest of the class. 4 Get students to ask you the questions in the Students Book and give true answers. Write up relevant vocabulary on the board in the categories given below and get students to add to each list, e.g. Where/live? house with a garden, flat, in the centre, near the beach What/in your town? theatre, opera, beaches, mountains, beautiful buildings, good restaurants, an amazing bridge What/do with your friends? go to restaurants/clubs/ bars/the cinema/theatre, playfootball/tennis/golf, go shopping/swimming/sailing/surfing/walking/skiing/ snowboarding T 8.10 T 8.11 Unit 8 • Where I live 77
- 77. Where/go shopping? inthe town centre, at the supermarket/department store/clothes shop/market How/travel? by саг/bus/train/trolley bus/bike, on foot good place? Yes - exciting/amazing/interesting; no - a bit boring/dull/quiet. Put the students into groups and get them to talk about their home town or a town they like. Get them to refer to the ideas on the board to help them, but also encourage them to say as much as they can for themselves. Monitor and check, but only help if asked, as it’s important for students to have the opportunity for freer practice and to rely on each other for help. Feed back on any common errors, but only focus on things which are potential blocks to communication. Correcting every small mistake will only discourage the class. Writing 5 This writing task can be done in class or for homework. Tell students they are going to write about a town they know. Focus attention on the paragraph headings and the ideas. If you have time, you might like to build up a full writing model on the board, based on the town where students are studying. If the writing is done in class, get students to exchange their descriptions with a partner for checking/editing. If you check the writing, feed back on any general errors, but again do not pick up on every small mistake. SUGGESTION If you have access to computers, you could ask students to do the writing task as part of a mini project to be uploaded onto the schools network, or onto the Internet. Students can research maps and photographs to produce a webpage similar to the one on Vancouver on pp60-61. EVERYDAY ENGLISH (SB P63) Directions NOTE This section uses s with the names of individual shops like newsagent’s and chemists. There’s no need to explain this use of the apostrophe s but if students query it, just explain it stands for the chemist’s (shop). 1 Pre-teach/check the items in the box and drill the pronunciation chorally. Demonstrate the activity by getting students to find and point to the hotel and the bank. Students continue locating the places on the map. 2 Focus attention on the signs. Copy them onto the board and drill the pronunciation of turn left, turn right, and go straight on. Answers a turn left b turn right с go straight on 3 [CD 2: Track 14] Tell students they are going to listen to some directions which they have to follow on the map. Tell students to find the start point You are here on the map. Play the first conversation as an example and get students to follow on the map. Play the rest of the conversations, pausing after each one and getting students to write in their final location. Get students to check in pairs. Play the recording again and get students to check/complete their answers. Check the answers with the whole class. If students had problems, go over the exercise again, holding up your book and following the route as you read the script aloud. Answers 2 at the cinema 3 at the railway station 4 at the Grand Hotel 5 at the park T 8.12 1 Go up North Road. Turn left at the bank into Charles Street. It’s on the right next to the theatre. 2 Go up North Road. Turn right at the school into Hillside Road, and it’s on the left next to the chemist's. 3 Go up North Road. Turn right at the church into Station Road. Go straight down, and it’s on the right next to the car park. 4 Go straight on up North Road for five minutes, and it’s in Albert Square. It’s a big building on the right. 5 Go straight on up North Road. At the post office turn left into Park Lane. It’s on the right, past the Chinese restaurant. Refer the students to the tapescript on SB pi 18. Get students to practise the conversations in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct pronunciation and intonation. If students have problems, drill key sections chorally and then get students to repeat the closed pairwork. If you have time, students can perform the conversation as a roleplay for the rest of the class. 4 Focus attention on the language in the speech bubbles. Drill the language chorally and individually. Check that students can reproduce the falling intonation on Excuse me! and the fall then rise on Is there a ... near here? 78 Unit 8 • Where I live
- 78. Introduction to theunit The title of this unit is ‘Times past’ and it focuses on the birth dates and lives of famous people. This is the vehicle for the presentation of was/were born, which is extended to general uses of the past of to be. The positive forms of Past Simple irregular verbs are also presented in a story context. Students learn how to say dates in English with focuses on months, ordinal numbers, and years. The focus on collocation is extended with a vocabulary section on words and phrases that go with the verbs have, do, and go. Skills practice is provided in the Reading and speaking section. Saying years • was/were born Past Simple - irregular verbs have/do/go When’s your birthday? Times past Language aims Saying years The Starter section teaches students how to read dates in English. This highlights dates before 2000, e.g. 1986 - nineteen eighty-six, and the use of and in dates after 2001, e.g. 2005 - two thousand andfive. POSSIBLE PROBLEMS How students say dates in their own language can often create problems with dates in English. Some languages divide the date differently, e.g. 1999 - *one thousand nine hundred and ninety-nine, so students need help with dividing the century and years correctly. The use of and in dates after 2001 also needs highlighting. People also differ in how they say 2010 and the years that follow: two thousand and ten or twenty ten. Both forms are given in Starter exercise 2, and students will need regular practice to be able to say a range of dates fluently. was/were The past of to be is introduced in all forms. Students’ first contac with the past forms is with was/were born, and then students move on to general uses of was/were. POSSIBLE PROBLEMS was/were Students usually make the switch from present of to be to past relatively smoothly, although they need a lot of practice in which subjects take was and which take were. Pronunciation can present a problem in that the vowels in was and were both have weak and strong forms: was /woz/ and /wdz/; and were /wo/ and /w3:/. The weak form /э/is in the positive and question forms, and strong forms /о/and /з:/ are in negatives and short answers: She was at school. She wasn’t at school. Was she at school? Yes, she was./No, she wasn’t. They were at school. They weren’t at school. Were they at school? /Ji: woz ot sku:l/ /Ji: woznt ot sku:l/ /woz Ji: ot sku:l/ /jes Ji: w d z / /пэи Ji: wDznt/ /6ei wo(r) ot sku:l/ /6ei W3:nt ot sku:l/ /w3: 6ei (j)ot sku:l/ Yes, they were./No, they weren’t, /jes 6ei W3:/ /пэи 6ei W3:nt/ The pronunciation of the negative forms is highlighted and practised in the Negatives and pronunciation section on p67. 80 Unit 9 • Times past
- 79. •cs/were born Theequivalent structure in students’ own ar.guage is often different, leading students to say *1 am ■pm or *1 born. The unit provides a whole section on this ^rructure to help students become familiar with the correct forms. *ist Simple irregular verbs The unit introduces the Past Scmple in the positive. The focus is on a limited number z f irregular verbs which are presented as a lexical set a story context. This allows students to get initial iliarization with some of the highest frequency mlar past forms before they move on to the use of in questions and negatives in Unit 10. kave/do/go This vocabulary section highlights common collocations with have, do, and go to form verbs for everyday activities, e.g. have lunch, do my homework, go shopping. Students match and practise the past forms :t the verbs as well as the infinitives. •veryday English This covers months of the year, ordinal cumbers in dates, and personalizes the language by talking ibout students’ birthdays. Workbook Saying years is consolidated in writing and fctening exercises. Was/were and was/were born are :: nsolidated through a range of exercises, including a fctening exercise, and a reading exercise about famous reople from the past. Past Simple irregular verbs are -orther practised. There is further practice of collocations •nth have, do, and go, and of months, ordinal numbers, and dates. ^lotocopiable activity There is a photocopiable activity to review the past of be, was/were born, and dates on ТВ pl46. Notes on the unit STARTER (SB p64) Briefly review numbers 1-20 round the class. Write numbers in the 30s, 40s, 50s, etc. on the board to review numbers up to 100. Pre-teach/check a thousand. [CD 2: Track 15] Write the two years from number 1 on the board. Play the recording for number 1 and ask a student to underline the correct answer. Play the rest of the recording and get students to underline the correct years. Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. Answers and tapescript 1 nineteen ninety-six 4 seventeen ninety-nine 2 nineteen sixteen 5 eighteen forty 3 two thousand and two 6 two thousand and five 2 Focus attention on the dates. Read the first two dates aloud and write them on the board. Highlight that we divide dates in English like this: 1 8 -4 0 1 9 -9 6 Focus attention on the last two dates. Read them aloud and highlight the use of and in dates after 2000, and the two forms for 2010. Write 2011, 2012, etc. on the board and elicit the two possible forms: two thousand and eleven/twenty eleven-, two thousand and twelve/twenty twelve. Ш 1 [CD 2: Track 16] Play the recording and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Elicit how we read each of the dates in exercise 1. Then get students to practise saying the dates in closed pairs. Monitor and check. 3 Elicit the answers to the questions. The second question includes was for recognition. If students query it, just tell them it’s the past of be, but do not go into a full presentation of was!were at this point. WHEN WAS SHE BORN? (SB P64) was/were born 1 Focus attention on the photos. Ask Who was he/she? about each of the people to check the names. Check comprehension of When were they born? Focus attention on the information about the people. Check comprehension of writer, south, and north. Tell students that they will hear a short description of each person and that they have to write the year they were born. ■ЕЖИ [CD 2: Track 17] Play the recording and get students to write the years. Check the answers with the class. Answers and tapescript Jane Austen, the English writer, was born in 177S in Hampshire in the south of England. Luciano Pavarotti, the Italian opera singer, was born in 1935 in Modena in the north of Italy. POSSIBLE PROBLEMS There are a lot of irregular verbs for students to learn in the course of their studies. The initial presentation is limited to a small number of verbs, and students access them by matching to their present forms. Students are referred to the irregular verb list on p i42 to help them do this and they should be encouraged to refer to the list as they work through the remaining units in the book. T 9.1 Unit 9 • Times past 81
- 80. 2 П Д[CD 2: Track 18] Focus attention on the sentences. They present the I and he/she/it forms with was. Play the recording and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Encourage students to reproduce the weak form /э/in was. 3 Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Get students to ask you the questions and give the answers. Drill the language chorally and elicit a few exchanges in open pairs. Students continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of am and was, and correct pronunciation. 4 [CD 2: Track 19] This exercise presents the you and they forms with were, the Wh- question form, and also reviews dates. Play the recording and get students just to listen. Play the recording again and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Encourage students to reproduce the weak form /э/in was and were, and the correct intonation and sentence stress: When were you born ?I was born in 1994. Get students to practise the questions and answers in open pairs and then in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct reading of dates, pronunciation, and intonation. GRAMMAR SPOT 5 Focus attention on the photo. Ask What’s her name? (.Magalie Dromard.) How old do you think she is? (Students guess her age.) Draw a family tree on the board and review/check the following vocabulary: brother, sister, father, mother, grandmother. Focus attention on the names of Magalie’s family. Read the names aloud so that students can recognize the pronunciation. Ask When was Magalie born? and elicit 1994. Ш 1 [CD 2: Track 20] Tell the students they are going to hear Magalie describing her family. Ask Whe was Tristan born? Play the recording as far as His name’s Tristan, and he was born in 1985. and elicit the answer. Play the rest of the recording and get students to complete their answers. Get students to check their answers in pairs. Play the recording again if necessary to allow students to ched complete their answers. Check the answers with the whole class. Answers Tristan 1985 Cecilia 1988 Matt 1996 Andre 1958 Ella 1961 Edith 1935 ■ m My name’s Magalie. It’s a French name, but I’m not French. I’m English. I was born in 1994.1have two brothers and a sister. My eldest brother’s a doctor. His name’sTristan, and he was born in 1985. My sister is also older than me. Her name’s Cecilia and she’s ateacher, and she was born in 1988. And my little brother is Matt, and he was born in 1996. He’s stilt a student. My father is French. His name’s Andre, he’sfrom Marseilles, and he was born in, Ithink... 1958. My mother is English, her name’s Ella, she’s from Manchester, and she was born in, er... 1961. My grandmother, who is my mother’: mother, is called Edith. Isn’t that a lovely name? She was born in Bristol in... I'm not sure, but I think about 1935. Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Highlight the uses of the present and past forms. Ask the first two questions and get students to answer. Elicit the complete questions and answers for the remaining questions (They’re her parents. When were they born? Andre was born in 1958. Ella was born in 1961.) Drill the questions and answers chorally. Elicit some questions and answers about the other people in Magalie’s family with students working in open pairs. Students continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of is/are, was/were born, dates, pronunciation, and intonation. 6 Pre-teach/check grandfather, aunt, and uncle, drilling the pronunciation. Demonstrate the activity by writing the names of some of your family on the board. Focus attention on the example conversation. Elicit similar questions about your family from the class. Briefly review he/she if students have problems with this and make sure they use is and was correctly. Students work in closed pairs and ask and answer about their respective families. Tell them to make brief notes of the dates when people in their partner’s family were Focus attention on the chart. Read out the present forms of to be and focus on the past examples with were. Elicit the I form in the past (was). Then get students to complete the rest of the chart. Answers Present Past 1 am was You are were He/She/It is was We are were They are were Read Grammar Reference 9.1 on p i27 together in class, and/or ask students to read it at home. Encourage them to ask you questions about it. 82 Unit 9 • Times past
- 81. born in preparationfor the next exercise. Monitor and check for correct use of is/are, was/were born, dates, pronunciation, and intonation. 7 This is a transfer activity to consolidate the third person singular form. Elicit information from several students about their partner’s family. a d d it io n a l m a t e r ia l book Unit 9 rcises 1-4 Saying years : RACTICE (SB p66) were they? Pre-teach/check the words in the box, and the countries Pakistan and Austria. Drill the pronunciation chorally and individually. Focus attention on the box. Say Who was a singer? and elicit Michael Jackson. Students write number 5 in the singer box. Get students to continue matching the people to the jobs. Answers 5 singer 2 musician 7 actor 1 writer 4 artist 3 princess 6 politician 8 racing driver 1 [CD 2: Track 21] Tell the students they are going to hear when each of the people in exercise 1 was born. Play the first sentence and focus on the example about Shakespeare. Play the rest of the recording and get students to write the other years. Get students to check their answers in pairs. Play the recording again if necessary to allow students to check/ complete their answers. Check the answers with the whole class. [ Answers and tapescript 1 Shakespeare was born in 1564 in Stratford-upon-Avon, England. 2 Mozart was born in Salzburg, Austria, in 1756. 3 Diana Spencer was born in Sandringham, England, in 1961. 4 Andy Warhol was born in 1928 in Pittsburgh, in the United States. 5 Michael Jackson was born in 1958 in Indiana, in the United States. 6 Benazir Bhutto was born in Karachi, Pakistan, in 1953. 7 Marilyn Monroe was born in 1926 in Los Angeles, in the United States. 8 Ayrton Senna was born in 1960 in Sao Paulo, Brazil. 3 1 К Д [CD 2: Track 22] This exercise extends Wh- question forms with was. Play the recording and get students just to listen. Play the recording and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Encourage students to reproduce the weak form /э/in was and the correct intonation and sentence stress. Get students to practise the questions and answers in open pairs and then in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct pronunciation and intonation. Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Ask the question about Andy Warhol and elicit the answer {He was an artist.). Elicit the other questions with Where and When and get students to practise in open pairs. Students continue asking and answering in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct question formation and intonation, and for correct reading of the dates. Negatives and pronunciation 4 This exercise introduces the negative forms wasn’t/ weren’t, and highlights the change in pronunciation of the vowel from positive to negative. It also highlights the need for contrastive stress when students correct information. PHOTOCOPIABLE ACTIVITY UNIT 9 Who were they? ТВ pl46 Materials: one copy of the worksheet cut up per pair of students Procedure: Explain that students are going to exchange information about famous people from the past. • Pre-teach/check scientist, dancer, and Jamaica. • Divide the class into pairs. Assign the role of A or В to each student and hand out the relevant half of the worksheet. • Elicit the questions students will need to ask: Who was number {1)? What was his/herjob? When was he/she born? Where was he/she born? • Demonstrate the activity by getting one pair of students to ask about picture 1 {Einstein). Remind students to ask How do you spell that? when they don’t know the spelling of the proper nouns. • Students then complete the task, working in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of was, reading of the dates, and use of the alphabet. • Get students to compare their sheets to check they have exchanged the information correctly. Unit 9 • Times past 83
- 82. ШH ' l[CD 2: Track 23] Focus attention on the examples. Remind students that the shading indicates the main stress of each sentence. Play the recording and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Encourage them to produce quite a wide voice range, the correct sentence stress, and strong vowel forms in wasn’t and weren’t. 5 Focus attention on the example and ask a student to read it aloud. Students continue correcting the information, working individually. Remind students they will need a plural verb form in numbers 3 and 5. [CD 2: Track 24] Play the recording and get students to check their answers. Play the recording again and get students to repeat. If students have problems, highlight the weak and strong verb forms in the Caution Box again and elicit where the main stress goes on each sentence. Then get students to repeat again. Get students to practise the sentences in pairs, Student A reading the first sentence and Student В the correction. Monitor and check for correct sentence stress and correct pronunciation of the past verb forms. Today and yesterday 6 Pre-teach/check yesterday and briefly review the days of the week round the class. Briefly elicit other items that can complete the sentences, e.g. Today/Yesterday ... I’m/I was in town/at the shops/at the cinema/in the country/in the park the weather is/was good/all right/bad my parents are/were (see above examples) Demonstrate the activity by saying where you and your parents are today and were yesterday. Elicit an example of the days of the week and the weather and then get students to continue in closed pairs. This exercise can be extended also to practise the negative. Monitor and check for correct present and past verbs forms, and for correct pronunciation. Check it 7 Focus attention on the example. Students complete the other sentences, working individually. Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. Get students to read the complete sentences out in order to get more pronunciation practice. Answers 2 When were your parents born? 3 No, my parents weren’t both born in 1951. My father was born in1951, and my mother was born in 1953. 4 I was on holiday in New York in 2008. 5 ‘Was he at home yesterday?’ ‘No, he wasn’t.' 6 ‘Were you at work yesterday?’ ‘Yes, we were.’ 7 ‘Were they at school yesterday morning?’ ‘No, they weren’t.’ Focus attention on the Caution Box. 1/2 Focus attention on the examples and read the full sentences aloud. Then read the positive and negative verb forms in isolation, emphasizing the change from the weak form /э/in was and were to the strong forms /d/in wasn’t and /з:/ in weren’t. Drill the sentences and individual verb forms chorally and individually. Make sure students understand that wasn’t and weren’t are contracted forms and what the corresponding full forms are (was not and were not). T 9.10 Answers and tapescript 1 A Ayrton Senna was an actor. В No, he wasn’t! He was a racing driver! 2 A Jane Austen was a princess. В No, she wasn’t! She was a writer! 3 A Marilyn Monroe and Michael Jackson were Italian. В No, they weren’t! They were American! 4 A Mozart was a scientist. В No, he wasn’t! He was a musician! 5 A Luciano Pavarotti and MichaelJackson were politicians. В No, they weren’t! They were singers! 6 A Benazir Bhutto was a writer. В No, she wasn’t! She was a politician! ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 9 Exercises 5 -8 was/were - was born Exercise 9 Reading - Andy Warhol and Princess Diana READING AND SPEAKING (SB P68) Past Simple - irregular verbs ABOUT THE TEXT A small set of irregular past forms is presented in the context of a simple, true story about a painting. Students access the verbs through their knowledge of the Present Simple and the main focus is a lexical rather than grammatical one. It is therefore not 84 Unit 9 • Times past
- 83. advisable to gointo a detailed presentation of the Past Simple at this stage. This is covered in Unit 10. The painting in the story is by the abstract artist lackson Pollock (1912-1956). Born in Wyoming and brought up in California, he studied at the Los Angeles Manual Arts High School. In 1930, he moved to New York, where he continued his art studies. In the 1940s, he developed his characteristic technique of dripping liquid paint directly onto a canvas on the floor, rather than using a canvas on an easel and conventional paints and brushes. In October 1945, he married another American painter, Lee Krasner. By the late 1940s, Pollock had become well known both inside and outside the art world, appearing in Life magazine m 1949. In the 1950s, he underwent changes in style in his work and he didn’t paint at all in the last year of his life. He had suffered from alcoholism for many vears and his career was cut short when he died in a car crash when driving under the influence of alcohol. People continued to be fascinated by Pollocks life and work. A biographical film was made in 2000 and the chance purchase of a Jackson Pollock in a charity shop m 1992 for $5 caused huge interest. This is the true story that appears in exercises 2 and 3 of this section. Check the meaning ofpresent and past and review the meaning of the verbs in their present form. Demonstrate the activity by eliciting the past of be (was). Refer students to the Irregular verbs list on p i42. Get students to match the verbs forms, working in pairs. [CD 2: Track 25] Play the recording through ?nce and get students to check their answers. Answers and tapescript ^resent Past go went come came ~ave had oe was -axe made see saw ruy bought say said 5nd found Г ' ? 'ay the recording again and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Make sure students aren’t ; : nfused by the silent g in bought - /bo:t/. Say ± e present forms and get students to say the past j equivalent round the class. Refer students to Grammar Reference 9.2 on p i27. T 9.11 2 Focus attention on the photo and ask When was Jackson Pollock born? (1912). Use the dates to teach When did he die? (1956). Ask What do you know about Jackson Pollock? Elicit any information students know, in LI if appropriate. Pre-teach/check the following vocabulary, using the pictures where appropriate: painting, charity shop, an expert,fingerprint, rich, film company, fo r sale, art gallery. Focus on the example to demonstrate the activity. Students continue matching the pictures and sentences, working in pairs. Check the answers with the whole class. Answers 2 f 3d 4 c 5 e 6 a 3 Tell students they are going to read a newspaper article of the story about the painting. Focus attention on the examples to demonstrate the activity. Tell students to complete the rest of the story, working individually. Encourage them not to worry if they come across new words and to try to understand them from the context. Put students in pairs. Ask them to take it in turns to read sections of the article aloud and so compare their answers. Answers and tapescript ‘Who isJackson Pollock?’ Teri Horton, a 60-year-old lady from Los Angeles, (1) went shopping in San Bernardino, a town in California, USA. She (2) was in a charity shop when she (3) saw a colourful, modern painting. She (4) bought it for $5. An art teacher saw the painting and (5) said it was by the American artist, Jackson Pollock. ‘Who isJackson Pollock?’ said Teri. She (6) had no idea that he was a very famous modern painter. Many art experts (7) came to her house to see the painting. Some said that it wasn’t a ‘Pollock’, but one expert, Peter Paul Biro, (8) found Pollock’s fingerprint on the back. Biro said, ‘This is a real Pollock painting.’ A rich businessman was happy to pay $9 million for it, but Teri said, ‘No! I want $50 million.’ In 2007, a Canadian TV company (9) made a film about Teri and the painting. It is now for sale in an art gallery in Toronto. Price: $50 million! ■ Ы > 1 [CD 2: Track 26] Play the recording and get students to check their answers. 4 Get students to cover the text in exercise 3. Focus attention back on the pictures. You could re-tell the story as a class activity first and then get students to repeat in pairs. Alternatively, set up the pairwork first and then re-tell as a class in a checking phase. Either Unit 9 • Times past 85
- 84. way, when youmonitor, don’t expect students to reproduce the story with complete accuracy. Do not over-correct in the feedback stage - just pick up on common errors in the irregular past forms. SUGGESTION If appropriate, you can ask students to research someone famous from the past and find some basic biographical details, e.g. when born, where/ what studied, became famous for ..., married, died. Students then exchange information in pairs/small groups, or give simple presentations to the class. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 9 Exercises 10 and 11 Past Simple - Irregular verbs Pre-teach/check a mess, go to the gym, and early. Focus attention on the example and then get students to complete the sentences, working individually. H I H [CD 2: Track 27] Play the recording and get students to check their answers. If students need more help with pronunciation, get them to read the sentence aloud, drilling any difficult lines with the whole class. Answers and tapescript 1 Yesterday I met my mother at one o’clock and we had lunch in a restaurant. 2 I hate doing housework, but last Sunday I did a lot because my house was a mess. 3 Yesterday was a lovely day so I went for a walk in the park. 4 Usually I walk, but yesterday I went to work by bus. 5 On Saturday night I went to agreat party. I had a really goodtime. 6 I did a lot of exercise yesterday. I went to the gym. 7 The party wasn’t very good so we went home early. VOCABULARY (SB P70) have, do, go This section highlights an important feature of English - the range of meanings that can be generated from high-frequency verbs like have, do, and go by creating collocations with nouns, noun phrases, or adverbs. Students have already met some of the collocations as lexical items in earlier units, e.g. have a shower, have lunch, go shopping, so this section provides revision and extension. 1 Focus attention on the pictures and the examples with have, do, and go. Get students to read the sentences aloud. 2 Focus attention on the examples with each verb. Elicit another example for each one. Students complete the task, working in pairs. Check the answers, making sure students can pronounce the collocations correctly. Check students understand the difference between do my homework and do the housework. Answers have: a shower / a good time / breakfast do: the housework / some exercise go: for awalk / on holiday / home / to work 3 Give students time to write the past forms. Then check the answers. Answers Present Past have had do did go went 86 Unit 9 • Times past Talking about you 5 This gives students the opportunity to personalize some of the collocations. With weaker students, go through the sentences and elicit what type of information students need to provide in the second gap. Elicit a possible answer for number 1. Students then complete the task, working individually. Be prepared to feed in a range of vocabulary for numbers 2 and 3. Elicit a range of possible answers when checking the task. Answers Possible answers given in brackets. 1 Yesterday I had a shower at (seven) o’clock. 2 This morning I had breakfast at (eight) o’clock. I had coffee and (croissants). 3 Last Saturday Iwent shoppingand I bought (apair oftrainers and aCD). 4 Last weekend I did my homework at (five) o’clock on (Sunday). 5 Last year I went on holiday to (Morocco). 6 Elicit one or two examples of what students did. Encourage them to describe the activities in a connected way rather than just read out their completed sentences. Put students in pairs to exchange information. Monitor and check for correct use of past tenses and the collocations. Highlight common errors, but don’t correct every mistake students make. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Teacher’s Resource Disc Communicative activity Unit 9 Yesterday Workbook Unit 9 Exercise 12 Vocabulary - have/do/go
- 85. EVERYDAY ENGLISH (SBP7l) •Vhen’s your birthday? I Focus attention on the months. Elicit the second month of the year (February) and get students to continue writing the months in order in the list. [CD 2: Track 28] Play the recording and get students to check their answers. Answers and tapescript January, February, March, April, May,June, July, August, September, October, November, December Focus attention on the stress shading on each word. Play the recording again and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Get students to say the months in order round the class. Check for accurate pronunciation and drill the months again if necessary. 1 Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles. Check comprehension of So is my birthday! Drill the language chorally and then get students to stand up and practise the language in a mingle activity. Get them to note down the months of other students’ birthdays as they ask. Elicit the answers to the follow-up questions and establish which is the most common month for birthdays in your class. 3 This exercise presents ordinal numbers. Check that students understand the difference between cardinal numbers and ordinal numbers with the following examples: There are seven days in a week and there are twelve months in a year. Thefirst day is Monday and the seventh day is Sunday. Thefirst month is January and the twelfth month is December. Get students to tell you the ordinal numbers (first, seventh, and twelfth). [CD 2: Track 29] Focus attention on the numbers and on how we form the abbreviations with the numeral and the last two letters of the ordinal number. Play the recording and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Write the abbreviated numbers on the board in random order and elicit the ordinal from individual students. 4 Elicit the first ordinal as an example (sixteenth). Get students to say the other ordinal numbers, working in pairs. Monitor and check, noting down any common errors. [CD 2: Track 30] Play the recording and let students check their answers. If necessary, drill any ordinals students had problems with. T 9.16 T 9.15 T 9.14 5 1 CAгД [CD 2: Track 31] This exercise presents how we read dates in English. Tell students they are going to hear eight dates and that they should write down the correct ordinal. Play the first date and elicit the answer (thefirst o fJanuary). Play the rest of the dates and get students to complete the task. Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. Answers and tapescript the first ofJanuary the third of March the seventh of April the twentieth of May the second ofJune the twelfth of August the fifteenth of November the thirty-first of December Focus attention on the Caution Box and highlight the use of the and the ordinal in spoken dates and the use of the numerals, but not the in writing. If appropriate, point out that students may also see dates written as 3rd January, 10th March, etc. Ask students to focus on the date in the American format. Ask 4: day or month? (month - April) and 10: day or month? (day). Remind students that in American English you put the month first. Elicit the dates in exercise 5 orally and then get students to continue practising in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of the, correct ordinals, and pronunciation of the months. 6 Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Get students to ask you the questions, and give answers. Drill the language chorally and then get students to practise in open pairs. Students continue in groups. Monitor and check for correct falling intonation in the questions and for the correct use of prepositions - on + date and at + time. Tell the class the date and time of your birth, following the example in the last speech bubble. Elicit more examples from the class. 7 This unit ends of with the song Happy Birthday! The tune should be familiar to students as it is often used in other languages with adapted wording and often appears in English-speaking films and TV programmes. In LI if possible, explain that we usually sing Happy Birthday! when the birthday cake is served. Children and some adults have candles on their cake (with children, one for each year), which they blow out when the singers finish the song. Some people also make a wish. Unit 9 • Times past 87
- 86. [CD 2: Track32] Ask some simple questions about the photograph: Why is there a party? {It’s Sarah’s birthday). How old is she? (About seven). Who is at the party? (Sarah’sfriends). What is on the table infront of Sarah? (her birthday cake). Play the recording through once and let students just listen. Play the recording again and get students to join in the song. T 9.18 Happy Birthday to you! Happy Birthday to you! Happy Birthday, dear Sarah! Happy Birthday to you! Hip hip! Hooray! SUGGESTIONS You can give students regular practice in dates by asking What’s todays date? at the beginning of every class. Encourage students to write the dates in full at the top of any written work, i.e. January 3rd 2013, rather than 3/1/13. When one of the students has a birthday, get students to sing the song to him/her and ask them about their day. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 9 Exercises 13-15 Months and dates Don’t forgetl Workbook Unit 9 Exercises 16-20 Revision Word list Ask the students to turn to p i35-6 and go through the words with them. Ask them to learn the words for homework, and test them on a few in the following lesson. Teacher’s Resource Disc Unit 9 Test Unit 9 Skills test Video/DVD Unit 9 Steve Jobs: a life on iTools and iTutor T 9.18 88 Unit 9 • Times past
- 87. Past Simple -regular and irregular • Questions and negatives Sport and leisure • Going sightseeing We had a great time! traduction to the unit title of this unit is ‘We had a at time!’ and the overall theme is ure and holidays. The unit follows from Unit 9 with the introduction all forms of the Past Simple with th regular and irregular verbs. Skills ctice is provided with speaking, ening, and writing tasks. lexical set of sport and leisure vities is reviewed and extended, leisure and holiday theme is carried through in the Everyday tnglish section with a focus on going Kghtseeing. Language aims Grammar - Past Simple regular and gular The set of irregular past s from Unit 9 is extended, and regular forms are also introduced, e unit covers positive, negative, and cuestion forms. Students’ knowledge of me Present Simple usually helps them :th the Past Simple, in that students already familiar with the uses of the iliary do, and so will understand bow did functions. The past auxiliary i easier in that it is the same in all persons. It is important for students to jee the contrast in the use of Present Simple and Past Simple, and the unit provides practice in using the two lenses in parallel. POSSIBLE PROBLEMS • Although knowledge of the Present Simple helps students to access the Past Simple, students often make mistakes in the new tense. Common errors are: * Did they watched TV? * They no played tennis. * When you lived in the US? • Irregular verbs need constant use and reviewing. Students often try to apply the regular -ed ending to irregular verbs, e.g. *1goed to the cinema. Encourage students to refer to the Irregular verbs list on p i42 and get students to review the verbs regularly for homework. • There are different ways of pronouncing the -ed regular ending and students need help with this. There is a pronunciation focus on p72 highlighting the /t/, /d/, and /id/ -ed endings, e.g. worked /w3:kt/ played /pleid/ started /sta:tid/ Students often try to divide out the -ed ending in the pronunciation inappropriately, e.g. watched* /wotjed/ rather than /wDtJt/ Monitor and check for this mistake, and also help students to perceive the different -ed endings, but do not insist that they produce the endings each time. Vocabulary The lexical set of sport and leisure activities is reviewed and extended. Students focus on sports/activities collocations with play and go + -ing, e.g. play tennis, go swimming, etc. Everyday English The situational syllabus continues with a section focusing on going sightseeing. The section includes key language for getting information in a Tourist Office and for talking about sightseeing in your home town. Workbook Regular and irregular Past Simple verbs in the positive are reviewed and consolidated in a range of exercises. There is also further practice on the lexical set of sport and leisure. A short reading text gives further consolidation of Past Simple forms, and there is further practice of the functional language of going sightseeing. Photocopiable activity There is a photocopiable activity to review Past Simple Wh- and Yes/No questions on ТВ pl47. Unit 10 • We had a great time! 89
- 88. Notes on theunit Introduce the theme of the unit and review the expression have a good/great time by writing the sentence starter on the board and eliciting possible endings, e.g. I had a great time (last weekend/at my party/at the beach). STARTER (SB p72) 1 This section reviews days, present and past forms, and key time expressions. Focus attention on the questions and elicit the answers. Make sure students use is/was and pronounce the days correctly. 2 Focus attention on the sentences. Go through and ask Past or present?about each one, and also elicit which verb is used in each sentence. Demonstrate the activity by eliciting the time expression for the first line (now). Elicit from students the fact that the other time expressions are not possible and establish that this is because they refer to the past. Students then match the remaining lines and time expressions. Check the answers. 3 Elicit the past of have and then get students to write the remaining Past Simple forms. If necessary, refer them back to the Irregular verbs list on p i42. Check the answers, drilling the pronunciation as necessary. YESTERDAY WAS SUNDAY (SB P72) Past Simple - regular and irregular 1 This section reviews and extends the irregular verbs students met in Unit 9 and also presents regular -ed forms. Focus attention on the photo and ask What’s her name? (Angie.) Where is she? (In the kitchen at home.) Tell students they are going to hear Angie talking about what she did yesterday. Focus attention on the list of verbs and ask Past or present? Check comprehension of each verb and get students to tell you the infinitive of the irregular past forms. (If students query the regular -ed endings, tell them this is the ending for most verbs in the Past Simple, but do not go into a long explanation at this stage.) [CD 2: Track 33] Play the first line of the recording as far as eleven thirty and focus attention on the example. Play the recording through to the end and get students to tick the relevant verbs. Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. Finally, point to the list of actions Angie did yesterday and ask What day was it? (Sunday). Answers got up late had a big breakfast went shopping stayed at home cleaned her flat did some work watched TV went to bed early T10.1 Angie’s weekend Yesterday was Sunday, so I got up late, about 11.30.1had a big breakfast, orange juice, toast, eggs, and coffee. Then I went shopping, just to the supermarket, and I bought some tea, some milk, and the Sunday papers. Then Ijust stayed at home for the rest of the day. In the morning I cleaned my flat and in the afternoon I did some work on my computer for a bit, then in the evening I watched a film on TV. I went to bed early, about 11.00.1was tired. I had a late night on Saturday. GRAMMAR SPOT 1 Focus attention on the list of verbs and on the example cooked. Ask students to write the other past forms. Check the answers with the whole class. Elicit the last two letters in each of the verb forms: -ed. Answers It/ cook cooked watch watched Id/ play played listen listened /id/ start started want wanted Explain that these are regular verbs and so are different from the ones students met in Unit 9. Establish that adding -ed is the rule for the formation of the Past Simple in the majority of verbs. [CD 2: Track 34] Pronounce the sounds /t/, /d/, and /id/. Then play the recording. Get students to repeat chorally and individually. Make sure students don’t divide out the -ed ending in past forms with just one syllable, e.g. */koked/. Point out that the ending is pronounced /id/ when the final sound of the base verb is /t/. Encourage students to reproduce the endings accurately, but do not overdo this if students find it difficult. It is enough at this stage for them to perceive the difference. Answers We’re at school now. I went to the US in 2002. I did my homework yesterday. Answers get-got buy - bought have - had do-did go- went see - saw T10.1 T 10.2 90 Unit 10 • We had a great time!
- 89. /t/ cooked watched /d/ played listened /id/started wanted 2 Read the Past Simple forms aloud. Check students understand there is no difference in the verb forms for different persons in the Past Simple. Contrast this with the third person -s in the Present Simple. Read Grammar Reference 10.1 on p i27 together in class, and/or ask students to read it at home. Encourage them to ask you questions about it. Focus on the speech bubble and highlight the use of Then to link a series of actions. Elicit from the class ••chat Angie did yesterday. Students then take it in turns to say what Angie did, working in closed pairs. Monitor and check for pronunciation of the -ed regular endings but do not overcorrect if students have problems during this initial production stage. Refer students back to the list in exercise 1. Get students to underline the things that they did last Sunday. Demonstrate the activity by telling the class things that you did on that day. If appropriate, write the sentences on the board and underline the verbs, e.g. I had a big breakfast. Elicit a few more short examples from the class and then get students to continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of regular and irregular past forms. DITIONAL MATERIAL_______________________________________________ book Unit 10 rcises 1-4 Past Simple - Regular and irregular verbs stions and negatives This section presents the Past Simple question and negative forms. Focus attention on the photo. Ask What’s her name? (Angie.) and What’s his name? (Rick.) Where are they? (At work.) Tell students they are going to hear Angie and Rick talking about the weekend. Pre-teach/check get up early, cook a meal, and roast beef. [CD 2: Track 35] Play the first two lines of the recording and focus attention on the example. Play the recording to the end and get students to complete the conversation. Get students to check their answers in pairs. Play the recording again if necessary. Check the answers with the whole class. Answers and tapescript A =Angie, R =Rick A Hi, Rick. Did you have a good weekend? R Yes, I did, thanks. A What did you do yesterday? R Well, I got up early and I played tennis with some friends. A You got up early on Sunday! / R Well, yes, it was such a lovelyday. A Where did you play tennis? R In the park. We had lunch in the cafe there. A Oh, great! Did you go oijt in the evening? R No, I didn’t. I cooked a meal for my sister. A Mmm! What did you have? R Roast beef. It was delicipus! What about you, Angie? Didyou have a good weekend? 2 a t lH f [CD 2: Track 36] Give students time to read through the questions. Play the recording and get them to repeat chorallyAnd individually. Encourage falling intonation on the Wh- questions. Get students to listen and repeat again if necessary. Focus on the use of bold to highlight the form of Wh- and yes/no questions in the Past Simple. Students practise the conversation in pairs. Monitor and check for pronunciation and the correct intonation ~4nAhe questions. If students have problems, play the recording again and drill the questions, then get students to repeat the task. 3 Explain that students are now going to hear Rick asking Angie about her weekend. Ask What did Angie do on Sunday? and elicit any examples students can remember from exercise 1 on p72. Pre-teach/check go to a party, oldfriends (= friends for a long time), and too tired. Focus attention on the example and Rick’s first question. [CD 2: Track 37] Play the recording and get students to complete the rest of Rick’s questions, using the cues to help them. Play the recording again and let students check or complete their answers. Elicit what Angie did at the weekend. Answers 2 Who did you see at the party? 3 Did you go out on Sunday? 4 Did you do anything on Sunday evening? Angie went shopping on Saturday morning. Then she went to a party on Saturday evening. She met one or two old friends. She stayed at home on Sunday. She watched afilm on TV on Sunday evening. T10.3 T 10.5 Unit 10 • We had a great time! 91
- 90. Т 10.5 А =Angie,R =Rick R What about you, Angie? Did you have a good weekend? A Oh yes, I did, very good. R What did you do on Saturday? A Welt, on Saturday morning I went shopping. Then on Saturday evening I went to a party. It was great! R Who did you see at the party? A Oh, one or two old friends. R Did you go out on Sunday? A Oh no, I didn’t. I didn’t go out because I was too tired. I stayed at home most of the day. R Did you do anything on Sunday evening? A No, I didn’t do much. Ijust watched afilm on TV. I didn’t go to bed late. About 11.00. 4 Ill'll [CD 2: Track 38] This exercise highlights the negative form. Give students time to read through the sentences. Play the recording and get them to repeat chorally and individually. Encourage accurate pronunciation of didn’t. Ask What didn’t Angie do? Elicit answers using the she form. Answers She didn’t goout because she was too tired. She didn’t do much on Sunday. She didn’t go to bed late. 5 Focus attention on the examples. Highlight the pronunciation of didn’t. Give students time to say the other things Angie and Rick didn’t do. Monitor and check for correct formation of the negatives. A common error is the repetition of the positive past form after the auxiliary didn’t - * He didn’t watched TV. If students have this problem, highlight the errors in a general feedback session, then refer students to the Grammar Spot. GRAMMAR SPOT 6 Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Get students to ask you the question and give two or three pieces of information in your answer, e.g. I didn’t go out. I stayed at home. I cooked dinner and then I watched TV. Drill the questions and answers chorally and individually. Elicit other questions and answers in open pairs. Students continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for accurate formation and pronunciation of Past Simple questions and negatives. If you have time, get students to report back about their partner to the rest of the class or to another student. PHOTOCOPIABLE ACTIVITY UNIT 10 What did she do yesterday? ТВ pl47 Materials: one copy of the worksheet cut up per pair of students Procedure: Explain that students are going to play a memory game based on pictures of two flats, which show what the occupants did yesterday. • Pre-teach/check write a letter and irregular past wrote, read a book/newspaper and irregular past read /red/, have a bath, have a shower, and play the guitar /gi'ta:/. • Divide the class into pairs. Assign the role of A or В to each student and hand out the relevant half of the worksheet. • Demonstrate the activity with two confident students. Get Student A to look carefully at the picture of Jane’s flat for 30 seconds and then put it out of sight. Student В then uses the question cues to ask about what Jane did yesterday. Pre-teach I can’t remember. • Get students to complete the task in closed pairs for Student As picture. Students then change roles with Student В looking at Paul’s flat for 30 seconds and Student A using the question cues to ask about what Paul did yesterday. • Monitor and check for correct question formation and use of regular and irregular past forms. (With a weaker class, you could put all the A and В students together in separate groups to give them time to write out the cues as full questions. Then divide the class into A and В pairs and continue as above.) ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 10 Exercises 5 -8 Past Simple - Questions and negatives PRACTICE (SB p74) Grammar 1 This exercise consolidates positive and negative Past Simple forms. Focus attention on the example. Give students time to complete the sentences, working individually. 1/2 Working individually, students complete the questions with did and the negatives with didn’t. Make sure students understand that didn’t is the contracted form of did not. Remind students that did is used for all persons in Past Simple questions. Refer students to Grammar Reference 10.2 on p i27. 92 Unit 10 • We had a great time!
- 91. Let students checktheir answers in pairs before checking with the class. Answers 1 had 5 did... buy, bought 3 did 6 did... do, didn’t go, went i didn’t clean you have a good weekend? Read out the list of activities in the questionnaire and 3et students to point to the relevant pictures. Answers The pictures show: go to the cinema, play football, have a meal г arestaurant, do a lot of housework, do a lot of homework, goshopping. Tell students they are going to use the questionnaire to ask and answer questions about what they did last weekend. Explain that there are three columns in the questionnaire - one for you, one for the teacher, and one for your partner. Get students to tick the activities they did last weekend in the You column. Exercises 4 and 5 consolidate Yes/No questions in the Past Simple. Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Drill the question chorally and individually and then give your answer. Get students to ask you the rest of the questions and record the answers in the Teacher column. Demonstrate the activity in open pairs and then get students to continue in closed pairs, recording their partners answers in the Partner column. Monitor and check for correct Past Simple question formation and short answers. Focus attention on the example in the speech bubble. Highlight the contrastive stress: Maria went to the cinema, but ! didn’t. I went shopping. Elicit two or three other examples from individual students. Then get students to tell the class about what they and their partner did last weekend. £<ing conversation This section highlights the importance of follow-up questions in keeping a conversation going and also introduces useful expressions for responding and showing interest, e.g. Really?, Oh, good!, etc. Read the rubric and example as a class. Make sure students understand that В s response shows a range of possible follow-up questions. Focus attention on the example and ask two students :o read it aloud. Put students in pairs to complete the responses in numbers 2-5, using the cues. [CD 2: Track 39] Play the recording and let students check their answers. Answers and tapescript 1 A I went shopping yesterday. В Really? What did you buy? 2 A We went to that new Italian restaurant last night. В Mmm! What did you have? 3 A We saw a lot of our friends in the coffee bar. В Oh! Who did you see? 4 A I played tennis at the weekend. В Oh, really? Where did you play? 5 A The party on Saturday was great! В Oh, good! What time did you leave? Play the recording again and get students to repeat the exchanges. Encourage them to imitate the intonation in the responses in order to show interest. If students sound a little ‘flat’, give an exaggerated model of the voice range and get students to repeat again. 7 This task gives students freer practice by extending the conversations in exercise 6 with their own ideas. Ask two confident students to read out the model conversation. Remind them of the need to sound interested. Check what one refers back to in lines 6 and 7 (coat). Put students in pairs and let them choose the conversation from exercise 6 that they want to continue. Alternatively, assign a conversation to different pairs if you want all of the conversations to be covered. With weaker students, elicit another model from the whole class and write it on the board, e.g. A The party on Saturday was great! В Oh, good! What time did you leave? A About one o’clock in the morning. В Who was there? A Marta, Yuko, and Adam. And some other people from school. В Did you dance? A Yes, of course! Give students time to write their conversations. Monitor and help with vocabulary as necessary. [CD 2: Track 40] Play the recording and get students to compare their conversations. Answers and tapescript 1 A I went shopping yesterday. В Really? Where did you go? A Oxford Street. В Oh! What did you buy? A Well, I wanted a new coat and I went into Selfridges. В Did you find one? A Yes, I did. Ifound a beautiful black one. It was only £50! T 10.7 T 10.8 Unit 10 • We had a great time! 93
- 92. 2 A Tomand I went to that new Italian restaurant last night. В Mmm! What did you have? A Well, I had pasta and Tom had pizza. В Did you enjoy it? A Very much. And it wasn’t expensive. 3 A We saw a lot of our friends in the coffee bar. В Oh! Who did you see? A Angie and Rick and some other friends from work. В I don’t think I know them. A They’re very nice. 4 A I played tennis at the weekend. В Oh, really? Where did you play? A In the park. It was lovely. It was so sunny. В What a great thing to do on a Sunday morning! 5 A The party on Saturday was great! В Oh, good! What time did you leave? A Three in the morning. The music was fantastic! В Did you dance? A Of course! All night! Let students roleplay the conversations they wrote for the rest of the class. Monitor and check for good intonation and that the students sound interested. If you are short of time, let some of the students do their roleplay in a subsequent lesson. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 10 Exercise 9 Making conversation - Was it a good match? Time expressions 8 This task reviews and extends time expressions often used with the Past Simple. It includes the prepositions at, in, and on, and last + time period. Focus attention on the phrase I went there ... and the example with on. Tell students that they can use the words in the box more than once. Students complete the diagram, working in pairs. Check the answers with the class. Give one or two true examples that use the time expressions, e.g. I saw my parents last week. I lived in Paris in 2007. Elicit more true examples from the class. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Teacher’s Resource Disc Communicative activity Unit 10 A love story Workbook Unit 10 Exercises 10 Time expressions - in/at/on Check it 9 Focus attention on the first pair of sentences and elic: the correct sentence as an example. Students continui working individually to complete the task. Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. Answers 1 She bought an expensive car. 2 I played tennis on Sunday. 3 Did they go shopping yesterday? 4 What did you do last weekend? 5 ‘Did you like the film?’ ‘Yes, I did.’ 6 I sawJohn last night. SUGGESTION Take the opportunity to review the Past Simple by getting students to ask and answer questions about the weekend in the first lesson that you have each week. This provides a useful review and also highlights the value of what students are learning in a realistic situation. Also encourage students to use the response expressions Really?, etc. when they are making conversation in later lessons, e.g. when talking about the weekend/a trip/a holiday/a party, etc. VOCABULARY AND SPEAKING (SB P76) Sport and leisure 1 Focus attention on the photographs and the example. Students continue matching the photos and activities. Check the answers with the whole class, drilling the pronunciation as necessary. Answers [2] tennis QT] cards Q] football Q3] walking [4] skiing 1 ! swimming 0 golf 0 dancing [8] sailing US cycling |T| windsurfing [9] fishing Ш rugby Щ horse-riding [5] ice-skating Answers on/last Monday at/last night at 8 o’clock last week in 2007 last year on/last Sunday morning 94 Unit 10 • We had a great time!
- 93. This exercise focuseson collocations with play and jo + -ing. Focus attention on the examples and then get students to complete the categorizing, working in pairs. Check the answers with the whole class. As a general rule, you could tell students that sports with a ball, and games like cards, chess, etc. take play, and physical activities ending in -ing take go. Answers play go +-ing tennis skiing •'ootball sailing golf windsurfing -ugby ice-skating cards walking swimming dancing cycling fishing horse-riding I This exercise practises Yes/No and Wh- questions with the collocations from exercise 2. Focus attention on the speech bubbles. Highlight the use of the tenses - Present Simple to talk about general habits in the present and Past Simple to ask When? in the past. Drill the language chorally and individually. Elicit two or three more examples from students working in open pairs. Students continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of tenses, correct use ofplay and go, and pronunciation. I This exercise practises the third person forms. Focus attention on the examples. Elicit more examples from students about their partner. Check for accurate use of the third person forms in the Present Simple. Highlight common errors and get students to correct them. ODITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 10 Exercises 11 and 12 Sports and leisure activities USTENING AND SPEAKING (SBP77) ack and Millie’s holiday This section gives further practice of the Present Simple and Past Simple in the context of holidays. It also reviews the sport and leisure activities from the Vocabulary and speaking section. Revise the months of the year by getting students to say them round the class. Check for accurate pronunciation. Then get students to say the months that correspond to each season in their country, e.g. In England, spring is March, April, and May. Focus attention on the speech bubble and give an example about yourself. Elicit more examples from the class, and then get students to continue in pairs. Focus attention on the photos. Ask Who are they? (Jack and Millie.) What places are in the photos, do you think? (possible answers: Switzerland or Germany; Italy or France). Focus attention on the lists of information for usually and last year. Check comprehension of villa and diners (small restaurants that sell simple, good-value food). Check students recognize that the first list is in the Present Simple and the second is in the Past Simple. ЧИАЯ [CD 2: Track 41] Focus attention on the example. Explain that students need to listen and underline the correct information about Jack and Millie’s holidays. Make sure they understand that they will need to look at both columns of answers as they listen. Play the recording through once and get students to complete the task. Get students to check their answers in pairs. Play the recording through again and get students to check/ complete their answers. Check the answers with the whole class. But last year they... went in winter went to Colorado stayed in a hotel went out to restaurants went skiing/ice-skating went out every night had a good time Answers They usually... go in summer goto Italy stay in a villa eat at home go swimming play cards have a good time J=jack, M =Millie J Well, we usually go on holiday in summer... M Yes, usually we goto Italy for our holidays, don’t we? j But last year we did something different. We had a holiday in winter, and we went to Colorado, in America. M Because we wanted to learn to ski, you see, and we wanted a change. In Italy we always stay in a villa... J ... but in Aspen, Colorado, we stayed in a very nice hotel, and because we were in a hotel, we had all our meals in restaurants. M And that’s very special for us. In Italy we cook at home in the villa. But in Colorado we went to a different restaurant every night! J In Italy, because it’s summer and it’s hot, we go swimming in the swimming pool, and sit in the sun, and I play tennis sometimes... Unit 10 • We had a great time! 95
- 94. M Jack loveshis tennis, don’t you, darling? Ч 1 Я М [C D 2: T ra ck 42] Give students time to J I do, but of course last year in Colorado we learned to ski, so complete the sentences. Then play the recording and we went skiing every day. And Millie, you went ice-skating, get students to check their answers, didn’t you? M We both went ice-skating! Answers and tapescript J That’s right! It was great fun! In Italy in the evening, we usually 1 Last yearJack and Millie didn’t go on holiday in summer. They play cards or read... went in winter. M ... but last year in Colorado we went out everynight, and we 2 They didn’t go to Italy.They went to Colorado, met lots of lovely people, didn’t we? 3 They stayed in a hotel. They didn’t stay in a villa. J We did. We had a really good time. 4 They didn’t eat at home. They ate in restaurants. M And we have a good time in Italy, too,don’twe? 5 They went skiing. They didn’t go swimming. J Mmm, we’re very lucky. 4 This exercise practises questions in the Present Simple and Past Simple. Focus attention on the speech bubbles, Drill the questions and answers, encouraging students to reproduce the correct sentence stress: When do they usually go on holiday? When did they go last year? Elicit the questions and answers for the second prompt in open pairs. (Where do they usually go on holiday? (To Italy). Where did they go last year? (They went to Colorado.) Remind students that the questions for the last prompt are a different type (Yes/No questions). Get students to ask and answer in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct question formation in both tenses, for correct sentence stress, and for correct use of prepositions to and in. Check the answers by getting students to ask and answer in open pairs across the class. Feed back on any common errors if necessary. 5 This exercise consolidates positive and negative Past Simple forms. Establish that this exercise is about Jack and Millies holiday last year and so students will need to use the Past Simple tense. Focus attention on the example and then point out that students sometimes need a positive verb in the first gap. With a weaker group, you might like to elicit the verbs students will need to use before they start: 2 - go, 3 - stay, 4 - eat, 5 - go. SPEAKING AND WRITING (SBP78) My last holiday This section allows students to personalize the language of holidays and the Past Simple with guided speaking practice that leads into a writing task. 1 Focus attention on the photos and pre-teach/check the activities shown (sitting on the beach, going sightseeing, walking in the mountains, going camping). Check comprehension and pronunciation of the activities in the list. The spelling of mountains Гmauntinz/ and sightseeing I'seatsv.ipl may create problems for students so be prepared to drill these chorally and individually. Give an example of your own favourite type of holiday and say what you like and don’t like doing. Write the activities on the board and put a tick (/ ) next to what you like and a cross (/) next to what you don’t. Give students time to complete the list in the same way. Demonstrate the comparing activity by asking a student to read out his/her choices as full sentences using I like and I don’t like. Respond to the student with expressions like Me too. Oh, yes? Really? Get another pairs of students to compare in open pairs. Students then take it in turns to read out their choices in closed pairs. Remind students to show they are listening by using the above response expressions. 2 This stage uses a speaking activity to activate students’ ideas for the writing task in exercise 4. Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles and then on the question cues in the list. Elicit the complete questions and a range of possible answers. Write any new vocabulary on the board and review/check any irregular Past Simple forms students may need. Also focus on the use of ago in the Grammar Spot (see notes on next page). Questions and possible answers: Where did you go? I went to Spain!Cuba!the south of France/Riga, in Latvia. Answers • Where do they usually goon holiday? To Italy. Where did they go last year? They went to Colorado. • Where do they usually stay? In a villa. Where did they stay last year? They stayed in a hotel. • Where do they usually eat? At home. Where did they eat last year? They went out to restaurants. • What do they usually do? They usually go swimming and play tennis. What did they do last year? They went skiing and ice-skating. • Do they usually have a good time? Yes, they do. Did they have a good time last year? Yes, they did. 96 Unit 10 • We had a great time!
- 95. When did yougo? Last month/last year/eighteen months ago/two years ago. Where did you stay? In a villa/withfriends/in a hotel/on a campsite. What did you do every day? We went swimming/sightseeing/walking in the mountains/sat on the beach and relaxed. Did you have good weather? Yes, we did. It was warm and sunny/lovely/very hot. / No, we didn’t. It rained a lot./It was cold and wet./It was horrible. What did you do in the evening? We saw ourfriends./W e ate in restaurants./We went to a club./We stayed in the hotel and relaxed. What did you eat? We ate traditional localfood/steaks and hamburgers/ chicken and rice/seafood and salads. Did you meet nice people? Yes, we did. They were veryfriendly. / No, we didn’t. They weren’t veryfriendly. Get students to ask you the questions. Students then ask and answer in closed pairs. Remind students to make a few notes about their partner’s last holiday in preparation for exercise 3. Monitor and check for accurate formation of the Past Simple questions and use of regular and irregular verbs. Highlight any common errors after the pairwork. 3 Ask a confident student to give an example about his/ her partner’s last holiday. With larger groups, you can get the class to feed back in small groups. •Vriting 4 Tell students they are going to write about their last holiday. Ask Present or past? and establish that students need to use the past tense. Focus attention on the sentence starters and elicit what language can complete the skeleton. Check students understand they need to say how often they did different holiday activities, e.g. Every day we went to the beach/went sightseeing/played tennis. Sometimes we visited a museum/went shopping/went swimming. Once we went walking in the mountains/had a party on the beach/went horse-riding. Tell the class about your own last holiday, using the prompts as a framework. Then get students to write their description, using the skeleton in the Student’s Book. Go round and help, feeding in vocabulary and correcting as necessary. Get students to read their description to the class. If time is short, or if you have a very large class, get students to read their descriptions in groups of four or see the suggestion below. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 10 Exercises 13 and 14 Reading - A holiday in Disneyland EVERYDAY ENGLISH (SBP79) Going sightseeing Focus on the map to introduce the topic of sightseeing. Ask Where is it? (London). Where do people visit in London? (museums, art galleries, Buckingham Palace, the London Eye, shops like Harrods, etc.). 1 Focus attention on the names of the cities and the dates. Elicit sentences by asking Where and when? (I went to London in July 2 0 0 5 .1 went to Paris in April 2009.) Ask What did you see? and What did you buy? and elicit possible information about sights and souvenirs, e.g. We visited Buckingham Palace. We bought some chocolates. We saw the Eiffel Tower. We bought a picture. Review the question Did you have a good time? Get students to write down two cities and dates when they were a tourist. Students talk about the cities in the closed pairs, using the ideas in the Student’s Book. Encourage them to ask Did you have a good time? about each trip. 2 This section practises typical conversations in a Tourist Office. Pre-teach/check Tourist Office and ask What do people askfor? Elicit possible answers to introduce key vocabulary: maps, bus tours, information about buses/ trains/museums/shops/prices, etc.) Pre-teach/check show (verb), leave, it takes two hours, get on and off (a bus), to open/close, andfree (= you don’t have to pay). GRAMMAR SPOT Read the notes on ago with the class. Check the pronunciation of ago /э'дэи/ and point out that it comes after the time expression. SUGGESTION If appropriate, you can get students to display their written work on the classroom walls. Ask them to exchange their descriptions with a partner to check for any errors. Once corrected, students can walk round, read the descriptions, and choose the one they think is most interesting. Unit 10 • We had a great time! 97
- 96. [CD 2: Track43] Play the first line of the conversation and elicit the words for the first two gaps {help you). Play the rest of the recording and get students to complete the conversations. If necessary, play the recording again and allow students to complete any missing answers. Then check the answers with the whole class. Answers and tapescript 1 A Hello. Can I help you? В Yes. Can I have a map of the city, please? A Of course. Here you are. В Can you show me where we are on the map? A Yes. We’re here in Regent Street in the city centre. 2 С We want to go on a bus tour of the city. A That’sfine. The next bus leaves at 10o’clock. It takes about an hour and a half. С Where does the bus gofrom? A It goes from Trafalgar Square, but you can get on and off when you want. 3 D I want to visit the British Museum. What time does it open? A It opens at 10 in the morning and closes at 5.30 in the evening. D How much is it to get in? A It’sfree. Check pronunciation of the proper nouns: Regent Street /'ri:d33nt stri:t/, Trafalgar Square /tro'faelgo skwea/, and British Museum /'britij mju'ziam/. Get students to practise the conversations in closed pairs. If students have problems with pronunciation, drill key sections of the conversation and get students to practise again in closed pairs. 3 This exercise gives students the opportunity to talk about sights in their town or city. Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles. Check comprehension of market and old town. Give an example of places to visit in your town and elicit more examples from the class about places where they live. Students continue in closed pairs. Write key words from the students’ examples on the board to help them during the roleplay in exercise 4, e-g- Nouns: cathedral, museum, art gallery, square, monument, college, theatre, palace Verbs: go on a tour, see, visit, buy, go to, take a photo of Roleplay 4 Divide the class into pairs and get them to make up conversations, using the conversations in exercise 2 a: model. Let students write their conversations down ir the initial stage and go round monitoring and helping Give students time to rehearse their conversations a f< times but then encourage them not to refer to the text when they act out the roleplays. (With a weaker grouj you could draft the conversations as a class activity ar write them up on the board. Students rehearse from ti text on the board. Then rub off some of the words fro the board so that there are just key words left and get students to act out the conversations.) ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 10 Exercise 15 Going sightseeing Don’t forget1. Workbook Unit 10 Exercises 16-18 Revision Word list Ask the students to turn to p i36 and go through the won with them. Ask them to learn the words for homework, and test them on a few in the following lesson. Teacher’s Resource Disc Unit 10 Test Unit 10 Skills test Stop and check 3 (Units 7-10) Progress test 2 (Units 6-10) Video/DVD Unit 10 What did you do last weekend? on iTools and iTutor T 10.11 Unit 10 • We had a great time!
- 97. troduction to theunit e title of this unit is ‘I can do that!’ it introduces can for ability, e positive, negative, and question rms are introduced and practised, ng with common verb + adverb mbinations, e.g. dance well, run t, speak (French) fluently, etc. The s of can are also extended to cover uests and offers. There is a Reading d listening section with a text on Internet, and a focus on verb and un collocations. The Vocabulary ±nd speaking syllabus continues with further work on collocations of adjectives + nouns. The Everyday English section focuses on common problems in everyday life. Language aims Grammar - can/can’t Can for ability is introduced in all forms. It is presented md practised with key verbs and idverbs including well, slowly, and Euently. There is also a pronunciation rocus highlighting the different sounds in can/cant. Students get both receptive •nd productive practice with the features of pronunciation. can/can’t • Adverbs Adjective +noun Everyday problems I can do that! POSSIBLE PROBLEMS • After having practised the Present Simple, students can sometimes want to use the auxiliaries do/does and don’t/doesn’t to form negatives and questions with can: * We don’t can run fast. * Do you can swim? • The pronunciation of can/cant needs careful presentation and practice. Students often have problems with the different vowel sounds (weak form /э/and strong form /ае/in can /кэп/, keen/, and /a:/ in cant /ka:nt/). Students can also have problems distinguishing positive from negative forms, as the final t in can’t is often not fully pronounced. I can swim. /ai кэп swim/ Can you swim? /кэп ju: swim/ Yes, I can. /jes ai kaen/ I can’t swim. /ai ka:nt swim/ The pronunciation is included as part of the Grammar Spot, but be prepared to repeat the key points whenever students have problems with pronunciation. • Students last sawfast as an adjective in Unit 8, e.g. afast train, and will see it again in the Vocabulary and speaking section of this unit, e.g. afast car. The Grammar Spot on SB p82 coversfast as an adverb, but if students query the word order, e.g. run fast, before this point, just explain it’sfast + noun and verb + fast without giving a detailed explanation of the grammar behind adverbs and adjectives. Requests and offers Requests and offers with can are presented and practised. Vocabulary The work on vocabulary patterns continues with common adjective + noun combinations. There is also a focus on key verb + noun collocations in the pre-reading exercises for a text about the Internet. Everyday English The language associated with describing and solving basic problems is introduced and practised. Workbook Can/can’t is consolidated in a range of exercises, and requests and offers with can are further practised. There is also a reading exercise with a focus on can. There is further practice of adverbs, and adjective + noun collocations are consolidated. The Everyday English focus on everyday problems is also consolidated. Photocopiable activity There is a photocopiable activity to review can/can’t and adverbs on ТВ p!48. Unit 11 • I can do that! 99
- 98. Notes on theunit STARTER (SB p80) NOTE In New Headway Beginner, Fourth edition, we have chosen to spell email without a hyphen. Students may have seen the hyphenated form e-mail and both are acceptable in current usage. This Starter section focuses on possible uses of a computer and provides a useful introduction to the overall topic of computing and the Internet. Pre-teach/check the language in the list of questions. Drill the pronunciation as necessary. Give an example of how you use computers, e.g. I have a computer at home and at work. I use my work computer to prepare lessons and my home computerfor shopping and emails. Elicit one or two more examples from the students and then get them to continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check. Elicit a few more examples in a short class feedback session. WHAT CAN THEY DO? (SB p80) can/can’t 1 This section presents different people and their skills, and so highlights the use of the positive form can. It also reviews the use of a/an with jobs/roles. Focus attention on the photos and on the example. Students continue matching the words and photos, working in pairs. Check the answers with the whole class, drilling the pronunciation as necessary. Answers 2 Laura: architect 3 Justin: pilot 4 George: farmer 5 Lola: athlete 6 Oliver: schoolboy 7 Margaret: grandmother 2 Pre-teach/check speak (French) fluently, draw well, run fast, drive a tractor, fly 747jum bo jets, and make cakes, using the information in the photos. Focus attention on the example, highlighting the use of an. Students complete the rest of the sentences with a or an. [CD 2: Track 44] Play the recording and let students check their answers. Answers and tapescript 1 Marcus is an interpreter. He can speak French and German fluently. 2 Laura is an architect. She can draw well. 3 Justin is a pilot. He can fly 747jumbo jets. 4 George is a farmer. He can drive a tractor. 5 Lola is an athlete. She can run very fast. 6 Oliver is a schoolboy. He can use a computer really well. 7 Margaret is Oliver’s grandmother. She can make fantastic cakes. Play the recording again line by line and get students to repeat. Encourage them to reproduce the weak form in the positive form of can /кэп/. If students find this hard, get them to highlight the main stresses in each sentence and then practise the sentences again. Students practise in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct pronunciation of can. 3 Focus attention on the language in the speech bubble. Drill the example chorally and individually. Give another example about yourself and elicit one or two more examples from the class. Students then continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use and pronunciation of can. Don’t overdo the practise of the weak form /кэп/, as students will have the opportunity to review this in contrast with the other forms at various points in the unit. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 11 Exercises 1 and 2 can/can’t - cook/run fast Questions and negatives 1 Ш И [CD 2: Track 45] This section presents the question and negative forms. Play the recording through once and get students to just listen. Play the recording again and get students to repeat the question: and answers. Encourage them to reproduce the weak form /кэп/ in the question, the strong form /каеп/ in th< positive short answer, and the negative form /ka:nt/. If students query the use of at all, give them a scale of examples from good’ to ‘bad’, e.g. (Andrea Bocelli) can sing really well. (Kylie Minogue) can sing. (My brother) can’t sing. (I) can’t sing at all. If appropriate, use board drawings or mime to demonstrate the meaning depending on the verb you choose. Get students to ask and answer the questions in open pairs across the class. Students then continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct pronunciation of the different forms of can.T 11.1 100 Unit 11 • I can do that!
- 99. GRAMMAR AND PRONUNCIATION 1Read the notes with the whole class. Highlight that can/cant is used with all persons, and that cant is the contraction of can not. Highlight the use of can in the positive and question forms. 2 ailfck [CD 2: Track 46] Tell students they are going to hear the three ways of pronouncing can. Play the recording and get students to just listen. Play the recording again and get students to repeat chorally and individually. If students have severe problems with the pronunciation, drill the sentences again, but don’t make students self-conscious about using the new language. Point out that we don’t use do/does in question forms with can. Read Grammar Reference 11.1-11.2 on p128 together in class, and/or ask students to read it at home. Encourage them to ask you questions about it. 2 Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles. Highlight the use of can for both the she and the I forms. Drill the examples in open pairs. Elicit some more examples about the people in exercise 1, and also some student-student examples. Students then continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use and pronunciation of can and can’t. Of course I can! ’ 1111ЕЯ [CD 2: Track 47] Focus attention on the photo. Ask What’s his name? Does he have ajob? (Oliver. No, he’s a schoolboy.) Ask What’s her name? (Dominique.) Pre-teach/check (draw) a bit, planes, and grandma. Play the recording through once and get students to fill in the gaps. Ask them to check their answers in pairs. Play the recording again and get students to check/complete their answers. Check the answers with the whole class. Answers and tapescript D=Dominique, О =Oliver D Can you use a computer, Oliver? 0 Yes, of course Ican! All my friends can. I use acomputer at home in my bedroom and we use computers at school all the time. D That’s great. What other things can you do? 0 Well, I can run fast, very fast, and I can draw a bit. I can draw really good cars, but I can’t drive them of course! I can draw good planes, too. When I’m big I want to be a pilot and fly 747s. D Excellent. Now, I know you can speak French. 0 Yes, I can. I can speak French fluently because my dad’s French. We sometimes speak French at home. D Can you speak any other languages? 0 No, Ican’t. I can’t speak German or Spanish, just French - and English of course! And I can cook! I can make cakes. My grandma makes fantastic cakes and I sometimes help her. Yesterday we made a big chocolate cake! Get students to practise the conversation in closed pairs. Monitor and check. If students have problems with pronunciation, drill key sections of the conversation and get students to practise again in closed pairs. 4 Elicit the answer to question 1 as an example (He can use a computer, run fast, draw planes and cars, speak French and English, cook, and make cakes.). Students continue asking and answering in closed pairs. Check the answers by getting students to read the questions and answers across the class. Answers 1 Fie can use a computer, run fast, draw planes and cars, speak French and English, cook, and make cakes. Fie can’t drive, or speak German or Spanish. 2 Yes, he does. 3 He wants to be a pilot. 4 He can speak French well because his dad is French. 5 He made a chocolate cake with his grandma. SUGGESTION You could ask students to practise similar conversations to the one in exercise 3 by getting them to roleplay the other people in the photos on p80. Students can imagine the skills for their character and then ask and answer, using the conversation in exercise 3 as a model. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 11 Exercise 3 can/can’t - Questions and short answers Exercise 4 can!cant - Negatives PRACTICE (SB p82) Pronunciation 1 This is a discrimination exercise to practise recognizing and producing can and can’t. It includes both can for ability and can used in requests. Pre-teach/check quite well and read music. [CD 2: Track 48] Play sentence 1 as an example and elicit the answer (can). Play the rest of the sentences, pausing at the end of each one, and get students to underline the correct word. Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. T 11.5 Unit 11 • I can do that! 101
- 100. I love ithere. Saturday night is dancing night and I go dancing with friends. A lot of my friends can play the guitar really well. I can’t play a musical instrument but I can dance very well. I love the music. On Sundays I often go riding here. I can ride quite well now. Or sometimes I watch friends playing golf. I can’t play golf, but I like watching it. Sunday is also the day for ‘asado’ or barbecues. We always cook beef. I can’t cook at all, but I want to learn. It’s a great life here, everyone is really friendly. Answers and tapescript 1 I can ski quite well. 2 She can’t speak German at all. 3 He can speak English fluently. 4 Why can’t you come to my party? 5 We can’t understand our teacher. 6 They can read music. 7 Can I have an ice-cream, please? 8 Can cats swim? Play the recording again line by line and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Students then practise the sentences in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct pronunciation of can/can’t, but don’t insist on perfect pronunciation from all students. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 11 Exercise 5 Pronunciation - /кэп/ and /ka:nt/ She can speak Spanish very well! 2 This section gives students the opportunity to listen to a person talking about their skills in a more extended context. Focus attention on the photos and the rubric. Ask What’s her name? (Jenni Spitzer). Where is shefrom ? (the United States). Where does she live? (Argentina). Focus attention on the chart. Check comprehension of the verbs in the list, using the photos as appropriate. Tell students that they will get the answers for Jenni from the recording, they will complete the You column, you will give answers for the T column, and another student for the S column. [CD 2: Track 49] Tell students they are going to hear Jenni in the recording and that they should tick the things she can do in her column of the table. Pre-teach/check barbecues. Play the recording as far as German a little bit. Elicit the boxes that require a tick (speak Spanish and speak German). Play the rest of the recording and get students to complete their answers. Play the recording again and get students to check their answers before checking with the whole class. 3 This exercise highlights the use of adverbs when talking about abilities. With weaker students, you could consolidate the meaning by listing the words and expressions in a scale from ‘good’ to ‘bad’, e.g. very well /really well /fluently (languages) quite well a little bit (not) at all Elicit the missing word for number 1 as an example (fluently). Students complete the exercise, working in pairs. [CD 2: Track 49] Play the recording again and get students to check/complete their answers. Get students to practise the sentences in open and then closed pairs. If students have problems with pronunciation, drill the examples, highlighting the sentence stress. GRAMMAR SPOT 1 Explain that an adverb describes a verb, e.g. run - run fast, draw - draw well. Copy the examples onto the board and highlight the word order with the adverbs coming after the verbs. 2 Focus attention on the examples. Elicit the adjective in each one (fluent and slow). Copy them onto the board and highlight the formation of the adverb by adding -ly. Refer students back to the examples in exercise 1. Explain thatfast and well are special examples that don’t take -ly. Elicit the adjectives and adverbs for each one (fast -fast; good - well). Read Grammar Reference 11.3 on pl28 together in class, and/or ask students to read it at home. Encourage them to ask you questions about it. T 11.6 T 11.6 Answers 1 I can speak Spanish fluently. 2 I can speak German a little bit. 3 My friends can play the guitar really well. 4 I can dance very well. 5 I can ride quite well. 6 I can’t cook at all. Answers speak Spanish speak German dance ride a horse T 11.6 I live in the city of Tucuman. Iteach English. I can speak Spanish fluently and German a little bit. 102 Unit 11 • I can do that!
- 101. Talking about you 4Refer students back to the chart in exercise 2 and elicit a few examples about what Jenni can and cant do. Students complete the You column in the chart. Drill the pronunciation of the verbs in the list. Then elicit the question forms from a range of students and give true answers for yourself. Get students to complete the T column. Focus attention on the language in the speech bubbles. Drill the language chorally and individually. Elicit two or three more examples in open pairs. Then get students to continue asking and answering in closed pairs, noting their partner’s answer to each question in the S column. Monitor and check for the correct use and pronunciation of can/cant. 5 Focus attention on the example in the speech bubble. Drill the language and highlight the different pronunciation of can and cant and the contrastive stress in the second sentence: /а/ Isabel and I can dance very well. /э/ /а:/ She can cook, too, but I cant cook at all. Elicit two or three more examples from the class and then get students to continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for the correct use and pronunciation of can/cant. Feed back on any major common errors, but do not expect students to produce perfect pronunciation of can/cant as this may prove demoralizing. PHOTOCOPIABLE ACTIVITY UNIT 11 I can’t ... at all ТВ pl48 Materials: one copy of the worksheet cut up per group of three students Procedure: Explain that students are going to play a miming game and practise can/cant and adverbs. • Pre-teach/check say the alphabet and type. Mime a few actions done well and badly, e.g. play tennis well, singing badly and elicit sentences with You ..., e.g. You can play tennis well. You cant sing very well. • Divide the students into groups of three. Fland out sets of cards to each group and put them face down on the desk. Demonstrate the activity by picking up a card from one set, miming the activity shown, and getting students to say what you can/can’t do. If they don’t include an adverb, e.g. they say You cant sing, gesture that they need to add more information, e.g. You cant sing at all. • Students take it in turns to choose a card and mime the activity. The others in the group guess and say a sentence. The student that gets the wording on the card or closest to it wins the card. If no-one guesses correctly, it goes to the bottom of the pile and can be used again. Monitor and help as necessary. If necessary, remind students that they need to say how well the action is done to win the card. • The student with the most cards in each group wins. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL____________________________________________ Workbook Unit 11 Exercise 6 Adverbs - very well/ not at all REQUESTS AND OFFERS Can I help you? This section introduces other uses of can and helps to consolidate the question forms. 1 Focus attention on the pictures. Elicit where the people are in each one (picture 1 a shop, 2 by a bus stop, 3 someone’s house, 4 a restaurant, 5 London, 6 a car). Focus attention on the example. Remind students to cross out the words in each set as they use them starting each sentence with Can. Students write the other questions, working individually. Get students to check their answers in pairs but don’t check with the whole class until after exercise 2. Answers 1 Can I help you? 2 Can you tell me the time, please? 3 Can you come to my party? 4 Can I have a glass of water, please? 5 Can you speak more slowly, please? 6 Can I give you a lift? 2 Elicit the question to item a (3 Can you come to my party?). Students continue matching, working individually. [CD 2: Track 50] Play the recording and let students check their answers to the question formation and the matching phase. Answers a 3 b 2 с 4 d 1 e 6 f 5 1 Can I help you? Yes, please. I want to buy this postcard. 2 Can you tell me the time, please? It’s about three thirty. 3 Can you come to my party? Sorry. I can’t. It’s my grandma’s birthday on Saturday. T 11.7 Unit 11 • I can do that! 103
- 102. 4 Can Ihave a glass of water, please? Yes, of course. Here you are. 5 Can you speak more slowly, please? I’msorry. Is this better? Can you understand me now? 6 Can I give you a lift? Oh, yes please! That’s so kind of you! 3 Deal with any vocabulary queries from exercises 1 and 2. Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles. Highlight how the conversation can be continued. Get students to practise the conversation in open pairs. Get students to continue with the other conversations in closed pairs. Remind them to continue the conversations in an appropriate way. With a weaker class, you could get students to repeat after the recording, and also elicit ways of continuing the conversations before students start the pairwork. Possible ways of continuing the conversations: 1 That’s 90p, please. Thank you. 2 (See example in Student’s Book.) 3 Say ‘Happy Birthday’ from me. OK. Thanks. 4 Thanks very much. That’s OK. 5 Yes, I can. Thanks. 6 That’s no problem. Check it 4 Focus attention on the first pair of sentences as an example. Students continue working individually to choose the correct sentence. Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. Answers 1 I can’t understand. 2 He can drive a tractor. 3 Can you swim fast? 4 We can play tennis quite well. 5 You speak Italian very well. 6 He plays the piano very well. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 11 Exercises 7 and 8 Requests and offers - Can I ... ?/Can you ...? READING AND LISTENING (SBP84) The Internet NOTE The reading text in this section contains a number of new lexical items and some topic-specific lexis, e.g. computer network, the Net, go worldwide. In order to save time in class, you might like to ask students to look up the following words in their dictionary for homework before the reading lesson: history, Department of Defense (US spelling), computer network, military (noun), scientist, telephone company, communicate, the Net, go worldwide, million, partner (in a game), share, write a blog, endless. This section gives practice in vocabulary, reading, and listening based on a subject of interest to many students - the Internet. Lead into the topic with the following questions: Do you use ‘Google or another search engine? Whatfor? Are you on Facebook or another social networking site? Do you write a blog? What’s it about? 1 Focus attention on the web addresses. Elicit what ‘www’ means (world wide web) and check students can pronounce the abbreviation: /dAblju: dAblju: 'dAblju:, Give students time to discuss what each website is for before discussing as a class. 2 The exercise reviews and extends useful verb + noun collocations and also pre-teaches some of the vocabulary used in the reading text. Focus attention on the example. Students continue matching, working individually. Get students to check in pairs before checking with the whole class. Check comprehension of play chess, pay bills, and chat to friends. Ask students which activities you can do on the Interne and check students understand you can do all of them. Answers listen to the radio watch TV play chess pay a bill read a newspaper chat to friends send an email book a hotel 3 Read the questions through as a class and elicit possibl answers. Divide the class into pairs or groups of three and get students to discuss the questions. Allow them to use whatever language they can to express their ideas, but be prepared to feed in language if students 104 Unit 11 • I can do that!
- 103. request it. Donot feed back on the questions at this stage, as students will find answers to the questions in the reading text. 4 >!!>:■ [CD 2: Track 51] If you haven’t set the vocabulary checking as homework, pre-teach/check the items listed in the Note at the start of the section, especially with weaker groups. Ask students to read and listen to the text and to find the answers to the questions in exercise 3. Get students to compare their predictions in exercise 3 with the information in the text. Check the answers with the whole class. Answers 1 The Internet started in the 1960s. 2 It started because the US Department of Defense wanted a computer network to help the American military. 3 People can ‘google’ for information, buy and sell clothes and cars, book a hotel, a holiday or tickets for the cinema, pay their bills; watch their favourite TV programme, play chess with a partner in Moscow; ‘chat’ to their friends and share photographs on Facebook, write a blog. 5 Get students to read the text again and find and correct the false sentences. Ask students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. Answers 1 False. The Internet started in the 1960s. 2 False. The US Department of Defense started it. 3 True. 4 True. 5 True. -Vhat do you do on the Internet? 6 Tell students they are going to hear different people talking about when and why they use the Internet. Focus attention on the photos and the age of each person. Give students a few moments to discuss how each one might use the net. Pre-teach/check: Wikipedia (an online encyclopaedia), geography, science, post photos (on Facebook), songs. ■i1ИД [CD 2: Track 52] Play the first extract and focus attention on the example. Remind students that they don’t have to understand every word to be able to complete the exercise. Play the rest of the recording and get students to note down their answers for each person. Get students to check their answers in pairs. Play the recording again and get students to check/complete their answers. Check the answers with the whole class. Elicit any other information students understood about each Internet user. Answers Charlotte Lauren Santiago Alan Krum Max Edna When? every day 3or 4 times a day in the evenings on Sundays after school every Friday Why? help with homework hear friends’ news find songs get information about his family history play games shopping 1 Charlotte, age 14 1use the Internet a lot. Every day, I think. It helps me with my homework. I ‘google’ for information or I use Wikipedia. It helps me with everything - history, geography, science, English - er, everything. Yesterday I got a lot of information aboutJane Austen. 2 Lauren, age 20 I go on Facebook a lot, sometimes three or four times a day. It’s a great way to hear all your friends’ news and see all their photographs. Yesterday I posted all the photos from my party last weekend. You can see them if you want. 3 Santiago, age 23 I play the guitar and I can find lots of songs on the Internet. Yesterday I got the words and music for Can’t buy me love, you know, by the Beatles. I can play it now. I use the Internet in the evenings, when I have time. 4 Alan Krum, age 47 Well, my surname, - er, my family name is Krum and I want to write about my family, so I use the Internet to find out about my family’s history. There are special websites for this. Also, I can chat to people with the same name from all over the world - Canada, Germany, Argentina. It’s really interesting. I usually use it on Sundays, because I have more time then. 5 Max, age 10 I play games a lot. And I go on websites for my favourite pop groups and football players. I want to be on the computer all the time, but my mum says I can’t. She says I can only use it after school for an hour, and then I stop. 6 Edna, age 71 I go shopping on the Internet. Every Friday I go to my son’s house and I use his computer. It’s fantastic - the supermarket brings all my shopping to my home. I want a computer now. I want to send emails to my friends. Most of my friends have computers. Elicit examples of other uses of the Internet that don’t appear in the text, e.g. read the weather forecast, get help with your English, get maps and directions, get names and addresses of businesses, etc. Give the names of a few good websites that you know and describe what you can do on these sites. Feed in useful language for talking about websites: (Name of site) is good for (shopping). I visit (name of site)/or (information on travel). You can (read the news) at (name of site). A good sitefor (games) is (name of site). Unit 11 • I can do that! 105
- 104. Divide the classinto groups and get them to talk about how they use the Internet and about good websites that they know. Monitor and help as necessary. Get students to tell the whole class of any interesting sites in a brief feedback session. Highlight any common errors to the class, but do not over-correct as this may prove demoralizing. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL____________________________ Workbook Unit 11 Exercises 9 and 10 Reading - Meet ASIMO VOCABULARY AND SPEAKING (SBP86) Adjective +noun This section consolidates and extends the adjective + noun collocations students have met to date in the course. 1 Focus attention on the illustration and elicit a few examples of what is shown. Focus on the example match of old/young/tall to people. Put students in pairs to continue the matching task. Check the answers, drilling the pronunciation as necessary. Answers old/young/tall people fast/expensive car delicious/fresh food big/busy/cosmopolitan city dangerous/exciting sport funny/interesting/boring films warm and sunny/cold and wet weather 2 Elicit a possible ending for number 1 (a fast car/an expensive car). If necessary, remind students of the use of a/an with a singular noun. Explain that students sometimes need an adjective + noun combination and sometimes just an adjective on its own. Give students time to complete the sentences and then compare with a partner. [CD 2: Track 53] Tell students they are going to hear short conversations that talk about the people and things in sentences 1-7. Sometimes the wording is quite similar to the sentences and sometimes it is a bit different. Play number 1 as an example and get students to compare their version. Play the rest of the recording and get students to compare the adjectives used. Refer students to H H M on SB p i20. Put students in pairs to practise the conversations. Monitor and check. If students have problems with pronunciation, drill difficult lines from the recording again. Be prepared to give an exaggerated model of the voice range if student! sound a little flat. T 11.10 1 A A Ferrari is a fantastic car. It’s so fast. В Yeah, I know, but it’s also so expensive. 2 A Flow tall is your brother? В He’s very tall, 1.9metres. I’monly 1.7metres. 3 A I think motor racing is a really dangerous sport. В I know it’s dangerous, but it’s exciting too. That’s why I love it! 4 A Can I have afresh orange juice, please? В I’mafraid we don’t have fresh. A OK. Just a glass of water then. 5 A New York is a very cosmopolitan city. I love it. В Me too. I can’t believe I’m here. 6 A Charlie Chaplin made some very funny films, don’t you think? В No. I don’t like his films. Ithink they’re really boring. 7 A We can’t gofor a walk, it’s too cold and wet. В Yes, we can. Look, it’s sunny again! Come on! 3 Check comprehension offilm star. Elicit a few possible examples for each category and write them on the board. Put students in groups of three or four to draft their lists. Feed in useful language for this stage, e.g. What’s an example of an expensive car? A Mazda? I don’t really agree with that. How about a Porsche? Students continue in their groups. Make sure one student writes down the examples. Students then work with people from another group to compare their lists. Elicit the most common example for some of the categories in a short feedback session. SUGGESTION Students can play ‘10 questions’ with the examples in exercise 3. One student thinks of a category, e.g. an old city, without telling the others in the group. They have a maximum of 10 questions to find out what it is. SUGGESTION If your students are interested in the Internet, you can get them to work in groups and write a summary of how they use the Net, referring to script Ч)А'Д as a model. They can also produce a mini-guide of their favourite websites divided into categories according to students’ interests, e.g. sports, learning English, shopping, local information, news, etc. T 11.10 106 Unit 11 • I can do that!
- 105. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Teacher’s ResourceDisc Communicative activity Unit 11 Ready, steady, go! Workbook Unit 11 Exercise 11 Adjective + noun EVERYDAY ENGLISH (SB P87) Everyday problems 1 Focus attention on the photos and ask students where the people are in each one (1 in the city, 2 at work, 3 in a car park, 4 at home, 5 in the street, 6 in town). Get students to match the problems to the photos. Check the answers. Answers 1 directions 4 a lost passport 2 computers 5 an accident 3 a ticket machine 6 arriving late 2 Focus attention on the example. Students match the lines to the pictures, working individually. Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the class. Answers [4] /can’t find it anywhere! [3] This machine doesn’t work. Q] I'm lost. [6] I’m so sorry I’m late! |T] I can’t get on the Internet. [5] Areyou all right? This stage allows students to use their imagination and create a conversation around one of the situations in the photos. Ask a confident student to choose a photo and improvise a short conversation around the situation he/she selected. Students continue in pairs. Monitor and help as necessary, but don’t try to control the wording too much. It’s best just to let students do what they can with the language they already know. If appropriate, you can pair more confident students with weaker ones. If you have time, allow a few pairs to act out their conversations to the class. 3 Briefly review the language of giving directions from Unit 8: turn left/right, go straight on. Also pre-teach/ check the following words from the conversations: you cant miss it (= it’s easy to find), What’s the matter?, push (a button), airport, miss the bus, it doesn’t matter. ЧНИИ [CD 2: Track 54] Play the first line of conversation 1 and elicit the missing word (lost). Play the rest of the recording and get students to complete the rest of the task. Play the recording again and let students complete/ check their answers. Check the answers with the class. Answers and tapescript 1 A Excuse me! Can you help me? I’mtost. В Where do you want to go? A Grand Central Station. В Turn left onto Park Avenue. It’s straight on. You can’t miss it. 2 A Oh, no! В What’s the matter? A There’s something wrong with my computer. I can’t get on the Internet, so I can’t send my emails. В Turn everything off and try again. That sometimes works. 3 A Excuse me! This ticket machine doesn’t work. В Did you push the green button? A Oh! No, I didn’t. В Ah, well. Here’s your ticket. A Thank you very much. 4 A Come on! It’stime to go to the airport. В But I can’t find my passport! I can’t find it anywhere! A You put it in your bag. В Did I? Oh, yes. Here it is! Phew! 5 A Are you all right? В Yes, I think so. A Does your arm hurt? В It hurts a bit, but I think it’s OK. 6 A I’mso sorry I’m late. В It’s OK. The film starts in 15minutes. A I missed the bus. В Itold you, it doesn’t matter. Come on! Let’s go. 4 Get students to practise the conversations in closed pairs. Monitor and check for pronunciation. If students have problems, drill key sections from the recording and get students to repeat the pairwork. Get students to choose two conversations to learn and act out for the rest of the class. Encourage them to stand up and roleplay the situation, rather than just say the conversations face to face. This helps students with the acting out and with the overall delivery. Encourage the other students to listen carefully to the students who are acting and give feedback on pronunciation. SUGGESTION If class time is short, you could get students to learn their lines for homework and then give them a short time to rehearse in pairs. With a weaker group, you could put simple cues on the board to help if students forget their lines. Unit 11 • I can do that! 107
- 106. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit11 Exercise 12 Everyday problems Don’t forget! Workbook Unit 11 Exercises 13-16 Revision Word list Ask the students to turn to p i36-7 and go through the words with them. Ask them to learn the words for homework, and test them on a few in the following lesson. Teacher’s Resource Disc Unit 11 Test Unit 11 Skills test Video/DVD Unit 11 The Living Craft Show on iTools and iTutor 108 Unit 11 • I can do that!
- 107. I’d like -some/any In a restaurant Signs all around Please and thank you ntroduction to the unit This unit is called ‘Please and thank you and it focuses on the function ; f asking for things in a range of contexts. The structure would like is ntroduced and practised, along with some and any. Like is also reviewed and contrasted with would like. The lexical set of shops and amenities is reviewed and extended, and there is a Vocabulary and speaking section on food and drink, and ordering in a restaurant. The Reading and speaking section also focuses on food, with a :ext about what people eat in different Tarts of the world. This is the first jigsaw’ reading in the course and so fully integrates reading and speaking skills. There is further functional practice in the Everyday English section with the language used in a range of signs in public places. Language aims Grammar - I’d like Students have already met want + noun and want + fo-infinitive. In this unit would like + noun and would like + fo-infinitive are introduced as polite ways of asking for things, or saying that you want to do something. The question form Would you like ... ?is also introduced for offering things. Would like (for requests made ‘now’) is also contrasted with '.ike (for expressing likes/dislikes in general). some and any Students also practise some and any with plural countable nouns and uncountable nouns. POSSIBLE PROBLEMS • Students have already seen like as a main verb in the presentation of the Present Simple in Unit 5. This is the first time students have seen would like and it is easy for them to confuse the two. Common mistakes are: * Do you like a cup of tea? * I like to buy a dictionary. * You like a coffee? • Students can usually understand the difference between liking in general (expressed with like) and a specific request (expressed with would like), but the similarity in form can lead to confusion. Students are given both receptive and productive practice in both forms, but be prepared to monitor and check for mistakes and review as necessary. (There is no need to highlight at this stage that would is a modal verb, as students will meet would and its various uses in later levels of New Headway, Fourth edition.) • Students first met some and any with there is!are in Unit 8, but may still query their meaning as individual words. At this early stage, it’s best just to give practice in the use of some and any with a range of different examples, rather than get into complicated explanations. The Grammar Spot on SB p89 sets out the key uses that students need to be aware of at beginner level. Vocabulary Shops and amenities are reviewed and extended. The theme and vocabulary of food and drink is presented in the Reading and speaking section, and carried through in Vocabulary and speaking in the context of ordering things in a restaurant. Everyday English This highlights and practises the language used in signs in everyday situations. Workbook Would like is reviewed and consolidated in a range of exercises, and there is practice in distinguishing between like and would like. There is further practice of the functional language of offering things, and there is a pronunciation exercise to practise discrimination in vowel sounds. The lexical set of food and drink is practised further, and further reading practice is given with a text on eating habits. Photocopiable activity There is a photocopiable activity to review the language of signs on ТВ pl49. Unit 12 • Please and thank you 109
- 108. Notes on theunit STARTER (SB p88) This Starter section reviews and extends the lexical set of shops and amenities and also reviews can. 1 Focus attention on the chart and give students time to read the Activities column. Check bread, milk, fruit, meat, and conditioner. Deal with any vocabulary queries and focus attention on the example. Then get students to continue matching in pairs. Check the answers. Answers 2 e 3 c 4 a 5 b 6 f 7 d 2 Focus attention on the example. Then get students to make sentences with the phrases in exercise 1 using You can .... [CD 2: Track 55] Play the recording and get students to check their answers. Explain any individual words that students query. (If you think students need further practice in the pronunciation of can, you could get students to listen again and repeat the sentences.) SAYING WHAT YOU WANT (SB P88) I’d l i k e s o m e and any 1 Focus attention on the photos and get students to point to Adam in each one. Pre-teach/check slices, anything else, Emmental, Gruyere (types of Swiss cheese), and dry/normal hair. [CD 2: Track 56] Play the first line of conversation 1 and elicit the missing word (morning). Play the rest of the recording through once without stopping and elicit where Adam is in each conversation (1 in a supermarket, 2 in a chemists). Allow students to check their answers in pairs. Play the recording again to let students check/complete their answers. Check the answers with the whole class. (If students query the use of one in try this one in conversation 2, check they understand it means try this type ofshampoo.) Drill the pronunciation of the lines containing would like from conversation 1: Id like some ham, please. How much would you like? Would you like anything else? Check students can reproduce the contracted form Id /aid/ and the pronunciation of would /wud/. Put students in pairs to practise the conversations. Monitor and check for correct pronunciation. Be prepared to drill key lines again if necessary. Answers and tapescript Conversation 1 A Good morning. I’d like some ham, please. В How much would you like? A Four slices. В Would you like anything else? A Yes, I’d like some cheese. Do you have any Emmental? В I’mafraid we don’t have any Emmental. What about Gruyere? A No, thank you. Just the ham, then. How much is that? Conversation 2 С Can I help you? A Yes, please, I’d like some shampoo. С We have lots. Would you like it for dry or normal hair? A Dry, Ithink. С OK. Try this one. Anything else? A Er - oh yeah. I don’t have any conditioner. I’d like some conditioner for dry hair, please. С Yes, of course. That’s £6.90, please. GRAMMAR SPOT would like 1 Read the notes as a class. Make sure students understand the difference in register between want and the more polite would like, and that d like is the contracted form. 2 Read the notes as a class. Make sure students understand that Would you like ... ?is used when we offer things. Ask students to find more examples of would like in the conversations in exercise 1. some and any 1/2 Read the notes as a class, highlighting the use of some with positive sentences, and any in questions and negatives. Ask students to find more examples of some and any in the conversations in exercise 1. Read Grammar Reference 12.1-12.2 on pl28 together in class, and/or ask students to read it at home. Encourage them to ask you questions about it. T 12.1 Answers and tapescript 1 You can buy a magazine in a newsagent’s. 2 You can buy bread, milk, fruit, and meat in a supermarket. 3 You can get US dollars from a bank. 4 You can buy stamps and send a parcel in a post office. 5 You can buy a dictionary in a bookshop. 6 You can get a medium latte in a coffee shop. 7 You can buy shampoo and conditioner in a chemist’s. T 12.2 Unit 12 • Please and thank you
- 109. Explain that studentsare going to hear Adam from exercise 1 shopping in town. Pre-teach/check The Times (newspaper),first/second class, and Drink here or take away? Focus attention on the chart and read the questions out so that students know what to listen for. Explain that for What does he want? students can just write words and for What are his words? students write the sentences Adam uses. [CD 2: Track 57] Play the recording of conversations 1 and 2 through once. Play it again, pausing at the end of key lines if necessary to allow students to write Adam’s words. Check the answers with the class. Answers Conversation 1 Conversation 2 Where is he? in a newsagent’s in a coffee shop What does he want? The Times and two magazines; some stamps a medium latte; some chocolate cake What are his words? I’d like some stamps too. Two books of first- class stamps, please. I’d like a latte, please. I’d like some chocolate cake. T 12.3 Conversation 1 С Is that all? The Times and the two magazines? A Yes, that’s all. Oh, I nearly forgot - I’d like some stamps too. С First or second class? A First. Two books of first-class stamps, please. С OK. Would you like a bag? A No, thanks. I don’t need a bag. С That’s£9.65. Conversation 2 A I’d like a latte, please. В Drink here or take away? A To drink here, please. В Small, medium or large? A Medium, please. В Would you like something to eat? A Er - yes. I’d like some chocolate cake. С Sure. Anything else? A That’s it, thanks. If students ask why stamps can be first or second class, explain that in Britain there is a system of two classes of post with first class being quicker and more expensive. This may seem strange to students who are used to a flat tariff for sending basic letters. 3 Explain that in the conversations in this exercise Adam is talking to a visitor at his home. Pre-teach/check orange/apple juice. Elicit the second missing word in the first line {like). Give students time to complete conversations 1 and 2. Let them check in pairs before playing the recording. [CD 2: Track 58] Play the recording and get students to check their answers. Answers and tapescript A=Adam, V =Visitor Conversation 1 A What would you like to drink? V Ajuice. I’d like an apple juice, please. A Er... I have some orange juice, but I don’t have any apple juice. V Don’t worry. Orange juice is fine. Thanks. Conversation 2 A Would you like something to eat? V Yeah, OK. A sandwich. A cheese sandwich? A Er... I don’t have any cheese. Sorry. I have some ham. Would you like a ham sandwich? V I don’t like ham. A Would you like some cake, then? V Yes, please. I’d love some. Check pronunciation of apple juice /'aepl d3u:s/, orange juice /'Drind3 d3u:s/, and sandwich /'saenwitf/. Put students in pairs to practise the conversations. Monitor and check for accurate pronunciation and intonation. Check students reproduce I’d like correctly and make sure students don’t say I like. If students have problems with pronunciation, drill key sections of the conversations and get students to practise again in closed pairs. Roleplay 4 This exercise practises question forms with would like. Focus attention on the pictures and get students to imagine they are at home with a friend. Check comprehension offeel at home. Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles. Remind students of the use of would like + noun and would like + to- infinitive. Drill the examples chorally and individually. Encourage students to reproduce correct intonation, using a wide voice range on the answers, starting ‘high’. Check comprehension of the food, drinks, and activities on offer. Elicit two different exchanges from each of the boxes from the students in open pairs. Then get them to continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of would you like + noun and fo-infinitive, and pronunciation. If you have time, get students to act out their roleplay for the rest of the class. T 12. J T 12.4 Unit 12 • Please and thank you 111
- 110. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit12 Exercise 1 What’s in the basket? Exercises 2 and 3 some!any Exercise 4 I'd like - I ’d like a ... II’d like to ... Exercise 5 Offering things - What would you like? PRACTICE (SB p90) It’s my birthday! Exercises 1-4 of Practice focus on would like in the context of birthdays. It consolidates the use of would like + noun and would like + io-infinitive. 1 Introduce the topic by asking When’s your birthday? and What do you usually do on your birthday? Explain that students are going to hear a conversation between two friends. It’s the man’s birthday soon and the woman is asking what he would like. Pre-teach/ checkforget, presents, take you outfor a meal, and silly. Ask students to cover the text of the conversation in exercise 2. Ask the questions in exercise 1. [CD 2: Track 59] Play the recording through once and elicit the answers. 2 Ask two students to read out the first three lines of the conversation and elicit the missing words in line 3 (would you like). Give students time to complete the rest of the conversation. [CD 2: Track 59] Play the recording again and let students check their answers. Put students in pairs to practise the conversation. Monitor and check for accurate pronunciation and intonation. Check students reproduce I ’d like correctly and make sure students don’t say I like. If students hav problems with pronunciation, drill key sections of the conversations and get students to practise again in closed pairs. Birthday wishes 3 Tell students they are going to hear three people talkin about their birthday. Focus attention on the chart and elicit possible answers to the two questions, e.g. What would they like? A book, a CD, a picture, a jumper, a camera, etc. What would they like to do in the evening? Go to the theatre, have a party, go to a restaurant, go shopping, et< [CD 2: Track 60] Play the recording of Kelly and elicit the answers (breakfast in bed and to go to the theatre). Play the rest of the recording and get students to complete the chart. Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. Answers Kelly: breakfast in bed with the newspapers; goto the theatre Mike: a new computer; go to a good restaurant Jade: a new mobile phone; go out with all her friends T 12.6 Kelly What would I like for my birthday? That’s easy! I’d like to have breakfast in bed. With the newspapers. And in the evening I’d like to go to the theatre. Mike Well, I’d like a new computer, because my computer is so old that new programs don’t work on it. And then in the evening I’d like to go to a good restaurant. I don’t mind if it’s Italian, French, Chinese, or English.Just good food. Jade I’d love a new mobile phone. My mobile is so old now. I’d like one that takes good photos - your phone has a really good camera and it wasn’t that expensive. And in the evening I’d like to go out with all my friends and have a great time! 4 Ask students to imagine it’s their birthday soon. Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles. Drill the language and check students say I’d like rather than I like. Get students to give one or two more examples, working in open pairs. Students continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of would like - noun and would like + to-infinitive. Answers and tapescript A Hey, isn’t it your birthday soon? В Yeah, next week on the 15th. A So, what would you like for your birthday? В I don’t know. I don’t need anything. A But I’d like to buy you something. В That’s kind, but I think I’d like to forget my birthday this year. A What? You don’t want any presents! Why not? В Well, I’m 30 next week, and that feels old. A Thirty isn’t old. Come on. I’d like to take you out for a meal with some friends. You can choose the restaurant. В OK, then. Thank you. I’d like that. Just don’t tell anyone it’s my birthday. A Oh, that’s silly! T 12.5 Answers She wants to take him for a meal. He wants to forget his birthday. - see belowT 12.5 T 12.5 T 12.6 112 Unit 12 • Please and thank you
- 111. ke and wouldlike This section explains the difference between like and would like and gives students further practice in using the two forms. 1 Read the sentences aloud and ask What’s the difference? Allow students to express a range of ideas, in LI if appropriate. Do not confirm or explain the difference at this stage, as students get further help in exercise 2. 2 [CD 2: Track 61] Pre-teach/check tonight and What about you? Play the recording and get students to read the conversations. Point out the use of I ’d love to in reply to Would you like to ...? Explain that we don’t usually repeat the verb from the question. Ask the concept questions in the Student’s Book and check the answers. Answers Conversation 1is about what you like day after day. Conversation 2 is about what you want to do today. Put students in new pairs to practise the conversations. Monitor and check for accurate pronunciation and intonation. Check students use I like and I’d like correctly. If students have problems with pronunciation, drill key sections of the conversations and get students to practise again in closed pairs. GRAMMAR SPOT 1 Read the notes as a class. Make sure students understand that like is used to talk about something which is always true. Focus attention on the example sentences and elicit other examples from the class. 2 Read the notes as a class. Make sure students understand that d like is used to talk about something we wish to have or do now or soon. Focus attention on the examples and highlight the use of the noun and fo-infinitive in questions with would like. Elicit other examples from the class. Read Grammar Reference 12.3 on pl28 together in class and/or ask students to read it at home. Encourage them to ask you questions about it. Talking about you 3 Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles. With weaker classes, review the difference between like and would like by asking General or specific? about each sentence (like = general meaning; would like = a specific wish). Also highlight the use of like + -ing and would like + fo-infinitive. Elicit examples of complete conversations. Encourage students to ask What about you? and follow-up questions, e.g. A What do you like doing in your free time? В I like shopping and reading. What about you? A I like swimming and listening to music. В What music do you like? A Jazz and classical. What about you? В I like pop and rock. В What would you like to do this weekend? A I’d like to go out with my friends. What about you? В I’d like to go shopping. A What would you like to buy? В Some clothes and a CD. Then get students to continue working in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of like + -ing and would like + fo-infinitive. Feed back on any common errors which might interfere with comprehension, e.g. *1 like to visiting my parents. Listening and pronunciation 4 M W [CD 2: Track 62] This is a discrimination exercise to help students distinguish like and would like. Play the first sentence as an example and elicit the sentence that is recorded {W ouldyou like a Coke?) Play the rest of the recording and get students to choose the correct sentences. Get students to check in pairs. If there is disagreement on the answers, play the recording again and then check the answers with the class. Answers and tapescript 1 Would you like a Coke? 2 I like watching films. 3 We’d like a flat with two bedrooms. 4 What would you like to do? 5 I like new clothes. T 12.8 1 A What would you like? Would you like a Coke? В Yes, please. I’mvery thirsty. 2 A What sort of thing do you like doing at the weekend? В Well, I like watching films. 3 A What sort of flat do you want to move into? В Well... С We’d like a flat with two bedrooms. Somewhere near the centre. 4 A We have this weekend free. What would you like to do? В I’d like to have the weekend with you, and only you! A Oooh! 5 A What do you spend all your money on? В Well, I like new clothes. I buy new clothes every week. Unit 12 • Please and thank you 113
- 112. Refer students toЧ И П on SB pl21. Give students time to read the conversations and deal with any vocabulary queries they may have. Put students in new pairs to practise the conversations. Monitor and check for accurate pronunciation and intonation. Check students use I like and I ’d like correctly. If students have problems with pronunciation, drill key sections of the conversations and get students to practise again in closed pairs. Check it 5 Focus attention on the first pair of sentences as an example. Students continue working individually to choose the correct sentence. Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. Answers 1 I’d like to leave early today. 2 Do you like your job? 3 Would you like tea or coffee? 4 I’d like some tea, please. 5 They’d like something to eat. 6 I don’t have any money. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Teacher’s Resource Disc Communicative activity Unit 12 In your dreams Workbook Unit 12 Exercises 6 and 7 like and would like - like dancing/would like to dance READING AND SPEAKING (SBP92) You are what you eat Lead into the topic of food by asking students to brainstorm examples of food and drink. Get them to work in groups and then elicit examples, asking a student from each group to write them on the board. Take the opportunity to check pronunciation and review the alphabet by getting students to spell some of the key words. Focus attention on the title of the section. Say You are what you eat. What does it m ean? (it is important to eat well). 1 This exercise includes some of the key vocabulary in the jigsaw reading task. Ask What’s in picture 1?and elicit salad. Students continue asking and answering, working in pairs. Check the answers with the class. Drill the pronunciation of the words as necessary. Answers 1 salad 6 seafood 2 breakfast cereal 7 fish 3 chicken 8 rice 4 bread and jam 9 eggs 5 pasta 2 The words listed below are new. With stronger students, allow them to work together in their groups (see notes below) to deal with the new vocabulary, using dictionaries as appropriate. With weaker students, you could pre-teach/check the following items first: meal, soup /su:p/, lunch box, dish, vegetables /'vedjtablz/, beans, plate, have a snack, ride a bike, run a marathon, snack (verb), dessert, have a siesta, do some exercise, go to the gym. Focus attention on the article. Ask Whatfood can you see in the photos? Elicit some words for the food in the photos, e.g. sushi, salad, chicken, rice, and seafood. Focus attention on the photos of the people and check pronunciation of the names: Masumi /mas'su:mi:/, Caroline /'kaerslain/, Adella /a'dela/ Put students into three groups, A, B, and C. (With larger classes, you may need to have multiple sets of the three groups.) Assign a text to each group and remind students to read only their text: Group A - Masumi Group В - Caroline Group С - Adella Get students to read their text quickly, asking others in their group for help with vocabulary if you didn’t pre-teach the items listed above. Monitor and help with any queries. Give students time to read the questions and deal with any queries. Get them to work in their groups and answer the questions about their text, noting down the answers to each one. Monitor and help as necessary. NOTES This is the first ‘jigsaw’ reading in the course and so will need careful setting up. The ‘jigsaw’ technique integrates reading and speaking skills by getting students to read one of three texts and then work in groups to exchange information in a speaking phase. It’s important to remind students to read only their text and to get information about the other texts via speaking. The theme of the section is eating well and the texts describe the eating habits of three people in different parts of the world. 114 Unit 12 • Please and thank you
- 113. Answers Masumi: 1 rice, fish,eggs. 2 For breakfast he has rice, fish, and soup. For lunch he has bento, with rice, fish, vegetables and eggs, and sometimes meat. For dinner he has fish with beans. 3 He has lunch at 12o’clock. In the evening he eats at/after nine o’clock. 4 At the weekend, he likes goingfor walks and having dinner with his family. 5 He would like to eat with his children. 6 Yes, he goes for walks. Caroline: 1 breakfast cereal, salad, chicken, fish. 2 For breakfast she has toast and cereal. For lunch she has salad. For dinner she has chicken or fish. 3 She has breakfast early. She has lunch at 11.30. 4 She likes cooking for friends at home. 5 She would like to run the New York Marathon. 6 Yes, she rides her bike to work and runs 10kilometres a day. Adella: 1 bread and jam, pasta, salad, fish, seafood, rice. 2 For breakfast she has bread andjam. For lunch she has pasta, salad, fish or meat, and a dessert. For dinner she has seafood and rice. 3 She has lunch at two o’clock. She has dinner at about ten o’clock. 4 She likes goingto bars with her friends in the evening. 5 She would like to do some exercise/go to the gym. 6 No, she doesn’t. SUGGESTION You might want to feed in the language students can use for the information exchange, e.g. Do you want to start? You next. Sorry, I don’t understand. Can you repeat, please? 3 Re-group the students, making sure there is an A, B, and С student in each group. Demonstrate the activity by getting a couple of students from one group to talk about the person in their text. Students continue talking about the answers to the questions in exercise 2 and exchanging the information about their person. Monitor and help. Also, check for correct use of the Present Simple, like and would like. Note down any common errors, but feed back on them at a later stage. What do you think? Read through the questions as a class and elicit a few responses from a range of students. Briefly review the use of imperatives, e.g. E a t ..., Don’t have ... for the suggestions about diet. Give students time to discuss the questions in their groups, noting down suggestions for a good diet. Elicit a range of ideas from the class in a short feedback section. SUGGESTION If your students are interested in the topic of food, you could start a mini-project. Students can write about what people eat, using the descriptions in the reading texts as a model. This would work particularly well with students from different countries or regions of the same country. If possible, get students to produce their project on a computer, adding images and references they have researched on the Internet. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 12 Exercise 11 Reading - English food VOCABULARY AND SPEAKING (SBP94) In a restaurant This section reviews and extends the lexical set of food and drink, and recycles would like in the context of ordering in a restaurant. 1 Write the following words from a menu on the board: Starters, Mains, Sandwiches, Side orders, Desserts, Drinks. Elicit examples of things for each category, e.g. soup, pasta, cheese sandwich, chips, chocolate cake, orangejuice. Focus attention on the menu. Give students time to read it through. Encourage students to ask a partner for help with any dishes they don’t recognize, but be prepared to deal with any vocabulary queries students may have. Check pronunciation of the following items, especially the silent I in salmon and the g in Bolognese. Drill the word stress as necessary. tomato /to'm aitoo/ mozzarella /.m D tse'reb/ salmon /'saemon/ spaghetti Bolognese /spo'geti bob'neiz/ mayonnaise /,m ei3'neiz/ mixed salad /.m ikst 'ssebd/ apple pie /,aepl 'pai/ mineral water /'minorol ,wo:to(r)/ sparkling / ’spcuklir)/ Give a few examples of things from the menu that you like and don’t like. Put students in pairs to compare their likes and dislikes. Unit 12 • Please and thank you 115
- 114. Ask students toreport back about their partners preferences. Use this as an opportunity to review the third person -s on likes/doesn’t like. 2 Tell students they are going to hear Liam and Maddy ordering a meal at the Cafe Fresco. Check they understand that Liam is a mans name and Maddy is a womans name. Also check what the letters L, M, and W stand for. Give students time to read through the sentences. [CD 2: Track 63] Focus attention on the example and play the first line of the recording. Play the rest of the recording and get students to complete the task. Ask students to check their answers in pairs. If there is disagreement on the answers, play the recording again and get students to check/amend their answers. Check the answers with the whole class. 3 Divide the class into groups of three. Get students to practise the conversation in their groups. If students have problems with pronunciation, drill key sections of the conversations and get students to practise again. Roleplay 4 Give students time to prepare their roles and what they want to order. Encourage them to rehearse the conversation a few times. Once they are more confident with the language, encourage them not to refer to the text in the Student’s Book, but to work from their own memory. (With a weaker group, you could write simple sentence cues on the board to help with the roleplay.) Monitor and help as necessary. Get students to act out their conversations for the rest of the class. SUGGESTION If you have access to other real menus from British or American restaurants, bring copies of them into class and get students to roleplay other conversations, using the different menus. You will need to be careful that the menus you select contain language that is appropriate for the post-beginner level. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 12 Exercises 8 and 9 Pronunciation - /е/ /i:/ /u:/ III Exercise 10 Food EVERYDAY ENGLISH (SB P9S) Signs all around This section focuses on the meaning of everyday signs and also recycles can/cant in the context o f‘be allowed to’. Lead in to the topic by drawing some of the signs in and around your school on the board. Elicit where you can see them. 1 Focus attention on the signs in exercise 1. Elicit where you can see them. Answers You can see the signs in a variety of places, including shops, offices, restaurants, libraries, hospitals, etc. 2 Pre-teach/check smoke, push/pull, upIdown,floor (= storey), stand (verb). Focus attention on the example. Put students in pairs to continue matching the signs to the meanings. Check the answers. Answers 2 a 3 e 4 j 5 o 6m 7 k 8 i 91 10 n 11 b 12 h 13 g 14 c, d 3 4 > m l [CD 2: Track 64] Explain that students are going to hear eight single lines of conversation. Pre- teach/check gate. Play number 1 and elicit the correct sign (SALE). Play the rest of the recording and get students to find the remaining seven signs. Allow students to check in pairs. If there is any disagreement, play the recording again and get students to check/amend their answers. T 12.9 Answers and tapescript W Are you ready to order? L Well, 1am. Are you ready, Maddy? M Yes, 1am. What’s the soup of the day? W French onion soup. M Lovely. I’d like the French onion soup to start, please. W And to follow? M I’d like the salmon salad with some chips on the side. w Thank you. And you sir? What would you like? L Er - I’d like the tomato and mozzarella salad, followed by the hamburger and chips. w Would you like any side orders? L No, thank you. Just the hamburger. W And to drink? M Sparkling water for me, please. What about you, Liam? L The same for me. We’d like a bottle of sparkling water, please. W Fine. I’ll bring the drinks immediately. 116 Unit 12 • Please and thank you
- 115. SUGGESTION Ask students toresearch other signs in English and bring them into class. Encourage them to note down the signs they see when visiting an English-speaking country or to ask people they know to do so. Students can create a display of the different signs along with their meaning. Answers lb 2 о 3 i 4 e 5 h 61 7 g 8 c/d T 12.10 1 Hey, look! That lovely red jumper is only £19.99 now. 2 Oh, no. I put my money in before I saw the sign. 3 Can you tell me where the toilets are, please? 4 This is our table. It has our name on it. 5 I’mnot waiting. There are so many people. 6 Which floor is our room on? Is it the 6th or 7th? 7 Oh, dear we’re too late. It doesn’t open again until Monday now. 8 I’m sorry, but you can’t walk here. Didn’t you see the sign on the gate? 4 Demonstrate the activity by reading a short conversation and getting students to guess the correct sign, e.g. A Oh, no! I need some stamps, but the post office isn’t open. В Don’t worry. You can buy stamps at the newsagent’s. Students point to the Closed sign. Put students in pairs to continue. Monitor and help as necessary. Remind students not to use any of the wording in the sign if possible, and to keep their chosen sign a secret. Students take it in turns to act out their conversations and get the rest of the class to guess the correct sign. PHOTOCOPIABLE ACTIVITY UNIT 12 Signs all around ТВ pl49 Materials: one copy of the worksheet cut up per group of three students Procedure: Explain that students are going to play a game to help them recognize and remember different signs. • Divide the class into groups of three. Hand out a set of cards to each group. Ask students to spread them across the desk, face down. Demonstrate that students must take it in turns to turn two cards over. If they match (i.e. the sentence matches the picture), the student keeps the pair and has another go. If they are wrong, they must return the cards face down in the same place and the next student can have a go. • Feed in useful language for playing the game, e.g. It’s your turn. Is that right? That isn’t right. That isn’t a pair, etc. • Students play the game in their groups. Monitor and help. • The student with the most cards in each group is the winner. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Don’t forget! Workbook Unit 12 Exercises 12-15 Revision Word list Ask the students to turn to pp 137-8 and go through the words with them. Ask them to learn the words for homework, and test them on a few in the following lesson. Teacher’s Resource Disc Unit 12 Test Unit 12 Skills test Video/DVD Unit 12 The Los Angelesfood trucks on iTools and iTutor Unit 12 • Please and thank you
- 116. Colours and clothes• Present Continuous Opposite verbs • What’s the matter? Here and now Introduction to the unit This unit is called ‘Here and now’ and the main new language focus is the Present Continuous. Students practise the tense in a range of contexts and it is contrasted with the Present Simple. The lexical set of clothes and colours is reviewed and extended, and this is a vehicle for further practice of the Present Continuous. Students also get personalized practice of the tense by describing photos. (You will need to warn students to bring in photos from home for this task - see notes on ТВ pl23.) There is a Reading and listening skills section talking about a change in routine in the life of a millionaire who wants to help people. This consolidates the use of the two present tenses. The vocabulary syllabus continues with a focus on opposite verbs, e.g. teach and learn. The Everyday English section is called What’s the matter? and it focuses on feelings such as tired, worried, minor problems like have a headache, and suggestions with Why don’tyou ...? Language aims Grammar - Present Continuous In New Eleadway Beginner, Fourth edition, students meet and practise the Present Simple relatively early in the course and this tense is consolidated across the units. This unit introduces the Present Continuous after students have had the opportunity for thorough practice of the Present Simple. The unit contrasts the use of the two tenses and gives students the opportunity to practise them together. Despite presenting the Present Continuous later than the Present Simple, the two tenses can still cause confusion for some students. POSSIBLE PROBLEMS Many other languages do not have the equivalent of the Present Continuous, and they use a single present tense to express ‘action which is true for a long time and ‘action happening now or around now’. This can lead students to use the Present Simple in English when they want to refer to action in progress: * You wear a nice suit today. Students also confuse the form of the two tenses. They are already familiar with am/is/are as parts of to be, but they tend to start using them as the auxiliary with the Present Simple, and using doIdoes as the auxiliary with the Present Continuous. Common mistakes are: * She’s play tennis. * What do you doing? * Em comingfrom Spain. * Do they working today? * You’re go to work by bus. The Present Continuous can also be used to refer to the future and this is covered in Unit 14 of the course. Vocabulary Clothes and colours are reviewed and extended and the focus on vocabulary patterns continues with a section on opposite verbs. Everyday English This section is called What’s the matter? and it focuses on feelings, e.g. tired, hungry, etc., minor problems like have a cold/headache, and suggestions to make people feel better. POSSIBLE PROBLEMS English uses to be with hungry, thirsty, tired, cold, and hot, whereas other languages express the same idea with the equivalent of have, e.g. Spanish: Tengo sed; French: Jaifaim . This can lead students to use have with the adjectives in English and make the following mistakes: hI have hunger. ’He has cold. Students may need help distinguishing be cold from have a cold, which is also introduced in Everyday English. Workbook The vocabulary of colours and clothes is reviewed and consolidated. The Present Continuous is practised in all forms in a range of exercises, and the Present Simple and Present Continuous are reviewed in contrast. There is further reading practice, and opposite verbs are also reviewed and practised. The language of talking about feelings and making suggestions from the Everyday English section is also practised further. Photocopiable activity There is a photocopiable activity to review the Present Continuous on ТВ p!50. 118 Unit 13 • Here and now
- 117. Notes on theunit STARTER (SBP96) 1 This Starter section reviews and extends the lexical set of colours and clothes. Focus attention on the colours and the example. Students continue labelling the colours, working in pairs. Check the answers, drilling the pronunciation as necessary. Answers 2 green 6 grey 3 white 7 brown 4 black 8 yellow 5 blue Give an example of your own favourite colour(s) and then elicit examples from the class. If necessary, consolidate the vocabulary by pointing to different objects in the class and eliciting the correct colour. 2 Focus attention on the clothes and the example. Students continue labelling the clothes, working in pairs. Check the answers. Answers and tapescript 1 ajumper 7 trainers 2 a shirt and tie 8 ajacket 3 aT-shirt and shorts 9 a scarf 4 a skirt 10 boots 5 a dress 11 a suit 6 shoes and socks 12 trousers [CD 2: Track 65] Play the recording, getting the students to repeat chorally and individually. Check students can pronounce the vowels sounds in the following words correctly: skirt / shirt /sk3:t/ /|зТ/ trousers /'trauzoz/ boots /bu:ts/ suit /su:t/ tie /tai/ Check students can distinguish shirt and skirt. Elicit which items in exercise 2 are for women (a skirt and a dress). Highlight the use of a with the singular items, e.g. a jumper, and that the plural items do not need a, e.g. boots. Highlight that the word trousers is plural in English, because this may be different in the students’ own language. 3 Demonstrate the activity by talking about the colours of your clothes, e.g. My shirt is blue. My trainers are black and white, etc. Don’t use I ’m wearing at this stage. Elicit examples from one or two students. If necessary, remind them of the s to talk about possessions. Then get students to continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct pronunciation of the colours and clothes. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL _____________________________ Workbook Unit 13 Exercises 1 & 2 Colours and clothes WHAT ARE THEY WEARING? (SB P97) Present Continuous 1 This section introduces the positive forms of the Present Continuous in the context of talking about clothes. A limited number of verbs apart from wear are introduced to help students get used to the form of this new tense. Focus attention on the pictures of the people. Point to Nigel and elicit the missing words (suit and shirt). Give students time to complete the other descriptions, working individually. If they query the use of is/are wearing or the other verb forms, tell them they are in the Present Continuous, but do not go into a full explanation at this stage. [CD 2: Track 66] Play the recording and get students to check their answers. Play the recording again and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Encourage students to reproduce the contracted forms and the linking between -ing and a vowel: He’s wearingagrey suit. If students have problems, drill just the first part of each sentence with wearing, e.g. Nigel’s wearing a grey suit. Lily’s wearing a yellow T-shirt, etc. Then drill the sentences with the other verbs: He’s reading his emails. She’s running, etc. Answers and tapescript 1 Nigel’s wearing a grey suit and a white shirt. He’s reading his emails. 2 Lily’s wearing a yellow T-shirt and white trainers. She’s running. 3 Rick’s wearing blue jeans and a red jumper. He’s playing the guitar. 4 Eva's wearing a green jacket and brown boots. She’s carrying a black bag. 5 Polly and Penny are wearing yellow dresses and blue shoes. They’re eating ice-cream. T13.1 T 13.2 Unit 13 • Here and now 119
- 118. GRAMMAR SPOT 1 Focusattention on the examples and read the notes with the whole class. Ask students to underline the Present Continuous forms in the sentences about Nigel, etc. in exercise 1. 2 Read the notes with the whole class. Remind students of the -ing form by giving students the infinitive and eliciting the -ing form, e.g. wear - wearing, run - running, play - playing, etc. Check students understand that s is the contracted form of is, and ’re the contracted form of are. Focus attention on the sentences and the example. Students complete the other sentences, using contracted forms. Answers You/We/They’re wearing jeans. He/She’s playing in the garden. Highlight that the Present Continuous can be used for actions happening now, e.g. You’re wearing jeans, and around now, e.g. I ’m studying English. Read Grammar Reference 13.1 on pl29 together in class, and/or ask students to read it at home. Encourage them to ask you questions about it. Say wear - wearing, read - reading, sit and elicit sitting. Focus attention on the example and drill the pronunciation. Describe another student without saying their name and get students to guess who it is. Students continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct formation of the Present Continuous. Highlight any errors after the task and encourage students to self-correct as far as possible. Focus attention on the example and then talk about your own clothes. Students take it in turns to stand up and describe their clothes. In larger classes, students can do this in groups. SUGGESTION You can provide further practice of Present Continuous positive forms by getting students to think about what their family and friends are doing. Write the following questions on the board: • What are you doing now? • What are your parents/friends/brothers and sisters/ children doing now? Demonstrate the activity by giving your own answers, e.g. I ’m teaching English. I ’m working in Room ... with Class... My mother’s working at home. Elicit some more examples from one or two students, e.g. I ’m studying English. I ’m sitting in Room ... next to ... My parents are working. Divide the class into pairs and get students to continue exchanging examples. Monitor and check for correct formation of the Present Continuous. Feed back on any common errors with the tense, and if necessary drill the corrected forms. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 13 Exercise 3 Present Continuous - She’s wearing/talking Exercise 5 Present Continuous - Negatives 4 Ч В 1 [CD 2: Track 67] Write a big question mark on the board to show students they are going to practise questions. Focus attention on the examples. Play the recording and let students just listen. Play the recording again and get students to repeat chorally an individually. Make sure students include the contract* form ’s in What’s he doing? and the schwa sound /э/in What are they doing? What’s he doing? /'wots hi 'du:iq/ What are they doing? /'wot э 6ei 'du:ii]/ Check the pronunciation of the names in exercise 1. Focus attention on the language in the speech bubbles and elicit full answers He’s wearing a grey suit and a wh shirt, and He’s reading his emails. Drill the questions and answers chorally and individually. Get students to continue asking and answering about the people in exercise 1, working in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct formation of Present Continuous questions and statements. If students have problems, highlight th* changes from statement to question form on the board: He is wearing a white shirt. What is he wearing? PRACTICE (SB p98) Asking questions 1 This exercise gives practice in the he/she and they forn of Present Continuous questions and statements. Foci attention on the pictures and briefly review the verbs students will need to use {cook, drive, have a shower, write, ski, eat an ice-cream, run, dance, and play golf.). With a weaker group, you could write the verbs on the board. 120 Unit В • Here and now
- 119. Focus attention onthe examples in the speech bubbles and highlight the use of the contracted forms. Elicit one or two more examples and then get students to continue asking and answering in pairs. Monitor and check for correct formation of Present Continuous questions and statements. [CD 2: Track 68] Play the recording and get students to check their answers. If students had problems during the task, play the recording again and get students to repeat. Elicit the extra information provided in each answer. Answers and tapescript 1 A What’s he doing? В He’s cooking dinner for friends. 2 В What’s he doing? A He’s driving to London. 3 A What’s he doing? В He’s having a shower after work. 4 В What’s she doing? A She’s writing an email to her mother. 5 A What’s she doing? В She’s skiing in France. 6 В What’s she doing? A She’s eating a strawberry ice-cream. 7 A What are they doing? В They’re running fast. 8 В What are they doing? A They’re dancing at a party. 9 A What are they doing? В They’re playing golf in the rain. Demonstrate the meaning of mime. Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles and drill the language. Choose an activity that you can mime for the students and get them to guess what you are doing. Encourage them to give sentences in the Present Continuous rather than just call out the infinitive verb forms. Divide the students into pairs and get them to continue miming and guessing. Get them to change roles after each mime. Monitor and check for correct formation of the Present Continuous. • Divide the class into pairs. Assign the role of A or В to each student and hand out the relevant half of the worksheet. Remind students they shouldn’t look at each other’s picture. • Drill the type of questions students can ask, e.g. What is (thefather) wearing?Is (the mother) listening to music?, etc. • Students work in closed pairs to find all six differences. Tell them to circle the part of their picture when they find a difference. Monitor and help as necessary. • Students compare their pictures to check they have found the differences. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 13 Exercise 4 Present Continuous - Questions HE’S ON HOLIDAY AT THE MOMENT (SBP98) Present Simple and Present Continuous This section reviews the Present Simple and contrasts it with the Present Continuous. Exercise 1 highlights the use of Present Simple for facts and repeated actions. 1 Refer students back to the picture of Nigel on SB p97. Tell students they are going to read about his job. Review/checkfeel tired and enjoy and then focus attention on the example. Ask students to complete the rest of the text with the verbs. [CD 2: Track 69] Ask students to check their answers in pairs before playing the recording for a final check. Answers and tapescript Nigel is a businessman. He works from 9.00 to 5.30 every day. He always wears a suit and tie for work. He usually has lunch at his desk at LOO. He arrives home at about 7.00 every evening and he reads to his children before they go to bed. He often feels very tired at the end of the day. 2 This exercise consolidates the use of the Present Continuous for actions happening now and around now. Focus attention on the picture of Nigel and his family. Read the rubric and ask Where is Nigel? (on holiday in Spain). Who is phoning Nigel? (his boss). Where is his boss, Bill? (in England/in his office). [CD 2: Track 70] Play the recording and get students to read the text. PHOTOCOPIABLE ACTIVITY UNIT 13 What are they doing? ТВ pl50 Materials: one copy of the worksheet cut up per pair of students Procedure: This is an information gap using different pictures. Tell students that they are going to work with a partner and ask questions to find six differences between two similar pictures of a family. T 13.4 T 13.5 T13.6 Unit 13 • Here and now 121
- 120. GRAMMAR SPOT Read theexamples with the class. Ask Which verb is the Present Simple? {he wears), Which is the Present Continuous? {he’s wearing). Ask students to discuss the concept questions in pairs. Then check the answers. Answers He’s wearing aT-shirt. (=now) He wears a suit for work. (=true day after day, but not now) Read Grammar Reference 13.2 on pl29 together in class, and/or ask students to read it at home. Encourage them to ask you questions about it. 3 Focus attention on the list of names in the chart. Ask Who’s Karen? {Nigel’s wife). Who’s Bill? {Nigel’s boss). Briefly highlight the use of is/isn’t and are/aren’t by getting students to say which subject can go with which verb {Nigel, Karen, Bill, It + is/isn’t; The children, They + are/aren’t). If necessary, briefly review the pronunciation of aren’t /a:nt/. Demonstrate the activity by eliciting a range of true sentences about Nigel {Nigel is enjoying the holiday/talking to Bill/relaxing.). Students continue making sentences, working individually. Get students to compare their sentences in pairs before checking with the whole class. If students query the use of No, we’re not in line 6 of the dialogue, explain that this is an alternative for No, we aren’t. 4 This exercise consolidates Wh- and Yes/No questions in the Present Continuous. Briefly review the -ing form by saying the infinitive and eliciting the correct form, e.g. have - having, do - doing, swim - swimming, wear - wearing. Focus attention on the examples in the speech bubbles Elicit the wording for question 2 and highlight the falling intonation on the Wh-question: Where are they staying? Students ask and answer the questions in pairs. With weaker students, you could elicit the question forms with the whole class first and then get students to ask and answer. [CD 2: Track 71] Play the recording and get students to check the questions and answers. Answers and tapescript 1 Are they having a good time? Yes, they are. 2 Where are they staying? They’re staying in a house with a swimming pool near the beach. 3 What are the children doing? They’re swimming in the pool. 4 What’s Karen doing? She’s sunbathing. 5 What’s Nigel doing? He’stalking on the phone. 6 Is he wearing a suit? No, he isn’t. 7 Why is Bill calling? Because he has a problem. 5 This exercise consolidates the contrast between the two present tenses. Focus attention on the examples in number 1. Ask Which verb means true day after day, but not now? {lives); Which verb means now? {’s staying Students complete the sentences, working individually Remind them to use contracted forms, and point out that sentence 3 includes never and so needs a positive verb. Allow students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. If there are sentences that students disagree on, deal with them as a whole class, referring students back to the Grammar Spot on SB p99. Answers 2 He usually wears a suit, but today he’s wearing shorts. 3 He never relaxes at work, but now he’s relaxing by the pool. 4 Karen works in a shop, but today she’s enjoying her holiday. 5 The children work hard at school, but today they’re swimming in the pool. 6 It often rains in England and it’s raining there now. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 13 Exercise 6 Present Simple or Continuous? - wear/are wearing Answers Nigel is enjoying the holiday. Nigel istalking to Bill. Nigel is relaxing. Nigel isn’t staying in a hotel. Karen is enjoying the holiday. Karen is relaxing. Karen isn’t swimming in the pool. Bill is calling Nigel. Bill isn’t relaxing. The children are enjoying the holiday. The children are swimming in the pool. It isn’t raining in Spain. They are enjoying the holiday. They aren’t staying in a hotel. T 13.7 122 Unit 13 • Here and now
- 121. PRACTICE (SBplOO) Checkit NOTE In the lesson before exercise 2, A photo o fyou, ask students to bring in a photograph of themselves to talk about in class. Tell them that the photo needs to be an ‘action shot’ and show: • where you are • who you’re with • what you’re doing • what you’re wearing Get students to look up any useful words they need to talk about the picture. Also, bring in a photo of yourself so that you can demonstrate the activity. Questions and answers 1 This exercise practises Yes/No question formation in the Present Continuous. Focus attention on the cues and the example question. If necessary, remind students that the question form is an inversion of the statement form. Get students to write the questions for the exercise, working individually. Check the answers with the whole class. Answers 2 Are we learning Chinese? 3 Are we sitting in a classroom? 4 Are you listening to the teacher? 5 Is the teacher wearing blue trousers? 6 Are all the students speaking English? 7 Are you learning a lot of English? 8 Is it raining today? Model and drill the examples in the speech bubbles. If necessary, review the formation of short answers. Tell students that they have to stand up and ask the questions in a ‘mingle’ activity and that they should give true short answers. Get students to do the activity and monitor and check for correct question formation, intonation, and short answers. Encourage students to give extra information wherever possible. A photo of you 2 Demonstrate the activity by talking about a photo of yourself. Then elicit one or two more examples from students in the class. Get students to continue working in pairs and talking about their photo. Monitor and check for correct use of to be and of the Present Continuous. Note down any common errors, but don’t feed back on them until after the activity. Allow students to talk as freely as they can about their photo. 3 Focus attention on the first pair of sentences and elicit the correct one (I’m wearing a blue shirt today.). Students continue working individually to choose the correct sentences. Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Teacher’s Resource Disc Communicative activity Unit 13 What’s she wearing? READING AND LISTENING (SBplOO) This week is different This section provides skills practice in reading, listening, and speaking, and also consolidates the difference between the Present Simple and Present Continuous. Students also review the Past Simple in the reading text and in the tasks. 1 Exercise 1 is a warm-up activity for the reading stage. It reviews the use of the Present Simple for routines. Pre-teach/check rich and millionaire. Read the examples with the class. Then elicit two or three more examples from the class. Students then continue comparing ideas in closed pairs. Monitor and check, but do not focus too heavily on errors as this activity is to raise interest in the topic, rather than to test accuracy. 2 Focus attention on the photos. Ask Which person is the millionaire? Get students to point to the correct picture. Give students time to read the introduction. If students query Channel 4, elicit other examples of international channels, e.g. BBC, CNN, Discovery Channel, Disney Channel, etc. Check the answers to the questions. Unit 13 • Here and now 123
- 122. Answers They leave theirhome, and live and work with people who need help. The other people don’t know they are rich. 3 The main part of the text contains some new vocabulary. Encourage students to use the context as much as possible to help them understand the new words. Students can also ask a partner or use a dictionary if appropriate. With weaker students, you could pre-teach some or all of the new vocabulary, or ask students to check it before the lesson. The following items are new: be worth (£60 million), teenage, country house, private plane, especially, married couple, apartment block, run a hostel, homeless, miss (your family), build, bring (someone to a place). Give students time to read the paragraph about Colin. Deal with any vocabulary queries they may have. Focus attention on the questions. Elicit the missing word in number 1 (did). Get students to complete the questions, working individually. Check students’ questions. Don’t give the answers in brackets at this stage. Elicit the answer to question 1 and then put students in pairs to continue asking and answering. Check the answers by getting students to ask and answer again across the class (see Answers in brackets above). 4 Give students time to read the rest of the text. Deal with any vocabulary queries they may have. Check pronunciation of the names in the text: Colin /'kolin/, Roger /'гоёзэ/, and Margaret /'ma:grit/. Read sentence 1 and ask True orfalse? Elicitfalse and the correction He went to Manchester by train. Put students in pairs to complete the true/false task. Remind students to provide the corrections where necessary. Check the answers with the class. 4 False. The hostel is for homeless boys. 5 True. 6 False. They think that he is a good teacher. 7 False. He’s enjoying his time with Roger and Margaret. 8 True. Listening 5 Tell students they are going to hear Colin talking in four different situations. Ask students to guess from the information in the reading text who he might be talking to, e.g. his family, Margaret and Roger, etc. [CD 2: Track 72] Focus attention on the questions and on the chart. Play the first conversation and elicit the answers to the two questions (see Answer. below). Play the rest of the recording without stopping. Allow students to compare their answers in pairs, and play the recording again if necessary. Check the answers with the class. Answers and tapescript Who’s he talking to? What’s he talking about? 1 Roger and Margaret They are saying hello. Margaret is thanking Colin for helping them. 2 One of the boys from the hostel. Colin is helping the boy to read. 3 His wife. They are talking about Colin’s time with Roger and Margaret. 4 His sons. They are talking about working hard and meeting the people in Manchester. T 13.8 С =Colin R =Roger M =Margaret CW =Colin’s wife CS =Colin’s sons В =boy in the hostel Conversation 1 С Hello, I’mColin. R Hi, Colin. Lovely to meet you. This is my wife, Margaret. M It’s very good of you to come and help us. С I’m pleased to be here. Conversation 2 С That’s much better. Now, read it again. В There was a man who work -ed, worked hard and his busi- busi... С Business. В ... his business became very sue - sue - cess - ful, successful! С Great. You’re doing well. Conversation 3 С Hello, darling. CW Colin! How are you? We’re all missing you. С I’m missing you too, but I’mhaving a good time. It’s very interesting here. Roger and Margaret are wonderful people. Answers 1 False. Colin went to Manchester by train. 2 False. He’s staying in a flat in a poor area of the city. 3 True. Answers 1 When did he start his business? (He started in business 25 years ago when he was 19.) 2 Where does he live? (He lives in a beautiful, big country house.) 3 Does he have any children? (Yes, he has two teenage sons.) 4 Why is he a lucky man? (He also has a house in Majorca, and apartments in London and New York. He drives a yellow Lamborghini and has a private plane.) 5 Who does he want to help? (He wants to help people who aren’t as lucky as him, especially young people.) T 13.8 124 Unit 13 • Here and now
- 123. Conversation 4 С Hi,boys! CS Dad! Hi! We’re doing our homework. С Hey, that’s good. I’mworking hard too. CS Are you having a good time? С I am. I’mwith some really interesting people. CS Can we meet them? С Yes, you can. I’d like you to meet them. CS See you soon, Dad. С Yeah, can’t wait! See you soon! •Vhat do you think? Read through the questions as a class and elicit a few responses from a range of students. Give students time no discuss the questions in groups. Elicit a range of ideas from the class in a short feedback section. Ask students if they know any other examples of rich people who want to help others. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 13 Exercise 7 Reading - Todays different VOCABULARY AND LISTENING (SBP102) Opposite verbs This section focuses on another vocabulary pattern - opposites. Students first met the concept of opposites with the focus on adjectives in Unit 7. This section focuses on verbs. It reviews a number of verbs students have already met, e.g. ask and answer, and also introduces some new pairings, e.g. win and lose. The set also includes some common phrasal verbs, e.g. put on and take off. 1 Introduce the concept of opposites by saying a number of adjectives and eliciting the opposite, e.g. hot - cold, expensive - cheap, etc. Read the sentences with the class. Ask students to underline the verbs s asking and ’re answering. Explain that these are verbs with opposite meaning. 2 Focus attention on the example. Pre-teach What’s the opposite o f (leave)? to allow students to help each other with the task. Then put students in pairs to continue matching. If appropriate, allow students to use dictionaries. Monitor and help. Check the answers, drilling the pronunciation as necessary. Answers 2 work play 3 buy sell 4 walk run 5 love hate 6 open close 7 turnon turn off 8 start finish 9 get up go to bed 10 remember forget 11 put on take off 12 win lose 3 Focus attention on the pictures. Ask Who are the people? Where are they? Elicit a few ideas about some of the pictures. Elicit the missing verb for sentence 1 as an example (answer). Remind students that they will need to use different tenses in the sentences. With weaker students, elicit the tenses needed (but not the verbs) before students complete the task (Present Simple 1/3/6; Present Continuous 2; Past Simple 4/5; imperative 7). Remind students that never in sentence 6 is followed by a positive verb. Also refer students to the Irregular verbs list on p i42 to check the Past Simple answers. Students complete the sentences, working individually. Monitor and help. Let students check their answers in pairs. Deal with any disagreement on the tense or choice of verb together on the board. [CD 2: Track 73] Play the recording for a final check. As a follow-up, check what one refers to in sentence 2 (car) and it in sentence 7 (the TV). SUGGESTION The reading text contains a series of numbers in different formats. You could list these on the board and get students to check what they refer to: 4 - the number of the TV channel ten - the number of days the millionaire works with people 19 - the age when Colin started his business £60 million - what Colin is worth two - the number of sons Colin has 8th - the floor Margaret and Roger live on one - the number of bedrooms Margaret and Roger have £100,000 - the money Colin wants to give Margaret and Roger T 13.9 Unit 13 • Here and now 125
- 124. Answers and tapescript 1Please don’t ask me any more questions. I can’t answer them. 2 I’m selling my old car, and I’m buying a new one. 3 We always get up at seven in the morning and go to bed at eleven at night. 4 It was cold, soTom took off his T-shirt and put on a warm jumper. 5 I usually walk to school, but yesterday I was late so I ran all the way. 6 John’s playing tennis with Peter today. He always loses. He never wins. 7 Don’t turn off the TV, I’mwatching it! Please turn it on again! Tell students they are going to hear six short conversations that contain opposite verbs. Explain that they don’t need to understand every word, but just to write the pairs of verbs. Also, point out that they should write the verbs in the infinitive as they appear in exercise 2, rather than the full verb forms, i.e. work, rather than I ’m working. Ч И И [CD 2: Track 74] Focus attention on the examples and play conversation 1. Play the rest of the recording and get students to write the correct pairs of verbs. Play the recording again if necessary to let students check/complete their answers. Answers and tapescript 2 start,finish 3 play, work 4 leave, arrive 5 remember, forget 6 open, close T 13.10 1 A Would you like an espresso? В No, thank you, I hate black coffee. A Do you? I love it. 2 A What time does the film start? В 6.45. A And do you know when it finishes? В About 8.30,1think. 3 A Would you like to play tennis after work? В Sorry, I can’t. I’mworking late again. 4 A Our train leaves London at 13.55. В And what time does it arrive in Paris? A 16.05. В Wow! That’sfast. 5 A Did you remember to bring your dictionary? В Oh, sorry. I forgot it. A Not again! 6 A Can I open the window? I’m hot. В Of course. Just remember to close it when you leave the room. pairs to practise the conversations. Monitor and chec If students have problems with pronunciation, drill difficult lines from the recording again. Be prepared 1 give an exaggerated model of the voice range if studei sound a little flat. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 13 Exercise 8 Opposite verbs EVERYDAY ENGLISH (SB P103) What’s the matter? This section presents the language of talking about feeling minor medical problems, and offering suggestions. 1 Focus attention on the pictures and the question What’s the matter? Establish that What’s the matter? i< a common way of asking ‘What’s the problem?’ Focus attention on the example for picture 1. Student continue completing the sentences, working in pairs. МШ1И [CD 2: Track 75] Play the recording through once and get students to check their answers. Answers and tapescript She’s cold. 2 He’s hungry. 3 They’re tired. 4 He’sthirsty. 5 They’re hot. 6 She’sbored. 7 He’sangry. 8 She’s worried. 9 He has a headache 10 She has a cold Refer students to | ) on SB p!22. Put students in Play the recording again and get students to ч chorally and individually. Make sure they гг:«я tired and bored as one syllable - /'taiod/, /Ъзш than */'taired/, */'bo:red/. Ask students to mn cold and have a cold to check they have uncs-a difference. Get students to work in pairs. Student А p e s a cartoon and Student В says the corresponds^: Focus attention on the photos and two gappes conversations. Give students time to compie-j with words from exercise 1. i i m n [CD 2: Track 76] Play the recording students to check their answers. Highlight the Why don’tyou ... ?for making suggestions. Шi query I’ll in conversation 1, explain that it s z mpi making an offer, but don’t go into an exp1an s grammar behind it. Play the recording again and get students to ■ Students practise the conversations in pairs 126 Unit 13 • Here and now
- 125. Answers and tapescript Conversation1 A What’s the matter? В I’mtired and thirsty. A Why don’t you have a cup of tea? В That’s a good idea. A Sit down. I’ll make it for you. Conversation 2 С What’s the matter? D I have a bad headache. С Oh dear! Why don’t you take some aspirin? D I don’t have any. С It’s OK. I have some. : oleplay 3 Check comprehension of the ideas in the lists. Elicit one or two more conversations from the class and then get students to continue in closed pairs, using the words from exercise 1. Monitor and check for correct use of the adjectives and Why don’t you ... ? SUGGESTION Try to integrate language from the Everyday English sections in your lessons and encourage students to do the same. This language can be used quite naturally in the classroom context to reinforce the communicative value of what the students are learning. Good (morning). How are you? Em sorry Em late. Have a nice day. See you later. I don’t know. I don’t understand. Please./Thank you. How do you spell... ? What’s the date today? Is there a ... near here? Pardon? All right. Excuse me. (Em) sorry. That’s OK. Can I ... ? What’s the matter? Em ... Are you all right? I can’tfind m y ... My ... doesn’t work. I can’t get on the Internet. Why don’tyou ... ? That’s a good idea. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 13 Exercises 9 and 10 What’s the matter? Don’t forget] Workbook Unit 13 Exercises 11-16 Revision Word list Ask the students to turn to p i38-9 and go through the words with them. Ask them to learn the words for homework, and test them on a few in the following lesson. Teacher’s Resource Disc Unit 13 Test Unit 13 Skills test Video/DVD Unit 13 Clothes on iTools and iTutor Unit 13 • Here and now 127
- 126. Introduction to theunit This final unit of the course is called ‘It’s time to go!’ and it has two main themes - travel and holidays, and life events. Students have already practised talking about the present and the past, and now this unit allows them to look forward by introducing the language of future plans - the Present Continuous with future meaning and going to. Students are given plenty of practice in talking about future plans in the context of planning a trip, and in talking about their own future. The theme of life events also provides a review of past, present, and future. Students get the opportunity to review vocabulary and grammar in two full-page Revision sections that pull together the key language of the course. Integrated reading and speaking practice is provided in the form of a jigsaw reading on life events. This includes a speaking section in which students use the language of talking about the past, present, and future in a personalized way. The Beginner level rounds off with a second set of social expressions in the Everyday English section. Language aims Grammar - future plans There are a range of ways of expressing the future in English and in this final unit we focus on just two - the Present Continuous for the future and going to. Our aim in the unit is exposure to the forms, and not mastery of them. Students will be familiar with the form of the Present Continuous from Unit 13 and the form ofgoing to is quite similar. Both have the verb to be + an -ing form. In this unit they are presented as having pretty much the same meaning - Future plans Grammar revision • Vocabulary revision Social expressions (2) It's tim e to go! a future intention. The key aspect of the Present Continuous for future is arrangement, but this is not focused on in this unit. Neither is there any discrimination practice where students have to choose one of the forms. In a the work on future forms in this unit, both in the presentation and the practi sections, students are carefully guided to use one of the forms, not the other. POSSIBLE PROBLEMS Students might wonder why going to is sometimes used and sometimes not. The easiest answer is to say ‘Both are possible to talk about the future’. This is not the right time or level to attempt to draw out the differences between the two uses. Some students may confuse the form of the Present Continuous and going to. Again, at this stage in their learning, this is to be expected. Just let them have fun with talking about their own future plans. They will practise the Present Continuous and going to, and other ways of referring to the future, in later learning. Question words The questions words students have met in previous units are reviewed as part of the practice of talking about future plans. Grammar revision A page of the unit is dedicated to revising the key tenses in the Beginner level, including question formation and negatives. This section also reviews other areas of grammar from across the course, including some/any, there is, this/that, etc. Vocabulary revision There is also a page of vocabulary revision, which focuses on collocation, words that are linked, e.g. airport and planes, and words that don’t belong in a set. A pronunciation section focuses on word stress and recognizing words that rhyme. Everyday English This section includes a second set of social expressions, extending the language students practised in Unit 3. It focuses on a range of everyday situations including saying goodbye/seeing someone off at the station, saying sorry for breaking something, and talking about plans for the weekend. Workbook The Present Continuous for future plans is consolidated in the positive and question forms. There are further grammar and vocabulary revision exercises, and there is an exercise on form filling. The social expressions from the Everyday English section are also practised further. Photocopiable activity There is a photocopiable activity to review the language of future plans on ТВ p151. (This involves planning a trip, so you might want to bring in maps and tourist brochures or leaflets relating to different continents/countries to provide students with ideas.)
- 127. Notes on theunit STARTER (SB pi04) 1 This Starter section reviews and extends the lexical set of transport, and also reviews the Present Simple and Past Simple. Focus attention on the pictures and elicit the correct word for number 1 (car). Give students time to complete the task, working in pairs. Check the answers with the whole class, making sure students can spell and pronounce the words correctly. Answers 1 car 5plane 2 train 6boat 3 bus 7bicycle 4 coach 8motorbike 2 Write the example from the Student’s Book on the board and underline come and came. Ask Why come’? (Present Simple to talk about what usually happens) and Why came? (Past Simple for a single action in the past). Elicit other examples from the class. If necessary, briefly explain the uses of come and go. We usually use come to describe movement to where the speaker is now and go to describe movement away from where the speaker is now. Compare: I usually come to school by bus. (The students are at school now.) I usually go to work by train. Elicit a range of further examples from the class. SEVEN COUNTRIES IN SEVEN DAYS! (SBP104) Future plans This section introduces going to and the Present Continuous for future in the context of plans for a trip. This is a very natural context for carrying the target language and one that is easily personalized by the class. Students get initial exposure to the future forms in context in the questions in exercise 1. Don’t insist that they use these forms in their answers, but allow them to have a go if they want to. Lead in to the topic of a sightseeing trip around Europe by giving the names of the cities on the itinerary on SB ppl04-105 and eliciting some of the most famous places to visit, e.g. London - Buckingham Palace. Try to include as many of the sights listed in the itinerary as possible. 1 Focus attention on the photo and on rubric 1. What are their names? (Bill and Gloria Bigelow /'bigalou/) What nationality are they? (American) Where are theyfrom? (Columbus, Ohio). Focus attention on the map. Explain that it shows Bill and Gloria’s route across Europe. Elicit one or two countries that they are going to visit, e.g. Germany, Italy, etc. Then get students to continue naming the countries in pairs. Monitor and help as necessary. 2 Refer students to the itinerary on SB ppl04-105. Set a time limit of about two minutes to encourage students to find just the information they need to check their answers. Tell them not to worry about new vocabulary at this stage. Check the answers with the class. It’s fine for students to give just the places and forms of transport in their answers. Don’t insist that they use the future forms at this stage and leave the explanation of the structures until you focus on the Grammar Spot section. 3 This exercise includes both Present Continuous and going to for future plans. It has been set up to let students get used to seeing the structures in context in sentences 1-4 before they need to produce the new forms in sentences 5-8. Encourage students to use the context to help them understand any new vocabulary. The following words are new and may need explaining, especially with weaker classes: overnight, check into, cruise, boat ride, canal, tunnel, autoroute (- motorway), flight. Unit 14 • It’s time to go! 129
- 128. Elicit the answerto number 1 as an example (London). Also explain that students will sometimes need to write a verb. Elicit the answer to number 5 (drive) as an example. Get students to complete the sentences, working individually. Monitor and help as necessary. [CD 2: Track 77] Get students to check in pairs before playing the recording as a final check. Play the recording of sentences 1-4 again and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Students then take it in turns to practise the sentences in closed pairs. Monitor and check. If students have problems with the pronunciation of going to, drill key examples and get students to practise the sentences again. Answers and tapescript 1 On Sunday they’re flying to London. 2 On Monday they’re going to have a bus tour of London. 3 On Tuesday they’re travelling through Belgium and into Germany. 4 On Wednesday they’re going to drive down the ‘Romantic Road’ to the Alps and Austria. 5 On Thursday they’re goingto drive over the Europa Bridge. 6 On Friday they’re goingto stop in Verona. They're going to see Juliet’s balcony. 7 On Saturday evening they’re having dinner in a bistro in Paris. 8 On Sunday morning they’re going to the Louvre to see the Mona Lisa. In the evening, they’re flying back to the US. [CD 2: Track 79] Playing the recording and ge students to check their answers. With weaker students, write the questions on the board to allow students to check the verb forms. Get pairs of students to ask and answer questions 1 anc 2 across the class. Encourage them to give long answer: and so practise the two future forms (see Answers in brackets below). Students then ask and answer in closed pairs. Monitor and check. If students have problems with the form or pronunciation, drill key examples and get students to practise again. Answers and tapescript 1 What are they doing on Tuesday? (They’re travelling through Belgium into Germany.) 2 What are they goingto do on Wednesday? (They’re going to drive down the ‘Romantic Road’ to the Alps and Austria.) 3 When are they goingto drive over the Europa Bridge? (They’re going to drive over the Europa Bridge on Thursday.) 4 What are they goingto do in Verona? (They’re going to seeJuliet’s balcony.) 5 Where are they having dinner on Saturday? (They’re having dinner in a bistro in Paris.) 6 When are they goingto the Louvre? (They’re going to the Louvre on Sunday morning.) 7 When are they flying back to the US? (They’re flying back to the US on Sunday evening.) T 14.1 T 14.3 ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 14 Exercises 1 and 2 Future plans - going to study/work/travel Questions 4 IIEI1 [CD 2: Track 78] This section focuses on Wh- questions with the future forms. Focus attention on the examples. Play the recording and get students to repeat chorally and individually. Encourage them to reproduce the correct stress and falling intonation on the questions. What are they doing on Sunday? What are they going to do on Monday? 5 Elicit the complete question about Tuesday (What are they doing on Tuesday?). Give students time to write the rest of the questions, working individually. Monitor and check. If students mix the two future forms, remind them to look carefully at the cues and use going to only where specified. PRACTICE (SB p!06) Eddie’s plans 1 This exercise consolidates question formation with the Present Continuous, reviews Wh- question words fron previous units, and introduces How long... ?to refer to duration in the future. Focus attention on the photo and on rubric 1. Ask What’s his name? (Eddie). What’s he doing? (He’s lookin at a map and talking to a friend about his holiday plans.) Pre-teach/check rucksack, go on safari, sleep in a tent, byjeep, and cost (verb). I [CD 2: Track 80] Focus attention on the example and play the first two lines of the recording. Then get students to complete the conversation with the question words. Allow students to use the context to help them place how long in the correct line of the conversation. Get students to check in pairs before playing the whok recording. Check the answers with the class. T 14.4 130 Unit 14 • It’s time to go!
- 129. Answers and tapescript F=Friend,E =Eddie F What are you doing? E I’mplanning my holiday. F Oh, where are you going? E I’mgoing to South Africa. It’s my first time. F Oh, you’re so lucky! When are you leaving? E I’m leaving next Monday morning. F Who are you going with? E I’mnot going with anyone. Just me and my rucksack. F Where are ou going to stay? E Well, I’m staying with friends in Cape Town. Then I’mgoing on safari. I’mgoingto sleep in a tent. F Fantastic! And how are you going to travel? E By plane to Cape Town, of course, and then by jeep when I’m on safari. F By jeep! How exciting. And how long are you goingto stay? E Just two weeks. I’d like to stay longer, but Ican’t. It’stoo expensive. F How much is it going to cost? E About £2,000. F Mmmm, that’s quite a lot. Well, have a great time. I can’t wait to see your photos. E Oh, yes, I’m goingto take a lot of photos. Get students to practise the conversation in closed pairs. Monitor and check. If students have problems with pronunciation, drill key sections of the conversations and get students to practise again in closed pairs. 2 This exercise gives students the opportunity to practise WTi-questions using he/she/it forms with going to and the Present Continuous. Focus attention on the first question and the examples in the speech bubbles. Elicit the full answer for the second question (Because he wants to see hisfriends and he wants to go on safari.). Drill the language, highlighting the falling intonation on the Wh- questions. Then elicit one or two more exchanges in open pairs. With weaker classes, elicit the full question forms with the whole class first. If necessary, point out that we use the Present Continuous, not going to, with to go: I ’m going on holiday next week. NOT *I’m going to go on holiday next week. Students continue asking and answering in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of the future forms, and for intonation in the questions. Answers A Where’s he going? В He’s goingto South Africa. A Why is he going there? В Because he wants to see his friends and he wants to go on safari. A Who is he going with? В He isn’t going with anyone. A When is he leaving? В He’s leaving next Monday morning. A How is he going to travel? В He’s going to travel by plane and by jeep. A Where is he goingto stay? В He’s goingto stay with friends in Cape Town. Then he’s going on safari and he’s goingto sleep in a tent. A How long is he goingto stay? В He’s going to stay two weeks. Talking about you 3 Students are given the opportunity to personalize the language by talking about their own short-terms plans and also their holiday plans. Focus attention on the example in the speech bubbles. Get students to ask you the questions in the list, using either the Present Continuous or going to. Encourage students to ask you follow-up questions about your holiday. With weaker students, write a list of short answers on the board and elicit the correct question word, e.g. France (where?) In August (when?) For three weeks (how long?) In a hotel (where?) By plane (how?) Because I want to relax on the beach (why?) Briefly revise tomorrow and on with days of the week. Elicit one or two more exchanges in open pairs and then get students to continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for correct use of the future forms, but don’t interrupt the students during the pairwork. If you have time, you could ask students to report back about their partner and so practise the he/she statement form, e.g. (Misha) is going to the cinema after the lesson. Feed back on any common errors in a brief follow-up session. Check it 4 Focus attention on the example. Students continue working individually to write in the missing words. Remind them to add just one word each time. Get students to check their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. If there is any disagreement, ask students to write the relevant sentences on the board and then correct any mistakes as a class. Answers 2 I’mgoing to see some friends tonight. 3 When are they goingto France? 4 She’s seeing the doctor tomorrow. 5 What time are you going to leave? 6 I’m going to the cinema on Saturday evening. Unit 14 • It’s time to go! 131
- 130. PHOTOCOPIABLE ACTIVITY UNIT 14Planning a trip TBp151 Materials: one copy of the worksheet per group of three students Procedure: Tell students that they are going to work in groups to plan the trip of a lifetime. • Ask Where would you love to go in the world? Elicit a range of ideas from the class. • Divide the class into groups of three. Hand out one copy of the worksheet to each group. Explain that students are going to plan a trip that will last seven days. They have a lot of money and they can go wherever they like, in the country where students are studying, or somewhere else. • Focus attention on the day sections of the itinerary. Explain that students need to add the date for each section and provide the detail of the places and activities. Give students a few moments to look at the worksheet and elicit possible ideas to go in each gap. • Feed in useful language for the planning stage, e.g. Where would you like to go? Where can we stay in ... ? What can we do in ... ? Where can we go next? • Give students time to plan their trip, referring to any maps or travel information you may have. In a monolingual class, encourage students to use English as much as possible, but don’t be surprised if students revert to their own language at times. Monitor to help with ideas and vocabulary. If students need to modify the text on the itinerary, let them make a few simple changes. • Give examples of how students can talk about their trip, using the Present Continuous and going to to talk about plans, e.g. For our trip o f a lifetime, we're going to ... . Werefly ingfrom ... Airport to .... On the ... of... were going to visit..., etc. Students take it in turns to report back to the rest of the class about their trip. Encourage students from each group to speak and the rest of the class to ask questions. Don’t expect students to use the Present Continuous and going to completely accurately. Just let them have fun with the activity and feed back on any common errors after the task. • If appropriate, ask students to vote for the most exciting trip. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 14 Exercise 3 Future plans - Questions and answers VOCABULARY REVISION (SB P107) Words that go together This section contains a range of activities that review some of the key vocabulary from across the course. Students focus on common collocations, words that have a conceptual connection, and the odd one out’ in a set of words. There is also a set of exercises that focus on pronunciation, including word stress and words that rhyme. If appropriate, you could set up some or all of the exercises as a race/competition. Students work in groups and do each exercise under a time limit. (They can do the pairwork in exercise 1 after the competition.) They keep their scores for each exercise and add them up at the end. The team with the top final score is the winner. (Adapt the following notes to team work if you choose to do the revision as a competition.) 1 Focus attention on the first collocation as an example. Pre-teach/check carefully. Students continue matching, working in pairs. If necessary, get them to refer back to earlier vocabulary sections in the Student’s Book to help them. Check the answers with the class. Answers ride a bike drive carefully go sightseeing work hard have dinner with friends take a photograph do your homework pay bills on the Internet wear a suit Focus attention on the example in the speech bubble. Give one or two more examples of your own, including one with go sightseeing, e.g. I ’m going sightseeing on the coast next month. If necessary, remind students that we use the Present Continuous with go, rather than say going to go. Elicit a few more examples from individual students and encourage follow-up questions from the rest of the class. Students then continue in closed pairs. Monitor and check for common errors in the vocabulary and use of going fo/Present Continuous, but don’t interrupt to correct. Highlight the errors after the pairwork in a brief feedback session. 2 This activity reviews places, jobs, and objects and the connections between them. Focus attention on the examples. Elicit other possible sentences People catch a train at the station./You can travel by trainfrom stations. 132 Unit 14 • It’s time to go!
- 131. Point out thatthe sentences should talk in general about People/You/A ..., rather than be personal statements with I. Students continue making the connections in pairs. Check the answers. Answers station-train: Trains travel between stations./People catch trains from stations./You can travel by train from stations, beach-swimming: People go swimming at the beach./You can go swimming at the beach. journalist-newspaper: Journalists write for newspapers./ Ajournalist writes for a newspaper. airport-planes: Planes fly between airports./People catch planes from airports. shampoo-chemist’s: People buy shampoo from a chemist’s./ You can buy shampoo from a chemist’s, fridge-kitchen: People usually put their fridge in the kitchen, nurse-hospital: Nurses work in hospitals./A nurse works in a hospital, waiter-menu: Waiters bring menus./A waiter brings you the menu. 3 Read the rubric with the class and focus attention on the example. Elicit why bridge is different (A ‘bridge’ is part o f a city but the others are allforms o f transport.). Students then continue the task, working in pairs. Check the answers. Answers 2 waiter - A waiter is ajob, but the others are people in a family. 3 awful - Awful is a negative adjective, but the others are positive. 4 trousers - You wear trousers on your legs, but you wear the others on your feet. 5 laptop - A laptop is a piece of equipment, but the others are furniture. 6 cooker - A cooker is a piece of equipment, but the others are jobs. ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 14 Exercise 7 Lists - Monday/Tuesday Exercise 8 Words that go together - tired/work hard Pronunciation 4 Write these words on the board and ask How many syllables?: train (one), waiter (two), hospital (three). If necessary show where the two- and three-syllables words divide: wailter, hos/pi/tal. Demonstrate the two stress patterns in the chart. Write the words on the board and ask Where’s the stress?: pilot (stress on first syllable) and hotel (stress on second syllable). Point out that the bigger circle in the pattern indicates the stressed syllable. Students complete the chart, working in pairs. [CD 2: Track 81] Play the recording and let students check their answers. Play the recording again and get students to listen and repeat. Answers and tapescript • • • • pilot hotel women arrive married shampoo chocolate enjoy Focus attention on the words with three syllables and the example. Elicit a word for the other two stress patterns: stress on the second syllable (banana) and stress on the third syllable (souvenir). [CD 2: Track 82] Students complete the chart, working in pairs. Then play the recording and let students check their answers. Play the recording again and get students to listen and repeat. Answers and tapescript • • • • • • • • • photograph designer magazine vegetable assistant understand interesting banana souvenir 5 И Е»Д [CD 2: Track 83] Focus attention on the example and play the first three words of the recording. Explain that words that have the same spelling sometimes have different pronunciation. Remind students to focus on the sounds in each set of words rather than the spelling. Play the recording and get students to underline the words that rhyme. Play the recording again and get students to listen and check, and then repeat. Answers and tapescript 1 some home come 2 goes knows does 3 were here her 4 make steak speak 5 near wear there 6 eat great wait If appropriate, refer students to the Phonetic symbols chart on SB p i43 and get them to match the sounds to the words in exercise 5. T 14.5 T 14.6 Unit 14 • It’s time to go! 133
- 132. READING AND SPEAKING(SB P108) Life’s big events The final skills section in the Beginner Student’s Book gives students an opportunity to pull together the three main time references in the course - past, present, and future. The jigsaw reading task on life’s big events describes the past, present, and future of three people of different ages and backgrounds. The section integrates listening, reading, and speaking and gives students opportunities to personalize some of the key language. 2 Focus attention on the photos of the people and check pronunciation of the names: Milena /'mileno/, Georg /'geo:g/, Archie /'a:tji:/. [CD 2: Track 84] Read the questions as a class. Play the recording through once and get students to answer the questions in pairs. Play the recording again to let students complete/check their answers about who talks about what. Elicit any other details that the students understood from the recording, but don’t focus too much on details about jobs and studies, as students will exchange this information in exercises 3 and 4. T 14.8 NOTE Encourage students to use the context in the reading texts as much as possible to help them with new words. They can also pool their knowledge of vocabulary when working in groups, or, if appropriate, use a dictionary. Students may need help with the following words in terms of meaning and/or pronunciation. You may want to pre-teach/check (some of) the items before students do the reading task. Nationalities: Scottish, Czech /tjek/; Place names: Prague /рга:д/, Munich /'mjumik/, Glasgow /'glaesgou/, Edinburgh /'edinboro/; Jobs/Work: journalist/'d33:nolist/, chef/Jef/, housewife /'hauswaif/; banking, research company /ri's3:tj ,клтрэш/; Subjects: psychology /sai koisd^i/, economics /.iiko'nomiks/, modern languages /,nmdn lcEggwid3iz/, biology /bai'nladji/, chemistry /'kemistri/,physics /'fiziks/, medicine /'medsn/; Verbs: hope, move (to another country), look forward to something, go out (with someone), work in developing countries /di.vebpir) 'kAntriz/, train (other people to do something) 1 Lead into the topic by writing Life’s big events on the board and eliciting examples, e.g. having a baby, going to university, etc. Pre-teach/check get married (irregular past got), grow up (irregular past grew), and study. Focus attention on the example and then get students to order the events, working in pairs. Check the answers with the class. Answers 1 was born 2 grew up 3 went to school 4 met a boyfriend/girlfriend/studied at university 5 studied at university/met a boyfriend/girlfriend 6 got married Answers Milena talks about her parents and where she lives. Georg talks about his wife, his studies, and where he lives. Archie talks about his studies, his girlfriend, and where he lives. T 14.8 Milena Dusek My parents are divorced. My father is ajournalist, and works for a newspaper called Blesk. My mother works as a chef in a restaurant in the Old Town. I see my father quite often. He lives nearby. Georg Reinhardt I was born in Frankfurt, where I grew up and went to school. I studied architecture at the University of Munich. I met Karlotta at university, she was a student of modern languages. We moved to Berlin in 1995. Archie McCrae I went to Drumchapel High School. I studied biology, chemistry, and physics. At school I met Fiona, and we started going out when we were 16. We studied medicine together at the University of Edinburgh, and now we live in Edinburgh. 3 Students did a jigsaw reading in Unit 12, but each stage of this task needs careful setting up. Put students into three groups, A, B, and C. (With larger classes, have multiple sets of the three groups.) Assign a text to each group and remind students to read only their text: Group A - Milena Group В - Georg Group С - Archie Write an example about your own past, present, and future in jumbled order on the board, e.g. I really enjoy (my job). I ’m (getting married) next year. I was born in (the USA). Ask Past, present orfuture? and get students to say the correct sentence for each time period. See above Note about new vocabulary. You may want to pre-teach/check some of the items, especially with weaker groups. Get students to read their text quickly to find the information about their person’s past, present, and future. Give students time to compare their ideas. Monitor and help as necessary. 134 Unit 14 • It’s time to go!
- 133. 4 Give studentstime to read the questions and deal with any queries. Get them to work in their groups, read their text again, and answer the questions. They can ask others in their group for help with vocabulary, or use a dictionary. Remind them to note down the answers to each one. Monitor and help as necessary. Answers Milena 1 In Prague. 2 In Prague, with her mother and two sisters. 3 In Prague. 4 Her father is ajournalist and her mother is a chef. 5 She goes to an international school in Prague. 6 English, psychology, and economics. 7 Next summer. 8 She’s goingto study at a language school. 9 She’s excited, and a little bit worried. Georg 1 In Frankfurt. 2 In Berlin, with his wife and three children. 3 In Frankfurt. 4 His wife is a housewife. 5 In Frankfurt. 6 He isn’t studying now. He teaches architecture. 7 Next year. 8 He’s goingto teach at the University of California. 9 He’s looking forward to it. Archie 1 In Glasgow. 2 In Edinburgh, with his girlfriend. 3 In Glasgow. 4 His father is a doctor and his mother works for a research company. 5 He went to Drumchapel High School. 6 He studied medicine at university. 7 Next week. 8 He’s going to work in a hospital there. 9 He’s excited, but a bit nervous. Re-group the students, making sure there is an A, B, and С student in each one. Demonstrate the activity by getting a couple of students from one group to ask and answer questions 1 and 2 about the person in their text. Students continue comparing and exchanging the information about their person. Monitor and help. Also check for correct use of the Present Simple, Past Simple, and future forms. Note down any common errors, but feed back on them at a later stage. 'alking about you 5 Read the introduction with the class. Elicit some example endings for the sentence starters in the speech bubble. Focus attention on the first expression in the box and elicit possible endings about Milena, Georg, and Archie, e.g. I was born in Prague./I was born in Frankfurt./I was born in Glasgow. Put students in pairs. Get them to continue underlining expressions in the texts. Then check the answers. Answers She was born in Prague./I was born in Frankfurt, where I grew up./ He was born in Glasgow, where he grew up. She lives with her mother and two sisters./He lives with his wife and three children. She’s going to study business./She’s going to London to study at a language school./She’s going to stay with an English family./They’re goingto live on the university campus./His wife is goingto teach German./They’re goingto Zambia./They’re going to train doctors and nurses. I hope the family are nice./l hope I like English food./l hope we can help them. My father’s ajournalist and works for a newspaper./My mother works as a chef./His mother works for the research company, Bayer. She’s studying English, psychology, and economics./l studied architecture at the University of Munich./I studied biology, chemistry, and physics./We studied medicine together at the University of Edinburgh. She’s excited about goingto London./They’re all very excited about the trip./We’re very excited, but a bit nervous. 6 Students write sentences about themselves, drawing from the expressions in exercise 5 and facts about their own past, present, and future. 7 Review key question words by giving a short answer and eliciting the question word, e.g. in 1981 (when?), from Germany (where?), for two weeks (how long?), etc. Also review the expressions Nice to meet you. And you. Demonstrate the conversation with a confident student. Encourage him/her to ask as many follow-up questions as possible. With weaker students, write a range of question words on the board along with topics that students can refer to, e.g. year/place born,family, education, work, marriage, plans/ambitions. If possible, pair students with someone they don’t usually work with so that the roleplay feels authentic. You could set up the classroom to resemble a party by rearranging the furniture, playing music, etc. Give students time to roleplay their conversations. Students who finish quickly can work with a new partner and do the roleplay again. Monitor and check, helping as necessary. Note any common errors in the use of tenses and question formation, but don’t feed back on them until after the roleplay. Unit 14 • It’s time to go! 13
- 134. SUGGESTION Try to reviewtenses by talking about what students did/are going to do at different times, e.g. last/next weekend, during the last/next holidays, on their last/ next birthday, etc. You can set up short pair or group work activities as ‘warm-up’ stages at the start of a class, or as ‘fillers’ for students who finish a task quickly. GRAMMAR REVISION (SBpllO) Tenses This section includes a review of tenses including negatives and question formation, along with revision of prepositions, some!any, there is, this/that, a/an, possessive s, adverbs, adjective + noun word order, like/I’d like. Encourage students to use the resources in the SB by referring them back to the Grammar Reference on SB pp 123-9 and the Irregular verbs list on pl42. 1 Point to the photo on SB p i08 and ask students What can you remember about Archie McCrae? Elicit any information students can remember, but don’t correct any grammar mistakes they may make. Focus attention on the example. Ask Why ‘live’and not ‘lives’? (because the sentence is about Archie and Fiona, not just Archie). Students complete the sentences, working individually. Allow them to check in pairs before checking with the whole class. If there is any disagreement, ask students to write the relevant sentences on the board and then correct any mistakes as a class. Ask Past, present, or future? about each sentence and also check the spelling of the verb forms. Answers 2 Archie has a brother and a sister. 3 His mother works for the research company, Bayer. 4 Archie grew up in Glasgow. 5 He studied medicine at university. 6 He and Fiona are going to work in Zambia soon. Questions 2 Focus attention on the example. Ask Why ‘do’and not ‘did’? (because the question is about the present). Tell students they are going to need a range of tenses to complete the rest of the questions. Students complete the questions, working individually. Allow them to check in pairs before checking with the whole class. If there is any disagreement, ask students to write the relevant questions on the board and then correct any mistakes as a class. Ask Past, present, or future? about each question and also remember to check the word order in the questions. Answers 2 How many brothers and sisters does Archie have? 3 Who does his mother work for? 4 Where did he grow up/go to school? 5 What did he study at university? 6 Where are he and Fiona going to work soon? Check it 3 Focus attention on the example. Ask Why ‘comes’and not ‘come? (because the sentence is about he). Tell students there are a range of mistakes in the rest of the exercise. Also explain that sometimes a word is wrong and sometimes there is a word missing. Students correct the mistakes, working in pairs. Check the answers with the class. If there is any disagreement, ask students to write the relevant questions on the board and then correct any mistakes as a class. Answers 2 I don’t want to go out. 3 She is 18years old. 4 Where do you live? 5 I went to Italy last year. 6 He has/l/you/we/they have a dog and a cat. 7 I don’t/can’t understand you. 8 What did you do last night? 9 I’m goingto see a film tonight. 10 What are you going to do/What are you doing this weekend? Sentence completion 4 Explain that in this exercise students need to choose the correct word to complete each sentence/question. Focus attention on the example. Ask Why ‘some’? (because it’s a positive sentence). Give students time to complete the exercise, working in pairs. Check the answers with the class. If there is any disagreement, write the relevant sentences/questions on the board and then correct any mistakes as a class. Answers 2 a 3 b 4 a 5 a 6 b 7 b 8 a 9 b 10 a ADDITIONAL MATERIAL Workbook Unit 14 Exercise 4 Future plans - What are you doing tomorrow? Exercise 5 All tenses Exercise 6 Irregular verbs 136 Unit 14 • It’s time to go!
- 135. EVERYDAY ENGLISH (SBpill) Social expressions (2) This section focuses on a range of different situations and includes expressions for wishing people good luck, apologizing, saying thank you, etc. 1 Focus attention on the photos. Ask Where are they? about each one (1 in a school/university, 2 at home, 3 in the street, 4 in a car/in the street, 5 in the street, 6 on a train/at the station). l i t H [CD 2: Track 85] Play the recording through once and get students to read and listen to the conversations. (See H t A'i below.) Focus attention on conversation 1 and elicit As first missing word (luck.). Students continue completing the conversations in pairs. М ЕШ [CD 2: Track 85] Play the recording again and get students to check their answers. Check understanding of the following expressions: do my best ( - try as hard as I can), it doesn’t matter (= it isn’t a problem), anything special? (= anything different or unusual). Also check the pronunciation of special /'spejl/, journey /'d33:ni/, and pleasure /'р1езэ/. Answers and tapescript 1 A Good luck in the exam! I hope it goes welt. В Thanks. I’ll do my best. A See you later. Bye! 2 С Oh, no! D Don’t worry. It doesn’t matter. С I’m so sorry! 3 E Have a good weekend! F Thanks! Same to you! What are you doing? Anything special? E We’re goingto a birthday party. (F Oh, lovely!) 4 G Goodbye! Drive carefully! H Thanks! I’ll phone you when I arrive. G See you again soon! 5 I I have a present for you. J For me? Why? I It’sjust to say thank you. J That’s so kind of you! 6 К Bye! And thanks for everything! L It was a pleasure. We enjoyed having you. 2 Put students in pairs to rehearse the conversations. If they sound a little flat, play the recording again, drilling the intonation chorally and individually. Encourage students to start high to achieve a good voice range. Get students to choose two or three conversations to learn. Encourage students to test each other on their lines and prompt each other as necessary. If possible, rearrange the room to make the situations feel more authentic and bring in basic props. Ask students to put their books down and perform the conversations from memory. Be prepared to prompt students a little, or ask other students to do so. Get students to stand up to perform the conversations, as it will help their pronunciation and acting skills! ADDITIONAL MATERIAL_______________________________________________ Teacher’s Resource Disc Communicative activity Unit 14 The category game Workbook Unit 14 Exercise 9 Form filling - Questions and answers Exercise 10 Social expressions (2) Don’t forget1 Workbook Unit 14 Exercises 11 and 12 Revision Word list Ask the students to turn to p i39 and go through the words with them. Ask them to learn the words for homework, and test them on a few in the following lesson. Teacher’s Resource Disc Unit 14 Test Unit 14 Skills test Stop and check 4 (Units 11-14) Progress test 3 (Units 11-14) Video/DVD Unit 14 What are you doingfor your next holiday? on iTools and iTutor Unit 14 • It’s time to go! 137
- 136. Unit 1 What’sthis in English? tb pb ■ ■ New HeadwayB eg inner f o u r t h e d itio n * 138 Photocopiable Worksheet ) Oxford University Press 2013
- 137. Unit 2 Where’she from? ТВ p!7 ■ | New HeadwayB eg inner f o u r t h e d itio n * NAME J I |Yoshi NAME j 1 ] Karim |Kumico J Yasmine COUNTRY j j В Зарап COUNTRY 6q>[pt , — ---1 1 NAME j * ]|Fernando NAME 1 1 J Dimitri J Marta J Katerina __________ —1 COUNTRY j | ______ Spain COUNTRY ^a P-ussia J■ «»ян«мвпи1^^9 1 -J .........1 NAME j 1 J MiKe NAME | 1 | Michel 1 Earol J Marie COUNTRY ^ В ..ills»®» England COUNTRY | France----------------------------------------------------------------------------------/ i -------- 1 I 1 1 p^bert МДМС I V ----------- ----------------------------- ' NAME j I j l Marco HAIVIC 1 1 Eritne>( 1 %ara J COUNTRY Щ штттштщ Hwmw* ........................... " EES the United States1 J COUNTRY | 3 M i ---------------------------------------------------------------) i i ...J ■ И NAME j 1 1 Mam J NAME j I ] Luis _j l £ v a --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 3 Лпа J COUNTRY 1 - Hungary COUNTRY J о N Eraz.il i -------- 1 1 И И MtUE W ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7 NAME | 3 ? a u i J NAMt ----------------------------------------- g j T u n J 1 * » J COUNTRY Ц mEhina -s COUNTRY ^ изшв j | ----------------------------------------- Australia J Photocopiable Worksheet ©Oxford University Press 2013 139
- 138. Unit 3 Isshe a shop assistant? t b P28 ■ ■ New HeadwayB eg in ner f o u r t h e d itio n ^ Name Country Franpoise Monet France Phone number 33 57 45 69 Age 26 Job Married? shop assistent Yes Name Country Rosa Sanchez Spain Phone number 366 91 45 Age 26 Job Married? Name Tanya Petrova Name Country Sally Porter the USA 25 Phone number 514 499 6021 Age Job Married? % doctor Yes Country Russia Ammдо. Phone number 553 6316 Age 26 Job teacher Married? Yes bus driver No Name Country Jim Scott Australia Phone number 9422 0573 Age 30 Job businessman Married? No Name Country Phone nui Age Job Married? Fernando Ramos Name Country Phone nui Age Job Married? David Evans Brazil 237 5441 27 police officer No England 437791 23 nurse Yes Name Yoshi Suzuki Country Japan Phone number 5995 2702 Age 1 9 Job student Married? Yes 140 Photocopiable Worksheet ©Oxford University Press 2013
- 139. Student A Student В Unit4 My name’s Magda t b P4o ■ ■ New HeadwayB eg inner f o u r t h e d itio n * Hello! My name’s M agda____________________________ . I’m twentyand______________ . I have asister______________ . She’s very beautiful, _________________________________________________________. She has a good a jo b .__________________________________________ . Her school is __________________________________________ . Pilar isn’t married but_________________________________________________________. He’s from the U S A __________________________________________ My sister and I have___________________________________________ _____________________________. Our parents have a _____________ ________________________ . My father is a bank manager . When we’re together, from M adrid._______ student._____________ and her name’s Pilar, and she’s very funny. has a band. . She’s a teacher. near my university. _ and I’m I’m a she has a boyfriend. ______________ and he a small flat in tow n.____________ . big house in the country.__________________________ _______________ and my mother is a businesswoman. ., we have a really good time. Photocopiable Worksheet ©Oxford University Press 2013 141
- 140. Unit 5 Howmuch is it? ТВ p52 ■ » New HeadwayRooinnor FOURTH EDITION ^Beginner -b a g - water camera CD chocolate computer magazine mobile phone pizza television trainers watch £299.99 38p 99p £1.20 £2.30 £2.75 £3.30 £4.99 £8.99 £12.99 £15.99 —£ 2 9 r9 §~ £30 £45.99 £65 £80 £125 £195.95 £500 £800 b a g 142 Photocopiable Worksheet ©Oxford University Press 2013
- 141. Photocopiable Worksheet Unit 6What time is it, please? твр54 в .7 г r Beginner fo u r t h e d it io n HeadwayRpainnpr cm ipth FniTinM ^ ■ ■ New Student A Student В ©Oxford University Press 2013
- 142. Unit 7 It’san old computer tbP67 ■ ц New HeadwayB eg inner f o u r t h e d itio n ^ big new horrible cold lovely small hot old Nouns bag book camera computer hamburger sandwich television bus dog coffee tea mobile phone shoes CD player clock house 144 Photocopiable Worksheet ©Oxford University Press 2013
- 143. Unit8 Is there...?Are there... ? t b P75 ■ ■ New HeadwayB eg in ner f o u r t h e d itio n ^ Photocopiable Worksheet ©Oxford University Press 2013 145
- 144. Unit 9 Whowere they? тврвз ■ ■ New HeadwayB eg inner f o u r t h e d itio n * Student A Student В Name: Job: Born: Country: «—-....................................... ...„........................A r .................... .......................... Name: John F. Kennedy ----- Job: politician Born: 1917 Country: the United States ..........................j
- 145. Jane's flat StudentA Paul's flat Student В Ask Student В questions about Paul. W hat did he do yesterday? What sport/Paul/play/yesterday? What/he/read? Where/he/play the guitar? Paul/cook a meal? he/watch a DVD? he/have a bath? he/work at his computer? Ask Student A questions about Jane. W hat did she do yesterday? Where/Jane/go/yesterday? What/she/read? What/sport/she/play? Jane/have breakfast? she/write a letter? she/have a bath? she/watch TV? Unit 10 What did she do yesterday? tb P92 ■ ■ New HeadwayB eg inner fo u r t h e d itio n ^ Photocopiable Worksheet ©Oxford University Press 2013 147
- 146. Unit 11 Ican't...at all тврюз ■ в New HeadwayB eg inner f o u r t h e d itio n ^ Ican make fantastic cakes. Ican play the piano really well. Ican ride a horse really well Ican swim very fast. I can say the alphabet fluently. Ш Ш I can’t drive a tractor a t all Ican’t draw very well I can’t dance very well. ШЯШШ 1can’t sing a t all. 1can’t play golf very well. 1can’t type very fast. 148 Photocopiable Worksheet ) Oxford University Press 2013
- 147. Unit 12 Signsall around t b pii7 ■ ж New HeadwayB eg in ner f o u r t h e d itio n * OUT OF OUDFI 1 Г SALE TODAY O NLY >2 g | >V ' ЯЬв*. & «а .к ж е а ..- ,у» £ ,vr R * 1 * X M otorway r You turn right here. You can't take photos here. You can't drive here. You can't smoke here. You can buy food and drinks here. You can't use the lift. You go straight on here. You can't sit here. You can buy something cheap here. You can't drive fast here. You can leave your car here. You turn left here. Photocopiable Worksheet ©Oxford University Press 2013 149
- 148. Unit 13 Whatare they doing? ТВ pl21 Beginner fo u r t h e d it io n HeadwayRppinnpr FOURTHFn^ ■ ■ New Student A 'ШШШ Student В 150 Photocopiable Worksheet ©Oxford University Press 2013
- 149. Unit 14 Planninga trip ТВ p132 ■ ■ New HeadwayB eg in ner f o u r t h e d itio n * “ M y t r i p o f a l i f e t i m e Name _________________________ Day 1 Sun Check into hotel. Airport - fly to Day 2 Mon Bus tour of . Visit and Day 3 Tues Early morning start. Drive t o _______ cruise o n ____________. Overnight in _. Evening Day 4 Weds Sightseeing trip in ___________ , and _ . Visit Day 5 Drive to Thurs Walking tour o f. Overnight in Day 7 Sat Shopping trip in _______ Afternoon flight back to for souvenirs. Day 6 Fri Drive to . Sightseeing in morning to see and . Have special dinner in ~ Photocopiable Worksheet ©Oxford University Press 2013 151
- 150. O XFO RD UN IV E R SITY PRESS Great Clarendon Street, Oxford, 0x2 6 d p , United Kingdom Oxford University Press is a department o f the University o f Oxford. It furthers the University’s objective of excellence in research, scholarship, and education by publishing worldwide. Oxford is a registered trade mark o f Oxford University Press in the UK and in certain other countries ©Oxford University Press 2013 The moral rights o f the author have been asserted First published in 2013 2017 2016 2015 2014 2013 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Teacher's Book first published in 2010 as Third edition Photocopying The Publisher grants permission for the photocopying o f those pages marked ‘photocopiable’ according to the following conditions. Individual purchasers may make copies for their own use or for use by classes that they teach. School purchasers may make copies for use by staff and students, but this permission does not extend to additional schools or branches Under no circumstances may any part o f this book be photocopied for resale i s b n : 978 019 477118 4 Teacher's Book i s b n : 978 о 19 477120 7 Teacher's Resource Disc i s b n : 978 019 4 7 7 m 5 Teacher's Pack Printed in China This book is printed on paper from certified and well-managed sources A CKN O W LED GEM EN TS Illustrations by: Gill Button p.148; Mark Duffin p.138; Claire Littlejohn p.145;Joe McLaren p.151;Annabel Milne p.142, 149; Chris Pavely p.147; Gavin Reece p.150 We would also like to thank thefollowingfor permission to reproduce thefollowing photographs: Corbis p.146 (Kennedy/Bettmann); Getty Images pp.141 (JGI/Blend Images), 146 (Einstein/Arguelles/Transcendental Graphics/Hulton Archive), 146 (Dean/Philton Archive), 146 (Christie/Hulton Archive), 146 (Marley/Ebet Roberts/Redferns), 146 (Pavlova/Hulton Archive)
- 151. ■ I New Headway What’sdifferent about New Headway Beginner, Fourth edition? T Teacher's Resource Disc The world's most trusted English course A perfectly-balanced syllabus with extensive resources at all levels for students and teachers • In-depth treatment of grammar • Integrated skills throughout • Full support in print, on disc, and online Headway Beginner, Fourth edition English forthe true beginner Beginner Teacher’s Book, Fourth edition for lesson preparation and in-class support - with a Teacher’s Resource Disc for ready-made, customizable worksheets: iToolsy....................... Tests Activities Grammar For teachers • Teacher’s Book with improved TRD • New iTools for your digital classroom • Class Audio CDs For students • Student’s Book with iTutor to help you Revise > Review > Improve • Workbook with iCheckerto help you Assess > Progress Oxford >making OXFORD UN IVERSITY PRESS www.oup.com/elt H eadw ay and its aw ard-w inning authors, John and Liz Soars, are nam es that have becom e synonym ous with English language teaching and learning. The H eadw ay course is renow ned w orldw ide f o r its clear understanding o f teacher and learner needs. 9780194771115